Afcen Etc-C 2010

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION RULES FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS
EPR TECHNICAL CODE FOR CIVIL WORKS
ETC-C
french association
for design, construction and in-service
inspection rules for nuclear island components
2010 Edition
ETC-C - 2010 Edition
AFCEN - An association subject to the law of July 1, 1901

Head office: AFCEN, Tour AREVA - 92084 Paris la Défense Cedex
ISBN N°2-913638-32-5
 122-2010 – all translation, reproduction and adaptation rights

reserved for all countries
ETC-C 2010 Edition

This document is the property of AFCEN. It must not be reproduced or communicated to a third party without permission signed by the President
of AFCEN. Copyright © AFCEN 122-2010
© n° 122-2010
Page 3 of 405
NOTE TO THE USER
The present document, ETC-C 2010, constitutes the 2010 version of EPR Technical Code for Civil
Works (ETC-C).
ETC-C may be used as a basis for contractual relations between clients and contractors, and in
relations with nuclear safety authorities.
The use of ETC-C in no way engages the responsibilities of the authors or publisher.
A continuous improvement of ETC-C is generated by AFCEN.
Changes to ETC-C are processed through modification sheets reviewed and issued by AFCEN.
In case an ETC-C user wishes to request for modifications to the code, he has to use a Request For
Modification Form and send it to the AFCEN Secretariat General at the address given in the front
pages of the code.
The request must be accompanied by justificative documents.
To preclude unnecessary requests, it is recommended that a careful review of the ETC-C and a
technical investigation be conducted prior to issuing such requests.
Requests for modification are collected and processed by AFCEN. Whatever the issue of the
modification request (refusal or drafting of a modification sheet), the AFCEN Secretary General
notifies the requester accordingly.
The modification sheets are periodically incorporated in a new addendum of ETC-C.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 4 of 405
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 5 of 405
ETC-C DEVELOPMENT HISTORY
ETC-C was initially developed by EDF on the basis of the last version of the RCC-G series which
contain civil engineering design and construction rules for French NPPs.
The development of the RCC began in November 1976 when it was decided to establish a working
group involving EDF, FRAMATOME-CEA and the French Ministry of Industry, piloted by EDF, to
examine the possibility of issuing detailed documents (initially called ''Codes and Standards'' and then,
from 1978, ''Rules of Design and Construction”) with the following objectives:
− to serve as a basis for contractual relations between customers and suppliers,
− to facilitate discussions with nuclear safety authorities,
− to create documents facilitating export of safety reports.

ETC-C is an evolutionary development of RCC-G. It was undertaken for the design and construction of
EPR safety-classified buildings. The reasons for developing ETC-C were as follows:
− it was necessary for the EPR to comply with requirements from both French and German
regulations and practices;
− new load cases were required to represent severe accident and more severe hazard
conditions;
− changes were needed to take into account the Eurocodes in the design of structures;
− updated operational experience feedback from operating nuclear power plants as well as
current updated safety analysis requirements had to be taken into account;
− updated knowledge of material and structures behaviour (from laboratory and mock-up tests)
had to be incorporated.
A recent edition of ETC-C was issued by EDF in April 2006 and serves as a reference document for
Flamanville 3 Project, to be reviewed by French Safety Bodies.
In 2009, ETC-C development was continued under the frame of AFCEN.
The drafting of the current edition was developed and approved by a Sub-Committee, composed of
members of major companies and organizations in the nuclear energy sector.
The Sub-Committee directed the work of 7 Task Groups, each of them responsible for improving a
different part of the code.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 6 of 405
ETC-C SUB-COMMITTEE
APPROVAL SUB-COMMITTEE
Chairman: C. DUVAL EDF-CEIDRE
Members:
P. BISCH IOSIS
M.T. BLANCHARD EDF
C. BRUNET EDF
D. CHAUVEL EDF
A. COURTOIS EDF
N. DE-MATHAN EDF
D. DESROBERT VINCI
E. GALLITRE EDF
L. GERMANE CEA
A. HALBRITTER AREVA
G. ITHURRALDE EDF
F. LAFOLIE CEA
A. LANGEOIRE CEA
P. LAZZARINI EDF
D. NOEL BOUYGUES
T. ROURE EDF
J.F. SIDANER AREVA
G. SIFFERLIN EDF
C. SIMON EDF
J.L. TORIS VINCI
LIST OF SUB COMMITTEE TASK GROUPS AND THEIR LEADERS
TG1 Design and structure of the code TG Leader: E. GALLITRE

TG2 Geotechnics TG Leader: C. SIMON
TG3 Concrete structures and prestressing TG Leader: D. CHAUVEL
TG4 Containment and pool liners, and storage tanks TG Leader: N. DE-MATHAN
TG5 Steelwork structures TG Leader: G. SIFFERLIN
TG6 Anchorages TG Leader: T. ROURE
TG7 Tests and monitoring TG Leader: A. COURTOIS
ETC-C 2010 Edition

ETC-C
PART 0
GENERAL
Page 7 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
PART 0 GENERAL
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 8 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
0.1 STRUCTURE OF ETCC
0.1.1 GENERAL INTRODUCTION
ETC-C contains rules for the design, construction and testing of the EPR civil engineering structures. It
describes the principles and requirements for safety, serviceability and durability conditions for
concrete and steelwork structures on the basis of Eurocode design principles (European standards for
structures) together with specific provisions for safety-class buildings.
0.1.2 CONTENTS
0.1.2.1 GENERAL ORGANISATION OF ETC-C
The ETC-C consists of four Parts addressing General (PART 0), Design (PART 1), Construction
(PART 2) and Test Requirements (PART 3) for every C1 safety-classified building. Nevertheless, the
ETC-C shall be considered as a whole.
ETC-C PART 0 defines the structure and the scope of ETC-C.
ETC-C PART 1 defines:
− the actions and combinations of actions to be taken into account in the design of civil works
(see 1.3). However, numerical values (intensity of loads) associated to these actions shall be
provided by specific documents for each EPR Project (such as document [1], see 1.2.3);
− the rules or criteria needed to design the C1-classified structures are given in 1.4 for concrete
structures, 1.5 for metal parts involved in the tightness of the containment, 1.6 for pool and
tank liners, 1.7 for structural steelwork, 1.8 for anchorages and 1.9 for geotechnical issues.
ETC-C PART 2 provides construction criteria (concrete, reinforcement, prestressing system,

leaktigthness of metal parts, etc).
ETC-C PART 3 provides the main principles for containment testing, covering the initial acceptance
test and subsequent periodic tests.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 9 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
0.1.2.2 CONTENTS
PART 0 GENERAL
0.1 STRUCTURE OF ETCC
0.1.1 GENERAL INTRODUCTION
0.1.2 CONTENTS
0.1.3 LIST OF STANDARDS
0.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS

0.2.1 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
0.2.2 SCOPE AND APPLICATION OF ETCC
PART 1 DESIGN
1.1 SCOPE
1.1.1 DEFINITION OF STRUCTURES CONCERNED BY THE ETC-C AND PURPOSE OF THIS
DOCUMENT
1.1.2 DESIGN WORKING LIFE TIME
1.2 PRINCIPLES AND REFERENCES

1.2.1 GENERIC PRINCIPLES
1.2.2 ANALYSIS PRINCIPLES
1.2.3 GENERIC REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
1.2.4 NOTATIONS
1.2.5 REQUIREMENTS
1.3 DEFINITION OF ACTIONS AND COMBINATIONS OF ACTIONS

1.3.1 GENERAL RULES
1.3.2 CLASSIFICATION OF ACTIONS
1.3.3 CHARACTERISTIC OR DESIGN VALUES
1.4 GENERAL RULES FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES

1.4.1 DESIGN WORKING LIFE
1.4.2 GENERAL
1.4.3 PROPERTIES OF THE MATERIALS
1.4.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
1.4.5 SPECIFIC DESIGN CRITERIA FOR THE CONTAINMENT WITH STEEL LINER
1.4.6 RAFT AND BURIED WALLS
1.4.7 INTERNAL PROJECTILES AND DROPPED LOADS
1.4.8 SPECIFIC CRITERIA FOR THE DESIGN OF BURIED STRUCTURES (TUNNELS AND
GALLERIES)
1.4.9 ADDITIONAL RULES FOR WALLS AND SLABS OF POOLS SUBJECTED TO THERMAL
EFFECTS
1.4.10 ADDITIONAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF THE AIRPLANE RESISTANT SHELL
1.4.11 SPECIAL DETAILING
1.5 METAL PARTS INVOLVED IN THE LEAKTIGHTNESS OF THE CONTAINMENT

1.5.1 ANCHORED LINER OF THE CONTAINMENT
1.5.2 CONTAINMENT PENETRATIONS
1.5.3 OPTIONAL DESIGN RULES FOR THE LINER AND PENETRATIONS
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 10 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
1.6 POOLS AND TANKS WITH LINER

1.6.1 COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS
1.6.2 DESIGN PRINCIPLES
1.6.3 COMBINATIONS OF ACTIONS TO BE CONSIDERED
1.6.4 DESIGN RULES
1.6.5 MATERIAL
1.7 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

1.7.1 MATERIALS
1.7.3 ADMISSIBLE DEFLECTIONS
1.8 INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS BETWEEN ANCHORS AND CONCRETE

1.8.1 DETERMINING LOADS IN THE ANCHORAGES
1.8.2 PARTIAL FACTORS FOR MATERIALS
1.8.3 VERIFICATION OF STRESSES IN ANCHORAGES
1.8.4 RESISTANCE TO TENSILE LOAD
1.8.5 RESISTANCE TO SHEAR LOAD
1.8.6 RESISTANCE TO COMBINED TENSION AND SHEAR LOAD
1.8.7 CHECKING WELDS IN THE CASE OF ANCHORAGES WELDED TO THE PLATE
1.9 GENERAL RULES FOR GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN

1.9.1 GEOLOGICAL, GEOTECHNICAL, AND HYDRO-GEOLOGICAL MODELS
1.9.2 ACTIONS AND COMBINATIONS FOR GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN
APPENDIX 1.A SEISMIC ANALYSIS

1.A.1 FOREWORD
1.A.2 INPUT MOTION
1.A.3 REPRESENTATION OF SOIL EFFECTS
1.A.4 MODELLING OF STRUCTURES AND SUBSTRUCTURES
1.A.5 METHODS OF ANALYSIS
1.A.6 COMBINATION OF MODES, DIRECTIONS AND TIME HISTORY SETS
1.A.7 FLOOR RESPONSE SPECTRA GENERATION
1.A.8 OTHER METHODS OF ANALYSIS
1.A.9 OTHER PARTICULAR CIVIL STRUCTURES
1.A.10 USE OF SEISMIC ANALYSIS FOR DESIGN
APPENDIX 1.B CREEP AND SHRINKAGE STRAINS AND CRACKS OF CONCRETE

1.B.1 CREEP AND SHRINKAGE FOR CONTAINMENT
1.B.2 CREEP AND SHRINKAGE FOR OTHER STRUCTURE
1.B.3 CRACKS OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES
APPENDIX 1.C ENGINEERING METHOD FOR MILITARY AIRCRAFT IMPACT VERIFICATION

AND DROPPED LOADS
1.C.1 SCOPE OF THE APPENDIX
1.C.2 CALCULATION METHOD AND MODELLING PRINCIPLES
1.C.3 MODELLING OF MASSES
1.C.4 STIFFNESS MODELLING
1.C.5 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR THE LOCAL VERIFICATION
APPENDIX 1.D PENETRATIONS OF REINFORCED AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE SLABS BY
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 11 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
HARD MISSILES
1.D.1 NOTATION
1.D.2 VALIDITY RANGE
1.D.3 PENETRATION FORMULA
1.D.4 APPLICATION CONDITIONS
APPENDIX 1.E GLOSSARY FOR THE ANALYSIS OF METAL PARTS INVOLVED IN THE
LEAKTIGHTNESS OF THE CONTAINMENT
1.E.1 TYPE P DAMAGE
1.E.2 BUCKLING
1.E.3 ELASTIC FOLLOW UP
1.E.4 STRESSES
1.E.5 STRAIN
1.E.6 CLASSIFICATION OF STRESSES OBTAINED BY ELASTIC ANALYSIS
1.E.7 EQUIVALENT STRESS
APPENDIX 1.F CALCULATION OF THE STATIC FORCE EQUIVALENT TO CERTAIN
ACCIDENTAL ACTIONS
1.F.1 CALCULATION PRINCIPLE
1.F.2 CALCULATION OF THE DYNAMIC AMPLIFICATION FACTOR (α)
1.F.3 CALCULATION OF THE PLASTICITY COEFFICIENT (β)
APPENDIX 1.G (INFORMATIVE) TABLES OF REQUIREMENTS
APPENDIX 1.H SHEAR RESISTANCE OF REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES

1.H.1 MINIMUM REINFORCEMENT
1.H.2 MEMBERS NOT REQUIRING DESIGN SHEAR REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION
1.H.3 MEAN VALUE OF CONCRETE TENSILE STRENGTH fctm
1.H.4 ANGLE BETWEEN COMPRESSION STRUTS AND THE NEUTRAL AXIS
1.H.5 DESIGN VALUE OF COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH fcd
1.H.6 CONCRETE CONTRIBUTION TO SHEAR RESISTANCE Vfd
1.H.7 COEFFICIENT ACCOUNTING FOR THE STRESS STATE IN THE ELEMENT IN
COMPRESSION
1.H.8 COEFFICIENT FOR REDUCTION OF SHEAR RESISTANCE OF CRACKED CONCRETE
1.H.9 RESISTANT SHEAR
PART 2 CONSTRUCTION
2.0 GENERAL PRINCIPLES
2.0.1 STANDARDS
2.0.2 NATIONAL MARKS, CERTIFICATIONS, QUALIFICATIONS, APPROVALS
2.0.3 LABORATORIES AND ORGANISATIONS
2.0.4 WORKING TOLERANCES
2.0.5 NON-CONFORMITIES AND DEVIATIONS
2.0.6 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
2.1 EARTHWORKS AND SOIL TREATMENTS

2.1.1 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS
2.1.2 SOIL STRENGTHENING OR IMPROVEMENT
2.1.3 EARTHWORKS REGARDING SAFETY-RELATED CIVIL STRUCTURES
2.1.4 DEWATERING OF EXCAVATIONS
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 12 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
2.1.5 MONITORING, INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF EXCAVATION

2.1.6 BLOCKING AND SUBSTITUTE CONCRETES (ON ROCK FOUNDATION)
2.1.7 LINER UNDER BASEMAT
2.2 CONCRETES
2.2.1 CONSTITUENTS
2.2.2 QUALIFICATION AND COMPOSITION
2.2.3 MANUFACTURE
2.2.4 TRANSPORT OF CONCRETES
2.2.5 PLACING OF CONCRETES
2.2.6 EMBEDDING AND WEDGING PRODUCTS
2.2.7 INJECTIONS TO COMPLEMENT CONCRETE LEAKTIGHTNESS
2.3 SURFACE-FINISHES AND FORMWORKS

2.3.1 SURFACE-FINISHES
2.3.2 FORMWORK
2.4 REINFORCEMENT FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE

2.4.1 SELECTION AND ORIGIN
2.4.2 CONDITIONING
2.4.3 TRANSPORT, HANDLING AND STORAGE
2.4.4 CHECKS AND CONTROLS ON DELIVERY
2.4.5 STRAIGHTENING, SHAPING AND PLACING
2.5 PRESTRESSING SYSTEM

2.5.1 CONSTITUENTS
2.5.2 CONSTITUENT TESTS AND CONTROLS
2.5.3 INSTALLATION AND ASSOCIATED CONTROLS
2.6 PREFABRICATION FOR CONCRETE ELEMENTS AND REINFORCEMENT CAGES

2.6.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
2.6.2 LOCATION OF PREFABRICATION WORKSHOPS
2.6.3 PREFABRICATED REINFORCEMENT CAGES
2.6.4 PREFABRICATED CONCRETE ELEMENTS
2.7 LEAKTIGHT METAL PARTS ON CONTAINMENTS

2.7.1 MATERIALS – GRADES AND QUALITIES
2.7.2 WELDING
2.7.3 PREFABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY
2.7.4 DIMENSIONAL INSPECTIONS DURING EXECUTION
2.7.5 SURFACE TREATMENT
2.8 METAL ELEMENTS INCORPORATED INTO THE CONCRETE

2.8.1 SCOPE
2.8.2 SLEEVES
2.8.3 ANCHOR PLATES INCORPORATED INTO THE CONCRETE
2.9 METAL LINER OF WATERTIGHT POOLS AND TANKS

2.9.1 SCOPE
2.9.2 MATERIALS - GRADES AND QUALITIES
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 13 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL

2.10.2 WORKSHOP CONSTRUCTION
2.10.3 ASSEMBLY ON SITE
2.10.4 METAL FRAMES AND HARDWARE
2.10.5 PROTECTIVE LINING OF STRUCTURAL STEELWORK, METAL FRAMES OR
HARDWARE
2.11 BURIED SAFETY-CLASSIFIED PIPELINES
2.12 FILLING OF JOINTS

2.12.1 FIELD OF APPLICATION
2.12.2 PRINCIPLE
2.12.3 PRODUCT AND QUALIFICATION PROCESS
2.12.4 TYPES OF FILLER CONCERNED
2.12.5 QUALIFICATION
2.12.6 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION ON SITE
2.12.7 FILLER DURABILITY: FUNCTIONAL AND AGEING MONITORING
2.13 TOPOGRAPHY, TOLERANCES AND MONITORING

2.13.1 TOPOGRAPHICAL REFERENCE UNITS
2.13.3 ALTIMETRIC MONITORING
APPENDIX 2.A TO CHAPTER 2.13
APPENDIX 2.B
APPENDIX 2.C
PART 3 LEAK AND RESISTANCE TESTS AND CONTAINMENT MONITORING

3.1 TERMINOLOGY
3.3 LEAKTIGHTNESS TESTS

3.3.1 ACCEPTANCE LEAKTIGHTNESS TEST OF THE CONTAINMENT
3.3.2 PERIODIC LEAKAGE TESTS DURING OPERATION PHASE
3.3.3 SPECIAL TESTS IN THE EVENT OF SERIOUS INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL
ACCIDENTAL EVENTS
3.3.4 TEST REPORT
3.4 RESISTANCE TESTS AND CONTAINMENT MONITORING

3.4.1 ACCEPTANCE TEST
3.4.2 PERIODIC RESISTANCE TESTS
3.4.3 TEST REPORT
3.4.4 MONITORING DURING CONSTRUCTION
3.4.5 MONITORING DURING OPERATION
3.4.6 EXPERIMENTAL MONITORING
3.4.7 SUMMARY TABLE OF INSTRUMENTATION USE
3.4.8 DATA ACQUISITION FREQUENCY
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 14 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
0.1.3 LIST OF STANDARDS
This section 0.1.3 groups all standards and reference documentation used in all the sections of ETC-
C.
0.1.3.1 STANDARDS AND DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO IN PART 1
Table 0.1.3-1 Standards referred in the ETC-C PART 1
STANDARD DATE (*) TITLE
EN 639
Common requirements for concrete pressure pipes including

EN 639 03/95
joints and fittings
EN 641
Reinforced concrete pressure pipes, cylinder type, including

EN 641 03/95
joints and fittings
EN 1990 - Eurocode
EN 1990 03/03 Basis of structural design
EN 1991 - Eurocode 1 - Actions on structures
Part 1-1: General actions - Densities, self weight, imposed

EN 1991-1-1 03/03
loads for buildings
Part 1-3: General actions — Snow loads

EN 1991-1-3 04/04
and its National Annex
Part 1-4: General actions - Wind actions

EN 1991-1-4 11/05
and its National Annex
EN 1991-1-5 06/04 Part 1-5: General actions - Thermal actions
EN 1991-1-6 11/05 Part 1-6: General actions - Actions during execution
EN 1991-3 04/07 Part 3: Actions induced by cranes and machinery
EN 1992 - Eurocode 2 - Design of concrete structures
EN 1992-1-1 10/05 Part 1-1: General rules and rules for buildings
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 15 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
Table 0.1.3-1 Standards referred in the ETC-C PART 1 (continued)
EN 1992-1-2 10/05 Part 1-2: General rules - Structural fire design
EN 1992-2 06/06 Part 2: Concrete bridges - Design and detailing rules
EN 1992-3 12/06 Part 3: Liquid retaining and containment structures
EN 1993 - Eurocode 3 - Design of steel structures
EN 1993-1-2 11/05 Part 1-2: General rules - Structural fire design
EN 1993-1-6 07/07 Part 1-6: Strength and Stability of Shell Structures
EN 1993-1-8 12/05 Part 1-8: Design of joints
EN 1994 - Eurocode 4 - Design of composite steel and concrete structures
EN 1997 - Eurocode 7 - Geotechnical design
EN 1997-1 06/05 Part 1: General rules
EN 1997-2 09/07 Part 2: Ground investigation and testing
EN 1998 - Eurocode 8 - Design of structures for earthquake resistance
EN 1998-4 03/07 Part 4: Silos, tanks and pipelines
Part 5: Foundations, retaining structures and geotechnical

EN 1998-5 09/05
aspects
EN 10025 - Hot rolled products of structural steels
EN 10025-1 03/05 Part 1: General technical delivery conditions
Part 2: Technical delivery conditions for non-alloy structural

EN 10025-2 03/05
steels
Part 3: Technical delivery conditions for

EN 10025-3 03/05 normalized/normalized rolled weldable fine grain structural
steels
Part 4: Technical delivery conditions for thermomechanical

EN 10025-4 03/05
rolled weldable fine grain structural steels
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 16 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
Table 0.1.3-1 Standards referred in the ETC-C PART 1 (end)
Part 5: Technical delivery conditons for structural steels with

EN 10025-5 03/05
improved atmospheric corrosion resistance
Part 6: Technical delivery conditions for flat products of high

EN 10025-6 07/09 yield strength structural steels in the quenched and
tempered condition
EN 10080
Steel for the reinforcement of concrete. Weldable reinforcing

EN 10080 09/05
steel. General
Pr EN 10138 - Prestressing steels
Pr EN 10138-1 01/01 Part 1: General requirements
Pr EN 10138-2 01/01 Part 2: Wire
Pr EN 10138-3 01/01 Part 3: Strand
Pr EN 10138-4 01/01 Part 4: Bars
EN 10210 - Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain steels
EN 10210-1 07/06 Part 1: Technical delivery requirements
EN 10210-2 10/06 Part 2: Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties
EN 10219 - Cold formed welded structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain steels.
EN 10219-1 08/06 Part 1: Technical delivery requirements
EN 10219-2 08/06 Part 2: Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties
XP A 35 045 - Produits en acier - Armatures de précontrainte -
XP A 35 045-1 02/00 Partie 1: prescriptions générales
XP A 35 045-2 02/00 Partie 2: fils
XP A 35 045-3 02/00 Partie 3: torons
(*) dates correspond at AFNOR editions.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 17 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
Table 0.1.3-2 Additional documents referred in the ETC-C PART 1
AUTHOR DATE TITLE
Section 1.2
AFCEN 2010 ETC-F – EPR Technical Code for Fire protection
Section 1.4
Concrete design for a given structure service life – Durability

management with regard to reinforcement corrosion and
AFGC 2007 alkali-silica reaction – State of the art and Guide for the
implementation of a predictive performance approach based
on upon durability indicators
Section 1.8
1997
CEB Design guide of Fastening in concrete
(project)
APPENDIX 1.C
Concrete Structures under Impact and Impulsive Loading -

CEB 1988
Synthesis Report - Bulletin d’Information No. 187
Shear design concept for structural concrete based on strut-

K.H. Reineck 1999
and-tie models - FIP 99
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 18 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
0.1.3.2 STANDARDS AND DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO IN PART 2
0.1.3.2.1 European or Ministerial documentation
ETAG 013: Guideline for European Technical Approval of post-tensionning kits for prestressing of
structures - June 2002.
Fascicule n°4 – Titre III : Cahier des Clauses Techniques Générales des marchés publics de travaux:
Fourniture d’acier et autres métaux - Aciers laminés pour construction métallique.
Fascicule n°65-A : Cahier des Clauses Techniques Générales des marchés publics de travaux:
Exécution des ouvrages en béton armé ou en béton précontraint, Ministère de l'Écologie, de l'Energie,
du Développement durable et de l'Aménagement du territoire, édition 2008.
Fascicule n°66 : Cahier des Clauses Techniques Générales des marchés publics de travaux:
Exécution des ouvrages de génie civil à ossature en acier.
Arrêté du 10 août 1984 et circulaires d'application de la réglementation sur la qualité de la conception,

de la construction et de l'exploitation des installations nucléaires de base.
Arrêté du 21 novembre 2002 relatif à la réaction au feu des produits de construction et

d'aménagement.
Arrêté du 21 janvier 1980 fixant les tolérances applicables aux levés à grande échelle entrepris par les
services publics et instruction du 28 janvier 1980 relative à l'application de cet arrêté.
Règlement de certification et de contrôle des armatures de précontrainte en vigueur en France.
Circulaire n°99-54 du 20 août 1999 instituant un avis technique des coulis d'injection pour conduits de
précontrainte, délivré par la Commission Interministérielle de Précontrainte.
Décret n°2000-1276 du 26 décembre 2000 portant application de l'article 89 de la loi n°95 -115 du 4
février 1995 modifiée d'orientation pour l'aménagement et le développement du territoire relatif aux
conditions d'exécution et de publication des levés de plans entrepris par les services publics.
0.1.3.2.2 Standards
If the standards referenced in the present document are not available in an applicable version at the
issuing date of the present ETCC edition, the use of standards other than those referenced in the
present document (other standard or revised standard) shall be justified by a document attesting to
their equivalence concerning their scope, requirements and criteria.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 19 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
Table 0.1.3-3 Standards applicable to section 2.1
STANDARD DATE TITLE
NF P 94-110 07/91 Soil: investigation and testing. Menard pressuremeter test.
NF P 94-112 11/91 Soil investigation and testing – vane test
NF P 94-113 10/96 Soil: investigation and testing. Cone penetration test.
Geotechnical investigation and testing — Field testing — Part 2:

EN ISO 22476-2 07/2005
Dynamic probing
Geotechnical investigation and testing — Field testing — Part 3:

EN ISO 22476-3 07/2005
Standard penetration test
NF P 94-119 12/95 Soil: investigation and testing. Piezocone test. Cptu.
XP P 94-120 12/97 Soil: investigation and testing. Phicometer shearing test.
Soils: investigation and testing. In situ pore pressure measurement.

NF P 94-157-1 03/96
Part 1: piezometric tube.
NF P 94-131 09/94 Soil: investigation and testing. Lugeon water test.
NF P 94-132 10/00 Soil: investigation and testing - Lefranc test.
NF P 94 117-1 04/00 Soil: investigation and testing – part 1 – Plate loading test.
Technical specifications edited by AFNOR.
XP CEN ISO/TS 17892-1 to 12, Geotechnical investigation and testing – Laboratory testing of soil –
– Part 1: determination of water content;

– Part 2: determination of density of fine soils;
– Part 3: determination of density of soil particles;
– Part 4: determination of particle size distribution;
– Part 5: incremental loading oedometer test;
– Part 6: fall cone test;
– Part 7: unconfined compression test on fine grained soils;

– Part 8: unconsolidated undrained triaxial test;
– Part 9: consolidated triaxial compression test on water saturated soils;
– Part 10: direct shear tests;

– Part 11: permeability test;
– Part 12: Atterberg limits.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 20 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
STANDARD DATE TITLE
Cement - Part 1 : composition, specifications and conformity

EN 197-1 06/2000
criteria for common cements.

EN 197-1 / A1 04/2004

EN 197-1 / A3 07/2007
Hydraulic binders - Cement with limited sulphides content for

NF P 15-318 09/2006
use in prestressed concrete.
NF P 15-317 09/2006 Hydraulic binders - Sea-water resisting cements.
NF P 15-319 09/2006 Hydraulic binders – Sulphate-resisting cements.
Concrete - Part 1 : specification, performance, production and

NF EN 206-1* 04/2004
conformity.

EN 206-1 12/2000
conformity.

EN 206-1 / A1 07/2004
conformity.

EN 206-1 / A2 06/2005
conformity.
Concretes, mortar and grout admixtures - Ordinary injection

P 18-363 12/1986 grouts for prestresses concrete - Determination of feigned
setting (Tusschenbroeck test).
Methods of testing cement - Part 3: Determination of setting

EN 196-3 + A1 11/2008
times and soundness
EN 196-6 12/1989 Methods of testing cement - Determination of fineness
Methods of testing cement - Methods of taking and preparing

EN 196-7 12/2007
samples of cement.
EN 196-1 02/2005 Methods of testing cement - Part 1 : determination of strength.
Methods of testing cement - Part 9: Heat of hydration - Semi-

EN 196-9 03/2010
adiabatic method.
XP P 18-545 03/2008 Aggregates – Defining elements, conformity and coding
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 21 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
Table 0.1.3-4 Standards applicable to section 2.2 (continued)
STANDARD DATE TITLE
EN 12620 + A1 04/2008 Aggregates for concretes
NF EN 12620 / IN1 06/2008 Aggregates for concretes
Tests for general properties of aggregates – Part 3: Procedure

EN 932-3 08/1996
and terminology for simplified petrographic examination
Tests for general properties of aggregates – Part 3: Procedure

EN 932-3 / A1 09/2003
and terminology for simplified petrographic examination
Aggregates - Measurement of the friability coefficient for fine

P 18-576 12/1990
aggregate.
Methods of testing cement - Part 2 : chemical analysis of

EN 196-2 02/2005
cement.
Tests for mechanical and physical properties of aggregates –

EN 1097-1 07/1996
Part 1: Determination of the resistance to wear (micro-Deval)

EN 1097-1 / A1 09/2003
Part 1: Determination of the resistance to wear (micro-Deval)
Tests for thermal and weathering properties of aggregates –

EN 1367-1 03/2007
Part 1 : Determination of resistance to freezing and thawing
Tests for thermal and weathering properties of aggregates –

EN 1367-2 10/2009
Part 2: Magnesium sulfate test

EN 1097-2 03/2010 Part 2: Methods for the determination of the resistance to
fragmentation

EN 1097-6 09/2000
Part 6: Determination of particle density and water absorption

EN 1097-6 / A1 10/2005
Part 6: Determination of particle density and water absorption
Aggregates - Criteria for qualification natural aggregates for

FD P 18-542 02/2004
hydraulic concrete with respect to the alkali-reaction
Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates – Part 1:

EN 933-1 08/1997
Determination of particle size distribution – Sieving method

EN 933-1 / A1 10/2005
Determination of particle size distribution – Sieving method
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 22 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
STANDARD DATE TITLE

EN 1097-5 03/2008 Part 5: Determination of the water content by drying in a
ventilated oven
XP P 18-594 02/2004 Aggregates – test methods on reactivity to alcalies
Tests for chemical properties of aggregates - Part 1: Chemical

EN 1744-1 11/2009
analysis
Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates - Part 9:

EN 933-9 07/2009
Assessment of fines - Methylene blue test

EN 933-8 03/1999
Assessment of fines – Sand equivalent test

EN 933-3 01/1997
Determination of particle shape – Flakiness index

EN 933-3 / A1 09/2003
Determination of particle shape – Flakiness index

EN 933-10 07/2009 Assessment of fines – Grading of filler aggregates (air jet
sieving)
Fly ash for concrete - Part 1: Definitions, specifications and

EN 450-1 + A1 10/2007
conformity criteria
Fly ash for concrete - Part 1: Definitions, specifications and

NF EN 450-1 / IN1 12/2007
conformity criteria
Additions for concrete - Water retention - Method for

NF P 18-507 11/1992
measurement of fluidity by flowing with the "cone de Marsh".
Method of testing fly ash - Part 2: Determination of fineness by

EN 451-2 09/1994
wet sieving.
Additions for concrete - Limestone additions - Specifications and

NF P 18-508 07/1995
conformity criteria.
Additions for concrete - Siliceous additions - Specifications and

NF P 18-509 12/1998
conformity criteria.
Silica fume for concrete - Part 1: Definitions, requirements and

EN 13263 + A1 03/2009
conformity criteria
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 23 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
STANDARD DATE TITLE
Silica fume for concrete - Part 1: Definitions, requirements and

NF EN 13263 / IN1 05/2009
conformity criteria
Ground granulated blast furnace slag for use in concrete, mortar

EN 15167-1 08/2006 and grout – Part 1: Definitions, specifications and conformity
criteria
Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout - Part 1: Common

EN 934-1 01/2008
requirements
Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout - Part 2: Concrete

EN 934-2 05/2009 admixtures - Definitions, requirements, conformity, marking and
labelling.
Admixtures - Curing products for concrete and mortar -

NF P 18-370 10/1995
Definition, specifications and marking.
Mixing water for concrete – Specification for sampling, testing

EN 1008 06/2002
and assessing the suitability
12/2004 + Eurocode2 – Design of concrete structures – Part 1-1: General

EN 1992-1-1
AC 01/2008 rules and rules for buildings
Testing hardening concrete – Part 2: Making and curing

EN 12390-2 10/2000
specimens for strength test
EN 12350-2 10/1999 Testing fresh concrete - Part 2: Slump test
EN 12350-5 03/2009 Testing fresh concrete - Part 5: Flow table test
EN 12350-7 04/2000 Testing fresh concrete - Part 7: Air content - Pressure methods.
Testing hardened concrete. Part 3: Compressive strength of test

EN 12390-3 12/2001
specimens
Testing hardened concrete - Part 7: Density of hardened

EN 12390-7 10/2000
concrete.
Concrete - Testing hardened concrete – Testing porosity and

NF P 18-459 03/2010
density
Concrete - Reactivity of a concrete formula with regard to the alkali-

NF P 18-454 12/2004
aggregate reaction - Performance test
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 24 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
Table 0.1.3-4 Standards applicable to section 2.2 (end)
STANDARD DATE TITLE
Testing of concrete – Part10 : Determination of static modulus of

ISO 1920-10 09/2010
elasticity in compression
Microscopical determination of parameters of the air-void

ASTM C457 1998
system in hardened concrete
Testing hardened concrete - Part 6: Tensile splitting strength of

EN 12390-6 10/2000
test specimens.
Concrete - Freeze test on hardened concrete - Freeze in water -

NF P 18-424 05/2008
Thaw in water
Concrete - Freeze test on hardened concrete - Freeze in air -

NF P 18-42 05/2008
Thaw in water
EN 206-9 04/2010 Concrete - Part 9 : Additional rules for Self-compacting Concrete
EN 13670 12/2009 Execution of concrete structures**
* The French Version of NF EN 206-1 (P 18-325-1) is different from the English Version of the
same standard NF EN 206-1 (P 18-325-1): French National Annexes not included in the
English written version.
** 11-2010: not published in France yet.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 25 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
STANDARD DATE TITLE
NF P 93-350 06/95 Walls form for concrete
EN 13670 09/2009 Execution of concrete structures
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 26 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
Table 0.1.3-6 Standards applicable to setion 2.4
STANDARD DATE TITLE
EN 10080 05/2005 Weldable reinforcing steel
EN 10020 03/2000 Definition and classification of grades of steel
NF A 35015 11/2009 Weldable smooth steel – bars and coils
NF EN 10204 10/2004 Metallics products – types of inspection documents
ISO 17660 09/2006 Welding – welding of reinforcing steel
Steel product for reinforced concrete – fabricated

NF A 35-027 11/2009
reinforcements
EN ISO 15630 08/2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete
NF A 35020 parts 1- Steel products – end coupling or anchoring devices for high
07/1999
2 adherence steel for concrete reinforcement
Welding and allied processes — Classification of geometric

EN ISO 6520-1 07/2007
imperfections in metallic materials
Steels for the reinforcement of concrete – reinforcement

ISO 15835 04/2009
couplers fir mechanical splices of bars
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 27 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
STANDARD DATE TITLE
EN 10020 03/2000 Definition and classification of grades of steel
Pr EN10138 08/2009 Prestressing steels part 1 to 4
Non-alloy steel tubes and fittings for the conveyance of aqueous

EN 10224 12/2002 liquids including water for human consumption – technical
delivery conditions
Cold formed welded structural hollow sections of non-alloy and

EN 10219 04/2006
fine grain steels
Steel strip sheaths for prestressing tendons. Terminology,

EN 523 08/2003
requirements, quality control.
Concretes, mortar and grout admixtures - Ordinary injection

P 18263 12/1986 grouts for prestressed concrete - Determination of feigned
setting (Tusschenbroeck test).
EN 524 part 1 to 6 03/1997 Steel strip sheaths for prestressing tendons. Test methods.
EN 197-1-A1-A3 06/2000
Cement - Part 1: Composition, specifications and conformity
EN 197-1-A1 04/2004 criteria for common cements
EN 197-1-A3 04/2009
Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout —

EN 934 - 1 01/2008
Part 1: Common requirements
Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout — Part 4: Admixitures

EN 934 - 4 05/2009 for grout for prestressing tendons — Definition, requirements,
conformity, marking and labelling
EN 445 10/2007 Grout for prestressing tendons — Test methods
Grout for prestressing tendons —

EN 447 10/2007
Basic requirements
EN 196-1 02/2005 Methods of testing cement — Part 1: Determination of strength
Methods of testing cement — Part 3: Determination of setting

EN 196-3 + A1 11/2008
times and soundness
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 28 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
STANDARD DATE TITLE
EN 196-6 12/2009 Method of testing cement : determination of fineness
Methods of testing cements — Part 7: Methods of taking and

EN 196-7 12/2007
preparing samples of cement
Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing

EN ISO 15630-3 04/2002 of concrete — Test methods —
Part 3: Prestressing steel
EN 446 10/2007 Grout for prestressing tendons — Grouting procedures
Paints and varnishes — Corrosion protection of steel structures

EN ISO 12944-2 05/1998 by protective paint systems — Part 2 : Classification of
environments
Mixing water for concrete — Specification for sampling, testing

and assessing the suitability of water, including water recovered
EN 1008 06/2002
from processes in the concrete industry, as mixing water for
concrete
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 29 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
STANDARD DATE TITLE
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 30 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
The displayed dates correspond to those associated to the EN, ISO or ASTM standard.
Corresponding national transcriptions can be associated to a different date of issue.
STANDARD DATE TITLE
EN 10204 10/04 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents.
Flat products made of steels for pressure purposes. Part 2:

EN 10028-2 06/09 non-alloy and alloy steels with specified elevated temperature
properties.
Steel products with improved deformation properties

EN 10164 12/04 perpendicular to the surface of the product. Technical
delivery conditions.
Hot-rolled products of non alloy structural steels. Part 2:

EN 10025-2 11/04
Technical delivery conditions for non-alloy structural steels.
Seamless steel tubes for pressure purposes - Technical

EN 10216-2 + A2 08/07 delivery conditions - Part 2: non-alloy and alloy steel tubes
with specified elevated temperature properties
Welded steel tubes for pressure purposes – Technical

EN 10217-2 05/02 delivery conditions – Part 2: Electric welded non-alloy and
EN 10217-2: 2002/A1 01/05 alloy steel tubes with specified elevated temperature
properties.
Flat products made of steels for pressure purposes. Part 3:

EN 10028-3 06/09
Weldable fine grain steels, normalized
EN 10222-4 11/98 Steel forgings for pressure purposes — Part 4: Weldable fine
EN 10222-4: 1998/A1 07/01 grain steels with high proof strength
08/06 + AC Steels for quenching and tempering – Part 3: Conditions

EN 10083-3
07/06 techniques de livraison des aciers alliés
EN 10269 08/99
Steels and nickel alloys for fasteners with specified elevated
EN 10269: 1999/A1 04/06 + AC and/or low temperature properties
07/06
EN ISO 4017 11/00 Hexagon head screws. Product grade A and B
Non-destructive testing of steel forgings – Part 1: Magnetic

EN 10228-1 03/99
particle inspection
Non-destructive testing of steel forgings – Part 2: penetrant

EN 10228-2 05/98
testing
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 31 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
STANDARD DATE TITLE
Ultrasonic testing of steel flat product of thickness equal or

EN 10160 07/99
greater than 6 mm (reflexion method)
Non-destructive testing – Ultrasonic testing of steel of steel

EN 10308 11/01
bars
Welding and allied processes. Flux and gas shielded electrical

EN ISO 14344 02/10
welding Processes. Procurement guidelines for consumables.
Welding consumables - Test methods and quality requirements

- Part 1: Primary methods and conformity assessment of
EN 14532-1 11/04 consumables for steel,
nickel and nickel alloys
Welding consumables - Test methods and quality requirements

EN 14532-2 11/04 - Part 2: Supplementary methods and conformity assessment
of consumables for steel, nickel and nickel alloys
Welding - Recommendations for welding of metallic materials -

EN 1011-1 03/09
Part 1: General guidance for arc welding
Specification and qualification of welding procedures for

EN ISO 15609-1 10/04 metallic materials. Welding procedure specification. Part 1: Arc
welding
EN ISO 15614-1 Specification and qualification of welding procedure for metallic

06/04
EN ISO 15614-1: materials – Welding procedure test – Part 1: Arc and gas
02/08 welding of steels and arc welding of nickel and nickel alloys
2004/A1
EN ISO 14555 10/06 Welding . Arc stud welding of metallic materials
Welding. Welding of reinforcing steel. Part 1: Load-bearing

EN ISO 17660-1 09/06
welded joints.
EN 287-1 03/04 +
AC 08/04 Qualification test of welders - Fusion welding - Part 1: steels
EN 287-1: 2004/A2 03/06
Welding personnel. Approval testing of welding operators for

EN 1418 12/97 fusion welding and resistance weld setters for fully mechanized
and automatic welding of metallic materials
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 32 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
STANDARD DATE TITLE
FD CEN ISO TR 15608 10/05 Welding. Guidelines for a metallic. material grouping system.
Welding – Fusion-welded joints in steel, nickel, titanium and

EN ISO 5817 08/07 their alloys (beam welding excluded) – Quality levels for
imperfections
EN 12062 08/97
Non-destructive examination of welds. General rules for
EN 12062: 1997/A1 05/02
metallic materials
EN 12062: 1997/A2 12/03
Welding and allied processes. Classification of geometric

EN ISO 6520-1 07/07
imperfections in metallic materials. Part 1: fusion welding
Non-destructive testing - Qualification and certification of

EN 473 06/08
NDT personnel - General principles
ISO 9712 02/05 Non-destructive testing — Qualification and certification of

ISO 9712/AC1 11/06 personnel
Controle non destructif des assemblages soudés par fusion –

EN 970 02/97
Contrôle visuel
Non-destructive testing – Penetrant testing – Part 1 General

EN 571-1 01/97
principles
Non-destructive testing of welds – Part 1: Evaluation of

EN 12517-1 03/06 welded joints in steel, nickel, titanium and their alloys by
radiography – acceptance level
EN 1289 02/98
Non-destructive examination of welds – Penetrant testing of
EN 1289: 1998/A1 05/02
welds
EN 1289: 1998/A2 12/03
EN 1290 02/98
Non-destructive examination of welds – Magnetic particle
EN 1290: 1998/A1 05/02
examination of welds
EN 1290: 1998/A2 12/03
EN 1291 02/98
Non-destructive examination of welds – Magnetic particle
EN 1291: 1998/A1 05/02
examination of welds – Acceptance levels
EN 1291: 1998/A2 12/03
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 33 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
STANDARD DATE TITLE
EN 1712 08/97
Non destructive examination of welds - Ultrasonic
EN 1712: 1997/A1 05/02
examination of welded joints - Acceptance levels
EN 1712: 1997/A2 12/03
EN 1713 05/98 Non-destructive examination of welds – Ultrasonic

EN 1713: 1998/A1 05/02 examination –
EN 1713: 1998/A2 12/03 Characterization of indications in welds
EN 1714 08/97
Non-destructive testing of welds. Ultrasonic testing of welded
EN 1714: 1997/A1 05/02
joints
EN 1714: 1997/A2 12/03
EN 1593 09/99 Non-destructive testing - Leak testing - Bubble emission

EN 1593: 1999/A1 12/03 techniques
EN 1779 08/99 Non-destructive testing - Leak testing - Criteria for method

EN 1779: 1999/A1 12/03 and technique selection
EN 1435 08/97
Non-destructive examination of welds - Radiographic
EN 1435: 1997/A1 05/02
examination of welded joints
EN 1435: 1997/A2 12/03
Welding and allied processes – Nomenclature of processes

EN ISO 4063 08/09
and reference numbers
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 34 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
STANDARD DATE TITLE
NF EN 287-1 07/04 Qualification test of welders - Fusion welding - Part 1: steels
Hot-rolled products of non alloy structural steels. Technical

NF EN 10025 12/93
delivery conditions.
Steel construction. Welded connections. Details and design of

NF P 22-470 08/89
welds.
Execution of steel structures and aluminium structures – Part 2:

NF EN 1090-2 02/09
Technical requirements for steel structures
NF EN 1990 03/03 Eurocode – Basis of structural design
NF EN 12062 10/97
Non-destructive examination of welds. General rules for metallic
NF EN 12062/A1 06/03
materials
NF EN 12062/A2 07/04
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 35 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
The displayed dates correspond to those associated to the EN, ISO or ASTM standard.
Corresponding national transcriptions can be associated to a different date of issue.
STANDARD DATE TITLE
EN 10204 10/04 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents.
EN ISO 7438 06/05 Metallic materials - Bend test.
Stainless steels. Part 2: technical delivery conditions for

EN 10088-2 06/05
sheet/plate and strip for general purposes.
Welding and allied processes. Flux and gas shielded electrical

EN ISO 14344 02/10
welding Processes. Procurement guidelines for consumables.
Welding and allied processes. Classification of geometric

EN ISO 6520-1 07/07
imperfections in metallic materials. Part 1: fusion welding
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 36 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
STANDARD DATE TITLE
Execution of steel structures and aluminium structures- Part 1:

EN 1090-1 10/09 Requirements for conformity assessment of structural
components
Execution of steel structures and aluminium structures - Part 2:

EN 1090-2 02/09 Technical requirements for steel structures
Hot rolled taper flange I sections. Tolerances on shape and

EN 10024 10/95 dimensions
Steel products with improved deformation properties

perpendicular to the surface of the product. Technical delivery
EN 10164 05/05 conditions
Iron and steel - Ultrasonic testing of H beams with parallel

EN 10306 09/02
flanges and IPE beams.
NF A 35-503 11/94 Iron and steel. Steel for hot dip galvanizing
Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles.

EN ISO 1461 07/09 Specifications and test methods
EN 1435 10/97 Non-destructive examination of welds. Radiographic

examination of welded joints.
Ultrasonic testing of steel flat product of thickness equal or

EN 10160 12/99
greater than 6 mm (reflexion method).
Automatically blast-cleaned and automatically prefabrication

EN 10238 12/96
primed structural steel products.
Protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures. Zinc

EN ISO 14713 07/99
and aluminium coatings. Guidelines.
High-strength structural bolting assemblies for preloading -

EN 14399-1 06/05 Part1: General requirements
High-strength structural bolting assemblies for preloading - Part

EN 14399-2 06/05 2: Suitability test for preloading
High-strength structural bolting for preloading – Part 3: System

EN 14399-3 06/05 HR. Hexagon bolt and nut assemblies
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 37 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
STANDARD DATE TITLE
High-strength structural bolting assemblies for preloading – Part

EN 14399-4 06/05 4: System HV. Hexagon bolt and nut assemblies

EN 14399-5 06/05 5: Plain washers

EN 14399-6 06/05 6: Plain chamfered washers

EN 14399-7 09/08 7: System HR. Countersunk head bolt and nut assemblies

9: System HR or HV. Direct tension indicators for bolt and nut
EN 14399-9 06/09 assemblies

10: System HRC. Bolt and nut assemblies with calibrated
EN 14399-10 05/09 preload
EN ISO 10684 12/04 Fasteners - Hot dip galvanized coatings
EN ISO 4042 11/99 Fasteners - Electroplated coatings
Welding consumables - Procurement of filler materials and

EN ISO 14344 05/10 fluxes
EN 1993-1-8 12/05 Part 1-8: Design of joints
EN 1990 03/03 Basis of structural design
Non-destructive examination of fusion welds. Visual

EN 970 05/97 examination
Non-destructive testing. Penetrant testing. Part1: General

EN 571-1 09/97 principles
EN ISO 17638 04/10 Non-destructive testing of welds. Magnetic particle testing
10/97
Amendment
A1(12/02) Non destructive testing of welded joints. Ultrasonic testing of
EN 1714 and A2(07/04) welded joints
Non-destructive testing of welds - Ultrasonic testing -

EN ISO 23279 05/10 Characterization of indications in welds
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 38 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
STANDARD DATE TITLE
Welding - Fusion-welded joints in steel, nickel, titanium and their

EN ISO 5817 11/07 alloys (beam welding excluded) - Quality levels for imperfections
Non-destructive testing of welds - Penetrant testing of welds -

EN ISO 23277 01/10 Acceptance levels
Non-destructive testing of welds - Magnetic particle testing of

EN ISO 23278 04/10 welds - Acceptance levels
11/97
Amendment
A1(12/02) Non-destructive examination of welds. Ultrasonic examination of
EN 1712 and A2 (07/04) welded joints. Acceptance levels
Non-destructive testing of welds. Part1: Evaluation of welded

joints in steel, nickel, titanium and their alloys by radiography.
EN 12517-1 07/06 Acceptance levels
07/04
Amendment
EN 287-1 A2 (09/06) Qualification test of welders - Fusion welding - Part 1: steels
Lifting appliances. Overhead travelling cranes. Construction and

NF E 52-121 11/79 installation.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 39 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
STANDARD DATE TITLE
Building construction — Jointing products — Determination of

EN ISO 7389 11/2003
plastic recovery of sealants
Building construction — Sealants — Determination of tensile

EN ISO 8339 06/2005
properties. (Extention to break)
Jointing products – sealants – determination of adhesive and

NF P 85-522 12/1990
cohesive force by shearing to rupture
Building construction — Sealants — Determination of resistance

EN ISO 11432 12/2005
to compression
Paints and varnishes — Paint for nuclear industry —

NF T 30-901 08/1995 Performance test for susceptibility to contamination and fitness
to decontamination
Building construction — Sealants — Determination of

EN ISO 10591 07/2005 adhesion/cohesion properties of sealants after immersion in
water
Building construction — Jointing products — Determination

05/2003 +
EN ISO 9047 +AC
AC 11/2009 of adhesion/cohesion properties of sealants at variable
temperatures
Fire resistance tests for service installations —

EN1366-4 + IN 06/2010
Part 4: Linear joint seals
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 40 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
0.1.3.2.3 Other documents
Certification
CE Marking
− Cement
− Aggregates
− Admixtures
− Silica fume
− GGBS
− Calcareous and siliceous additions (as aggregates)
− Fly ash
− Concrete : None
− CE marking directive 93/68/EEC
Others
− ISO 9001 Quality management systems - Requirements
Mark NF
NF – Liants hydrauliques (hydraulic binders)
NF – Adjuvants pour bétons, mortiers et coulis, produits de cure (Admixtures for concrete, mortar,
grout and curing compounds).
NF – Béton prêt à l'emploi" (ready-mixed concrete)
NF – Produits spéciaux destinés aux constructions en béton hydraulique autorisés d’emploi (Special
products for concrete structures),
NF – Produits spéciaux destinés aux constructions en béton hydraulique (special products involved in
construction with hydraulique concrete)
NF – Aciers pour béton armé (steel for reinforced concrete)

NF – Armatures (reinforcement)
Accreditation
− COFRAC (French accrediting body)
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 41 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
Other documents
“Recommendations for the prevention of damage by the alkali-aggregate reaction ” (LCPC, June
1994).
“Recommendations for preventing disorders due to Delayed Ettringite Formation" (LCPC, August
2007)
ETAG 013 (june 2002) guideline for european technical approval of post tensioning kits for
prestressing of structures (commonly called Post- tensioning systems). From European Organisation
for Technical Approvals
Referential AC CWA 14646 : CEN workshop agreement for post tensioning system
Referential ACQPA : Association pour la Certification et la Qualification en Peinture Anticorrosion

Méthode d'essai du LCPC : N10 rev 1 (Pr NF EN 10138-1 annexe E) : Essai de traction déviée des
torons de précontrainte de juillet 1985
Construction products directive 89/106/EEC

EDF/CEIDRE/TEGG procedure n°EDTCE090496A
Code de bonne pratique n°50-C-QA de l'Agence Intern ationale de l'Energie Atomique de Vienne
concerning quality assurance for safety in nuclear power plants (1978)
Référentiel ASQPE pour les armatures de précontrainte
Guide technique "Réalisation des remblais et couches de forme", SETRA – LCPC, septembre 1992
Méthode d'essai du LCPC : N10 rev 1 (Pr NF EN 10138-1 annexe E) : Essai de traction déviée des
torons de précontrainte de juillet 1985
Rapport n° 24 du Conseil International du Bâtiment (CIB) "Tolérances sur les défauts d'aspect du
béton", juin 1973
Règles professionnelles-« Recommandations pour le choix et les conditions d’utilisation des boulons
précontraints et non précontraints » (S.C.M.F. et CTICM - Edition octobre 1997)
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 42 of 405
PART 0 - GENERAL
0.2.1 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
0.2.1.1 THE PROJECT
In this document “the Project” is defined as the organisation responsible for leading engineering
studies applied to a specific plant on an identified site within a particular regulatory framework. This
organisation may also be responsible for the construction or even the operation of this plant, although
not necessarily. “The Project” in that sense will have to define further notions that are addressed in the
ETC-C at a generic level only and that cannot be precisely quantified at this generic level.
0.2.1.2 OTHER DEFINITIONS
To be updated in later editions.
0.2.1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
To be updated in later editions.
0.2.2 SCOPE AND APPLICATION OF ETCC
0.2.2.1 DEFINITION OF STRUCTURES CONCERNED BY ETC-C
A primary objective of the nuclear safety analysis is to identify the relative importance of EPR
(European Pressurised water Reactor) structures based on the various levels of safety requirements
which they must fulfil. Some of these structures may be classified as C1 safety-classified structures,
associated with functional requirements related to protection systems or the nuclear barrier.
The detailed list of structures' classification shall be provided in the safety report or in a dedicated
document for each plant.
0.2.2.2 PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT
The ETC-C serves as the basis for the design and construction of structures of C1 classified EPR
buildings and describes the safety principles and requirements for concrete and steel structures,
including metallic liners, as well as the specific arrangements relating to this class of structures.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

ETC-C
PART 1
DESIGN
Page 43 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
PART 1 DESIGN
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 44 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.1 SCOPE
1.1.1 DEFINITION OF STRUCTURES CONCERNED BY THE ETC-C AND PURPOSE OF

THIS DOCUMENT
See general provisions to ETC-C.
1.1.2 DESIGN WORKING LIFE TIME
EPR structures are designed assuming the following durations of the three main life phases:
− Construction: 5 years,
− Operation: 60 years,
− Decommissioning: 15 years.
Design working life "time" shall be used for the design of EPR civil structures, according to specific
requirements for each phase as defined above.
However, these three durations shall be adapted to the National Regulations in force at the site.
The duration of the operation phase may be longer for the Fuel Building.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 45 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.2 PRINCIPLES AND REFERENCES
1.2.1 GENERIC PRINCIPLES
The ETC-C is based on the limit state concept used in conjunction with the partial factors method, as
defined in EN 1990, EN 1991, EN 1992, EN 1993 and EN 1997, and adapted to the specific case of
the EPR.
The recommended values of the Eurocodes shall be used, unless otherwise specified.
1.2.2 ANALYSIS PRINCIPLES
All structures shall be designed with appropriate structural resistance, serviceability and durability in
accordance with the requirements for design Project situations and with the corresponding acceptance
criteria described hereafter.
1.2.3 GENERIC REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
[1] Safety reports: generic reference whose format depends on the specific EPR Project in question.
[2] ETC-F: EPR Technical Code for Fire Protection.
The other documents referred to in PART 1 are listed in 0.1.3.1.
1.2.4 NOTATIONS
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 46 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
PERMANENT ACTIONS
Symbol Action
Gk,inf Lower characteristic value of a favourable permanent action.
Gk,sup Upper characteristic value of an unfavourable permanent action.
Gk,T Permanent effects due to temperature.
Gk,wl Permanent actions due to the groundwater table level.
Pk inf or Pinf,f Characteristic prestressing force, calculated at the end of design operation
phase, considering the maximal losses on the tendons.
Pk sup or Psup,0 Characteristic prestressing force, calculated at the time of tensioning with
minimum losses.
Pm Mean value of prestressing force.
Pm,0 Initial mean value of prestressing force.
Pm,f Mean value of prestressing force at the end of design operation phase.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 47 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
VARIABLE ACTIONS
Symbol Action
Qk,C Characteristic value of variable action applied during construction.
Qk,E Characteristic value of action due to Inspection Earthquake (IE).
Qk,L Characteristic value of the variable actions applied during normal operating
conditions (including reactor shutdown).
Qk,s Characteristic value of action due to snow.
Qk,T Characteristic value of effects due to temperature variations of exterior air from its
mean value during normal operating conditions.
Qk,T,E Characteristic value of effects due to temperature variations of water in pools

during exceptional situations.
Qk,T,exc Characteristic value of effects due to temperature variations of exterior air from its
mean value during exceptional situations.
Qk,T,N Characteristic value of effects due to temperature variations of water in pools

during normal operating conditions.
Qk,test Characteristic value of the variable actions applied during test conditions or when
applying test pressure.
Qk,w Characteristic value of action due to wind.
Qk,wl,EF Characteristic value of effects due to the variations of level of the groundwater
table from its mean value. This value is associated with the table level which may
be exceeded for only 1% of plant design working life.
Qk,wl,EH Characteristic value of effects due to the variations of level of the groundwater
table from its mean value. This value is associated with a return period of 100
years.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 48 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
ACCIDENTAL ACTIONS
Symbol Action
Ad,A Design value of action caused by Severe Accident (SA).
Ad,apc Design value of action due to an aircraft crash.
Ad,E Design value of action caused during a Design Earthquake (DE), including the
induced vibration, and the reaction of the equipment and water for pools.
Ad,exp Design value of action due to an external explosion.
Ad,m Design value of action due to dropped loads or the ejection of an internal
projectile.
Ad,P Design value of effects due to Loss Of primary Coolant Accident (LOCA).
Ad,R Displacements of metallic supports (specific to polar crane).
Ad,s Design value of snow action in accidental situation.
Ad,S Design value of action due to a Rupture of the High-Energy Pipework (RHEP).
Ad,S,j Jet load action in case of RHEP.
Ad,S,p Pressure build-up action inside the pipe housing in case of RHEP.
Ad,S,r Mechanical load (force/moment) on the piping supports or at the point of impact
on the civil structures if there is no support, in case of RHEP.
Ad,S,t Thermal action from the released fluid in case of RHEP.
Ad,s,T or Ad,p,T Thermal action in case of Severe Accident (specific to polar crane).
Ad,T Design value of accidental temperature variation of pool water.
Ad,w Design value of wind action in accidental situation.
Ad,wl Design value of action due to flooding.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 49 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
LIMIT STATES
Symbol Limit states
EQU Static equilibrium limit states.
GEO Ultimate limit states associated with failure or excessive deformation of the
ground where the strengths of soil or rock are significant in providing resistance.
SLS.c Characteristic serviceability limit states.
SLS.f Frequent serviceability limit states.
SLS.qp Quasi-permanent serviceability limit states.
STR Ultimate limit states associated with internal failure or excessive deformation of
the structural members where the strength of construction materials of the
structure is the critical factor.
ULS.a Accidental ultimate limit states (accidental situations).
ULS.f Fundamental ultimate limit states (persistent and transient design situations).
UPL Ultimate limit state associated with an overall uplift of the structure or the ground
caused by water pressure (buoyancy) or other vertical actions.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 50 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
MATERIALS AND DESIGN VALUES
Latin letters
Symbol Description
Act Area of concrete within tensile zone.
Ap Area of a prestressing tendon or tendons.
As Cross sectional area of reinforcement.
As,min Minimum cross sectional area of reinforcement.
At Cross sectional area of reinforcement across joint.
A% Ultimate elongation of the steel liner of pools and tanks.
b0 Thickness of concrete taken into account to assess stresses acting on joint.
C Calorific value.
∆cdev Calculation margin of bar cover for execution tolerance.
cmin Minimal reinforcement bar cover.
cnom Nominal reinforcement bar or prestressing tendons cover.
D Material damping.
Ec,eff Effective modulus of elasticity of concrete.
Ecm Secant modulus of elasticity for concrete.
Secant modulus of elasticity of concrete including thermal effects lasting less

Ecm,th
than 36 hours.
Ep Modulus of elasticity of prestressing steel.
ES Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement steel.
fbd Design value of bond strength.
fcd Design value of concrete compressive strength.
fck Characteristic compressive cylinder strength of concrete at 28 days.
fctd Design axial tensile strength of concrete.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 51 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
MATERIALS AND DESIGN VALUES (Continued)
Latin letters
Symbol Description
Mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete effective at the time when
fct,eff
cracks may first be expected to occur.
fctk,0.05 Characteristic (5% percentile) axial tensile strength of concrete.
fctm Mean value of axial tensile strength of concrete.
fliner,k or Reh,min Characteristic yielding stress of liner steel.
fp0.1k Characteristic 0.1% proof-stress of prestressing steel.
fpk Characteristic tensile strength of prestressing steel.
FN Normal force for anchorages of liner.
FT Tangential force for anchorages of liner.
Normal force for anchorages of liner corresponding to the maximum force of the
FuN
Force-Displacement curve.
Tangential force for anchorages of liner corresponding to the maximum force of

FuT
the Force-Displacement curve.
Normal force for anchorages of liner corresponding to the loss of linearity of the
FyN
Force-Displacement curve.
Tangential force for anchorages of liner corresponding to the loss of linearity of

FyT
the Force-Displacement curve.
fyk Characteristic yield strength of reinforcement.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 52 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Latin letters
Symbol Description
G Shear modulus.
gmax Maximum value of prestressing anchorage slip.
hi , he Heat exchange coefficient between internal or external walls and the air.
NSd Design value of the sum of the tensile loads acting on a tensioned anchor or a
group of anchors (normal force).
NRd Design value of resistance of a single anchor or a group of anchors (normal

force).
Nbd Design value of bond force.
padm Admissible concrete pressure under anchor head.
Force in one strand of a prestressing tendon corresponding to the ultimate

Pp,k
strength.
Force in one strand of a prestressing tendon corresponding to the yield

Pp,0.1k
strength.
Time-dependent losses of prestress due to creep, shrinkage and long-term

∆Pc+s+r
relaxation.
∆Pel Prestressing losses due to elastic deformation of concrete.
∆Pi Instantaneous prestressing losses.
∆Psl Prestressing losses due to anchorage slip.
∆Pr Prestressing losses due to short-term relaxation.
∆Pµ(x) Prestressing losses due to friction.
r Damping reduction factor.
ReH,mean Mean value of yield stress of steel.
RH Relative humidity.
Rm(θL)min Minimum conventional tensile strength of the material at the temperature θL.
Minimum conventional yield strength at 0.2% of the material at the temperature

Rp0.2(θm)min
θm.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 53 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Latin letters
Symbol Description
Sr,max Maximum crack spacing to design the anchorages of pool and tank liners.
st Spacing between two reinforcing bars across joint.
UN Normal displacement for anchorages of liner.
UT Tangential displacement for anchorages of liner.
UuN Normal displacement for anchorages of liner corresponding to the ultimate

displacement of the Force-Displacement curve.
UuT Tangential displacement for anchorages of liner corresponding to the ultimate

displacement of the Force-Displacement curve.
Vfd Contribution of the concrete to shear resistance.
VRd Design value of resistance of a single anchor or a group of anchors (shear

force).
VSd Design value of the sum of the shear loads acting on a sheared anchor or a
group of anchors (shear force).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 54 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Greek letters
Symbol Description
αc Coefficient of thermal expansion.
Coefficient taking into account the long-term effect of compressive strength and
αcc
of unfavourable effects, resulting from the way the load is applied.
Coefficient taking into account the long-term effect of tensile strength and of
αct
unfavourable effects, resulting from the way the load is applied.
βcd1 and βcd2 Coefficients depending of experimental data for drying shrinkage of concrete.
γ Specific weight.
γc Partial factor for concrete.
γMc Partial factor for concrete cone failure for anchorage.
γMs Partial factor for steel of anchorage.
γp Partial factor for prestressing steel.
γs Partial factor for reinforcement steel.
δ Amplitude of blistering of the pools and tanks liner.
δc Admissible amplitude of blistering of the pool and tank liners.
εc Compressive strain in the concrete.
εca Autogenous shrinkage strain.
εcd Drying shrinkage strain.
εcu Ultimate compressive strain in the concrete.
εm Membrane strain in liner.
εmb Membrane and bending strain in liner.
Characteristic uniform elongation of reinforcement or prestressing steel at

εuk
maximum load.
εud Strain limit of reinforcement or prestressing steel.
ηi Modal damping.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 55 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Greek letters
Symbol Description
θL Maximal temperature in the structure.
θm Mean temperature in the thickness of the structure.
λ Thermal conductivity.
µ Coefficient of friction between the tendons and their ducts.
ν Poisson’s ratio.
Value of relaxation (in %), at 1000 hours after tensioning and at a mean
ρ1000
temperature of 20°C.
ρs Reinforcement ratio for bending reinforcement.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 56 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
MATERIALS AND DESIGN VALUES (end)
Greek letters
Symbols Description
σc Compressive stress in the concrete.
Stress in the concrete adjacent to the tendons, due to self-weight and initial
σc,QP
prestress and other quasi-permanent actions where relevant.
σcw Compressive stress in shear struts of the concrete.
σn Axial stress (at a joint).
∆σP Variation of stress in prestressing steel.
σpi Absolute value of the initial prestress.
∆σpr Absolute value of the loss of prestress by steel relaxation.
σS Tensile stress in the reinforcement steel.
σSw Tensile stress in the shear reinforcement steel.
σt Tensile stress in the concrete.
Creep coefficient, defining creep between times t and t0, related to elastic
φ(t,t0)
deformation at 28 days.
φb Basic creep coefficient.
φd Drying creep coefficient.
τ Shear stress (at a joint).
1.2.5 REQUIREMENTS
1.2.5.1 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
The technical content of the ETC-C reflects the need to define the structural behaviour requirements
of the constitutive structural features during the design phase of the civil structures. The requirements
depend on the contribution of the features to plant safety, on their nature, their functional role and the
layout of the plant.
APPENDIX 1.G gives the requirements for each of the Nuclear Island structures, according to the
following definitions.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 57 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Stability (S):
Structures shall not collapse.
Within ETC-C, this requirement is achieved through ULS (Ultimate Limit State) and
EQU/STR/GEO/UPL verifications.
Durability (D):
The structures shall be durable.
Within ETC-C, this requirement is achieved through various specifications in PART 1 and PART 2,
according to EN 1990.
When fatigue is likely to reduce the durability of structures, it is taken into account according to the
Eurocodes referred to in 1.2.1.
Resistance and support function (R):
This requirement includes mechanical strength and adequate support of equipment.
Within ETC-C, this requirement is achieved through various specifications for analysis methods or
criteria, such as: linear analysis, provision to limit cracking in concrete structures, limitation on strains
in materials in conventional ULS combinations, etc. These methods and criteria are described in 1.4 to
1.9.
Serviceability (F):
Structures are required to be compatible with the requirements of equipment therein during normal
operation and during and after exceptional conditions without any repairs.
The deformation of the structure and materials are limited under normal and exceptional loading
conditions: this requirement leads to SLS (Serviceability Limit State) criteria as described in 1.4 to 1.9.
Leaktightness (L):
Structures are required to retain liquids.

Leaktightness is generally achieved by fulfilling dedicated SLS criteria described in 1.4 and 1.6.The
leaktightness of civil structures containing radioactive liquid is achieved by liners or other equivalent
solutions.
Containment (C):
Structures are required to contain gases under pressure with a limited rate of gas leaks.
Within ETC-C, this requirement is achieved for example by fixing limits on allowable reversible or
irreversible deformations or strains in material, to ensure limitation of the degree of cracking of the
concrete and strength margin concerning tendons and reinforcing bars as well as liner steel
deformation ability. This requirement leads to specific criteria described in 1.4 and 1.5 for every
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 58 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
material.
1.2.5.2 DESIGN SITUATIONS
The design approach used in ETC-C includes an association of the different situations to be taken into
account and the criterion levels which the structures are required to meet in order to reach structural
behaviour requirements. Therefore, the determination of the criteria to be used for the design of the
civil works is based on the following categories of situation:
Construction situation:
Transient situations corresponding to the construction phase are included in order to guarantee
stability and reversibility of deformations during climatic situations, as well as an adequate durability of
structural elements.
Normal or frequent situation:
The basic requirement is the ability to ensure continuous reactor operation in normally occurring
environmental conditions by providing protection and support to equipment over the design working
life of the plant.
Exceptional situations:
These situations correspond to plant operating conditions and internal and external ambient conditions
which might be expected to be encountered during the plant working life. The design requirements for
exceptional situations are linked to the strength of structures and the integrity of tanks, pools etc. In
addition to this approach, a seismic level called the “Inspection Earthquake” is also considered.
Concerning inspection earthquake, structural design shall be such that an earthquake event inducing
an action on site that less equal or less than this seismic level action would not cause any significant
damage to the plant. If the plant is shut down, the goal is to enable a restart without requiring the need
for an inspection.
Accidental situations:
These situations are unlikely to be encountered during plant working life but are nevertheless
considered in the design for safety and defence in depth purposes. In these cases, irreversible
deformation of structures is allowable.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 59 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.3 DEFINITION OF ACTIONS AND COMBINATIONS OF ACTIONS
This section defines the actions, and combinations of actions, to be taken into account for the design.
However, except for some default values, numerical values (intensity of loads) associated to these
actions shall be provided by specific documents for each EPR Project (such as document [1]).
1.3.1 GENERAL RULES
Each action:
− is associated to a specific structure or part thereof;
− is defined by its characteristic value (permanent and variable actions) or directly by its design
values (accidental actions).
Unless otherwise specified, the numerical values recommended by EN 1990 and EN 1991 to
determine design values of actions shall be used.
1.3.2 CLASSIFICATION OF ACTIONS
Actions are classified as follows:
− General actions applicable to all buildings concerned by this document (see 1.3.3.1 to
1.3.3.3),
− Actions specific to the Reactor Building, as defined in APPENDIX 1.G, which supplement
or modify the general actions (see 1.3.3.4),
− Actions specific to metal structures, which supplement or modify the general actions (see
1.3.3.5),
− Actions specific to buried tunnels and ducts, which supplement or modify the general
actions (see 1.3.3.6).
In each of these groups, the actions are classified by type: permanent, variable or accidental actions.
The main actions taken into account are detailed below.
Permanent actions
Permanent actions are designated by the letters G or P.
The permanent actions designated by the letter G include:

− The self-weight of structural elements,
− The self-weight of equipment under normal operating conditions,
− Hydrostatic fluid pressure (for the pools or other fluid-containing structures),
− Permanent actions due to lateral earth pressure,
− Actions due to the permanent level of the groundwater table (noted Gk,wl),
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 60 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
− Permanent thermal actions (noted Gk,T),

− Effects of distortions imposed on the structure,
− Permanent ground reaction.
The permanent action designated by the letter P is:
− Action due to prestressing (specific action for the Reactor Building):
o The mean values are noted Pm ;

o The characteristic values are noted Pk.
Variable actions
Variable actions are designated by the letter Q.
Variable actions include:
− Loads applied during construction (noted Qk,C),
− Loads applied during normal operating conditions (noted Qk,L): for some structures these loads
include operating actions induced by crane,
− Actions due to temperature variations caused by climatic or operating conditions: in normal

situations (noted Qk,T) or for an exceptional situation called “Exceptional cold” (noted Qk,T,exc),
− Actions due to variations of water temperature: in normal pool temperature conditions (noted
Qk,T,N) and exceptional pool temperature conditions (noted Qk,T,E),
− Pressures (positive or negative ones) due to fluids in structures,
− Effects due to variations of groundwater table level (noted Qk,wl),
− Wind action (noted Qk,w) or snow action (noted Qk,s),

− Actions induced by the Inspection Earthquake (noted Qk,E),
− Variable action representing tests of cranes (noted Qk,test),
− Variable action representing containment pressure test. Specific action to the Reactor Building
(noted Qk,test).
Accidental actions
Accidental actions are designated by the letter A.
Accidental actions include:
− Design Earthquake (DE, noted Ad,E) including induced vibrations and the reaction of the
equipment and the water for the pools,
− External explosion (noted Ad,exp),
− Rupture of High-Energy Pipework (RHEP, noted Ad,S),

− Dropped loads (noted Ad,m),
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 61 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
− Aircraft crash (noted Ad,apc) including induced vibrations and the reaction of the equipment and
the water for the pools,
− Flooding (noted Ad,wl),
− Accidental variation in temperature or accidental temperature of the water in the pools (noted
Ad,T),
− Accidental climatic conditions if required, for example accidental snow (noted Ad,s) or
accidental wind (noted Ad,w),
− Loss Of primary Coolant Accident (LOCA, specific to the Reactor Building, noted Ad,P),
− Severe Accident (SA, specific to the Reactor Building, noted Ad,A),
− Ejection of an internal projectile (specific to the Reactor Building, noted Ad,m).
In accordance with EN 1990, accidental actions that are not correlated should not be taken into
account simultaneously in the same accidental situations, with the following exception:
− LOCA + Design Earthquake (combination of conventional actions for Reactor Building,
combination 16 in Table 1.3.3-2).
1.3.3 CHARACTERISTIC OR DESIGN VALUES
Characteristic values of permanent and variable actions and design values of accidental actions are
defined according to document [1]. The selected values are applied to all structures or parts of
structures concerned by this document.
1.3.3.1 PERMANENT ACTIONS
The characteristic value Gk of a permanent action shall be assessed as follows:
− if the variability of G can be considered as small, one single value Gk may be used (the
variability of G may be neglected if G does not vary significantly during the design working life
of the structure and its coefficient of variation is small. In this case, Gk should be taken as
equal to the mean value);
− if the variability of G cannot be considered as small, two values shall be used: an upper value
Gk,sup and a lower value Gk,inf.
1.3.3.1.1 Self-weight of structural elements
The self-weight of structures may be represented by a single characteristic value and be calculated on
the basis of the nominal dimensions and mean density of materials. Unless more precise data are
specified, the following densities should be used:
−
-3
Reinforced concrete : 2 500 kg.m ;
−
-3
Unreinforced concrete : 2 400 kg.m ;
−
-3
Steel frames : 7 850 kg.m .
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 62 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
NOTE Other values should be used for specific concrete (filling concrete, heavy concrete, etc).
1.3.3.1.2 Self-weight of fixed equipment
For equipment with a clearly defined support system, a nominal load value corresponding to normal
operating conditions is considered (the self-weight of major equipment is defined by local or distributed
loads).
For smaller equipment, without a clearly defined support system, induced loads are taken into account
as an equivalent distributed load.
1.3.3.1.3 Pressures due to fluids on fluid-containing structures
Pressures are considered when the structure forms a pool, a tank or a conduit, which is in permanent
use.
This is the case for the spent fuel pool, which is considered to be full of water.
1.3.3.1.4 Lateral earth pressure
Lateral earth pressure results from the weight of backfill and structures present on the ground surface.
This pressure acts on the lateral walls which are not isolated by another structure.
The values are assessed according to 1.9.
1.3.3.1.5 Permanent level of the groundwater table: Gk,wl
Gk,wl represents the actions caused by the permanent level of groundwater table. This level is defined
as the one that is not considered to be exceeded for a return period equal to half the duration of the
design working life (see Figure 1.3.3-1).
NOTE Figure 1.3.3-1 illustrates the groundwater table levels defined by the current document:
− The permanent level (associated with the permanent action Gk,wl) and the accidental level
(associated with Ad,wl, see 1.3.3.3) which are both absolute values;
− Two variable levels (associated with Qk,wl,EH and Qk,wl,EF, see 1.3.3.2) which are relative
variations from the permanent level.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 63 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Groundwater
levels
Accidental absolute level

⇒ Ad,wl
“Characteristic” level
Relative variation ⇒ Qk,wl,EH
“Frequent” level
Relative variation ⇒ Qk,wl,EF
Permanent absolute level

⇒ Gk,wl
Figure 1.3.3-1 Schema of groundwater table levels
1.3.3.1.6 Permanent thermal actions: Gk,T
The permanent thermal actions Gk,T due to air conditions shall be derived by the following
methodology:
1- The temperature variation from a reference construction configuration (uniform temperature)

to a reference operation configuration shall be taken into account. The reference operation
configuration shall consist in general of a global temperature increase and gradients in external as well
as in internal walls.
2- To enable calculation of the actions described above, a number of reference temperatures in

operation shall be defined, in addition to the construction reference temperature:
− A unique external reference temperature, representative of site conditions (for instance, the
mean yearly temperature);
− A unique reference temperature for each internal room, representative of operational
conditions.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 64 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.3.3.1.7 Effect of displacements imposed on the structure
Distorsions may be imposed on metal parts, notably by movement of the supports due to the effects of
shrinkage, prestressing or differential settlements.
Generally, no distorsion is imposed on concrete structures, due to their stiffness. Nevertheless, the
effects on structures due to deformation of soil shall be taken into account by adapted methods in
static and dynamic situations.
1.3.3.2 VARIABLE ACTIONS
Each variable action is represented by one or more characteristic values that are evaluated either on
the basis of the probability of their occurring during design plant working life, or on the basis of their
mean time of recurrence.
The characteristic value (Qk) of each variable action (Q) shall be specified as an upper or nominal
value (without reference to any known statistical distribution) for each situation during which it applies.
1.3.3.2.1 Loads applied during construction: Qk,C
Construction loads are those that may be present during the construction phase and that no longer
exist when this phase is completed.
Construction loads may include the effects caused by (according to EN 1991-1-6):
− Construction personnel, supervisory personnel and visitors, the weight of possible small tools
or other light construction equipment;
− Storage of movable elements (e.g. construction materials, prefabricated parts and some
equipment);
− Some temporary equipment which is used with a fixed position (e.g. shuttering equipment,
scaffolding equipment, shoring equipment, machinery, containers, propping elements) or
which is moved during use;
− Some heavy machinery and mobile equipment, usually on wheels or tracks (e.g. lorries,
cranes, forklifts, generators, heavy control devices);
− The accumulation of waste materials (e.g. surplus construction materials, excavation

materials), etc.
Construction loads are defined either by individual local loads or by distributed loads.
1.3.3.2.2 Operating loads: Qk,L
Operating loads are defined by individual local loads or by distributed loads.
In order to better characterize each load, it shall be specified in design notes whether its intensity is
either known, estimated or factored in globally.
In the absence of more precise data, the following reference values should be taken into account:
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 65 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
−
-2
Characteristic vertical operating loads: 4 kN.m ,
−
-1
Horizontal loads on railings: 0.6 kN.m .
NOTE The reference value for horizontal loads on railings is based on French National requirements
for worker safety. This value may be modified according to requirements.
For structures or components affected by cranes, Qk,L includes the lift operating loads. Table 1.3.3-2
does not dissociate the crane loads and other operating loads: only one coefficient value is associated
with Qk,L for each combination of actions. However, for structures with specific seismic requirements
(polar crane in Reactor Building, Fuel Building), the crane action is multiplied by a coefficient taken as
equal to 1.00.
NOTE 1.00 is the default value which may be reduced by the Project (< 1.00).
1.3.3.2.3 Variable thermal actions: Qk,T and Qk,T,Exc
To be able to calculate variable thermal actions, the Project shall consider the relevant external and
internal temperatures as variations from the temperatures of the reference operation configuration
defined in 1.3.3.1. The Project may consider various combinations including, for example:
− Winter and summer maximum and minimum temperatures;
− Operation and shutdown situations;
− Situations with and without air conditioning.
Two characteristic values are considered:
− Qk,T are values to represent normal variations of temperature. In the absence of more precise
data, two cases (‘summer’ and ‘winter’) may be taken into account for all buildings except the
Reactor Building;
Specific values of Qk,T shall be determined by the Project. For instance, Qk,T may be defined
as the minimum average temperature observed for more than seven consecutive days with a
return period of 50 years;
− Qk,T,exc is the value resulting from “exceptional cold” situations, considered as exceptional over
the entire plant design working life;
Specific value of Qk,T,exc shall be determined by the Project. For instance, Qk,T,exc may be
defined as the minimum average temperature over 24 hours, with a return period of 100 years.
Both Qk,T and Qk,T,exc are deviations from the permanent value Gk,T.
Thermal situations are considered as enduring variable actions and so the static long-term modulus of
elasticity for concrete Ec,eff (see 1.4) shall be used.
In the absence of more precise information, the Project shall define an adequate reference
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 66 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
construction temperature. For example, the annual average temperature of the site may be chosen.
1.3.3.2.4 Actions due to variation of pool water temperature: Qk,T,N and Qk,T,E
As in the case of air temperature variations, two characteristic values are considered for actions due to
pool water temperature variations:
− Qk,T,N represents normal variations of water temperature in pools;
− Qk,T,E represents exceptional variations of water temperature in pools.
1.3.3.2.5 Pressures (positive or negative ones) due to the fluids in the structures
These actions are considered when the structure is a pool, tank or conduit in which fluid levels change
regularly, or when enclosed rooms are periodically under negative or positive pressure.
1.3.3.2.6 Variations of the groundwater level: Qk,wl
Relative variations from permanent level of groundwater table (Gk,wl defined in 1.3.3.1) in combinations
of actions are not taken into account by multiplying a characteristic value and some factors to obtain a
combination value, a frequent value and a quasi-permanent value.
In order to account for variations of groundwater level, two levels are used, consistent with 1.9, to
reflect the effects of the groundwater in design (see Figure 1.3.3-1). The following two representative
values are introduced:
− Qk,wl,EF is defined as the groundwater level that may be exceeded for only 1% of the plant
design working life. If this value is not defined, the decennial level may be taken into account;
− Qk,wl,EH is defined as the groundwater level with a one hundred years return period.
1.3.3.2.7 Climatic actions (Wind and Snow actions): Qk,W and Qk,s
Unless values are specified in the safety report or an equivalent document, EN 1991-1-3 (snow) and
EN 1991-1-4 (wind) apply for climatic actions, including their load combination factors and the relevant
National Annexes. Climatic conditions (intensities of actions Qk,W and Qk,s and associated combination
factors, see Table 1.3.3-2) shall be considered as site-specific actions in accordance with EN 1991
and the associated National Annexes.
1.3.3.2.8 Inspection Earthquake: Qk,E
The Inspection Earthquake (IE) is considered as an exceptional situation. Effects caused by the IE on
the structures are represented by the variable action Qk,E. The design shall provide adequate SLS
performance against the IE.
1.3.3.3 (accidental actions) defines additional information about seismic design.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 67 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.3.3.2.9 Test of cranes: Qk,Test
Qk,Test is the load used during tests conducted after crane installations on supporting structures (see
also principles about actions induced by cranes in 1.3.3.5).
1.3.3.3 ACCIDENTAL ACTIONS A
Each accidental action A is directly associated with a design value Ad.
1.3.3.3.1 Seismic actions: Ad,E
1- Concerned structures
Seismic action shall be taken into account for all structures concerned by the document.
2- Design value and design analysis

The Design Earthquake (DE) is defined by the Project.
The Design Earthquake is defined by three independent oscillatory movements, in two perpendicular
horizontal directions and one vertical direction.
Each movement is defined by:
− A response spectrum of oscillators at the surface of the earth, in free field. This spectrum is
expressed as accelerations according to frequency;
− Horizontal acceleration of the earth, defining the setting level at infinite frequency of the above
response spectrum, for both horizontal directions;
− Vertical acceleration of the ground, applied as for horizontal acceleration, in the vertical
direction.
Alternatively, oscillatory movements may be defined by an adequate set of time-histories for design
purposes, as defined in APPENDIX 1.A.
APPENDIX 1.A gives methods and principles to define the design value of earthquake actions on
structures, Ad,E (i.e. efforts or other quantities representative of the efforts on structures).
1.3.3.3.2 External explosion: Ad,exp
Reactor Building is systematically concerned.

A specific safety study shall define which other structures shall be concerned. This study takes into
account the protection provided by adjacent structures. The specific requirements included in [1] shall
be considered.
Unless the load is specified in document [1], the following data are taken into account. The external
explosion is defined as an incident pressure wave in free field arriving from any direction, with a
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 68 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
triangular form and a rigid front, defined by maximum pressure and duration.
The load taken into account for structures shall include reflection and the focusing phenomenon.
The loading profile on the walls of the building, taking into account any reflections of the walls and
roofs of the buildings, will be considered to generate a maximum pressure on the flat walls twice the
free-field maximum pressure.
To determine equivalent static stress, a plasticity factor and dynamic amplification factor may be
applied to the incident wave’s pressure value (see APPENDIX 1.F).
1.3.3.3.3 Dropped loads: Ad,m
The Project shall define, in accordance with document [1], the locations where accidental dropped
loads Ad,m shall be taken into account.
Accidental dropped loads are usually defined by the mass, the impact energy and the geometrical
characteristics of the impact zone.
An acceptable design static equivalent method is described in APPENDIX 1.C.
1.3.3.3.4 Rupture of High-Energy Pipework RHEP: Ad,S
Document [1] provides the rules defining pipework liable to rupture. It also provides interface
information and data relating to the design of civil engineering structures.

All effects of the ruptures shall be taken into account. In general these effects are:
− a mechanical load (force/moment) on the supports, or at the point of impact on civil

engineering structures in the absence of support (Ad,S,r),
− a jet force (Ad,S,j),
− effects due to the temperature of the released fluid (Ad,S,t),
− an increase of the pressure in the pipe sleeve (Ad,S,p).
NOTE In Table 1.3.3-2, these effects are included in Ad,S.
The jet acts on the ruptured pipework and the surrounding structures. It is considered to widen from
the rupture with an angle of 10° to the normal and is considered as spreading uniformly in the defined
zone.
The impact force of the ruptured pipework is considered to be transmitted by whip restraints. It is
defined according to the damping characteristics of the impact damping materials (stainless steel
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 69 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
tendons, washable studs, ductile structures) or the crushing characteristics of the pipework itself, if the
facility allows direct impact of the pipework on the whip restraint.
The room through which the pipework passes is pressurized for about ten seconds and this action
shall be factored in when the broken pipework is in a confined space.
To determine the equivalent static stress, a plasticity factor and a dynamic amplification factor shall be
applied to the force on its supports or on the point of impact (see APPENDIX 1.F).
1.3.3.3.5 Aircraft crash: Ad,apc
Document [1], or another specific Project document, defines the structures that shall be protected
against military aviation.
2- Design values and design analysis
Document [1], or another specific Project document, defines actions associated to aircraft crash As.
For general aviation, the design study based on loads defined with an equivalent static stress, which
may be determined by applying a plasticity factor and dynamic amplification factor to the maximum
value of the load (see APPENDIX 1.F), is acceptable.
For military aircraft, the design study shall be carried out, in accordance with the method described in
APPENDIX 1.C.
The justifications concern:
− the structural stability study,
− a study of the strength of the exposed walls.
The induced vibrations shall also be analysed with a method consistent with seismic analysis methods
described in APPENDIX 1.A.
1.3.3.3.6 Flooding: Ad,wl
Actions induced by flooding shall be taken into account for all structures concerned by the document.
For site flooding, an accidental groundwater level, associated with accidental action Ad,wl, shall be
defined in document [1] and Project documents to reflect the effects of groundwater in design (see
Figure 1.3.3-1). Ad,wl corresponds to the highest water level taken into account by the Project.
For internal flooding, unless otherwise specified, the water level over the entire rafts of the Nuclear
Island shall be taken as 1.50 m.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 70 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.3.3.3.7 Accidental temperature variation of pool water: Ad,T
This action represents the effects caused by accidental variations of temperature of pool water.
1.3.3.3.8 Accidental climatic actions (Wind and Snow actions): Ad,W and Ad,s
Document [1] defines accidental climatic conditions to be considered (accidental wind or accidental
snow).
1.3.3.3.9 Fire
As a generic principle, fire-resistance is obtained by the layout, detailed design and construction
arrangement of the structural elements, as defined in EN 1992-1-2 and EN 1993-1-2, in order to fulfill
fire resistance requirements given in document [2].
Nevertheless, for specific cases, the fire action may be defined on a case by case basis by the Project
by a room temperature increase curve and minimum fire-resistance times.
1.3.3.4 ACTIONS SPECIFIC TO THE REACTOR BUILDING
For the Reactor Building, the general actions defined in 1.3.3.1 to 1.3.3.3 are supplemented or
modified as stated hereafter. If these additional actions also affect structures located near the Reactor
Building, the effects of these actions should be taken into account in the design of these structures.
1.3.3.4.1 Permanent actions
Actions due to prestressing: Pm and Pk
Values of actions due to prestressing are considered by factoring in deferred losses of tension.
However, if the prestressing action is penalising (as in the case of construction), it shall be considered
without deferred losses.
1.3.3.4.2 Variable actions
1- Pressures (positive or negatives ones) due to the fluids contained by the structure:
Unless otherwise specified, the maximum negative pressure in the inner containment shall be taken
as 25 kPa (untimely start-up of sprinkler systems). Average depression between the walls of the
containment (space between containments) shall be taken as 2.5 kPa.
2- Containment test pressure: Qk,test
During containment tests, the internal volume of the inner containment is pressurized.
Acceptance test pressure and the periodic test pressure are defined in document [1].
1.3.3.4.3 Accidental actions
1- Loss Of primary Coolant Accident (LOCA): Ad,P

ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 71 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Loss Of primary Coolant Accident 2A (LOCA-2A) is defined as a double-strain rupture of the pipework
of the main primary circuit.
Loss Of primary Coolant Accident SLB (LOCA-SLB) is defined as the rupture of the expansion
member on the primary circuit pressurizer.
LOCA leads to the release of pressurized steam and water in the containment.
LOCA is assumed to occur at any time during operation of the reactor, except when the reactor vessel
is opened.
The interior door of personnel airlocks shall be considered to be in any position. If open, the second
door of the airlock shall be considered to be closed.
Only one occurence is considered during the design working life of the plant.
LOCA is characterized by the following actions:
− reactions transmitted by the supports and flanging, characterized by alternating forces,

− differential pressurization of the rooms (or bunkers) housing the broken pipework,
− an homogeneous increase of pressure and temperature in the containment.
The containment design studies are conducted for a period of 24 hours after the accident.
For internal structures, thermal effects are disregarded. For the containment, the pressure and
temperature caused by the LOCA are defined in document [1].
2- Severe Accident (SA): Ad,A
The Severe Accident (SA) is defined as the corium melting through the reactor vessel at a primary
pressure below 2 MPa. The vessel failure is assumed to occur instantaneously. The corium then spills
to the bottom of the reactor pit and spreads into a "spreading area" through a melt discharge channel.
The structural consequences of SA are as follows:

− instantaneous increase in pressure and temperature in the sumps of the Reactor’s tank when
the tank bursts,
− a rise in temperature and pressure in the main volume of the containment following the
removal of gases,
− deferred thermal input in the foundation slab of the internal structures and the common raft,
once the corium has spread over the "spreading area" (eventually the heat is conducted into
the ground),
− a slow rise in pressure and temperature inside the containment, generated by the energy
released by the corium spilling into the "spreading area". During that time, the civil engineering
structures alone dissipate the heat. The containment’s residual heat removal circuit then
pulverizes water and the pressure and temperature drop rapidly;
− a pressure pulse generated by the explosion of some of the hydrogen from the steam-Zr
reaction.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 72 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Two cases shall be taken into consideration for the design rules (see left curve on Figure 1.3.3-2):
− Severe Accident at a maximum pressure of 0.55 MPa [absolute],
− ‘Increased’ Severe Accident to a maximum pressure of 0.65 MPa [absolute] (including the
explosion).
The long-term effects shall also be considered.

2
The hydrogen explosion raises the temperature of the liner over an area of 10 m (for the hottest zone)
next to the steam generator. In the absence of more precise values, a maximum temperature of 300°C
shall be considered.
Two temperature curves shall be considered (see right curve on Figure 1.3.3-2):
− A slow linear decrease for the temperature of the concrete on the internal face of the
containment resulting in a conservative thermal bending moment in the concrete wall,
− A rapid decrease in the temperature of the liner resulting in conservative tensile stresses.
The time-dependant evolution of the liner temperature between 170°C and 100°C is modelled as
follows:
Equation 1.3.3-1
T = 100 + 70 ⋅ e (−0.67⋅(t −12 )) (t in hours; t ≥ 12)
200
0.65
170°C
0,6
0.55
Pressure [MPa]
150
Temperature [°C]
0,4 100°C
100
0.20
0,2 50
0,0 0
0 12 24 36 48 0 12 24 36 48
time t [h] time t [h]
Severe Accident pressure Severe Accident temperature - Concrete
'Increased' Severe Accident pressure Severe Accident temperature - Steel liner
Figure 1.3.3-2 Evolutions of pressure and temperature during Severe Accident
3- Internal ejection of a projectile: Ad,m

Internal projectiles shall be considered for local design studies.
Each projectile shall at least be characterized by its mass, zone of impact and impact energy.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 73 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
4- Combination of conventional actions LOCA-SLB + Design Earthquake (LOCA-SLB + DE):
For the design of the containment, effects of maximum pressure and temperature corresponding to a
LOCA-SLB are combined with Design Earthquake (DE).
The pressure and temperature values are given in document [1].
1.3.3.5 ACTIONS SPECIFIC TO THE METAL STRUCTURES
For metal structures, the general actions defined in 1.3.3.1 to 1.3.3.3 are supplemented or modified as
stated hereafter. If these additional actions also affect the supporting concrete structures, the effects
of these actions should be taken into account in the design of these structures.
1- Self-weight of fixed equipments

The actions due to permanent equipment are:
− Equipment shown on the layout drawings (for example, such drawings indicate the areas with
superposed cable racks);
− The lighting of buildings, the main electrical devices, sprinkler devices, HVAC.
Unless otherwise specified, these devices shall be considered as a minimum equipment load of
-
150 N.m ².
2- Effect of displacements imposed on the structure
If the design of foundations is carried out without concrete beams between footings, the differential
displacements between column bases shall be considered.
In the absence of given values (crane runways supports) or of evaluation of differential settlements,
the value of differential settlement between two adjacent supports shall be taken as 1 cm.
1- Operating loads:
Unless otherwise defined by the Project, horizontal live load on the floors and secondary structures
shall be taken as 5% of the minimum vertical live load.
On each stability line, horizontal live load shall be taken as 5000 N.
-1
On parapets, horizontal load shall be taken as 1000 N.m .
2- Actions induced by cranes:
Principles are given in EN 1991-3 (Actions induced by cranes and machinery).
In order to take into account the plant design working life, the crane classification to be used in design
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 74 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
calculations is the class determined by the conditions of use increased by 1 (EN 1991-3, Table 2.5).
Calculations shall be performed considering both the static and the dynamic actions of the crane.
Calculations shall consider the following cases:

− Crane without suspended load,
− Crane with suspended load in normal service,
− Test load – static,

− Test load – dynamic.
The actions to be considered are:

− Vertically:
o Self-weight of the crane and of the trolley,
o Crane hoist load,
o Crane test load.
− Horizontally:
o Loads caused by acceleration or deceleration of the crane in relation to its movement
along the runway beam,
o Loads caused by skewing of the crane in relation to its movement along the runway
beam,
o Loads caused by acceleration or deceleration of the trolley in relation to its movement

along the crane bridge,
o Buffer forces.
1- Seismic load:
The Accidental actions induced by the Design Earthquake on surrounding buildings on which metal
structures are located shall be considered through:
− Either settlements or rotations of the supports,
− Earthquake induced movements at the supporting points, defined by transferred spectra or

adequate sets of time-histories. These movements shall be defined taking into account the
different levels of supports and the different structures or buildings to which the metal structure
is connected.
2- Polar crane load:
The accidental situations for the polar crane runway of the Reactor Building are as follows:
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 75 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
− Ad,s,T or Ad,p,T: action of the temperature in case of Severe Accident,

− Ad,R: dimensional variation of the supports as:
o Maximum settlement of 50 mm between two opposite points of any diameter of the

building,
o Variation of the diameter of the building for each loading case.
1.3.3.5.4 Specific combination for metal structures
A specific combination of simultaneous actions factoring in the effects of a Design Earthquake and the
climatic conditions is considered (combinations 19w and 19s in Table 1.3.3-2).
1.3.3.6 ACTIONS SPECIFIC TO BURIED TUNNELS AND DUCTS
For buried tunnels and ducts, the general actions defined in 1.3.3.1 to 1.3.3.3 shall be supplemented
or modified as stated hereafter. If these additional actions also affect the supporting concrete
structures, the effects of these actions should be taken into account in the design of these structures.
1- Self-weight of overlying structure
Overloads due to backfill or the structures located above the buried tunnels and ducts shall be taken
into account. In the absence of more precise data, vegetation cover may be assumed to be at least 2
m thick.
2- Effect of displacements imposed on structure
The effects due to the differential settlement of the ground along the tunnel or duct or settlement under
the entrances of the buildings generate deformations of the tunnel or pipework.
These deformations correspond to permanent loads, so the static type over the long-term of the
mechanical characteristics of the ground and the characteristics of the reinforced concrete shall be
considered (for dry ground).
1- Operating loads
The working loads on the surface are transmitted to the tunnel or pipework through the soil and
through road and rail tunnels. The dynamic effect and reduction due to the diffusion of loads according
to depth shall be taken into account.
2- Thermal actions
The variation of fluid temperatures shall be taken into account according to 1.3.3.2 and factored in.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 76 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
3- Test pressure
Test pressure shall be taken into account.
4- Pressure shock
The pipes shall be designed for a pressure shock (hammering) defined by the Project.
Design earthquake:
The effect of an earthquake on buried conduits results in structural deformations, differential

settlement of the ground or between the ground and the buildings connected to the conduits, and
seismic movement. Variations in space shall be taken into account.
This shall be calculated in accordance with APPENDIX 1.A and EN 1998-4, Appendix B.
1.3.3.7 COMBINATIONS OF ACTIONS
Table 1.3.3-1 gives an informative list of combinations to apply to C1-classified structures. This list
should be adapted by the Project.
NOTE When a component is common to several C1-classified structures (raft), it shall be designed
with the different combinations of actions associated with the different structures.
All these combinations of actions are defined in Table 1.3.3-2.
Limit states are defined in accordance with EN1990 (see notations in 1.2.4). Load combinations are
given in Table 1.3.3-2.
In these two tables, situations considered during the design are numbered from “1” to “19”. If several
combinations (limit states) are defined for a particular situation, the number is completed by a letter
(“a”, “b”, etc). Finally, another letter may be added:
− “w” if wind variable action is “dominant” over snow variable action;

− “s” if snow variable action is “dominant” over wind variable action.
For instance, “3bs” designates:
− Situation “3”: “Normal operation + Climatic conditions”;

− Combination “b”: ULS.f;
− The factor of snow action is greater than that of wind action: 1.5 for Qk.s and 0.9 for Qk.w.
NOTE The combinations are presented supposing that all the variable actions act unfavourably. If
this is not the case, the factor shall be taken as 0 (zero).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Situations Additional combinations for:
C1-classified Internal concrete
safety building Inner containment or steelwork
Airplane resistant Other steelwork
N° Name Generic of the Reactor structures & Other structures
shell structures
combinations (1) Building foundation raft of
Reactor Building
1aw X
1as X
1bw X
1bs X
1c X
1dw Construction X
1ds X
1ew X
1es X
1f X
1g X
2a X
2b X
2c Normal operation X
2d X
2e X (2)
2f Normal water temperature Pools
3aw X (3)

3as X (3)
3bw X (3)
3bs Normal operation X (3)
3cw + Climatic conditions X (3)
3cs X (3)
3dw X (3)
Table 1.3.3-1 Combinations of actions for concrete and steelwork structures
3ds X (3)
ETC-C 2010 Edition
PART 1 - DESIGN
Page 77 of 405
C1-classified
safety building Internal concrete
Inner containment or steelwork
Generic Airplane resistant Other steelwork
N° Name of the Reactor structures & Other structures
combinations (1) shell structures
Building foundation raft of
Page 78 of 405
Reactor Building
PART 1 - DESIGN
4 Inspection Earthquake X
ETC-C 2010 Edition

5a X
Level of groundwater table
5b X
6a X X
Test (Containment)
6b X X
6c X
Test (Polar crane)
6d X
6e Test (Other cranes) X(6)
7 LOCA-2A X X
8a SA (0.55 MPa) X X
8b SA (0.65 MPa) X X
8c SA – H2 Note: 8c is a specific combination for the design of the liner of containment (see 1.5)
9 RHEP X
Ejection of internal projectile or
10 X
dropped load

Table 1.3.3-1 Combinations of actions for concrete and steelwork structures (continued)
C1-classified
safety building Internal concrete
Inner containment
N° Name Generic or steelwork & Airplane resistant Other steelwork
of the Reactor Other structures
combinations (1) foundation raft of shell structures
Building
Reactor Building
11a Design earthquake including X
11b induced vibrations X
12a Aircraft crash including induced X X (4) X X
12b vibrations X X (4) X X
13a X (5)
External explosion
13b X (5)
14a X
Flooding
14b X
15a X (3)
Climatic accident (wind. snow)
15b X (3)
16 LOCA-SLB + Design Earthquake X X
17a Exceptional temperature (water) Pools
17b Exceptional temperature (air) X
18 Accidental temperature (water) Pools
19w Design Earthquake + climatic X (3)
19s conditions X (3)
(1) Unless otherwise specified, the generic combinations concern all C1-classified structures taking into account the following amendment: specific documents (such
as document [1]) or studies should reduce the number of combinations to be applied to structures.

(2) Situation 2e concerns only the components of the structure exposed to temperature variation as defined by EN 1991-1-5, 1.1.
(3) Situations 3aw to 3ds, 15a, 15b, 19w and 19s concern only the components of the structure exposed to climatic conditions.
(4) Vibration induced by aircraft crash shall be taken into account for internal structures and the raft.
(5) Situations 13a and 13b concern only the components of the structure exposed to external explosion.
(6) Situations 6e only concerns C1 classified safety structures equipped with cranes.
Table 1.3.3-1 Combinations of actions for concrete and steelwork structures (end)
ETC-C 2010 Edition
PART 1 - DESIGN
Page 79 of 405
CALCULATION PERMANENT ACCIDENTAL
VARIABLE ACTION
SITUATION ACTION ACTION
Qk.L Qk.T, Qk. Qk Qk.w Qk.s

No. Name State P Int Ext
Page 80 of 405
Gk.sup Gk.inf Qk.C Qk.Test Qk.T Qk.T,N Qk.T,E Qk.E

(4) Exc wl,EH wl,EF (5) (5)
PART 1 - DESIGN
ETC-C 2010 Edition

1aw EQU 1.1 0.9 1.0 1.5 - - 0.9 - - - - 1.2 0.9 - - - -
1as EQU 1.1 0.9 1.0 1.5 - - 0.9 - - - - 1.2 - 0.75 - - -
1bw EQU 1.1 0.9 1.0 0.9 - - 0.9 - - - - 1.2 1.5 0.75 - - -
1bs EQU 1.1 0.9 1.0 0.9 - - 0.9 - - - - 1.2 0.9 1.5 - - -
1c EQU 1.1 0.9 1.0 0.9 - - 0.9 - - - 1.2 - 0.9 0.75 - - -
1dw Construction ULS.f 1.35 1.0 1.0 1.5 - - 0.9 - - - - 1.2 0.9 - - - -
1ds ULS.f 1.35 1.0 1.0 1.5 - - 0.9 - - - - 1.2 - 0.75 - - -

Table 1.3.3-2 General matrix of combinations of actions
1ew ULS.f 1.35 1.0 1.0 0.9 - - - - - - - 1.2 1.5 0.75 - - -

1es ULS.f 1.35 1.0 1.0 0.9 - - - - - - - 1.2 0.9 1.5 - - -
1f ULS.f 1.35 1.0 1.0 0.9 - - - - - - 1.2 - 0.9 0.75 - - -
1g SLS.c 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - 1.0 - - - - 1.0 - - - - -
VARIABLE ACTION

No. Name State Gk.sup Gk.inf P Qk.C Qk.Test Qk.T Qk.T,N Qk.T,E Qk.E Int Ext
2a EQU 1.1 0.9 1.0 - 1.5 - 0.9 - - - - 1.2 - - - - -
2b ULS.f 1.35 1.0 1.0 - 1.5 - 0.9 - - - - 1.2 - - - - -
2c Normal SLS.c 1.0 1.0 1.0 - 1.0 - 0.6 - - - - 1.0 - - - - -

operation
2d SLS.qp 1.0 1.0 1.0 - 0.3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
2e
SLS.c 1.0 1.0 1.0 - 0.7 - 1.0 - - - - 1.0 - - - - -
(6)
Normal
2f water SLS.f 1.0 1.0 - - 0.3 - 0.6 - 1.0 - - 1.0 - - - - -
temperature

Table 1.3.3-2 General matrix of combinations of actions (continued)
ETC-C 2010 Edition
PART 1 - DESIGN
Page 81 of 405
PERMANENT ACCIDENTAL
CALCULATION SITUATION VARIABLE ACTION
ACTION ACTION

Page 82 of 405

PART 1 - DESIGN
ETC-C 2010 Edition

3aw EQU 1.1 0.9 1.0 - 1.05 - 0.9 - - - - 1.2 1.5 0.75 - - -
3as EQU 1.1 0.9 1.0 - 1.05 - 0.9 - - - - 1.2 0.9 1.5 - - -
3bw ULS.f 1.35 1.0 1.0 - 1.05 - 0.9 - - - - 1.2 1.5 0.75 - - -
Normal
operation
3bs ULS.f 1.35 1.0 1.0 - 1.05 - 0.9 - - - - 1.2 0.9 1.5 - - -
+
3cw SLS.c 1.0 1.0 1.0 - 1.0 - 0.6 - - - - 1.0 0.6 - - - -
Climatic
conditions
3cs SLS.c 1.0 1.0 1.0 - 1.0 - 0.6 - - - - 1.0 - 0.5 - - -
3dw SLS.f 1.0 1.0 1.0 - 0.5 - - - - - - 1.0 0.2 - - - -
3ds SLS.f 1.0 1.0 1.0 - 0.5 - - - - - - 1.0 - 0.2 - - -

PERMANENT ACCIDENTAL
CALCULATION SITUATION VARIABLE ACTION ACTION
ACTION

Inspection 0.7
4 SLS.c 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - 0.6 - - - - 1.0 - - 1.0 - -
Earthquake (*)
5a Level of EQU 1.1 0.9 1.0 - 1.05 - 0.9 - - - 1.2 - - - - - -
groundwater
5b ULS.f 1.35 1.0 1.0 - 1.05 - 0.9 - - - 1.2 - - - - - -
table
6a Test ULS.f 1.35 1.0 1.0 - - 1.35 - - - - - 1.0 - - - - -
6b (Containment) SLS.c 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - 1.0 0.6 - - - - 1.0 - - - - -
1.0
6c ULS.f 1.35 1.0 - 1.05 1.5 0.6 - - - - - - - - - -
Test (7)
(Polar crane) 1.0
6d SLS.c 1.0 1.0 - - 1.0 - - - - - - - - - - -
(7)
Test
6e (Other SLS.c 1.0 1.0 - - - 1.0 - - - - - - - - - - -
cranes)
0.3
7 LOCA-2A ULS.a 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - - - - - - 1.0 - - - Ad,P -
(1)

0.3
8a SA (0.55MPa) ULS.a 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - - - - - - 1.0 - - - Ad,A -
(1)
0.3
8b SA (0.65MPa) ULS.a 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - - - - - - 1.0 - - - Ad,A -
(1)
0.3
8c SA – H2 ULS.a 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - - - - - - 1.0 - - - Ad,A -
(1)
(*) for the global model, 0.46 Qk.L is applied in this combination
ETC-C 2010 Edition
PART 1 - DESIGN
Page 83 of 405
VARIABLE ACTION

Page 84 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
0.3
9 RHEP ULS.a 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - - - - - - 1.0 - - - Ad,S -
ETC-C 2010 Edition

(1)
Ejection of
internal
0.3
10 projectile ULS.a 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - - - - - - 1.0 - - - Ad,m -
(1)
or dropped
load
Design 0.3 0.5

11a EQU 1.1 0.9 1.0 - - - - - - 1.0 - - - - Ad,E
Earthquake (1) (2)
including
induced 0.3 0.5
11b ULS.a 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - - - - - 1.0 - - - - Ad,E
vibrations (1) (2)
Aircraft 0.3 0.5

12a EQU 1.1 0.9 1.0 - - - - - - 1.0 - - - - Ad,apc
crash (1) (2)
including

induced 0.3 0.5
12b ULS.a 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - - - - - 1.0 - - - - Ad,apc
vibrations (1) (2)
0.3 0.5
13a EQU 1.1 0.9 1.0 - - - - - - 1.0 - - - - Ad,exp
External (1) (2)
explosion 0.3 0.5
13b ULS.a 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - - - - - 1.0 - - - - Ad,exp
(1) (2)
VARIABLE ACTION

0.3 0.5
14a EQU 1.1 0.9 1.0 - - - - - - 1.0 - - - Ad,wl
(1) (2)
Flooding
0.3 0.5
14b ULS.a 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - - - - - 1.0 - - - Ad,wl
(1) (2)
0.3 0.5 Ad,w

15a EQU 1.1 0.9 1.0 - - - - - - 1.0 - - - - or
Climatic (1) (2) Ad,s
accident
(wind.
0.3 0.5 Ad,w
snow)
15b ULS.a 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - - - - - 1.0 - - - - or
(1) (2) Ad,s
LOCA-SLB 0.3

16 + Design ULS.a 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - - - - - - 1.0 - - - Ad,p Ad,E
Earthquake (1)
ETC-C 2010 Edition
PART 1 - DESIGN
Page 85 of 405
VARIABLE ACTION

Page 86 of 405

PART 1 - DESIGN
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Exceptional
0.3
17a temperature SLS.c 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - 0.6 - - 1.0 - 1.0 - - - - -
(1)
(water)
Exceptional
0.3
17b temperature SLS.c 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - - 1,0 - - - 1.0 - - - - -
(1)
(air)
Accidental
0.3
18 temperature ULS.a 1.0 1.0 - - - - - - - - 1.0 - - - Ad,T -
(1)
(water)
0.3 0.5
19w Design ULS.a 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - - - - - 1.0 0.2 - - - Ad,E
Earthquake (1) (2)

+ climatic
conditions 0.3 0.5
19s (3) ULS.a 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - - - - - 1.0 - 0.2 - - Ad,E

(1) (2)
Page 87 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Table 1.3.3-2 General matrix of combinations of actions (end)
NOTE Coefficients for variable loads are the result of the multiplication of safety factors γQ and load
coefficients ψi, i = 1; 2 or 3.
The combinations are presented supposing that all the variable actions act unfavourably. If
this is not the case, the factor shall be taken as 0 (zero).
(1) The value 0.3 is considered for the design of structural components (for instance, local cases
of floor slabs).
For analyses of whole structures (global cases), this value shall be reduced (0.2 instead of 0.3) to
represent the non-simultaneity of all operating loads.
(2) The ETC-C approach to thermal loads is conservative compared to Eurocode

recommendations:
• EN 1990 does not systematically recommend taking into account thermal loads for ULS
calculations;
• The ETC-C recommends applying a factor 0.5 to Qk,T in accidental ULS combinations. EN
1990 recommends using ψ2 = 0.
Coefficients defined in 1.4 (concerning the reduction of thermal loads in linear elastic analysis) are
not accounted for in Table 1.3.3-2 and should be added when calculating the contribution of thermal
loads.
(3) Calculation situations 19w and 19s only concern the metal structures.
(4) Qk,L includes crane actions. For structures with specific seismic requirements (Reactor
Building and Fuel Building), coefficients less than 1.00 should be taken as equal to 1.00 (see 1.3.3.2).
(5) Combination factors associated with Qk,w (wind) and Qk,s (snow) suggested by Table 1.3.3-2
may be modified according to the National Annexes of EN 1991-1-3 and EN 1991-1-4 (see 1.3.3.2).
(6) Combination 2e concerns only the components of the structures exposed to variable thermal
actions as defined by EN 1991-1-5, 1.1.
(7) Combinations 6c and 6d apply during construction and operating phases. The coefficient
value should be adapted to the relevant phase: coefficients associated to the prestressing P shall be
taken as 0 in construction and coefficients associated to the snow Qk,s shall be taken as 0 in
operation.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 88 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.4 GENERAL RULES FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES
The basic principle is that the recommended values of EN 1992-1-1 shall be used to design concrete
structures unless otherwise specified in the following paragraphs.
1.4.1 DESIGN WORKING LIFE
Unless otherwise defined by the Project, the assumed age of concrete shall be consistent with the
durations provided in 1.1.2.
1.4.2 GENERAL
The actions considered in design are defined in 1.3 and 1.9 and are supplemented by the following
requirements.
1.4.2.1 THERMAL EFFECTS
Three types of actions relating to temperature shall be considered:
− Permanent thermal action (Gk,T, see 1.3.3.1);

− Variable thermal actions (Qk,T and Qk,T,Exc, see 1.3.3.2);
− Accidental thermal actions (Ad,T, see 1.3.3.3).
1.4.2.2 DIFFERENTIAL SETTLEMENT/MOVEMENTS
Refer to EN 1992-1-1, 2.3.1.3 (1).
Three types of actions relating to movements shall be considered:

− The quasi-permanent value of the movement, relating to differential settlement and/or
displacements relating to long or short-term behaviour for the containment (creep of concrete,
losses of prestressing),
− The variable portion of movement during tests (for the containment),
− Displacement/movement during an accident situation (Design Earthquake, etc).
1.4.2.3 PRESTRESSING
The following clauses on prestressing supplement those given in 1.3.3.4.
For ultimate limit states, the prestressing value used to check:
− the resistance of the containment and;
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 89 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
− the effect of prestressing on other structures;

is the most demanding between the mean values of the prestressing force, Pm. These mean
values are calculated factoring in losses along the tendons (EN 1992-1-1, 3.3):
o At the initial instant of prestress transfer: Pm = Pm,0, considering the initial losses
(friction, anchorage slip, elastic deformation, see 1.4.5.2).
For the initial instant of prestress transfer, the age of concrete is assumed taken as:
1 year for the cylinder;

1 month for the dome.
o At the end of design operating phase: Pm = Pm,f, considering time-dependant losses

(creep, shrinkage and relaxation, see 1.4.5.2).
For serviceability limit states:
− The upper characteristic value of the prestressing force, Pk,sup, shall be used to check
maximum compressive stresses. This value is calculated at the initial instant of prestress
transfer considering the minimum initial losses in the tendons (see 1.4.5.2).
− The lower characteristic value of the prestressing force, Pk,inf, shall be used to check the
tensile stress of the passive steel and the minimum compressive stress. This value is
calculated at the end of the design operating phase of the containment (see 1.1.2) considering
the maximum losses in the tendons (see 1.4.5.2).
Prestressing shall be applied by internal high-resistance steel tendons (strands).
1.4.2.4 SHRINKAGE AND CREEP
Requirements related to shrinkage and creep are defined in the chapter dedicated to the concrete
properties (1.4.3.1 for general cases and 1.4.3.3 for the specific case of the inner containment).
1.4.2.5 PARTIALS FACTORS FOR MATERIALS
EN 1992-1-1, 2.4.2.4, (1), Table 2.1N defines the partial factors for materials for ultimate limit states.
EN 1992-1-1, 2.4.2.4, (2) defines the partial factors for materials for serviceability limit state.
Additional values of partial factors are defined in specific sections for the containment with metal liner
(see 1.4.5) and the airplane resistant shell (see 1.4.10).
1.4.3 PROPERTIES OF THE MATERIALS
This section describes:
− the properties of materials that shall be used for the design of all works covered by this
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 90 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
document (see 1.4.3.1),

− additional properties of materials that are specific for the inner containment (see 1.4.3.3).
Moreover, properties of materials used during the design shall be consistent with requirements given
in PART 2 (2.2 for concrete, 2.4 for steel of reinforcing bars and 2.5 for prestressing system).
1.4.3.1 GENERAL CASE
1.4.3.1.1 Concrete
1- Strength
For concrete structures outside the containment, the compressive strength of concrete should
correspond, at least, to the strength class C45/55 for Airplane Resistant Shell or class C40/50 for
other structures, in accordance with EN 1992-1-1, 3.1.2.
Concrete tests and qualification inspections are described in PART 2.
2- Elastic deformation
For short-term effects (particularly to study the effects of all dynamic actions: Design Earthquake or
APC), mechanical calculations are made with a mean modulus of elasticity Ecm corresponding to the
concrete as defined in EN 1992-1-1, 3.1.3.
For long-term effects, the effective modulus of elasticity is used, given in (EN 1992-1-1, 7.4.3, (5)):
Equation 1.4.3-1
Ecm
Ec,eff = ,
1 + ϕ (t f , t 0 )
Where
− ϕ (t f ,t 0 ) is the creep coefficient defined in APPENDIX 1.B (based on EN 1992-2, Appendix

B);
− tf is the design working lifetime, and;
− t0 is taken as 1 year.
For thermal effects (exceptional or accidental water temperature), if thermal effects last less than
36 hours, the modulus of elasticity is given by:
Equation 1.4.3-2
E cm + 2 E c ,eff
E cm,th =
3
3- Shrinkage and creep
The formulae provided in APPENDIX 1.B (based on EN 1992-2, Appendix B) shall be used for
shrinkage and creep calculations.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 91 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Exothermic effects during early hydration and autogenous shrinkage are not added to drying
shrinkage. It shall be verified that the reinforcement designed for other loads can resist the imposed
tension stresses. As a general rule, the minimum reinforcement is determined in tension for the
horizontal reinforcement of the wall and in bending for the vertical reinforcement of the wall and the
slab.
The effects of shrinkage shall only be taken into account for SLS, not for ULS, as defined in EN 1992-
1-1, 2.3.2.2.
As a general rule, shrinkage may be considered:
− either with a “force method” which consists in an equivalent thermal load to be combined with
other loadings, with a reduction factor that takes into account the loss of rigidity due to
cracking;
− or, with a “strain method” which consists in a reduction in admissible stress in the
reinforcement, due to the crack width consumed by “shrinkage”.
The effects of shrinkage may be omitted from the overall study provided that the joints are
incorporated so as to take up the resulting deformations.
4- Design compressive and tensile strengths
The design strengths are described in EN 1992-1-1, 3.1.6.
− Design compressive strength, fcd, is defined as follows:

Equation 1.4.3-3
α cc ⋅ f ck
f cd =
γc
where α cc = 
 0.85 for long - term actions (ULS.f)
1.00 for ULS.a
NOTE For shear, αcc = 1.00 for all cases.
− Design tensile strength, fctd, is defined as follows:

Equation 1.4.3-4
α ct ⋅ f ctk , 0, 05
f ctd =
γc
where α ct = 1.00
5- Thermal properties
The following table gives the thermal properties of concrete that shall be used for design purposes in
accidental situations.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 92 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Table 1.4.3-1 Thermal properties of concrete
Thermal property Symbol Value
-1 -1
Calorific value C 1000 J.kg °K
-6 -1
Thermal expansion factor αc 10. 10 °K
Heat exchange coefficient between internal walls and -2 -1

hi 8 W.m °K
the air
Heat exchange coefficient between external walls and -2 -1

he 16 W.m °K
the air
-1 -1
Conductivity λ 2.3 W.m .°K
1.4.3.1.2 Steel for reinforced concrete
Steel bars for reinforced concrete are defined by their grade (specified characteristic yield strength, fyk)
and their section.
The behaviour properties of reinforcing bars are described in EN 1992-1-1, 3.2 and Appendix C and
are supplemented by the following conditions:
− steel properties of reinforcing bars shall comply with EN 10080;

− the characteristic value of the yield strength used for basic calculations is:
fyk = 500 MPa (high-bond reinforcements).
NOTE The use of mild plain bars for reinforcement of concrete structures is prohibited (mild
bars are not covered by EN 1992). However, such bars may be used for exceptional cases as
“secondary” bars (detailing) or anchor rods (see 1.8). In these exceptional cases, the
characteristic value of the yield strength shall be at least: fyk = 235 MPa (mild bars).
− the reinforcing bars used shall have a high-ductility. They shall be classified as Class B or
above with εuk ≥ 5% (according to EN 1992-1-1, Appendix C);
− the design "stress-strain" diagram shall be defined with:

o an upper horizontal branch (i.e. k = 1 on EN 1992-1-1, 3.2.7, Figure 3.8);
o a strain limit εud = 10‰.
− The criteria of 1.4 are defined for a maximum diameter of reinforcing bars taken as Фmax = 40
mm. The use of bars with a diameter greater than Фmax shall require specific provisions.
Stainless steel is prohibited for high-adherence reinforcements.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 93 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.4.3.2 DURABILITY AND COVER
1.4.3.2.1 Environmental exposure conditions
Refer to EN 1992-1-1, 4.2, (1) to (3).

To assess the reinforcing bar covers, the inner containment and structures are classified XC1 (“Dry
and permanently wet - concrete inside buildings with low air humidity”), except for the walls of pools.
An alternative class may be given in the Project documents.
1.4.3.2.2 Nominal cover, cnom
Refer to EN 1992-1-1, 4.4.1.1, (1) and (2). The nominal bar cover cnom is defined by:
Equation 1.4.3-5
cnom = cmin + ∆cdev

Where:
cmin is the minimum bar cover, and;
∆cdev is a calculation margin for execution tolerance.
1.4.3.2.3 Minimum cover, cmin
EN 1992-1-1, 4.4.1.2, (1) to (13) are completed as follow. The minimum reinforcement cover is defined
by:
Equation 1.4.3-6
c min = max{c min,b ; c min,dur + ∆c dur,γ − ∆c dur, st − ∆c dur,add ; 10 mm}
Where:
− cmin,b is the bar diameter;
− cmin,dur is defined for interior and exterior walls. To calculate the values of cmin,dur, EN 1992-1-1,
4.4.1.2, (5), Tables 4.3N and 4.5N are respectively replaced by Table 1.4.3-2 and Table
1.4.3-3.
− ∆cdur,γ = 0;
− ∆cdur,st = 0;
− ∆cdur,add= 0.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 94 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Table 1.4.3-2 Modulation of the recommended structural class to determine cmin,dur with EN
1992-1-1, 4.4.1.2, (5), Table 4.4 and Table 1.4.4.1-3
Exposure class according to Table 4.1 of EN 1992-1-1, 4.2, (2)

Criterion
XD1/XS1/ XD2/XS2/ XD3/XS3/
X0 XC1 XC2/XC3 XC4 (3) (3) (3)
XA1 XA2 XA3
100 years: 100 years: 100 years: 100 years: 100 years: 100 years: 100 years:
Increase Increase Increase Increase Increase Increase Increase
Design class by 2 class by 2 class by 2 class by 2 class by 2 class by 2 class by 2
working Less than Less than 25 Less than 25 Less than 25 Less than 25 Less than 25 Less than 25
life 25 years: years: years: years: years: years: years:
Reduce Reduce Reduce Reduce Reduce class Reduce class Reduce class
class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 by 1 by 1 by 1
≥ C30/37 ≥ C30/37 ≥ C30/37 ≥ C35/45 ≥ C40/50 ≥ C40/50 ≥ C45/55

and and and and and and and
< C50/60: < C50/60: < C55/67: < C60/75: < C60/75: < C60/75: < C70/85:
Strength class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 by 1 by 1 by 1
(1)
class
≥ C50/60: ≥ C50/60: ≥ C55/67: ≥ C60/75: ≥ C60/75: ≥ C60/75: ≥ C70/85:
class by 2 class by 2 class by 2 class by 2 by 2 by 2 by 2
Concrete Concrete Concrete

C35/45 C35/45 C40/50
based on based on based on
Nature of CEM I CEM I CEM I
cement without fly without fly without fly
ash: ash: ash:
Reduce Reduce Reduce
class by 1 class by 1 class by 1
Compact Reduce Reduce Reduce Reduce Reduce class Reduce class Reduce class
(2)
cover class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 by 1 by 1 by 1
(1) Concrete strength class is considered as an indicator of durability.

(2) “Compact cover” criterion applies only when a good compactness of covers may be assured.
(3) For exposure classes XAi, correspondence is indicative and shall be justify according to the nature of aggressive agent.
Table 1.4.3-3 Required values of cmin,dur in the case of prestressing tendons
Environmental Requirement for cmin,dur [mm]
Exposure class according to Table 4.1 of EN 1992-1-1, 4.2, (2)

Structural
class
X0 XC1 XC2/XC3 XC4 XD1/XS1 XD2/XS2 XD3/XS3
S1 10 15 25 30 35 40
S2 15 25 30 35 40 45
S3 Not 20 30 35 40 45 50
S4 applicable 25 35 40 45 50 55
S5 30 40 45 50 55 60
S6 35 45 50 55 60 65
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 95 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Unless otherwise defined by the Project, in accordance with durability requirements, the structural
class shall be S5. This class is assumed according to the following approach:
− According to EN 1992-1-1, 4.4.1.2, (5):
o The structural class is S4 for a 50 year lifetime (“lifetime” is taken here in the Eurocode
sense, different from the design working life of an EPR define in 1.1.2);
o The structural class should be increased by 2, i.e. to S6, for a 100 years lifetime (Table
4.3N). This value is appropriate for the design working life of the EPR.
− According to EN 1992-1-1, Table 4.3N and the resistance class:
o The structural class may be reduced by 1 due to the strength of the concrete specified;
o A further reduction by 1 of the structural class may be applied if “special quality control
of the concrete production is ensured”.
In EN 1992-1-1, concrete strength class is considered as an indicator of durability. However, it may be

advisable to perform a specific justification of the chosen structural class based on fundamental
durability indicators and associated criteria in consistence with normative documents (such as AFGC
guide).
1.4.3.2.4 Taking into account execution tolerance (∆cdev) when calculating nominal cover
Refer to EN 1992-1-1, 4.4.1.3, (1) to (4).
Unless otherwise specified, the following values of ∆cdev shall be used:
− ∆cdev = 10 mm for concrete cast in situ;
− ∆cdev = 5 mm for precast concrete.
1.4.3.3 SPECIFIC CASE OF THE INNER CONTAINMENT
For the inner containment, in order to obtain adequate limited creep, the concrete shall be silica fume
concrete.
1.4.3.3.1 Concrete
1- Strength
For the inner wall of the containment, the compressive strength of concrete shall correspond, at least,
to a strength class of C60/75 in accordance with EN 1992-1-1, 3.1.2.
2- Elastic deformation
The moduli of elasticity Ecm, Ec,eff and Ecm,th given in 1.4.3.1 shall be used.
3- Shrinkage and creep
The behaviour of the inner containment is sensitive to shrinkage and creep deformations.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 96 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
When shrinkage deformation calculations are required (long-term effect on thick elements),
APPENDIX 1.B shall be used.
The effects of shrinkage and creep shall be factored in to check ultimate and serviceability limit states.
4- Design compressive and tensile strengths
See 1.4.3.1.
5- Thermal properties
See 1.4.3.1.
1.4.3.3.2 Steel for reinforced concrete
See 1.4.3.1.
1.4.3.3.3 Prestressing
Prestressing steel shall comply with XP A 35-045 or Pr EN 10138.
1- Properties
The characteristic values of the strand used for calculation shall be those of an 1860 T15 TBR (“Very
Low Relaxation”):
− Section: Ap = 150 mm²;
− Breaking strength: Ppk = 279 kN (fpk = 1860 MPa);

− Yield strength: Pp0,1k = 248 kN (fp0,1k = 1653 MPa);
− Elongation at maximum load: εuk = 3.5 %;
− Low relaxation (class 2):

Relaxation losses shall be calculated with following formula:
Equation 1.4.3-7
0.75⋅(1- µ )
 t 
∆σ pr = 0.66 ⋅ ρ1000 ⋅ e 9.1⋅µ ⋅   ⋅ 10 −5 ⋅ σ pi
 1000 
where:
o ∆σpr is the absolute value of relaxation losses of the prestress;
o σpi is the absolute value of initial prestress;
o t is the time after tensioning (in hours);
o µ equals (σpi / fpk) where fpk is the characteristic value of the tensile strength of the
prestressing steel;
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 97 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
o ρ1000 is the value of relaxation loss (in %), at 1000 hours after tensioning and at a mean
temperature of 20°C; and ρ1000 = 2.5 % for Class 2 (according to EN 1992-1-1, 3.3.2, (6)).
The modulus of elasticity of the multi-strand tendons Ep shall be taken as 190 000 MPa instead of
195 000 MPa as given by EN 1992-1-1, 3.3.6.
2- Ductility characteristics
EN 1992-1-1, 3.3.4 applies with:
Equation 1.4.3-8
fpk / fp0,1k = 1.125

(i.e. the value of k in EN 1992-1-1, 3.3.4, (5) is k = 1.125)
3- Design assumptions
Refer to EN 1992-1-1, 3.3.6, (1) to (7).
The design "stress-strain" diagram is defined with:
− εud = 0.02 and;

− fpk / fp0,1k = 1.125.
4- Prestressing tendons in sheaths or ducts
Refer to EN 1992-1-1, 3.3.7, (1) and (2).
Tendons shall be injected by cement grout.
5- Prestressing devices (tendons)
Each Project shall seek the necessary certification according to local requirements.
The prestressing system is a ‘bonded post-tensioning’ system.
Prestressing systems shall comply with PART 2 requirements.
1.4.3.3.4 Durability and cover
1- Environmental cover conditions
See 1.4.3.2.
2- Nominal cover, cnom
The special requirement regarding the bond of circular post-tension sheaths or ducts for tendons
injected into cement grout is:
cnom = 100 mm.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 98 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.4.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
1.4.4.1 LINEAR ELASTIC ANALYSIS
EN 1992-1-1, 5.4, (1) to (3) are supplemented by the following rules.
When thermal effects are calculated with a linear elastic calculation of stresses, the induced thermal
loads may be reduced by a factor (accounting for the cracking of concrete under the effect of heat and
depending on the linear or non-linear distribution and on the normal force):
− for the prestressing wall of the containment, 0.50 for accidental situations;
− for reinforced concrete walls with 30 MPa ≤ fck ≤ 60 MPa and a bending reinforcement ratio
ρs ≤ 0.01:
o 0.60 for normal operating conditions (SLS.f and SLS.qp);
o 0.50 for exceptional conditions (SLS.c and ULS.f);
o 0.35 for accidental conditions (ULS.a).
A more precise calculation may be made by taking into account the cracked section of the concrete
and its tensile rigidity.
NOTE The previous values of the factor are not accounted for in Table 1.3.3-2 and should be
included when calculating the contribution of thermal loads.
1.4.4.2 ULTIMATE LIMIT STATES (ULS)
1.4.4.2.1 Simple and combined bending
EN 1992-1-1, 6.1, (7) and (8) do not apply.
1.4.4.2.2 Shear
EN 1992-1-1, 6.2.1 to 6.2.4 shall be replaced by the methods defined in APPENDIX 1.H.
For the construction joints, EN 1992-1-1, 6.2.5 does not apply. The following equation shall be verified:
Equation 1.4.4-1
A t ⋅ f yk
(cos α + sin α ) ≥ τ − σ n
b0 ⋅ st ⋅ γ s
Where:
− At is the sum of the cross sectional area of reinforcing bars;
− st is the spacing between two reinforcing bars;

− b0 is the thickness of concrete taken into account to assess stresses acting on joint:
o τ is the shear stress;
o σn is the stress caused by axial load. σn ≥ 0 for compressive loading and σn < 0 for
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 99 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
tensile loading.
− α is the angle between the joint plane and the reinforcing bars (45° ≤ α ≤ 90°).
1.4.4.2.3 Partially loaded areas
The requirements of EN 1992-1-1, 6.7, (1) to (4) shall be supplemented by the following specifications:
− For specific accidental actions, such as a projectile, 1.4.7, APPENDIX 1.C and APPENDIX
1.D apply;
− For seismic resistance, additional requirements are defined in 1.4.9;
− For actions due to aircraft crash, additional requirements are defined in 1.4.10.
1.4.4.3 SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATES (SLS)
1.4.4.3.1 General considerations
Refer to EN 1992-1-1, 7.1, (1) and (2).
EN 1992-1-1 describes the principles and requirements for the safety, fitness for service and durability
of concrete structures. The principle is to ensure that:
− The formation of cracks is limited in quasi-permanent situations for reinforced concrete

structures and in frequent situations for prestressed concrete structures;
− Compressive stresses are limited for characteristic or quasi-permanent situations;
− Deflection is limited for quasi-permanent situations;
− The ratio ES/Ec,eff is used to calculate stress in sections subject to the long-term effects relating
to frequent or quasi-permanent situations.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 100 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Table 1.4.4-1 SLS criteria
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 101 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.4.4.3.2 Cracks opening
Cracks width assessment shall be consistent with EN 1992-1-1 principles and the hypotheses given in
APPENDIX 1.B (1.B.3). Calculation of crack openings shall be performed for SLS.f for inner
containment and for SLS.qp for other concrete structures.
The calculated crack width wd is considered to be the width at the surface of the concrete. It is
admitted to take into account the actual cover compared to the required cover (and if possible, the
diameter of reinforcing bars).
It is acceptable to use the procedure proposed by CEB for the April 2010 CEB-FIP draft Code, which
is reproduced below:
The nominal value of crack width Wlim,0 shall be multiplied by a factor Q:
Equation 1.4.4-2
c prov − c req
Wlim = W lim, 0 × Q and Q = 1+
c req
Where:
− Wlim,0 is the recommended value of EN 1992-1-1;
− cprov is the actual cover;

− creq is the required cover.
In any case, the increased value of the nominal crack width at the concrete surface should not exceed
0.4 mm due to considerations regarding the appearance of the structure.
The crack width acceptance criterion is consequently the following one:
Equation 1.4.4-3
wd ≤ Wlim
NOTE In compliance with EN 1992-1-1, 2.3.3, (3), for small-sized structures, these calculations
should be performed without taking into account the shrinkage.
1.4.4.3.3 Minimum reinforcement sections
The requisite minimum reinforcement sections may be calculated with the following formula from EN
1992-1-1, 7.3.2:
Equation 1.4.4-4
k c ⋅ k ⋅ f ct ,eff ⋅ Act
As ,min =
σs
where:
− As,min is the minimum reinforcement section for reinforced concrete in the tensile zone;
− Act is the area of a straight section of tensile concrete; the tensile concrete zone is the part of
the section placed under tension just before the formation of the first crack, as shown by
calculation;
− kc is taken as:
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 102 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
o 1.0 in pure tension;

o 0.4 in simple bending (without normal compressive force).
− k is taken as:
o 1.0 for walls thinner than 300 mm;
o 0.65 for walls thicker than 800 mm;
o The intermediate values may be interpolated.
o fct,eff is the mean tensile strength of the concrete when the first cracks are assumed to
appear: fct,eff = fctm;
− σs is taken as:
o 0.8 fyk when the cracks are caused by variable accidental thermal effects;
o 1.0 fyk when the cracks are caused by a deformation imposed by premature thermal
shrinkage;
o The intermediate values shall be interpolated.
1.4.5 SPECIFIC DESIGN CRITERIA FOR THE CONTAINMENT WITH STEEL LINER
This section refers to:
− ‘singular’ zones (see Figure 1.4.5-1) which are defined either as:
o zones in which prestressing cables deviate significantly from the ‘standard’ layout (e.g.
around the equipment hatch), or
o zones of geometric discontinuity (e.g. the gusset, the prestressing cable anchoring
ribs, the dome girder, etc), or
o zones where the reinforcing bar area is designed against loads other than thermal
moments (more ‘physical’ definition).
− ‘current’ zones (see Figure 1.4.5-1) which are defined as ‘non-singular’ by contrast to ‘singular’
zones, as:
o zones in which prestressing cables do not deviate significantly from the ‘standard’
layout, or
o zones which are geometrically continuous.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 103 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Figure 1.4.5-1 Example of singular and current zones in the containment of the EPR
1.4.5.1 STRESS LIMIT FOR THE DESIGN OF THE CONTAINMENT
The containment is sealed by means of a metal liner. In order to limit tensile deformation in the liner,
additional requirements are given in 1.4.5.3 for three groups of situations (Group 1 to 3).
The purposes of these additional requirements are to:
− Limit the formation of cracks in current zones;

− Limit the formation of transversal cracks in singular zones;
− Guarantee reversible behaviour after an accidental situation.
The requirements concern the behaviour of the containment under axial forces, bending moments and
shear forces.
The criteria for the different combinations of actions (Group 1 to 3) are given in Table 1.4.5-1.
1.4.5.2 CALCULATION ASSUMPTIONS
In design calculations, the liner is not considered as a tension-resistant element, but the liner’s thrust
effect (due to thermal effects or an imposed deformation) is taken into account in the loads applied to
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 104 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
the section. For accidental situations, an equivalent pressure is determined with a stress value equal
to ReH,mean as defined in 2.7, unless otherwise specified.
The stresses due to bending moments or axial forces are calculated on the basis of the following
assumptions:
− Plane sections remain plane;
− The strain in bonded reinforcement or bonded prestressing tendons, whether in tension or in

compression, is the same as that in the surrounding concrete;
− When a non-cracked section is considered, the entire concrete section is assumed to be

active and the concrete is assumed to be elastic both in tension and in compression;
− When a cracked section is considered, the concrete is assumed to be compressively elastic
but unable to withstand any tensile stress;
− The steel reinforcements are assumed to be elastic or elastoplastic in tension and

compression;
− The effects of shrinkage, creep and temperature that may influence stress are considered;
− In the case of a cracked section, the initial stress in the prestressing tendons just before the
formation of the first cracks is taken into account;
− In the case of a cracked section, to take into account the lower bond between the tendons (in
relation to the passive reinforcement) and the concrete, the section of tendons used in
calculations is reduced by a factor of 0.4 for groups 1 and 2 to calculate the maximum
stresses in the passive reinforcements.
NOTE For group 3, the tendon section reduction factor is taken as equal to 1.0.
1.4.5.2.1 Concrete
Under accidental situations (accidental thermal stresses only), the maximum compressive strength
may be taken as 1.2 fck / γC instead of fck / γC when the section is subjected to biaxial compression
(case of a variable thermal effect for instance).
A more accurate calculation may be made by using EN 1992-2, Appendix LL.
1.4.5.2.2 Prestressing
EN 1992-1-1, 5.10.1, (1) to (6) and 5.10.2 are amended as follows:
− The force applied to a tendon (EN 1992-1-1, 5.10.2.1), Pmax (i.e. the force applied to the active
end when placed under tension) should not exceed:
Equation 1.4.5-1
Pmax = Ap ⋅ Min{0.8 ⋅ f pk ;0.95 ⋅ f p 0.1k }
(i.e. k1 = 0.8 and k3 = 0.95 for the EN 1992-1-1 parameters)
Excessive tension is not permitted during prestressing phases.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 105 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
− The minimum compressive stress of the concrete (EN 1992-1-1, 5.10.2.2) when placed under
tension or transferring prestress shall be indicated in the approved technical documents for
the prestressing system in question. If these documents do not exist, requirements relating to
reliability and performance shall be taken into account.
Maximum compressive stress of the concrete is 0.6 fck.
EN 1992-1-1, 5.10.2.3, (1) to (3) are supplemented by the following requirements:

− Anchorage slip shall also be checked by measurement;
− The initial prestressing force Pm0(x) (at time t = t0) applied to the concrete immediately after it
is placed under tension and fitting of the anchor (prestressing by post-tension) is obtained by
subtracting the instantaneous losses ∆Pi(x) from tensile force Pmax and should not exceed:
Equation 1.4.5-2
Pm 0 ( x ) = Ap ⋅ Min{0.8 ⋅ f pk ;0.9 ⋅ f p 0.1k }
(i.e. k7 = 0.8 and k8 = 0.9 for the EN 1992-1-1 parameters)
This criterion should not be checked after tensioning each tendon, but only after tensioning of
all containment tendons.
In accordance with EN 1992-1-1, 5.10.3, (3), the notations of the various prestressing losses are as
follows:
− losses due to elastic deformation of concrete: ∆Pel;

− losses due to short-term relaxation: ∆Pr;
− losses due to friction: ∆Pµ(x);
− losses due to anchorage slip: ∆Psl;
In accordance with EN 1992-1-1, 5.10.5 and 5.10.6:

− The instantaneous prestressing losses caused by the elastic deformation of the concrete ∆Pel
(EN 1992-1-1, 5.10.5.1) are calculated with the following formula:
Equation 1.4.5-3
0.5 ⋅ (Ap ⋅ E p ) ⋅ ∆σ c (t0 )
∆Pel =
Ecm (t0 )
Where ∆σc(t0) is the variation of the mean stress of the concrete along the tendon at the initial moment
of prestress transfer.
A more accurate formula factoring in the Poisson effect may be used to estimate the deformation of
the concrete.
To calculate Pk,sup at the initial moment, the concrete modulus of elasticity Ecm is assumed to remain
constant (calculation value to analyse short-term actions) during the prestressing phases.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 106 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
− The instantaneous prestressing losses due to friction ∆Pµ(x) (EN 1992-1-1, 5.10.5.2) may be
estimated using the following formula:
Equation 1.4.5-4
(
∆Pµ (x ) = Pmax 1 − e − µ (θ + k ⋅ x ) )
Where
o µ is the friction factor between the tendons and sheaths or ducts. Unless otherwise
specified, the friction factors are as follows:
o µ = 0.18 for the steel corrugated sheaths (horizontal tendons);
o µ = 0.16 for the steel tubes (vertical tendons and tendons of the dome).
o θ is the sum of angular displacements over distance x;
o k is the unintentional angular displacement per unit of length:
o k = 0.009 for the horizontal tendons and tendons of the dome;

o k = 0.005 for the vertical tendons.
− The maximum value (or upper value) of anchorage slip gmax corresponding to the chosen
prestressing system shall be used (EN 1992-1-1, 5.10.5.3).
− Evaluation of the deferred losses under permanent loads: given that the prestressing effect in
the wall of the containment mainly corresponds to a mean compressive stress and that the
steel section is ignored, the formula given in EN 1992-1-1, 5.10.6 may be simplified:
Equation 1.4.5-5
  σ (t )  
∆Pc + s + r = A p ⋅  E p ⋅ [ε ca (t ) − ε ca (t 0 ) + ε cd (t ) − ε cd (t 0 )] + 0.8 ⋅ ∆σ pr + E p ⋅ ε i , x ⋅ φ b (t , t 0 ) + m 0 ⋅ φ d (t , t 0 ) 
  Ec  
with the notations defined in APPENDIX 1.B:
− εca: autogenous shrinkage;

− εcd: drying shrinkage;
− φb: basic creep coefficient;
− φd: drying creep coefficient;

− σm: sum of the three principal stresses;
− εi,x: instantaneous deformations (in direction x).
And with ∆σpr: the absolute value of the loss of prestress by steel relaxation.
The effect of the steel section, including the tendons, reinforcements and liner may be taken into
account when estimating shrinkage deformations and creep coefficients.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 107 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
− Prestressing at the SLS (EN 1992-1-1, 5.10.9):

o Pk,inf is calculated at the assumed end of the operating phase including the maximum
corresponding tension losses;
o Pk,sup is calculated at the initial moment of prestress transfer with minimum tension
losses.
Given that time-dependant tension losses are estimated with a safety margin and that the initial
prestress force is estimated without these losses when placed under tension, the values of rinf and rsup
are taken as equal to 1 (EN 1992-1-1, 5.10.9). So,
Pk,sup = Pm,0(x);
Pk,inf = Pm,f(x).
1.4.5.2.3 Additional requirements for group 1 and group 2
Shear:
Stresses due to shear shall be calculated on the basis of the assumptions given in APPENDIX 1.H
with the stress limitations corresponding to those defined in Table 1.4.5-1 for group 1 and group 2
situations.
1.4.5.2.4 Additional requirements for group 3
Shear:
The shear resistance verification shall be performed in accordance with APPENDIX 1.H.
Minimum reinforcement (vertical and tangential – cylindrical reinforcement):
The minimum required reinforcement sections shall be calculated with the formula given in 1.4.4.3 and
adapted from EN 1992-1-1, 7.3.2.
Equation 1.4.5-6
k c ⋅ k ⋅ f ct ,eff ⋅ Act
As , min =
σs
In case of an unexpected bending moment during construction (for periods of over 28 days) the
preceding formula becomes:
Equation 1.4.5-7
h
0.4 × 0.65 × f ctm ×
As , min = 2
500
Where h is the thickness of the wall.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 108 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
The minimum reinforcement sections required for the dome are calculated using the same principle as
that used for the cylinder.
1.4.5.2.5 Additional fundamental ultimate limit state verification
An additional verification should be made for the Test combination (6a) with ULS.f criteria, namely:
γc = 1.5 and γs = 1.15.
1.4.5.3 STRESS AND STRAIN CRITERIA FOR THE THREE GROUPS OF COMBINATIONS
Table 1.4.5-1 defines specific material criteria for the design of the containment structures.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Structure
Test
Raft
SLS.c)
RHEP
LOCA
(4 SLS.c)
(7 ULS.a)
(9 ULS.a)
(6b SLS.c)
(8a ULS.a)
(16 ULS.a)
(8b ULS.a)
2d SLS.qp)
(11b ULS.a)
LOCA + DE
Construction
Design Earth.
SA (0.55 MPa)
SA (0.65 MPa)
(1aw/1as EQU,
1bw/1bs EQU, 1g
Inspection Earth.
Normal operation
Inner containment
Outer containment
(2a EQU, 2c SLS.c,

Partial factor γc 1.0 1.2 1.2
Bending stress:
2 - - - X - -
Max σ C ≤ ⋅ f ck
3
For SLS.qp, Membrane stress: Membrane stress: Membrane stress:
f - Mean σc = compression - Mean σc = compression - - C - -
Mean σ C ≤ 0.45 ⋅ ck
γc (i.e. no traction) (i.e. no traction)
Compression stress  f ck
Bending stress:  γ
σc  c
- f ck Max σ C ≤  or X X X
[MPa] Max σ C ≤ 0.6 ⋅
Concrete (1/2)
γc 1.2 ⋅ f ck ; if thermal accidental situation
 γc

 f ck
 γ
 c
Max σ C ≤  or X - X
1.2 ⋅ f ck ; if thermal accidental situation
 γc

X: All zones of structure; C: Current zones; S: Singular zones;

(1): external longitudinal reinforcements;
(2): internal longitudinal reinforcements;

(3): internal and external longitudinal reinforcement.
Table 1.4.5-1 Specific material criteria for containment structures (1/4)
ETC-C 2010 Edition
PART 1 - DESIGN
Page 109 of 405
Test
Raft
SLS.c)
RHEP
LOCA
(4 SLS.c)
(7 ULS.a)
(9 ULS.a)
(6b SLS.c)
(8a ULS.a)
(16 ULS.a)
(8b ULS.a)
2d SLS.qp)
(11b ULS.a)
LOCA + DE
Construction
Design Earth.
SA (0.55 MPa)
SA (0.65 MPa)
(1aw/1as EQU,
Page 110 of 405
1bw/1bs EQU, 1g
Inspection Earth.
Normal operation
Inner containment
Outer containment
(2a EQU, 2c SLS.c,

PART 1 - DESIGN
ETC-C 2010 Edition

f ck
Max σ CW ≤ 0.6 ⋅ X X X
Compression γc
stress in shear  f ck
 f ck  γ
strut  γ  c
σcw  c Max σ CW ≤  or
Maxσ CW ≤  or  f ck X - X
[MPa] 1.2 ⋅ f ck ; if thermal accidental situation 1.2 ⋅ γ ; if thermal accidental situation
  c

γc
Tensile stress 2
Concrete (2/2)
σt Max σ t ≤ f ctk - - - X - -
3
[MPa]
Ultimate strain
εcu 3‰ X - X
[‰]

Test
Raft
RHEP
SLS.c)
LOCA
(4 SLS.c)
(7 ULS.a)
(9 ULS.a)
(6b SLS.c)
(8a ULS.a)
(16 ULS.a)
(8b ULS.a)
2d SLS.qp)
(11b ULS.a)
LOCA + DE
Construction
Design Earth.
SA (0.55 MPa)
SA (0.65 MPa)
(1aw/1as EQU,
1bw/1bs EQU, 1g
Inspection Earth.
Normal operation
Inner containment
Outer containment
(2a EQU, 2c SLS.c,

Partial factor γS 1.0 1.0 1.0
Bending stress:
2  X X X
Max σ S ≤ Min  ⋅ f yk ; Max 0.5 ⋅ f yk ;110 η ⋅ f ctm 
( ) (1) (1) (1)
3 
with η = 1.6 for high-bond reinforcements
f pk
Membrane stress: Max σ S ≤ 0.1 ⋅ S S S
γP
Membrane stress: No traction Membrane stress: No traction C C C
f yk C C C
Bending stress: Max σ S ≤ 0.8 ⋅
γS (3) (3) (3)
f yk S S
Bending stress: Max σ ≤ 0.8 ⋅
S -
Tensile stress γS (3) (3)
σS Bending stress:
[MPa]
2  S S
Max σ S ≤ Min  ⋅ f yk ; Max 0.5 ⋅ f yk ;110 η ⋅ f ctm 
( ) -
(2) (2)
3 
Passive reinforcement (1/2)

with η = 1.6 for high-bond reinforcements
f pk

Membrane stress: Max σ S ≤ 0.1 ⋅ S - S
γP
Bending stress:
X X
f yk -
Max σ S ≤ (3) (3)
γS
Membrane stress:
f R X - X
Max σ S ≤ liner , k = eH min
γP γP
ETC-C 2010 Edition
PART 1 - DESIGN
Page 111 of 405
Test
Raft
RHEP
SLS.c)
LOCA
(4 SLS.c)
(7 ULS.a)
(9 ULS.a)
(6b SLS.c)
(8a ULS.a)
(16 ULS.a)
(8b ULS.a)
2d SLS.qp)
(11b ULS.a)
Page 112 of 405
LOCA + DE
Construction
Design Earth.
SA (0.55 MPa)
SA (0.65 MPa)
(1aw/1as EQU,
PART 1 - DESIGN
1bw/1bs EQU, 1g
Inspection Earth.
Normal operation
Inner containment
Outer containment
(2a EQU, 2c SLS.c,
ETC-C 2010 Edition

2 
Tensile stress in Max σ Sw ≤ Min  ⋅ f yk ; Max 0.5 ⋅ f yk ;110 η ⋅ f ctm 
( )
3  X X X
shear
reinforcements with η = 1.6 for high-bond reinforcements
σSw f yk f yk
(2/2)
[MPa] Max σ Sw ≤ 0.8 ⋅ Max σ Sw ≤ X - X
γS γS
Strain
εS Max εS ≤ 10‰ (see 1.4.3.1) Max εS ≤ 10‰ (see 1.4.3.1) Max εS ≤ 10‰ (see 1.4.3.1) X - X
Passive reinforcement
[‰]
Partial factor γP 1.0 1.0 1.0
Prestressing
tendons section
40% 40% 100%
taken into account
[%]
If membrane stress is
If membrane stress is tensile stress:
tensile stress:
- - - f pk C - -
f pk Max ∆σ P ≤ 0.1 ⋅
Overtension stress Max ∆σ P ≤ 0.1 ⋅
Prestressing
γP γP
∆σP

[MPa] If membrane stress is tensile stress:
f liner , k ReH min X - -
Max ∆σ P ≤ =
γP γP

Page 113 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.4.6 RAFT AND BURIED WALLS
Table 1.4.6-1 gives additional design criteria for components of structures containing radioactive fluid
such as rafts (in particular, the common raft of Nuclear Island and the raft of Nuclear Auxiliary
Building) and buried walls.
Table 1.4.6-1 Specific material criteria for raft and buried walls
SLS
Passive
Tensile stress 2
( 
Max σ s ≤ Min  ⋅ f yk ; Max 0.5 ⋅ f yk ; 110 η ⋅ f ctm  )
σS 3 
reinforcement
[MPa] with η = 1.6 for high-bond reinforcements
1.4.7 INTERNAL PROJECTILES AND DROPPED LOADS
In the case of internal projectiles and dropped loads, calculations may be made with a special study.
The methods defined in APPENDIX 1.C and APPENDIX 1.D are acceptable to check the design
resistance of reinforced concrete structures against perforation by hard projectiles and against
punching shear.
1.4.8 SPECIFIC CRITERIA FOR THE DESIGN OF BURIED STRUCTURES (TUNNELS

AND GALLERIES)
Buried tunnels and galleries shall be designed according to the general requirements for concrete
structures with the following additional detail arrangements:
− Vegetation cover of at least 2 m shall be considered.
− At penetrations into buildings or at singular points such as elbows, “Ts”, solid infill materials,
etc, the tunnels or conduits shall be designed to allow for adequate differential displacements.
NOTE For concrete pipes with a steel core:
Whatever the final destination of the pipes (embedded in a concrete structure, set inside a
gallery, buried in the ground…), reinforced concrete pipes with a steel core shall be designed
according to EN 639 and EN 641.
The cover thicknesses of the internal and external reinforcements shall be assessed
according to structural class, exposure class and strength class of the concrete as defined in
EN 1992-1-1.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 114 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.4.9 ADDITIONAL RULES FOR WALLS AND SLABS OF POOLS SUBJECTED TO

THERMAL EFFECTS
For walls and slabs of pools subjected to thermal effects, special checks shall be carried out using the
criteria defined in Table 1.4.9-1.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Normal operating Normal operating Exceptional water temperature Accidental water temperature
(2d SLS.qp) (2f SLS.f) (17a SLS.c) (18 ULS.a)
Compressive stress In current zones:

f ck f ck
σc f ck Max σ C ≤ 0.6 ⋅ Max σ C ≤ 0.6 ⋅
Mean σ C ≤ 0.45 ⋅ γc γc
[MPa] γc
Compressive stress in
shear strut f ck
Concrete
Max σ C ≤
σcw γc
[MPa]
Tensile stress 2  f yk
Max σ s ≤ Min  ⋅ f yk ; Max 0.5 ⋅ f yk ; 110 η ⋅ f ctm 
( ) Max σ S ≤ 0.8 ⋅
σS 3  γS
[MPa] where η = 1.6 for high-bond reinforcements
Passive
Ultimate strain
reinforcement
εuk 10‰.(see 1.4.3.1)
[‰]

Table 1.4.9-1 Specific material criteria for walls and slabs of pools subjected to thermal effects
ETC-C 2010 Edition
PART 1 - DESIGN
Page 115 of 405
Page 116 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.4.10 ADDITIONAL RULES FOR THE DESIGN OF THE AIRPLANE RESISTANT SHELL
This section describes the civil engineering requirements for demonstrating the stability and load-
bearing capacity of structural parts in case of an aircraft crash.
Checks of the local zone of impact and the building as a whole shall be carried out. APPENDIX 1.C
provides an acceptable method for checking impacts according to load diagram defined in a specific
document, such as document [1].
The purpose of the overall analysis is to identify movement at different points of structures and
calculate the internal forces in constructional elements not directly affected by the impact. The zone of
impact and its immediate vicinity are generally represented separately from the overall model.
A modified load diagram (document [1]) may be used for floor response spectra taking into account
the material’s elastic linear behaviour.
The impact is considered at the centre of each external protective wall. For the Reactor Building, the
vertical impact in the middle of the dome and the horizontal impact on the roof of the protected
peripheral building along the axis orthogonal to the centreline of the building are factored in.
Displacements and internal forces shall be determined by dynamic elastic calculation. An equivalent
static stress may be used if it is based on a dynamic calculation, for instance the elements’ own
dynamic load factor and frequency.
The corresponding response spectra are calculated for the main structural elements of buildings.
The internal forces caused by induced vibrations shall be applied with alternating signs.
It is preferable to use a simple finite element model rather than a very detailed one from a better
survey, however in all cases the model shall enable the requisite calculation values to be determined.
The ground in the model is represented mainly by a spring weight damping system. For homogeneous
ground, the parameters shall be determined on the basis of the elastic half-space theory.
The weights of the finite element model shall be determined by factoring in the weights of the civil
engineering structural elements and the self-weight of the plant equipment. The fluids stored in tanks
or pools are represented as rigid masses. Non-permanent loads are factored in when designing the
individual elements and should not be included in the overall model.
To calculate the responses of the buildings (movements and internal forces), damping proportional to
speed (linear-viscous) is used. Different damping values for the ground and the structure are taken
into account. Damping of the ground due to hysteresis and radiating energy is established according
to the condition of the ground and foundations. If the dynamic calculation is made with modal methods
using real own modes, the damping shall be limited to the following values:
− horizontal vibration and torsion: 15% of critical damping;
− vertical vibration: 30% of critical damping.
The internal forces exerted on structural elements that are not represented in the finite element model
with their own rigidity are determined with the aid of acceleration of the rigid body of the floor without a
response spectrum.
These forces are tracked until a structural element in which internal forces may be determined from
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 117 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
overall forces is reached.

Checking the load-bearing capacity of the elements directly concerned
The calculations may be made either by using the energy balance method with the applied
momentum, or dynamically using the accelerogram. The calculations shall be performed with the
assumption that the element displays elasto-plastic behaviour.
The stress-deformation diagram used for the concrete corresponds to the rectangular parabolic
diagram with an upper horizontal branch for εc > 0.2%. The stress-strain diagram used for the
reinforcement is an elasto-plastic diagram, with a horizontal branch of fyk.
The safety factor of the concrete is taken as γc = 1.2, and that of the steel is taken as γs = 1.
The limits of the calculated deformations are supplied in the form of limit deformation values for the
concrete and the reinforcement.
1.4.11 SPECIAL DETAILING
Good practice in detailing for nuclear structures should be observed. These aim to ensure that the
final structures are sufficiently robust and ductile. A non-exhaustive list of good practice for detailing is
given below:
− Careful treatment of intersections (wall-wall, wall-slab, column-beam…), and in particular good

concrete confinement;
− Sufficient anchorage and overlap lengths;
− Careful treatment of openings;

− Careful treatment of lintels;
− Suitable tying system.
1.4.11.1 REINFORCEMENT
1- Reinforced concrete
The maximum spacing of transversal reinforcements suggested in EN 1992-1-1, Figure 8.9 should be
adapted to the type of member under consideration and the actual main mesh of longitudinal
reinforcement.
In the case of discontinuous geometry, reinforcing bars may be added at the centre of the section (3
bars of 20 mm in diameter for example) to reduce the risk of cracking caused by shrinkage and
thermal movements at a young age due to the elements cooling in the first few days after pouring.
2- Additional arrangements for minimum shear reinforcements

Σ Ast,min shall be taken as equal to:
− 0.25 As for beams and columns (see EN 1992-1-1, Table 8.2);
− 0.25 As for the anchor in the beams and columns;

− 0 for the anchor in the slabs and walls;
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 118 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
As applies for covering in the beams, columns, slabs and walls.

The coefficient K = 0.1 may also apply for stirrups in the walls and slabs.
For walls (including the containment wall), at least 4 links per m² are required (EN 1992-1-1, 9.6.4,
(2)).
Position of shear reinforcements shall be adapted to the position of the main longitudinal reinforcing
bars.
1.4.11.2 PRESTRESSING
Tendons
EN 1992-1-1, Figure 8.15 applies, however bundled ducts are not accepted.
When two tendons cross over each other and the minimum spacing between the ducts is less than
that stated in EN 1992-1-1, Figure 8.15, at least one duct shall be tubular and rigid for this situation to
be acceptable.
In the wall, the minimum spacing between two ducts may be reduced to 50 mm in the horizontal
direction and 40 mm in the vertical direction.
In the dome, the minimum spacing between two ducts may be locally reduced to 10 mm.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 119 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.5 METAL PARTS INVOLVED IN THE LEAKTIGHTNESS OF THE

CONTAINMENT
1.5.1 ANCHORED LINER OF THE CONTAINMENT
This section applies to the anchored metal liner which covers the inner surface of the internal
containment, including the base mat and cavities, so as to form a continuous surface.
1.5.1.1 DESIGN PRINCIPLES
The following are taken into consideration:

− the metal liner itself which ensures leaktightness;
− its system of anchorage to the concrete, welded to the liner.
The following assumptions are made:
− the force applied to the liner shall be defined assuming that in a given section the mean
strains of the liner are identical to those of the concrete at the intrados of the containment;
− these strains are obtained by an elastic finite element calculation, the modulus of elasticity of
the section concerned being that of the concrete;
− the modulus of elasticity and yield strength of the steel are used to calculate the thermal
stresses when thermal expansion is prevented.
The liner is not taken into account in the resistance of the structure except when its action is
unfavourable.
The anchoring system welded to the liner comprises:
− continuous anchors that generally cross at right angles, which delineate portions of the liner
known as meshes;
− local anchors (studs) located within the meshes, in a square pattern.
The continuous anchors transmit concrete strains to the liner. They limit slippage of the liner in the
event of differences of thickness1, temperature or elasto-plastic condition between two adjacent
meshes on the liner. In addition, they stiffen the liner sufficiently during assembly and during the
concreting phases.
1 This applies to designed thickness differences only (e.g. between liner plate and adjacent anchor plate); it does
not apply to minor differences, e.g. due to tolerances of the plate thickness.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 120 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Local anchors prevent the meshes from blistering. The pitch of the local anchors is such that local
bending initiated by manufacturing shape defects, and which may be amplified by the effects of
prestressing or a temperature rise, remain compatible with the leaktightness requirements.
The anchoring system shall be designed to prevent cascade failure, in the event of the failure of one of
the elements of the system. For this, the design shall take into account the following cases of failure:
− failure of a stud;
− failure of all studs in a mesh.
For the liner base which is inserted between the main base mat of the Reactor Building and that of the
internals, the contact zone of the liner with the underlying base mat shall be sufficiently flat to avoid
leaving excessively large voids and avoid the risk of crushing of the liner under load.
1.5.1.2 COMBINATIONS OF ACTIONS TO BE TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT
The main combinations of actions considered are taken from Table 1.3.3-2, with all load factors taken
as 1.0.
In these combinations, two categories of actions shall be considered:

− the actions applied by the concrete to the liner (due to prestressing, creep, shrinkage,
earthquake, etc.), which are expressed only in terms of strains or displacements;
− the actions directly applied to the liner (hydrostatic pressure due to liquid concrete during
construction, self-weight, internal pressure, temperature, etc.) which are expressed in terms of
stresses or strains.
Internal pressure and temperature are represented by Qk,L and Qk,T for Group 1, and combination 11 of
Group 2. They are included in Ad,P, Ad,A and Ad,S for other combinations of Groups 2 and 3 (internal
accident situations).
The result is the following list of situations classified according to the different Groups of design
criteria:
Group 1:
Construction:
(1) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + Qk,C +Qk,T +Qk,w + Qk,s
Normal operation:
(2) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + Qk,L +Qk,T
Inspection Earthquake:
(4) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + Qk,L + Qk,T + Qk,E
Test (containment):
(6) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + Qk,test +Qk,T
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 121 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Group 2:
LOCA-2A:
(7) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + Qk,L + Ad,p

Severe Accident (0.55MPa):
(8a) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + Qk,L + Ad,A
Rupture of High Energy Pipework (RHEP):
(9) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + Qk,L + Ad,S
Design Earthquake including vibrations:
(11) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + Qk,L + Qk,T + Ad,E

Aircraft crash including vibrations:
(12) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + Qk,L + Qk,T + Ad,apc
Group 3:
Severe Accident (0.65 MPa):
(8b) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + Qk,L + Ad,A
LOCA-SLB + DE (Design Earthquake):
(16) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + Qk,L + Ad,p + Ad,E
Group 3bis:
Severe accident (H2):
(8c) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + Qk,L + Ad,A
NOTE For the construction case, the substitution of combination (1) by the combinations 1aw to 1bs
and 1g of Table 1.3.3-2 is acceptable.
1.5.1.3 DESIGN RULE FOR CONSTRUCTION
During the construction of the containment, the metal liner is used as formwork and stresses shall be
limited so that its overall behaviour remains elastic.
In the construction situation, the following configurations shall be studied:

− the concrete pouring conditions (concrete lift height, etc.);
− the different possible assembly configurations and the handling of elements (basemat,
cylindrical part, dome);
− the behaviour of the exposed part of the liner (not yet concreted), when it is exposed to the
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 122 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
wind and differences in temperature.
An elastic analysis is required, assuming that:
− the behaviour of the material is elastic and linear;

− the material is isotropic;
− the strains and displacements are small;
− the initial stresses are assumed to be zero.
The design rule for the construction situation is based on the equivalent stress calculation, referred to
as σ and defined in APPENDIX 1.E.
Notation (see Figure 1.E-1, APPENDIX 1.E):

θm = average temperature of the section during the combination of actions to be taken into
consideration. The temperature θm is calculated along the reference segment used to assess
equivalent stress;
Rp0.2 (θm)min = minimum conventional yield strength at 0.2 % of the material at temperature θm .
In the construction situation, equivalent stress shall not exceed the limit given in Table 1.5.1-1 for the
liner and its anchoring system.
Table 1.5.1-1 Design criterion for the liner and its anchoring system in the construction
situation
Situations σ ≤
Construction situation, Group 1 0.67 Rp0.2 (θm)min
For the liner base, in addition to the limitation of stresses (see Table 1.5.1-3), the geometrical defects
admissible during the construction phase shall:
− take into account the mode of pouring of the internal structures (lift height, temperature
increase during the setting of the concrete);
− be defined so that, after concreting, the liner is returned to a quasi flat situation which satisfies
the design requirements of 1.5.1.4.2.
Defects resulting in local bossing towards the bottom and which may lead to damage of the sheet
metal shall also be eliminated.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 123 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.5.1.4 DESIGN RULES FOR OTHER SITUATIONS
The spacing of the local anchors shall be determined beforehand for Group 1 situations other than the
construction situation (see 1.5.1.4.1).
The metal liner and its anchoring system shall then respect the design rules according to whether the
liner is considered to be free of geometrical defects (see 1.5.1.4.2) or not (see 1.5.1.4.3).
1.5.1.4.1 Preliminary rule to determine the spacing of local anchors
Buckling shall be studied to determine the dimensions of the local anchors and their spacing, referred
to as “a”. The analysis shall be carried out for the combinations of Group 1 actions at least, with the
exception of the construction situation.
The critical bifurcation load (defined in APPENDIX 1.E) associated with the buckling mode
corresponding to a combination of actions, referred to as CC, shall be determined for:
− a strip between two lines of studs for all directions;
− a square area, length a and a√2 (for orientation at 45°).
Considering a mesh of the liner which is assumed to be perfect (with no shape defects), the buckling
calculation coefficient Cd is defined by:
Equation 1.5.1-1
where C corresponds to the combination of actions studied and CC the corresponding limit critical
bifurcation load.
The calculation coefficient for buckling shall be greater than the limit given in Table 1.5.1-2.
Table 1.5.1-2 Preliminary design criterion for the liner
Situations Cd ≥
Group 1: other than construction 1.
1.5.1.4.2 Design criteria for the liner plates (liner assuming no shape defect)
In this case, the metal liner is assumed to be perfect (with no shape defect) and all local anchors are
assumed to be present. An elasto-plastic analysis shall be performed to determine the strain tensor.
For this type of analysis, the mathematical behavioural model (stress-strain diagram of the material) is
based on the following assumptions:
− the isotropy of the material;

ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 124 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
− the Von Misès plasticity criterion;

− the corresponding law of normality for plastic strain: plastic shearing stress limit law;
− an isotropic strain hardening law.
The material characteristics required for the application of this model are:
− the minimum stress-strain diagrams according to temperature;
− the modulus of elasticity according to temperature.
The components of the membrane strain tensor, referred to as (εij)m, and the components of the
bending strain tensor, referred to as (εij)b, defined in APPENDIX 1.E, are calculated from the total
strain tensor. The maximum and minimum main strains referred to as εm and εmb are deduced from the
membrane strain tensor and the membrane plus bending strain tensor. These main strains in the liner
shall satisfy the inequalities given in Table 1.5.1-3 for the combinations of actions given in 1.5.1.2.
Table 1.5.1-3 Design criteria for the liner with no defects
Situations Membrane strain Membrane plus bending strain
Group 1 - 0.002 ≤ εm ≤ + 0.002 - 0.004 ≤ εmb ≤ + 0.004
Group 2 - 0.005 ≤ εm ≤ + 0.003 - 0.014 ≤ εmb ≤ + 0.010
Group 3 - 0.007 ≤ εm ≤ + 0.004 - 0.018≤ εmb ≤ + 0.012
Group 3bis - 0.010 ≤ εm
NOTE
1. Negative values correspond to compression and positive values correspond to tension.

2. These criteria only concern the liner. The design rules for anchorages are specified in 1.5.1.4.3.
3. If these criteria are not respected, the optional analysis given in 1.5.3 shall be performed.
1.5.1.4.3 Design criteria for the anchoring system (liner with shape defects)
In this case, the liner is assumed to be imperfect (with shape defects). Blistering is assumed to appear
between the studs of a mesh. To be conservative and initiate blistering, the shape defect shall be
proportional to the buckling mode according to 1.5.1.4.1 with amplitude equal to the maximum value of
the construction tolerance. The thickness tolerances of the liner plates and shape defect that may
affect the last elements to be assembled shall also be taken into account.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 125 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
The following configurations shall be analysed:

− a strip between two rows of studs in all directions;
− a square area, length a or a√2 (for orientation at 45°);
− a square area, length 2a (failure of one stud);

− a mesh (where all studs fail) for Group 2 and 3 situations only.
The analysis shall be carried out for the combinations of actions given in 1.5.1.2.
A distinction is made between mechanical loads and displacement limited loads. Mechanical loads are
those which are not self-limiting or self-relieving with load application. Displacement-limited loads are
those resulting from restraint of the structure or of adjacent material and are self-limiting or self-
relieving.
An elasto-plastic analysis identical to that of 1.5.1.4.2 is required using the hypothesis of great
displacements (taking the quadratic term into account in the definition of the strain tensor).
Following the elasto-plastic analysis, appropriate calculations shall be carried out to determine:
− normal and tangential forces;
− normal and tangential displacements, of the studs and continuous anchors.
Appropriate methods shall be used to:
− demonstrate that the studs are designed to fail before tearing the liner;
− determine the force-displacement curves that characterise the behaviour of the anchorages in
the normal and tangential directions.
Notation:
FT = tangential force;
FN = normal force;
FyT = tangential force corresponding to the loss of linearity of the force-displacement curve;
FyN = normal force corresponding to the loss of linearity of the force-displacement curve;
FuT = tangential force corresponding to the maximum force of the force-displacement curve;
FuN = normal force corresponding to the maximum force of the force-displacement curve;
U T = tangential displacement;
U N = normal displacement;
U uT = tangential displacement corresponding to the ultimate displacement of the force-displacement
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 126 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
curve;
U uN = normal displacement corresponding to the ultimate displacement of the force-displacement

curve.
Figure 1.5.1-1 Anchor force-displacement curve
Forces and displacements shall never exceed the limits given in Table 1.5.1-4 and Table 1.5.1-5 for
the combinations of actions given in 1.5.1.2.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 127 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Table 1.5.1-4 Anchorage design criteria for a liner with defects in the case of mechanical loads
Situations Forces
[
Min 0.67 FyT ;0.5 FuT ]
Min[0.67 F ]
Group 1
yN ;0.5 FuN
[
Min 0.9 FyT ;0.7 FuT ]
Min[0.9 F ]
Group 2
yN ;0.7 FuN
[
Min FyT ;0.8 FuT ]
Min[F ]
Group 3
yN ;0.8 FuN
Group 3 bis [
Min FyT ;0.8 FuT ]
(only for continuous anchors) Min[F yN ;0.8 FuN ]
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 128 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Table 1.5.1-5 Anchorage design criteria for a liner with defects in the case of displacement
limited loads
Situations Displacements
0.25 UuT
Group 1
0.25 UuN
0.5 UuT
Group 2
0.5 UuN
0.6 UuT
Group 3
0.6 UuN
Group 3 bis
0.6 UuT
(only for continuous
0.6 UuN
anchors)
1.5.1.5 THICKNESS TRANSITION ZONES
In the thickness transition zones (i.e. in the vicinity of a penetration or an anchor plate), no justification
is necessary if these zones are designed with a slope inferior to 1 in 4.
1.5.1.6 MATERIAL
For design calculations, the characteristics of the steel concerned are defined in 2.7.
The design calculations and the tests done according to 1.5.1.4.3 may require for studs to limit the
upper bounds of the mechanical characteristics (Rm, ReH), in order to prevent the tearing of the liner.
1.5.2 CONTAINMENT PENETRATIONS
This section concerns the following containment penetrations:

− equipment hatch;
− construction phase access penetrations;
− the sleeves of the fluid and electrical penetrations;

− the sleeves of the personnel air-lock (not including the air-locks themselves);
− the sleeve of the transfer tube.
These components and their limits of supply are shown in Figure 1.5.3-1 and Figure 1.5.3-2
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 129 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
The penetrations shall be designed:

− to be adapted to all the combinations of actions considered without loss of leaktightness or
structural integrity (the effects of temperature, shrinkage and creep of the concrete shall be
taken into account);
− with an anchoring system capable of transferring the effects of the combinations of actions on
the civil engineering structure.
1.5.2.1 DESIGN PRINCIPLES
The penetrations listed in 1.5.2 shall be provided with adequate protection against type P damage and
that induced by buckling.
The definition of type P damage is given in APPENDIX 1.E.
1.5.2.2 COMBINATIONS OF ACTIONS TO BE CONSIDERED
The main combinations of actions considered are taken from Table 1.3.3-2.
In these combinations, two categories of actions shall be considered:
− the actions applied by the concrete to the metal parts (due to prestressing, creep, shrinkage,
earthquake, etc.), which are expressed only in terms of strains or displacements;
− the actions directly applied to the metal parts (hydrostatic pressure due to liquid concrete
during construction, self-weight, internal pressure, temperature, piping reactions, etc.), which
are expressed in terms of stresses or strains.
Internal pressure and temperature are represented by Qk,L and Qk,T for Group 1, and combination 11 of
Group 2. They are included in Ad,P, Ad,A and Ad,S for other combinations of Groups 2 and 3 (internal
accident situations).
Piping reactions are represented by Qk,L for all the Groups.
Depending on the Group of criteria required, the result is the following classification:
Group 1:
Construction:
(1) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + Qk,C +Qk,T

Normal operation:
(2c) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + Qk,L +0.6Qk,T
(2e) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + 0.7Qk,L+ Qk,T

Inspection Earthquake:
(4) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + 0.7Qk,L + 0.6Qk,T +Qk,E
Test:
(6b) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + Qk,test +0.6Qk,T
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 130 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Group 2:
Construction:
(1dw) 1.35Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + 1.5Qk,C +0.9Qk,T + 0.9Qk,w

(1ds) 1.35Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + 1.5Qk,C +0.9Qk,T + 0.75Qk,s
(1ew) 1.35Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + 0.9Qk,C +1.5Qk,w + 0.75Qk,s
(1es) 1.35Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + 0.9Qk,C +0.9Qk,w + 1.5Qk,s

Normal operation:
(2b) 1.35Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + 1.5Qk,L +0.9Qk,T
Test:
(6a) 1.35Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + 1.35Qk,test
LOCA-2A:
(7) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + 0.3Qk,L + Ad,p

(8a) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + 0.3Qk,L + Ad,A
Rupture of High Energy Pipework (RHEP):

(9) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + 0.3Qk,L + Ad,S
Design Earthquake including vibrations:
(11b) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + 0.3Qk,L + 0.5Qk,T + Ad,E
Aircraft crash including vibrations:
(12b) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + 0.3Qk,L + 0.5Qk,T + Ad,apc
Group 3:
(8b) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + 0.3Qk,L + Ad,A

LOCA-SLB + Design Earthquake:
(16) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + P + 0.3Qk,L + Ad,p + Ad,E
1.5.2.3 DESIGN RULES
The following analyses shall be systematically carried out:
− an elastic analysis for Group 1 situations (see 1.5.2.3.1);

− a limit analysis for Group 2 and 3 situations (see 1.5.2.3.2);
− an analysis of buckling for all situations defined in 1.5.2.2, unless stated otherwise (see
1.5.2.3.3).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 131 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.5.2.3.1 Elastic analysis
This type of analysis shall be based on the following assumptions:
− the behaviour of the material is elastic and linear;

− the material is isotropic;
− the strains and displacements are small;
− the initial stresses are assumed to be zero.
The stresses are calculated along a reference segment to determine:
− the general primary equivalent membrane stress, referred to as Pm ;
− the primary local equivalent membrane stress, referred to as PL ;
− the primary equivalent membrane plus bending stress PL + Pb .
The definitions of the different terms and orders of magnitude are given in APPENDIX 1.E.
Notation
θm = average temperature in the section during the combination of actions to be taken into
consideration. θm is calculated along the reference segment used to assess the equivalent stresses.
Rp0.2 (θm)min = minimum conventional yield strength at 0.2% of the material for temperature θm.
For the combinations of actions given in 1.5.2.2, the general primary equivalent membrane stress Pm ,
the primary local equivalent membrane stress PL and primary equivalent membrane plus bending
stress PL + Pb shall not exceed the limits given in Table 1.5.2-1.
Table 1.5.2-1 Design criteria for elastic analysis
Situations Pm ≤ PL ≤ PL + Pb ≤
Group 1 0.67 Rp0.2 (θm)min Rp0.2 (θm)min
NOTE The criteria concern primary stresses. It should be noted that the classification of stresses
should be the consequence of the nature of the loading and not the way in which this loading is taken
into account in the calculation. A primary load (pre-stress for example) – in the calculation may be
modelled by an imposed displacement (displacement from the calculation of the concrete
containment). Accordingly, a load of the “imposed displacement” type should not be taken into
consideration systematically as an imposed and therefore secondary strain.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 132 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.5.2.3.2 Limit analysis
The strain of a structure made up of a perfectly plastic rigid material increases without limit for a
loading level known as the limit loading. The limit analysis methods enable this loading to be
calculated.
Preliminary analysis:
The absence of the risk of spring effect in the structure (see APPENDIX 1.E) shall be checked.
For a given combination of actions, the analysis of the plastic zones shall show that they remain at a
low level of strain. To achieve this, either calculation of the perfect plasticity limit load which is less
penalising or a specific elasto-plastic calculation to take strain hardening into account may be used.
An analysis of the spring effect is required in order to:
− avoid a concentration of strains in the vicinity of the junction with the containment, and,
− avoid excessively sudden transitions of thickness.
1- Limit analysis: method 1 (lower bound method)
Notation:
C = combination of actions concerned;

θL = maximum temperature in the structure for the combination of actions concerned at the point of
analysis;
Rp0.2 (θL)min = conventional yield strength at 0.2% minimum of the material at temperature θL.
Determination of the limit load:
A given combination of actions, referred to as C, is less than or equal to the limit combination of
actions if there is a distribution of elastic stress which satisfies the laws of equilibrium everywhere,
such that the plastic limit of the material is not exceeded at any point.
The determination of the limit combination of actions is based on the equivalent stress calculation,
referred to as σ (C ) and defined in APPENDIX 1.E.
For a combination of actions made up of imposed forces, referred to as CF, and imposed strain,
referred to as CD, the determination of the limit combination of actions should be restricted to actions
of the imposed force type.
By default, an approximation of the limit combination of actions, referred to as CL is given by the

equation:
Equation 1.5.2-1
[ ]
CL = λL CF + CD with λL such that max σ(CL ) = R p0,2 (θL )min
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 133 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
2- Limit analysis: method 2 (finite element method)
Notation:
C = combination of actions concerned,
θL = maximum temperature in the structure for the combination of actions concerned at the point of
analysis;
Rp0.2 (θL)min = conventional yield strength at 0.2% minimum of the material at temperature θL;
Rm (θL)min = conventional minimum tensile strength of the material at temperature θL.
Determination of the limit load:
The limit combination of actions, CL, is obtained by performing an elasto-plastic calculation for a
perfectly plastic-elastic material (strain hardening modulus is equal to zero) with a yield strength equal
to Rp0.2 (θL)min.
For a combination of actions made up of imposed forces, referred to as CF, and imposed strain
referred to as CD, the search for the limit combination of actions should be restricted to actions of the
imposed force type.
In practice, for a given combination of actions referred to as C = CF + CD, the imposed forces are
proportionally increased while keeping the imposed strain fixed. The limit combination of actions
corresponds to the determination of the real situation, referred to as λL, for which a clear divergence of
the calculation is obtained, hence:
Equation 1.5.2-2
CL = λ L C F + CD
For the combinations of actions given in 1.5.2.2, the parameter λL shall satisfy the conditions given in
Table 1.5.2-2.
Table 1.5.2-2 Design criteria for the limit analysis
Situations λL ≥
Group 2 1.11
Group 3 1.43 Rp0.2 (θL)min /Rm (θL)min
1.5.2.3.3 Buckling analysis
When a combination of actions concerned, referred to as C, increases proportionally, a transition from

a state of equilibrium to another state of equilibrium may occur (elastic bifurcation). The value of the
combination of actions at which bifurcation occurs is known as the critical combination of actions,
referred to as CC.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 134 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
CC is determined by solving a problem of eigenvalues leading to the determination of a minimum

positive eigenvalue, referred to as λC. This is the value by which each component of the combination
of actions concerned shall be multiplied to obtain an elastic bifurcation.
Equation 1.5.2-3
CC = λ C C
Where positive eigenvalues are not obtained, no instability is likely to occur and the analysis may be
interrupted.
For the combinations of actions given in 1.5.2.2 with the restriction below, the minimum positive
eigenvalue λC shall always exceed the limits given in Table 1.5.2-3 and Table 1.5.2-4.
For the Group 2 combinations of actions, the cases referred to as “construction”, “normal operation”
and “test” should not be analysed.
In the case of load-controlled buckling, as defined in APPENDIX 1.E, the required values for λC are
In the case of strain-controlled buckling, as defined in APPENDIX 1.E, the required values for λC are
See NOTE of 1.5.2.3.1.
Table 1.5.2-3 Safety factors for load-controlled buckling
Situations λC ≥
Group 1 2.5
Group 2 2.0
Group 3 1.3
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 135 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Table 1.5.2-4 Safety factors for strain-controlled buckling
Situations λC ≥
Group 1 1.67
Group 2 1.4
Group 3 1.1
1.5.2.4 SPECIFIC RULES FOR THE EQUIPMENT HATCH
For the combinations of actions given in 1.5.2.22, the strain calculated shall be compatible with the
requirements concerning opening and closing operations and maintaining the leaktightness of the link
between the shell and the hatch. This sealed link shall be made up of a system of flanges in which a
double joint is housed. This assembly shall be kept coupled by means of mechanical devices of the
“clamps” type.
1.5.2.4.1 Design of clamps
For these mechanisms, the elastic analysis according to 1.5.1.3 is required for all situations, limiting
the equivalent stress σ to the following values.
Table1.5.2-5 Stresses admissible for the design of clamps
Situations σ ≤
Group 1 0.4 Rp0.2 (θL)min
1.5.2.4.2 Design of the double seal
Given the size of the equipment hatch and the strain due to the containment during accident
situations, elastomer seals shall be designed according to the following approach:
2 The actions Qk,w and Qk,s should not be taken into account except for the sleeve and the shell. Action P should
not be taken into account since the shell flange is welded to the sleeve of the internal containment after
prestressing.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 136 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
− select one or more materials on the basis of mechanical characterisation tests, according to
their sensitivity to temperature and irradiation;
− model the link by flanges and seals using a hyper-elastic behaviour law for elastomers;
− study the behaviour of this link in all situations in order to optimise the shape of the seals and
the groove.
This approach shall be completed and validated by qualification tests.
1.5.2.4.3 Qualification of the sealed link
Given the difficulty of quantifying certain physical phenomena by calculation (particularly the ageing of
seals due to irradiation) and the resulting uncertainty, an experimental approach is necessary to
validate the components of this link of flanges, seals and clamps in accident situations.
Qualification of the joint/groove pairs
Qualification shall be carried out through tests on representative mock up models so that the seals
undergo successive accelerated thermal and mechanical ageing sequences, irradiation and thermo
mechanical loads corresponding to Severe Accident conditions. Qualification will depend on the
results of the final leaktightness tests and those carried out after each of these sequences.
Validation of clamps
The behaviour of these components shall be validated by a test carried out in the factory to measure
strain behaviour under loading. This test shall be continued up to a force of 1.1 times the envelope
value of the forces due to the Group 1, 2 and 3 situations. It shall be demonstrated that no
plasticisation occurs by checking:
− the linearity of the force/displacement curve;
− the lack of residual strain after completion of the test, by means of a dimensional check.
1.5.2.5 MATERIALS
The parts making up these penetrations and involved in the leaktightness of the containment may be
made of ferritic or stainless steel.
The characteristics of the steel used for design calculation are defined in 2.7.
1.5.3 OPTIONAL DESIGN RULES FOR THE LINER AND PENETRATIONS
For combinations of actions that do not comply with the design rule of 1.5.1.4.2 and 1.5.2.3, an elasto-
plastic analysis may be carried out in order to prevent risks of excessive strain and plastic instability.
Excessive strain:
Strain becomes excessive when it does not comply with the clearance of mechanical parts, the
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 137 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
leaktightness requirements of assemblies, and the resistance of the structure. Damage due to
“excessive strain” is revealed from orders of magnitude that are representative of overall behaviour
(diameter, length, etc.). Such damage shall be estimated by elasto-plastic analysis with the
assumptions that:
− the structure has no defects (nominal geometry);
− the displacement is small;
− the Von Misès’ criterion is used;
− a law of normality to define plastic strain is used;
− a model of the isotropic strain hardening type (minimum stress-strain diagrams and modulus
of elasticity according to temperature) is used.
Plastic instability:
Damage due to plastic instability appears beyond the excessive strain threshold when the behaviour
of the structure depends on the variation of its shape and the increase in resistance provided by strain
hardening. These two effects are antagonistic.
Such damage shall be assessed by elasto-plastic analysis with the assumptions that:
− the structure has defects (the shape defect is the first mode of buckling with an amplitude
equal to the manufacturing tolerance);
− the displacement is large (taking the quadratic term into account in the definition of the strain
tensor);
− the Von Misès criterion is used;
− a law of normality to define plastic strain is used;
− a model of the isotropic strain hardening type (minimum stress-strain diagrams and modulus
of elasticity according to temperature) is used.
For the combinations of actions selected (those for which the previous design rules are not complied
with), it shall be verified that the structure is not subject to type P damage (see APPENDIX 1.E) by
multiplying the combinations by the factors given in Table 1.5.3-1.
Table 1.5.3-1 Multiplication factors for combinations of actions
Situations Excessive strain Plastic instability
Group 1 1.5 2.5
Group 2 1.2 2.0
Group 3 1.0 1.35
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 138 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
The acceptance criteria are as follows:
− for the combination of actions increased by appropriate factors referred to as CM, the structure
shall be stable for the combination of actions λCM if λ ≤1;
− there shall be no buckling by bifurcation before reaching CM;
− for the combination of actions CM, the change of shape of the structure and the strain attained
shall be considered as acceptable by the Project.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 139 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
EPR : REACTOR BUILDING

View of different types of penetrations
REACTOR BUILDING
Types of penetrations
1
1
1. Equipment hatch
2. Personnel air-lock 2
3. Fluid penetration
3
4. Electrical penetration
5. Transfer tube penetration
Internal
containment
5
4
External
containment
Figure 1.5.3-1 Penetration assemblies
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 140 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Outer wall Inner wall
Metal liner
Bellows
Seals
Equipment hatch
Site access
Bellows
Standard piping penetration
Bellows
Personnel air-lock
Bellows
Transfer Tube penetration
Bellows
Penetration for steam and water pipes
Bellows
Electrical penetrations
Limit of supply
Figure 1.5.3-2 Supply limits for design rules
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 141 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.6 POOLS AND TANKS WITH LINER
1.6.1 COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS
This section applies to the liners of the internal surfaces of pools (including In-containment Refueling
Water Strorage Tank, IRWST) and tanks and to their doors and shutters.
Definitions:
− Pools are open compartments filled with water ensuring protection against radioactive
components like fuel assemblies. These components are likely to be handled or stored on the
bottom of these pools under a certain height of water;
− Tanks are closed compartments used for liquid storage.
Pools and tanks liners should comprise the following:
− watertight, decontaminable and corrosion resistant metal sheets with equipment anchor
plates;
− an anchoring system between the metal sheets and the concrete used to secure the metal
sheets;
− an anchoring system between the equipment anchor plates used to ensure the transmission of
forces to the concrete, without affecting the leaktightness of the liner;
− a system to collect potential leaks at the welds.
The anchoring system and anchor plates shall resist the strains and stresses undergone by the
structure.
Pools and tanks shall be classified by the Project as compartments which are either always filled with
water or not. Safety coefficients are applied according to this classification.
The doors and shutters shall be:
− watertight, decontaminable and corrosion resistant;
− resistant to the strains and stresses to which they are subjected.
1.6.2.1 GENERAL DESIGN PRINCIPLES
As pool and tank liners are composed of metal sheets welded onto a continuous anchorage system
without local anchors (studs), blistering is a normal mode of deformation for the liner.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 142 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
The design shall address:

− first level of rules: risk of buckling;
− second level of rules: resistance of the anchoring system and the anchor plates.
In addition:
− the seal welds shall be as short as possible. Requirements for welds quality are given in 2.9;
− to ensure the protection of the concrete and the detection of fault in the event of leaks at the
welds, the system to collect leaks shall have a slope of 1% or more;
− 2 pool compartments may be separated by doors or shutters. They shall be pressure-sealed
and fitted with gaskets;
− the anchors of liner plates (whether the anchors of the weld support sections or other plates
and penetrations) shall be sufficiently far apart, in all directions, to avoid the risk of local strain
of the liner due to cracking of the concrete. Such cracking may damage the welds;
− in the absence of precise experimental data, the spacing shall have a minimum value of dmin,
defined by:
Equation 1.6.2-1
dmin ≥ 0.178 Srmax
where Srmax is the distance between cracks calculated in accordance with EN 1992-1-1,
section 7, with k2 = 0.5 in bending.
1.6.2.2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DESIGN WITH BUTT WELDS
Butt welds shall be made of at least two passes.
The plates should be at least 4 mm thick.
The anchor sections shall be hollow and allow for the X-ray inspection of the welds.
1.6.2.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DESIGN WITH FILLET WELDS (OPTION)
The Manufacturer and the Owner may agree to choose fillet welds instead of butt welds, as an option
of the code.
As the principal function of the liner is to ensure leaktightness, the connection between the metal
sheets and the anchoring system or the equipment anchor plates shall be guaranteed.
For fillet welds, the plates should be at least 2 mm thick.
1.6.3 COMBINATIONS OF ACTIONS TO BE CONSIDERED
The main combinations of actions taken into consideration are taken from Table 1.3.3-2.
Depending on the Group of criteria required, the result is the following classification:
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 143 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Group 1:
Construction (load factors of 1):
(1b) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + Qk,c +Qk,T + Qk,w + Qk,s
Normal operation:
(2f) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + 0.3Qk,L + 0.6Qk,T + Qk,T,N
Group 2:
Exceptional temperature (water):
(17a) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + 0.3Qk,L + 0.6Qk,T + Qk,T,E
Exceptional temperature (air):
(17b) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + 0.3Qk,L + Qk,T,E
Group 3:
Design earthquake including induced vibrations:
(11b) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + 0,3Qk,L + 0.5Qk,T + Ad,E
Aircraft crash including induced vibrations:
(12b) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + 0,3Qk,L + 0.5Qk,T + Ad,apc
Accidental temperature (water):
(18) Gk,sup + Gk,inf + 0.3Qk,L + Ad,T
1.6.4 DESIGN RULES
1.6.4.1 LINER (FIRST LEVEL OF RULES)
The liner plates of pools and tanks shall be designed taking the following indications into account:
− The liner plays no part in structural strength (except for during construction). It transmits the
hydrostatic loads and reactions of the equipment to the concrete. For design calculations, the
value to be taken for the steel/concrete coefficient of friction shall be less than 0.6;
− Blistering shall be limited to guarantee liner leaktightness;
− Blistering shall be determined taking an initial defect into account. The form of the initial defect
shall correspond to the first mode of elastic buckling with a realistic amplitude (based on the
tolerances of shape and residual state after manufacturing);
− The behaviour of thin structures is very sensitive to limit conditions. An appropriate degree of
flexibility shall be imposed on these limits, taking the behaviour of the anchoring system or the
presence of fixed points for each zone analysed into account.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 144 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
For the buckling analysis, the mathematical behavioural model (stress-strain diagram of the material)
shall be based on the following assumptions:
− the hypothesis of large displacements (taking the quadratic term into account in the definition
of the strain tensor);
− the isotropy of the material;
− the Von Misès plasticity criterion;
− the corresponding law of normality for plastic strain: plastic shearing stress limit law;
− an isotropic strain hardening law.
The material characteristics required for the application of this model are:
− the minimum stress-strain diagrams according to temperature;
− the modulus of elasticity according to temperature.
1.6.4.1.1 Buckling analysis for butt welds
Notation
δC = admissible amplitude of blistering according to LC (see Figure 1.6.5-1),
LC = characteristic width,
L = width of the liner panels,
δ = amplitude of blistering of the liner determined at distance LC/2 from the limits (see Figure
1.6.5-2).
The admissible amplitude of blistering may be determined by:

− an experimental approach (see Figure 1.6.5-1). In this case, LC is the width of sheet metal
used for the test and is not associated with the spacing of anchoring of the sheet metal, but
with the determination of critical blistering δC;
− the following analytical approximation:
Equation 1.6.4-1
2
δC = LC εC
2
with
LC = 400 mm;
A%
εc = ;
1000
A%: ultimate elongation of the steel used (minimum coded value).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 145 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
The blistering of the liner is considered to be sufficiently limited if the following inequality is satisfied:
Equation 1.6.4-2
δC
δ≤
CS
The values required for the safety factor CS are given in
Table 1.6.4-1 and Table 1.6.4-2.
Table 1.6.4-1 Safety factors for compartments always filled with water
Situations CS
Group 1 1.67
Group 2 1.40
Group 3 1.10
Table 1.6.4-2 Safety factors for compartments which are not always filled with water
Situations CS
Group 1 1.40
Group 2 1.10
Group 3 1.00
1.6.4.1.2 Buckling analysis for fillet welds
In the case of fillet welds, the buckling analysis shall be defined (conditions, safety factors) by the
Project.
1.6.4.2 ANCHORING SYSTEM (SECOND LEVEL OF RULES)
The mechanical resistance of the anchoring system includes:

− the resistance of the anchors themselves;
− the resistance of the concrete;
− the interface requirements between the anchors and the concrete.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 146 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
The anchoring system shall be designed according to an appropriate code or validated experimental
method, chosen and approved by the Project.
The admissible amplitude of blistering shall take into account the resistance of the anchoring system.
1.6.4.3 DOORS AND SHUTTERS
Doors and shutters shall be designed according to an appropriate code or validated experimental
method, chosen and approved by the Project.
1.6.5 MATERIAL
The steel used for pool and tank liner plates shall be austenitic stainless steel. For the design
calculations, the characteristic values of the steel shall comply with those given in 2.9.
Lc
δc
Liner
Anchoring
System
Fimp or Uimp
Figure 1.6.5-1 Experimental approach to determine δC (principle)
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 147 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Lc/2
L/2
Figure 1.6.5-2 Blistering of the liner
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 148 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.7.1 MATERIALS
1.7.1.1 CONCRETE
Unless a more accurate value is given, the characteristic value of concrete compressive strength for
calculating the anchorages of column footings is assumed to be:
Equation 1.7.1-1
fck = 30 MPa
1.7.1.2 STEEL
For hot rolled products, the permitted steel grades are S235, S275 and S355 according to EN 10025.
The use of higher elasticity limit steels shall be submitted to the Project approval.
For hollow sections, the permitted grades are those defined by EN 10210 and EN 10219.
The minimum thicknesses to be used for open cross section profiles are:
− Structures inside buildings 4 mm;
− Structures outside buildings 5 mm.
For hollow sections, these thicknesses may be reduced to

− Structures inside buildings 3 mm;
− Structures outside buildings 4 mm.
1.7.2.1 GENERAL PRINCIPLES
The stability of steel framework cannot be ensured, even partially, by:
− Component elements of cladding or panelling;
− Component elements of metallic decks (gratings, tear-drop floor plates). These elements only
resist vertical loads;
− Secondary masonry structures (partition walls, blockwork walls).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 149 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.7.2.2 SEISMIC DESIGN
The seismic design of the steel structural elements shall comply with EN 1993 and not EN 1998. In
seismic calculations, behaviour factors will not be used; q = 1 shall be used in the calculations. This
principle results in large safety margins against seismic events.
Despite this, the structure shall be designed to have dissipative behaviour by choosing adequate
design options.
For example:
− The structure is designed so that dissipation of energy occurs in span sections of elements
(bars) rather than in the vicinity of connected joints,
− The ductility of materials used in the structure shall be compatible with its dissipative
behaviour.
The section elements should be of class 1 or 2 minimum. Secondary elements can be of class 3.
Class 4 is not permitted for any element.
The global analysis shall be an elastic analysis.
1.7.2.3 BUILT-UP GIRDERS
The welded connections between the flanges and the web of “I shapes” have to be designed and
calculated with symmetric and continuous welds.
1.7.2.4 LATTICE GIRDERS
The lacings shall be set symmetrically on both sides of the medium plane of the beam.
The slenderness of the elements in compression shall not exceed 200.
In cases of double angles acting together, the angles shall be connected by battenings with a spacing
of 50 times the minimum radius of gyration of the isolated angle; in all cases the local buckling of the
angles should be taken into account. At least 2 of these connecting points shall be disposed along the
element and sliding is not permitted.
1.7.2.5 CONNECTIONS
The followings are not permitted:

− Semi-rigid connections;
− The design of single-bolt connections;
− The use of intermittent fillet welds for structures exposed to weather conditions.
1.7.2.6 CRANE RUNWAYS
The crane runways shall be designed on the basis of simply supported beams.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 150 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
At the supports, the simply supported design is achieved either by:

− a thick vertical endplate (end stiffener) extended downwards under the bottom flange of the
main beam;
− using a bearing hinge.
The welded connection between the upper flange and the web shall be a full penetrated butt weld with
a double bevel preparation (K).
Intermittent fillet welds are not permitted.
1.7.2.7 ANCHORING
The shear force at the bottom of columns shall be transmitted to the concrete using a bar shear
connector.
Steel shims between the top of the concrete and the bottom of the base plate, arranged to
compensate for differences in level, shall not exceed an overall depth of 30 mm.
Chemical fixings are not permitted.
1.7.3 ADMISSIBLE DEFLECTIONS
1.7.3.1 DEFLECTION OF BEAMS EXCEPT CRANE RUNWAYS
1.7.3.1.1 Under vertical loads
The deflections are limited to the following values:
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 151 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Table 1.7.3-1
Part of structure spanning L wmax w2
Roof elements (1)(2) L / 200 L / 250
Floor elements (3)(4) L / 250 L / 300
Cladding rails supporting glazed parts – vertical deflection L / 500
w0 is the precamber of the unloaded structural member,

w1 is deflection under permanent loads,
w2 is variation of the deflection due to variable loads and long term variation of the permanent loads,
wmax = w1 + w2 - w0
(1). The roof elements may be: purlins, main lattice girders, secondary truss beams, rafters, ridge
beams, or eaves beams.
(2). The snow load and the maintenance load are not considered to be compatible.
(3). The vertical deflection is also limited to L / 500 under moving loads (e.g.: forklifts).
(4). If a floor is supporting special process equipment, more severe criteria for deflection may be
required, to ensure the compatibility of such deflections with normal service conditions.
1.7.3.1.2 Under horizontal loads
Table 1.7.3-2
Elements of walls spanning L δ2

th
Rails for metallic cladding Max (1/150 ; 2 cm max)
Cladding rails supporting glazed parts – horizontal deflection
for current walls (metallic cladding + glazed strip over concrete breast L / 300
wall)
Columns supporting cladding L / 200
Main roof bracing Max (L / 500 ; 5 cm)
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 152 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.7.3.2 DEFORMATIONS OF CRANE RUNWAYS
1.7.3.2.1 Under vertical loads
The values of δz given in EN 1993-6, 7.3., (1), table 7.2 are replaced by the following:
Equation 1.7.3-1
δz ≤ L / 1000 or 15 mm for the polar crane of the Reactor Building;
δz ≤ L / 600 in other cases.
1.7.3.2.2 Under horizontal loads
The value of δ y given in EN 1993-6, 7.3., (1), table 7.1 is kept, then:
Equation 1.7.3-2
δy≤ L / 600.
1.7.3.3 HORIZONTAL DEFORMATION OF COLUMNS, STABILITY DEVICES AND FRAMES
The horizontal deformations are limited to the following values:
Table 1.7.3-3
Maximal permissible
Element
deflection
Combinations including wind effect
Portal frame without crane H/150
Single level Building without crane H/250
Single level buildings with cranes ; at the top level of the rail H/200
Combinations not including wind effect
Portal frame without crane H/150
Single level Building without crane H/250
Single level buildings with cranes ; at the top level of the rail H/400
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 153 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.8 INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS BETWEEN ANCHORS AND

CONCRETE
1.8.1 DETERMINING LOADS IN THE ANCHORAGES
The torque applied to the fixture generates tensile NSd and shear VSd stresses in the anchor rods
(connectors).
These stresses are determined while taking the fact that this torque is applied at a point off-centre
relative to the centre of gravity of the fixture (medium/fixture installation tolerance).
The stresses in the anchorages are calculated assuming an (elastic) planar distribution of the
deformations while checking that:
− the anchor plate is sufficiently rigid and does not distort,
− the stiffness of all the anchorages (connectors) is identical.
1.8.2 PARTIAL FACTORS FOR MATERIALS
The partial factors given by the following table shall be used:
Table 1.8.2-1 Partial factors
ULS ULS
Type of limit state
Persistent and transient Accidental
Steel γMs 1.40 1.25
Concrete (compression) γMc 1.50 1.20
1.8.3 VERIFICATION OF STRESSES IN ANCHORAGES
The formulae used to check the clauses given in 1.8.4 and 1.8.5 depend on the type of anchorage
(connector, simple rod, stud, etc.), its depth and spacing, the distance to a free edge and, where
applicable, the state of stress of the medium (concrete in tension or otherwise).
These checks are carried out in accordance with the Project of CEB Design Guide “Design of
fastenings in concrete” or any other validated method; reference should be made to EN 1992 and EN
1993 for the cases not covered by the CEB Design Guide.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 154 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.8.4 RESISTANCE TO TENSILE LOAD
For each limit state, the required verifications for tension load in a single anchor or an anchor group
are:
− steel failure (see 1.8.4.1),
− pull-out (pull-through) failure (see 1.8.4.2),
− concrete cone failure (see 1.8.4.3),
− local blow-out failure (see 1.8.4.4).
For each verification, the following condition shall be respected:
Equation 1.8.4-1
N sd
≤1
N Rd
Where Nsd is the tensile load applied on the most loaded bolt.
1.8.4.1 STEEL FAILURE
CEB Design Guide, 15.1.2.2 applies with the partial factor γMs given in Table 1.8.2-1.
Shear resistance of the washer shall be verified according to CEB Design Guide.
1.8.4.2 PULL-OUT FAILURE
For headed anchors, CEB Design Guide, 15.1.2.3 applies.
NOTE For Serviceability Limit State verification for slabs or walls with edges or pedestal, the
admissible concrete pressure under the anchor head padm shall be equal to 3.fck where fck is the
compressive strength of concrete.
For simple rod, the available bond stress is given by the following formula:
Equation 1.8.4-2
Nbd = π.Φ.l.fbd
Where:
− Φ is the diameter of the anchorage,
− l is the length of the anchorage,
− fbd is the design value of the bond strength, calculated as follows:
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 155 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Equation 1.8.4-3
0.36 ⋅ ( f ck ) 2
1
f bd = , for mild steels,

γc
Equation 1.8.4-4
2.25 ⋅ ( f ctk 0.05 ) 2

1
f bd = , for high-bond steels, as given in EN 1992-1-1, 8.4.2 and 3.1.6,

γc
Where:
− fck is the characteristic compressive strength of the concrete,
− fctk,0.05 is the 5% percentile of the tensile strength,
− γc is the partial factor given in EN 1992-1-1, 2.4.2.
1.8.4.3 CONCRETE CONE FAILURE
CEB Design Guide, 15.1.2.4 applies and is completed by an additional verification on the diameter
pressure as defined by EN 1994-1-1, 6.6.3.1.
Locally, the effects of concrete edges, connector spacing, group behaviour, spalling risk and cracking
are taken into account by multiplying the considered efforts by coefficients, as described in the CEB
Design Guide.
1.8.4.4 LOCAL BLOW-OUT FAILURE
CEB Design Guide, 15.1.2.6 applies.
1.8.4.5 ADDITIONAL CRITERIA
The anchorage shall be long enough to transmit efforts to the principal reinforcement.
It may therefore be necessary to implement additional reinforcement according to EN 1992-1-1.
1.8.5 RESISTANCE TO SHEAR LOAD
For each limit state, the required verifications for tension load in a single anchor or in an anchor group
are:
− steel failure (see 1.8.5.1),
− concrete cone failure (see 1.8.5.2),
− concrete edge failure (see 1.8.5.3).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 156 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
For each verification, the following condition shall be respected:
Equation 1.8.5-1
Vsd
≤1
VRd
Where: Vsd is the shear load on the most loaded bolt.
1.8.5.1 STEEL FAILURE
CEB Design Guide, 15.1.3.2 and 15.1.3.3 apply for shear loads with or without lever arm.
1.8.5.2 CONCRETE CONE FAILURE
CEB Design Guide, 15.1.3.4 applies.
1.8.5.3 CONCRETE EDGE FAILURE
CEB Design Guide, 15.1.5 applies.
1.8.5.4 ADDITIONAL CRITERIA
The shear resistance of headed anchors with diameter φheaded anchor less than 22 mm shall be
calculated according to EN 1994-1-1, 6.6.3.1, Formula (6.19).
For diameters of headed anchors between 22 mm and 70 mm, the resistance shall be evaluated by
the same formula but shall be multiplied by a minor coefficient.
This coefficient is calculated with the following linear evolution:
Equation 1.8.5-2
Minor coefficient = - φheaded anchor/160 + 91/80
This is equal to:
− 1.0 for a 22 mm diameter, and,
− 0.7 for a 70 mm diameter.
1.8.6 RESISTANCE TO COMBINED TENSION AND SHEAR LOAD
According to CEB Design Guide, 15.1.4 for combined tension and shear loads the following condition
shall be satisfied:
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 157 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Equation 1.8.6-1
α α
 N sd  V 
  +  sd  ≤ 1
 N Rd   V Rd 
With:
− α = 2, if NRd and VRd are governed by steel failure,
− α = 3/2, for all other failure modes.
1.8.7 CHECKING WELDS IN THE CASE OF ANCHORAGES WELDED TO THE PLATE
The stresses in welds between anchorage rods (connectors) and plates shall be checked in
accordance with EN 1993-1-8.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 158 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.9 GENERAL RULES FOR GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN
1.9.1 GEOLOGICAL, GEOTECHNICAL, AND HYDRO-GEOLOGICAL MODELS
1.9.1.1 SCOPE AND DEFINITION
The geological model in the broad sense shall gather information relative to:
− Geological context (stratigraphical and structural), both on regional and local scales;
− Descriptions of the extent and nature of subsurface materials;
− Characterizations of soil and rock (in terms of mechanical properties);
− Information on groundwater (hydrological units, groundwater regime, hydrodynamic

characteristics, physical chemistry of the water).
This information is gathered in order to:
1- Consider all potential geotechnical issues: seismic level and faulting, bearing capacity,
settlements, liquefaction potential, slope stability, underground cavities, sink holes, soluble rocks,
groundwater flood, etc.
2- Supply and explain the geotechnical data necessary for the design to the Project manager and
to the engineers participating in the design, construction, and even operation of the structure.
The site investigation report (factual report) shall follow the recommendations given in EN 1997-1, 3.4.
1.9.1.2 DESIGN STUDY PHASES
Before design studies commence, it is assumed that the site selection process has verified that the
site is not prone to liquefaction (see 2.1.1.5.), major slope instability, or collapse or uplift of site
surface, or, if this is not the case, that reliable engineering solutions can solve the problem.
Once the site has been chosen, the design study phases are as given below according to EN 1997-2.
1- Design studies. This phase is associated to main site investigations (these may be split into
two or more separated steps if necessary), based on geotechnical data collected during site selection.
Ground investigations should be detailed enough to allow the development of a reliable geological,
geotechnical, and hydro-geological model, i.e:
− Confirm the main geological, hydro-geological and geotechnical issues, and verify that they
cannot affect the safety of the future nuclear installation;
− Assess the suitable positioning of the site-related structures (optimisation of the layout);
− Consider the possible foundation design (bearing capacity, settlement performances) and
provide necessary data to the designers;
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 159 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
− Assess the excavation means and stability (dewatering, stability of slopes, excavation
techniques, possibilities for reuse of materials);
− Assess the seismic soil-structure interaction (dynamic parameters);
− Assess the hydro-geological conditions;
− Compute settlements: see 1.9.1.3.
The geotechnical design report shall follow the recommendations given in EN 1997-1, 2.8.
2- The analysis of the first site investigation may lead to an additional investigation campaign to
gather more information regarding certain geotechnical parameters, geological features, or new
issues. The latter may refer especially to the ground under site-specific buildings, whose layout is
supposed to be definitive at this stage. For instance, this additional site investigation will:
− confirm fault occurrences;
− repeat defective tests of the first campaign;
− determine the deformability modulus in different directions in an anisotropic formation, heave

or creep;
− assess design of new buildings not taken into account in the first site investigation.
Accuracy of the geological, geotechnical and hydro-geological models increases at each stage of the
study, taking into account the data from the different geotechnical investigations and precisions on the
layout and embedment of the buildings.
3- Work execution studies associated to controlling and monitoring (see 2.1.5): if necessary, a
complementary investigation campaign shall be undertaken.
1.9.1.3 CALCULATION OF SETTLEMENTS
Both total and differential settlements shall be calculated taking into account:
− Stratigraphy with its spatial variations, dip and thickness variation of soil layers, heterogeneity;
− Soil characteristics in relation with stress path and stress level;
− Loads on and around the foundation;
− Loading history including possible preloading;
− Flexibility of the foundation;
− A soil thickness at least equal to 2 B, where B is the smallest dimension of the building. In the
case of presence of soft soils below a depth of 2 B, the calculated settlement value shall be
considered to be under-estimated. For the Nuclear Island, the width of the common raft shall
be used for B.
Short-term and long-term settlements, including creep, shall be calculated.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 160 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Calculated settlements and differential settlements shall be used to:
− check the GEO Serviceability limit state, see 1.9.2.4.2;
− calculate the consequences of settlements on STR ultimate limit state, see 1.9.2.3.1, and on
structural serviceability limit state, see 1.9.2.3.2.
Evaluation of settlements is closely related to the method used, estimated geotechnical parameters,
and estimated loads (See EN 1997-1, 6.6.1).
1.9.2 ACTIONS AND COMBINATIONS FOR GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN
1.9.2.1 DEFINITION OF ACTIONS
Permanent
− Ground reaction on foundations resulting from permanent loads on the structure;
− Lateral earth pressure on embedded walls resulting from gravity loads in soil and permanent
actions on soil near embedded walls;
− Groundwater table.
Variable
− Variation of ground reaction on foundations due to variable actions;
− Variation of lateral earth pressure on embedded walls due to variable actions on soil and
adjacent structures;
− Variation of groundwater table.
Accidental
− Dynamic ground reaction on foundations due to accidental actions;
− Dynamic lateral earth pressure due to earthquake action on soil or on structures close to
embedded walls;
− Accidental variation of groundwater table.
1.9.2.2 CHARACTERISTIC VALUES
1.9.2.2.1 Permanent ground reaction
Ground reaction distribution underneath foundations directly influences forces within foundations and
structures.
Ground reaction distribution is dependent upon:
− geotechnical model, stratigraphy, soil behaviour and characteristics;
− the stiffness of the building.

ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 161 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
As far as Nuclear Island buildings are concerned ground reactions are taken into account through
global analyses where building structure and soil models are used for the three types of actions:
permanent, variable and accidental.
For quasi-permanent loads, equivalent soil models may be used for the following purposes:
− evaluation of forces in raft foundations which are mainly influenced by soil characteristics
directly beneath foundation level down to a depth in relation with the distance between load-
carrying walls and columns at foundation level;
− evaluation of the consequences of long-term settlements on the whole structure which are
influenced by soil characteristics down to a depth at least equal to 2-B, where B is the smallest
dimension of the building (see 1.9.1.2).
These two evaluations may require different types of equivalent soil models.
1.9.2.2.2 Permanent lateral earth pressure
Lateral earth pressure on embedded walls of the Nuclear Island shall be determined for at rest
conditions.
The pressure shall be calculated individually for each site according to EN 1997.
The following standard values are assumed for preliminary design analysis when more precise data
are unavailable:
− earth pressure coefficient at rest Ko = (1-sinφ);
−
-3
wet soil density (above water table) 20 kN.m ;
−
-3
saturated soil density 22 kN.m .
1.9.2.2.3 Permanent groundwater pressure
Permanent groundwater pressure is defined in 1.3.3.1.
If a safety-classified permanent dewatering system is designed for a part or the whole site, it shall be
given as data and reflected in the combinations.
-3
Except in specific situations, water density is taken as 10 kN.m .
1.9.2.2.4 Variable ground reaction
Ground reaction resulting from variable actions is taken into account through an equivalent soil model
which may be common to the permanent load model.
1.9.2.2.5 Variable lateral earth pressure
For embedded basements, variable lateral earth pressure is calculated for the at rest condition
following the rules used for permanent lateral earth pressure.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 162 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.9.2.2.6 Variable groundwater pressure
Variations of water pressure to take into account are defined in 1.3.3.2 by two levels: Qk,wl,EF and
Qk,wl,EH.
1.9.2.2.7 Accidental ground reaction
Ground reaction resulting from accidental actions, earthquake, airplane crash, and external explosion,
shall be accounted for through an equivalent model representing dynamic soil-structure interaction.
1.9.2.2.8 Accidental lateral earth pressure on infrastructures of building
Dynamic earth pressure resulting from earthquake is evaluated following APPENDIX 1.A, 1.A.8 of
ETC-C.
If necessary, dynamic earth pressure effects may be analysed using a global analysis including soils
and structures.
1.9.2.2.9 Accidental water pressure
Accidental water level is the maximum flooding water level considered for the site, and that shall be
defined by the Project.
Water level acting simultaneously with design earthquake is Qk,wl,EF, the frequent value of groundwater
table level (see Table 1.3.3-2).
1.9.2.3 COMBINATIONS OF ACTIONS
1.9.2.3.1 Ultimate limit states
Limit states UPL, STR and GEO are defined in EN 1997-1, 2.4.7.1.
UPL
See combination 5a for EQU given in Table 1.3.3-2.
STR/GEO
The limit states shall be based on EN 1997 with approach 2 which does not require combinations
other than those given in Table 1.3.3-2.
Lateral earth pressure (permanent and variable) shall be added as an action.
The different types of ground reaction model shall be accounted for in STR combinations.
GEO ultimate limit state shall consider the following combinations, covering normal and accidental
situations:
1c, 2b, 5b, 11b, 12b, 13b, 14b, 15b

ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 163 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.9.2.3.2 Serviceability limit states
The relevant combination for settlement evaluation is the quasi-permanent combination where
permanent loads are combined with a partial coefficient equal to 1 and variable loads are combined
with their quasi-permanent value.
Combination 2d given in Table 1.3.3-2 is the relevant combination.
1.9.2.4 CHECKING OF GEO LIMIT STATES
1.9.2.4.1 Fundamental Ultimate Limit State
Bearing capacity shall be checked considering the load resistance under each monolithic foundation.
The eccentricity and orientation of the resultant load shall be considered.
The analytical approach given in Appendix D of EN 1997-1 may be used.
The semi-empirical method given in Appendix E of EN 1997-1 may also be used with the introduction
of the eccentricity and orientation of the resultant load.
In approach 2 the partial coefficient for resistance γR = 1.4 is used for the fundamental limit state.
1.9.2.4.2 Serviceability limit state
Settlements
Admissible total and differential settlements of foundations as well as admissible differential settlement
between adjacent foundations shall be defined in order to fulfil requirements relative to:
− vertical tolerances for buildings and equipment;
− dimensional tolerances between different buildings or structural blocks of a building (joints,

connections, etc).
Settlements calculated according to 1.9.1.2 shall be compared to admissible settlements.
Total and differential settlements under quasi-permanent loads shall be estimated.
The characteristic value of geotechnical data shall be used with γM=1.
Contact stress
As a general rule, no checking is required for local contact stresses.
In specific situations where local contact stress may be a concern, local soil equilibrium may be
analysed using stress distribution at the interface with a volume of soil.
1.9.2.4.3 Accidental Ultimate Limit State
For earthquake accidental ultimate limit state, bearing capacity shall be checked following Appendix F
of EN 1998-5. If the data required for this approach are not available, Appendix E of EN 1997 may be
used with the introduction of the eccentricity and orientation of the resultant load.
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 164 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
For earthquake loading, checking of bearing capacity shall apply a partial coefficient to resistance, γRd,
as given in Table 1.9.2-1.
Table 1.9.2-1
Dense to medium Loose and dry Saturated Non sensitive Sensitive

dense Sand Sand loose Sand Clay Clay
1 1.15 1.5 1 1.15
No checking of contact stress is required.
Post-seismic settlements shall be evaluated. Since there is no standardized method to assess the
magnitude of seismically induced settlement, the result should be carefully reviewed.
1.9.2.5 NECESSARY GEOTECHNICAL PARAMETERS
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 165 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Table 1.9.2-2
STRUCTURES LIMIT STATES GEOTECHNICAL PARAMETERS REQUIRED
Densities
Shallow ULS GEO: Bearing Shear strength (C, phi) or

foundations capacity Limit pressure (pressure meter test) or
Cone resistance
Shallow ULS EQU: sliding on Maximum shear strength (C, delta) and (C, Phi), post
foundations the base peak shear strength
Shallow ULS UPL: Uplift or tilt Groundwater level, shear strength (C, delta) and (C,Phi)
foundations of structure
Shallow ULS: seismic motion

foundations & & Dynamic modulus and Poisson ratio, based on waves
velocity measurements, density
Buried galleries SLS: vibrations
Poisson ratio, densities, and:
In grained soils and rock: static modulus ;

Shallow
In fine soils: overconsolidating ratio (OCR), compressibility
foundations & SLS: Settlements coefficients in normally and overconsolidated domain (Cc1
Buried galleries and Cc2), consolidating coefficient (Cv), thickness of fine
layer ;
Groundwater level
Densities
Shallow SLS STR: rupture of Shear strength (C, phi)
foundations & buried structures due
to earth pressure Earth pressure coefficient at rest K0
Buried galleries
Groundwater levels
Depending on the use, Table 1.9.2-2 shall be completed with all appropriate parameters.
See 0 for guidance on acquiring the geotechnical parameters listed above.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 166 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
APPENDIX 1.A SEISMIC ANALYSIS
1.A.1 FOREWORD
The input motion acts on the surfaces in contact with the ground.
This appendix deals with two cases: generic design and site specific design, as defined below:
− Generic design: this term refers to the entirety of the analysis and calculation performed for a
group of power plants, with an environment which can be described by an envelope range of
values. From the seismic studies, these values represent soil conditions and input motion. In
this case, soils are characterized by a homogeneous equivalent modulus and an associated
damping value and input motions which are characterized by spectra whose shape depends
on soil conditions. These soil dependence conditions may be extracted from validated
publications such as EUR (European Utility Requirements).
− Site specific design: this term refers to the analysis and calculation performed for a particular
power plant. In this case, the soil is represented in a more realistic way, which can be “best
estimated”, using the rules given in this appendix. Input motion is also site specific.
This appendix does not apply to structures equipped with anti-seismic bearings.
1.A.2 INPUT MOTION
The ground motion is defined by one or several response spectra at the grade level. The input motion
shall be represented by either response spectra or artificial time histories based on a damping value of
5%. The earthquake excitations shall be represented by two horizontal and one vertical input motions
simultaneously.
The vertical motion may be considered as two-thirds of the horizontal motion at all frequencies and for
all damping levels and site conditions.
A set of accelerograms is considered representative of a design spectrum if the mean response

spectrum of these accelerograms is enveloping the design spectrum expressed for 5% damping and
plotted using logarithmic scales and interpolations. The comparison plotted for damping ratios different
from 5% may reveal local exceedance. This exceedance is acceptable if lower than 10%.
This mean response spectrum of accelerograms shall be calculated at enough frequencies, as mean
0.03N
of spectral accelerations, in order to ensure its envelope property: for this a 10 type frequency
quantization, with N as a varying integer between -33 and 50, is acceptable.
Accelerograms have to be carefully selected taking into account the seismic hazard expected for the
site, considering complementary parameters consistent with the ones of the strong motion data base
relevant for the site. The complementary parameters are the duration of the strong phase, speed and
maximum displacement of the soil, A/S ratio, Arias intensity, and CAV (Combination of the Absolute
Values of the speed). In this framework, consistency of these parameters with earthquake hazard is
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 167 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
researched in terms of magnitude and focal distance.
The minimum accelerograms number making a set is 3 for linear analysis; The set of time histories
shall be statistically independent. This condition is satisfied by having a correlation coefficient lower
than 0.3. Only one set of three histories may be used to describe seismic input in the three directions
of solicitations (horizontals and vertical) through permutation in direction of each history. Additional
provisions are given in 1.A.8.2 for non linear studies.
The spectra representing the input motion which must to be taken into account shall be given by a
dedicated document such as reference [1] (see 1.2.3).
1.A.3 REPRESENTATION OF SOIL EFFECTS
1.A.3.1 SOIL CONDITIONS
GENERIC DESIGN
When generic studies are performed, the Nuclear Island is assumed to be seated on a homogeneous
half space. In order to cover the generic design soil range, calculations are performed for different
modules within a wide range. The soil conditions recommended for the EPR are those presented in
EUR documents.
The homogeneous half space is represented for every soil condition by an elastic, homogeneous
isotropic material, defined by its mechanical characteristics:
− G = shear modulus;
− ν = Poisson's ratio;
− γ = specific weight;
− D = material damping.
The properties of the homogenous equivalent soil may be calculated for quite simple soil layered
geometry showing relatively continuous evolution of their geotechnical properties by applying a static
load to the foundation for each degree of freedom (DOF) and calculating the resulting deflections and
rotations. This usually leads to different equivalent soil property for each DOF. A layered soil
representation shall be used should those equivalent properties differ excessively.
Should a homogenous soil representation be acceptable, the design should consider:
− A reduction by a factor of two of the radiation damping. This accounts for the fact that a
homogenous soil representation will overestimate radiation damping;
− Overall soil damping taken as 5% (for soil material damping) plus half of the calculated
radiation damping.
SITE SPECIFIC DESIGN
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 168 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
The soil should be defined as horizontally layered with or without bedrock. Each layer has constant
properties.
The following properties for each soil layer of the average soil condition shall be available:
− G = shear modulus;
− ν = Poisson's ratio;
− γ = specific weight;
− D = material damping.
The thickness of each layer and the water table level shall also be available.
As far as possible, the degradation curves for the soil properties (G and D), which are strain
dependent, shall be assessed by laboratory and in situ tests, or by data obtained on similar materials.
The non-linear properties of the soil layers should be approximated by equivalent linear properties
consisting of the equivalent linear shear modulus and damping ratio for the soil which are compatible
with the induced strain amplitudes in the soil medium, using methodology as proposed by Seed and
Idriss.
Due to uncertainties in the definition of the soil properties of equivalent homogeneous soil as well as in
the definition of layers, a variation of the shear modulus related to the best estimated value (GAVE) is
required for each layer. The variation range is limited either by [GMIN = 2/3 GAVE and GMAX = 3/2 GAVE]
or by other values which remain to be justified. The same variation coefficient should be applied for all
layers. No variation is required for generic design studies.
Where it is deemed appropriate, homogeneous half space may also be assumed depending on site
specific information.
1.A.3.2 SSI EFFECTS
This section discusses SSI (Soil Structure Interaction) effects and those shall be considered if
significant adverse effects may occur.
The SSI analyses shall include models of the structures that adequately represent the mass and
stiffness effects of the structures: simplified structural models may be used provided that they
adequately represent the predominant frequencies, modes and participation factors of the more
detailed models.
1.A.3.2.1 Embedment effects
Embedment effects are in general beneficial and may be considered negligible.
Variation of amplitude and frequency content with depth may be considered for partially embedded
structures. The maximum ratio of the spectral amplitude at the foundation depth to the corresponding
design response spectra at finished grade in the free field shall not be less than 0.6 over the full range
of frequencies. Lower values of this ratio shall require justification.
When accounting for embedment effects, the potential for reduced lateral soil support shall be
examined. No connectivity shall be assumed between the structure and the lateral soil over the upper
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 169 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
half of the embedment depth or 6m, whichever is less, except if special provisions are taken to ensure
proper contact between soil and structure.
1.A.3.2.2 Additional Effects
The SSI analyses shall consider the following additional effects if significant adverse effects may
occur. However in the event of advantageous situations, the effects may also be accounted for:
Spatial variation of the free field motion
Vertical propagating shear and compression waves may be assumed provided that torsional effects
due to non-vertically propagating waves are considered.
It is acceptable to consider the effect of an incoherent input wave motion and scattering effects at the
foundation mat.
Three dimensional effects
The SSI analysis shall appropriately take into account radiation damping and irregular structure of the
layered soils.
Structure to structure interaction effects
Structure to structure interaction effects may be considered negligible for overall structural response
but shall be considered for local effects from one structure to another.
Unless otherwise justified, the SSI analyses shall be performed using either direct or substructure
methods (see following paragraphs).
1.A.3.3 DIRECT METHODS
The following aspects of the method shall be considered and justified:
− Compatibility of the input motion in the soil model with the site specific earthquakes given at
the finished grade in the free field (the motion applied at the boundaries shall be established
taking into account the soil properties, the type of waves propagating during the earthquake
and the type of boundary assumed);
− The extent of the model and the type of boundary conditions;
− The suitability of the element size under and adjacent to the foundation to represent all the
relevant wave lengths, the static stresses, and the model rocking (the soil elements shall be
fine enough to ensure frequency-transmitting characteristics up to a frequency of at least 25
Hz). For frequency domain analyses, the cut-off frequency shall be at least 25 Hz unless
otherwise justified. 2-D models may be used in place of 3-D models provided they are
justified;
− The time step or the frequency increments used for a SSI analysis in the time or the frequency
domain to ensure the accuracy of the solution.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 170 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.A.3.4 SUBSTRUCTURE METHODS
The use of finite element, finite difference, or integral equation formulations is acceptable for
calculating the impedance functions.
The following aspects of the method shall be considered and justified:
− The assumptions used to simplify the shape and the stiffness of the mat foundations for the
translational and rocking modes of excitation (mat foundations may be approximated by
equivalent rectangular or circular shapes whose dimensions are consistent with the stiffness
formulation associated with the relevant motion);
− The frequency dependence of the impedance functions;
− The modification of the input motion from the control motion in case of embedment;
− The coupling of the structure and soil, and in particular, the frequency dependence of the
impedances in the coupled model;
− The solution of the equation of motion (direct or modal integration or complex frequency
response) and the time steps or the frequency intervals used in the analysis.
1.A.3.5 VALUES OF DISPLACEMENTS
Relative displacements calculated at levels of possible interaction between structures shall be

provided.
Unless otherwise justified, these values shall be multiplied by a factor equal to 1.5 to take into account
the non-linearity in the soil and the structures due to seismic excitation.
1.A.4 MODELLING OF STRUCTURES AND SUBSTRUCTURES
1.A.4.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
In order to perform the dynamic analysis, the stiffness, mass and damping characteristics of the
structural systems shall be incorporated into the analytical models.
Unless otherwise justified, the dynamic analysis shall consider where appropriate:
− The effects of soil-structure interaction;
− The translational and rotational response of the structures and their foundations;
− The effect of torsion about a vertical axis due to the eccentricity between the centres of mass
and the centres of rigidity;
− The hydrodynamic effects of any significant fluid mass interacting with the structure.
In general, the models shall be three-dimensional and made of finite elements connected at nodes
having three or more degrees of freedom. Two-dimensional models may be used for completely
symmetrical structures (plane or axial symmetry). When there is negligible coupling between
responses in the two horizontal directions and the vertical direction, separate models may be used.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 171 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
The type of finite element used to model a structural system shall be justified with regard to the type of
response desired, and the theory on which the element is based.
The finite element model shall produce responses that are not significantly affected by further
refinement of the mesh.
The nodal degrees of freedom shall represent the significant structural modes. A reduced number of
dynamic degrees of freedom may be used, based on condensation of the stiffness matrix and
reduction of the mass matrix, provided that the principal structural response characteristics are
preserved.
If walls are represented as vertical and shear beam elements and floors as lumped masses then:
− The beam elements shall be located at the centre of rigidity of the structures which they
represent and shall have appropriate torsional and shear stiffness;
− Each floor mass shall be placed at the respective centre of mass and connected to the
corresponding centre of rigidity by a rigid link;
− The centre of mass and the centre of rigidity may be considered as coincident if the horizontal
distance between them is less than 5% of the smallest horizontal dimension of the floor.
1.A.4.2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES
The following guidance is given for the use of materials for steel, prestressed or reinforced concrete
structures. For other materials, or for composite construction, the values used shall be substantiated.
Reinforced masonry shall not be used for resistant elements in Seismic Category I Structures.
1.A.4.2.1 Damping
Damping values for structures subjected to the Design Earthquake shall be those given in Table 1.A-1,
unless otherwise justified. These values are applicable to all modes for structures and substructures
consisting of a single material.
Damping values for systems that include two or more substructures, each having different damping
characteristics (such as combined concrete and steel structures, or soil-structure systems), shall be
obtained as described in 1.A.5.3.
Damping values for other structures, such as cable trays, and materials including composite materials,
shall be justified.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 172 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Table 1.A-1 Relative damping values
Material type Damping value
Welded steel 4%
Bolted steel 7%
Reinforced concrete 7%
Prestressed concrete 5%
Moving liquids in tanks 0.5 %
1.A.4.2.2 Elastic coefficients (E,ν) and others requirements
The values of modules of elasticity and Poisson’s ratios to be used to determine the stiffness
properties of concrete and steel members are given below. These values complement the values of
material properties defined in sections 1.4 and 1.7 for seismic analysis.
These values are given for materials at or near ambient temperature.
1- Concrete
-3
For a normal density (2 500 Kg.m ) prestressed and/or reinforced concrete with a specified
compressive strength fck (the design characteristic cylinder strength, in MPa):
− The modulus of elasticity Ecm to be used in the dynamic analysis, according to EN 1992-1-1
shall be taken as:
Equation 1.A-1
 f +8
0 .3
E cm = 22 ⋅  ck  (GPa)
 10 
− Poisson's ratio shall be taken as:
ν = 0.2
2- Steel
For steelworks, the corresponding values shall be taken as:
− Es = 210 000 (MPa);
− ν = 0.3.
The modulus of elasticity of austenitic steel or of tendons shall be confirmed by test or by data
supplied by the manufacturer.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 173 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.A.4.3 MODELLING OF STIFFNESS
The modelling of the stiffness of reinforced concrete members shall use the properties given in EN
1992-1-1. Unless otherwise justified, reinforced concrete members are modelled as uncracked
sections (Poisson’s ratio is taken as 0.2).
Best estimate values shall be used to model the stiffness of infill panels and non structural elements
(reinforced concrete or reinforced masonry), taking into account cracking and the type of supports.
However, when cracking due to bending is expected, the bending inertia should be evaluated taking
into account the reinforcement ratio and the state of cracking in the relevant elements. Cracking due to
bending may be expected when the elements are slender and the bending mode can be excited in the
considered direction.
In the absence of more detailed analysis, the inertia of the cracked elements may be evaluated by
applying a factor to the homogeneous inertia. This factor shall be taken as:
− 0.35 for beams and slabs in bending;
− 0.70 for columns and concrete walls in bending perpendicular to their plane.
In the case where cracking is considered, Poisson’s ratio should be taken as 0.
1.A.4.4 MODELLING OF MASS
The inertial mass shall include all masses expected to be present at the time of the earthquake.
This mass shall include self-weight, stationary equipment, cable trays, piping, and the appropriate
value of the live loads: the latter shall represent the non-simultaneity of all operating loads applied to
the global structure for a given time (unless otherwise justified, the operating live load on floors is 20%
-2
of the characteristic static value of live loads and shall not be lower than 100 kg.m ).
The structural mass shall be lumped so that the total mass, as well as the location of the centre of
gravity, is preserved, both for the total structure and for any of its major components that responds in
the direction of motion.
1.A.4.5 MODELLING OF HYDRODYNAMIC EFFECTS
The effects of hydrodynamic mass and damping shall be considered in the analysis of structures and
tanks, for both horizontal and vertical components of motion.
Fluids in containers within a structure shall be modelled to represent both impulsive and convective
effects.
For containers with walls acting as a rigid body, the impulsive and sloshing masses and the sloshing
spring may be located at single heights in the model.
When the container walls do not respond as a rigid body, or when local stresses are of interest, the
masses and associated sloshing springs as well as the impulsive masses shall be distributed over the
height of the container wall.
The mechanical interaction between the fluid and the structure shall also be considered.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 174 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
The effects of the fluid mass in the vertical direction shall be included in the building model.
The effect of compressibility of the fluid shall be taken into account if appropriate.
1.A.4.6 DYNAMIC DECOUPLING CRITERIA
Major structures that are modelled with their foundation and supporting media are defined as primary
structures. Structures, systems and components supported by primary structures are defined as
substructures.
Unless otherwise justified coupled analysis of a primary structure and a substructure shall be carried
out when the effects of interaction are significant.
Unless otherwise justified, relatively flexible substructures which support safety equipment, such as
walls and floor slabs, shall be coupled with the main structural model in developing floor response
spectra at intermediate points.
Coupled analysis is not required if the mass of the secondary system is 1% or less of the supporting
mass of the primary system. Coupled analysis shall be carried out if the mass of the secondary system
is greater than 10% of the supporting mass of the primary system.
For intermediate mass ratios, coupled analysis shall be carried out when the ratio of the frequency of
the dominant modes of the substructure to the frequencies of the dominant modes of the supporting
primary structure is in the range of 0.8 to 1.25.
1.A.5 METHODS OF ANALYSIS
1.A.5.1 FREQUENCY DOMAIN METHOD
If a Frequency Domain analysis is performed, a sufficient number of frequency points shall be

calculated to ensure the necessary accuracy in interpolating the transfer functions.
1.A.5.2 DIRECT INTEGRATION METHOD
The direct integration of the equation of motion is an acceptable approach. Time steps less than 1/15
(Houbolt) or 1/10 (Newmark or Wilson) of the period of the highest mode of interest are acceptable
values. If a larger time step is used for direct integration of the equations of motion, a sufficiently small
time step value shall be used such that reducing it by a factor of two produces a change in the
response of less than 10%.
1.A.5.3 MODAL ANALYSIS
As an alternative to direct integration, modal methods are acceptable for dynamic analysis, provided
the criteria presented hereafter are met.
The techniques used for determining modes, shape and frequencies shall have appropriate checks
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 175 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
(such as orthogonality checks) to ensure accuracy.
A sufficient number of modes shall be investigated to ensure the participation of all significant modes
for the member under consideration.
In general, all modes having frequencies under 33 Hz (40 Hz for hard sites) shall be included in the
analysis.
Response associated with high frequency modes may be important in some cases. In order that a
sufficient number of modes are included in the analysis, the last frequency shall be determined such
that the cumulative participating masses of the modes for each direction of excitation exceed a given
fraction of the total mass of the structure or equipments under consideration. Although this fraction is
usually taken to be 90% for structures, other values may be used for equipment, if justified.
For structures with large masses and high stiffness, such as thick rafts or stiff infrastructure, it is
acceptable not to take 90% of total mass, but in this case these “rigid” masses shall be allocated to a
pseudo-mode, and calculated dynamic modes shall represent at least:
− 60 % of the total masses;
− 90 % of the sub-structure ( global structure minus masses corresponding to mass rigidly

connected to raft and raft itself or equivalent bloc).
This pseudo-mode shall be taken with an acceleration γp corresponding to the last calculated
frequency, except for situations where the last calculated frequency is before the highest acceleration
of the spectra: in this last case the frequency associated with γp will be the first frequency
corresponding to the highest acceleration.
The calculation for the equivalent static correction method, which accounts for the missing modal
mass of the unconsidered modes, can be performed using the formula below. The correction can be in
the form of either imposed displacements or imposed forces. It shall be assumed that the response of
these modes is pseudo-static and in phase.
Equation 1.A-2
 m

K ⋅U res = − M  r − ∑ p i ⋅ φ i  ⋅ γ P
 i =1 
Where:
K is the stiffness matrix;
Ures is the residual displacement;
M is the mass matrix;
r is the influence vector, displacement vector of the structural system when the support
undergoes a unit displacement in the direction of the earthquake motion;
Pi is the modal participation factor;
φi is the normalized mode shape matrix;
γp is the acceleration of last-calculated frequency (see definition in previous paragraphs).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 176 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
For modal combination purposes, the residual response should be considered as an additional mode
having the frequency defined just above.
Alternatively, it is acceptable to demonstrate that the approach adopted meets the objective that
modes above the last calculated frequency do not add more than 10 % to the response.
Modes with masses less than 0.5% of the total mass may be ignored for the global response
assessment, but their local effect shall be taken into account in further specific studies such as floor
design or equipment studies. Special attention shall be paid to identification of those neglected modes
in the overall process, even if global effects of these modes are taken into account in the pseudo-
mode.
1.A.5.4 MODAL DAMPING
For the site study and for structural systems that consist of substructures with the same damping
properties, modal damping values shall be taken to be equal to the damping values.
For structural systems that consist of substructures with different damping properties, either the
composite modal damping approach or an alternative justified technique (such as the modal synthesis
technique) shall be used to account for the element associated damping.
For each mode 'i', the following weighted sum shall be used, in which each subsystem damping is
weighted by its deformation energy.
The weighted sum is the following:
Equation 1.A-3
  E   E Ei E i struct
η i = r.  ∑  η i . ik   + η . i soil + η . struct 1
+ η struct 2 . 2
...
 k  k Ei  soil
E iT struct 1
E iT E iT
 T 
Where:
− r is the damping reduction factor which can take two values:
o 1 if the representation of the site is detailed enough (e.g. detailed layered site
representations);
o 0.5 if an equivalent homogenous soil representation is used.
−
ηi is the modal damping;
ηik
− is the geometric damping coefficient associated with the ‘k’ degree of freedom of the
global soil spring at the frequency of mode 'i';
− ηsoil, ηstruct1… are the material damping coefficients for the soil and the structures;
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 177 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
E ik
− is the fraction of the total strain energy associated with soil spring DOF 'k';
EiT
Eisoil Eistruct1
− , are the fractions of the total strain energy in the soil and in the structures.
EiT EiT
In addition, the resulting value of ηi is limited to 0.30.

Use of any other methods shall be justified.
1.A.5.5 LINEAR MODELLING VALIDATION
Tensile soil area percentage:
The tensile area of tensile springs between the structure and the supporting fixed points shall be less
than 30% in order to validate the linear model representing the soil-structure interface.
Nevertheless if the tensile area obtained with this linear approach is more than 30%, a non-linear time
history analysis, an energy-based approach, or other alternative justified approach can be used to
demonstrate that 70% of the total interface area remains in contact.
If one of these alternative methods is successful, the linear model is validated. If not, the model shall
be non-linear.
1.A.6 COMBINATION OF MODES, DIRECTIONS AND TIME HISTORY SETS
1.A.6.1 COMBINATION OF MODES
If a response spectrum analysis is used, modes shall be combined using a justified method. The
Complete Quadratic Combination (CQC) method may be adopted for modes below the cut-off
frequency.
If a modal time history analysis method is used, modes shall be combined by addition.
1.A.6.2 COMBINATION OF DIRECTIONS
The input motions in the X, Y and Z directions are regarded as independent. If they are analysed
separately, one of the following methods of combination shall be used:
− Quadratic combination / SRSS;
− Newmark combination / component factor method:
If RD is the design value of the response R,
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 178 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Equation 1.A-4
RD = Max(±RX ±0.4 RY ±0.4 RZ ; ±0.4 RX ±RY ±0.4 RZ ; ±0.4 RX ±0.4 RY ±RZ)
Where RX, RY, RZ are the values of R for input in the X, Y and Z directions.
If a modal time history analysis method is used, combination of directions shall be done by addition at
each time step.
1.A.6.3 COMBINATION OF TIME HISTORY SETS
For linear analysis, the three sets of artificial time histories shall be combined by taking at least the
mean values of the variable of interest.
For non-linear analysis, particular care needs to be taken regarding the variability of results as a
function of accelerograms. The scale to use for design D is then defined as a function of the number N
of accelerograms used that respect the condition defined in 1.A.2, of the mean M and the deviations
type S of the absolute values of the results, corresponding to a value of N equal to or above 5 for each
dimensional direction studied.
1.A.6.4 REPRESENTATION OF SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
Systems and components may be represented with their own stiffness and damping ratio in the global
model: in this case they have to be taken into account with the corresponding damping ratio given in
the table below:
Table 1.A-2 Value of relative damping for materials
Material Type Damping Value
Tank, liquid
0.5%
sloshing modes
Cable raceway 10%
HVAC duct 7%
1.A.7 FLOOR RESPONSE SPECTRA GENERATION
Floor response spectra shall be calculated either with a time history method or with a transfer function
method. If any other method is used, justifications shall be provided.
To account for modelling and parameter uncertainties, spectra shall be broadened. The minimum
broadening shall be ±15% at each frequency in the amplified response region for the case of average
soil shear modulus (GAVE). In some cases the spectral broadening from variation of soil shear
modulus, i.e. GMAX & GMIN, will be the governing broadening. Therefore, the final spectra shall envelop
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 179 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
the upper and lower bounds.
The broadening process can be eliminated for generic design provided that all nine soil conditions in
EUR or equivalent are considered.
The location of the output position shall be selected such that the floor response spectra are able to
appropriately represent the dynamic behaviour of the structures. If necessary, individual response
spectra should be calculated at the anchorage positions for special equipments.
Floor response spectra shall be calculated at frequency intervals according to Table 1.A-3.
In addition, frequencies of the significant structural modes shall be included in the analysis. The
spectra shall be calculated for the 2, 4, 5, 7 and 15% damping values as a minimum.
Table 1.A-3 Frequency intervals for calculation of response spectra
Frequency range Increment
[Hz] [Hz]
0.2 – 3.0 0.10
3.0 – 3.6 0.15
3.6 – 5.0 0.20
5.0 – 8.0 0.25
8.0 – 15 0.50
15 – 18 1.00
18 – 22 2.00
22 – 40 3.00
1.A.8 OTHER METHODS OF ANALYSIS
1.A.8.1 STATIC METHODS
The following static methods may be used if justified:
− Linear static simplified methods for non-structural elements;
− Non-linear static methods for structural elements beyond the design domain or for structures
interacting with C1 structures: reduction factors on elastic seismic loads or push over
methods.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 180 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
The representativeness of the seismic monotonic input shall be justified.
1.A.8.2 NON-LINEAR TRANSIENT METHODS
Non-linear time history methods may be used for particular problems such as: seismic margin
assessment, basemat lift-off, shocks or seismic analysis of earth structures, or specific equipment.
Special attention shall be paid to the choice of time history accelerograms.
The number of accelerograms making up a set shall be adapted to the methodology of calculation and
to the treatment method of the variability of results.
The Student-Fischer law which allows calculation of an estimate of the mean of the population from
mean values and standard deviation determined over a sample, is an acceptable method.
1.A.9 OTHER PARTICULAR CIVIL STRUCTURES
This chapter covers the following structures:
− Retaining walls and substructures;
− Earthwork structures such as dykes or dams;
− Buried pipelines and galleries.
The seismic behaviour assessment of these structures under soil loading shall take into account the
following aspects:
− the bearing capacity of the foundation,
− the stability of the structure,
− the sliding of the foundation.
All the methods listed before may be used for justification. In general, best estimate evaluated
parameters are used for the soil. Sensitivity studies shall be provided in order to identify possible cliff-
edge effects.
Whenever types or constructions or effects are not covered either by the present text or by EN 1998,
recognised technical manuals or references may be used, subject to Project approval. In this respect,
the recommendations of EN 1998 may be proposed for the analysis of underground structures like
galleries and underground periphery walls (EN 1998-5, Annex E.8 for hydrodynamic pressure on the
outer face of the walls, and EN 1998-5, Annex E.9 for the force due to the earth pressure for rigid
structures).
1.A.10 USE OF SEISMIC ANALYSIS FOR DESIGN
Earthquake stresses or accelerations obtained in different elements of models implemented in the

methods given above, possibly completed by earthquake stresses or accelerations that are not
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 181 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
represented by models (e.g.: support reactions of equipment, local amplification, effects of raft
foundation or earth pressure), are used in combinations with stresses resulting from other effects that
are considered as described in 1.3.
For this purpose, the designer may use static calculations to determine the response of the structure
submitted to static loading equivalent to the earthquake load combined with other effects that occur at
the same time in order to confirm static balance under the forces caused by these combinations of
effects. They are used particularly to identify the force distribution inside structural elements and their
transfer to foundations and to soil foundations. The static loading can be considered representative of
the dynamic behaviour if the set of loads generated by this static approach leads to equivalent set of
loads obtained by the dynamic study. This set of loads in the general formulation includes axial and
shear forces, bending and torsion moments: this general breakdown may be reduce depending on the
considered structure if justified.
When earthquake load is represented by an equivalent distribution of forces, if basement uplift is

greater than 10% of the total surface, the tensile springs corresponding to tensile area have to be
deleted.
If the global model cannot represent local dynamic behaviour such as slender floors, a multi-scale
approach is acceptable, with refined local models being used for local element design.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 182 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
APPENDIX 1.B CREEP AND SHRINKAGE STRAINS AND CRACKS

OF CONCRETE
1.B.1 CREEP AND SHRINKAGE FOR CONTAINMENT
1.B.1.1 GENERAL RULES
This appendix should be used for calculating creep and shrinkage, including time history effects. The
following formulation comes from EN 1992-2, with some adaptations intended to take into account the
effect of bi-axial prestressing, which is particular to the containment.
The model distinguishes between strains occurring in sealed concrete and additional deformation due
to drying. Therefore, two expressions each for shrinkage and creep are given below. The time-
dependant strain components are:
− Autogenous shrinkage: εca;
− Drying shrinkage: εcd;
− Basic creep coefficient: φb;
− Drying creep coefficient: φd.
This distinction permits the adaptation of the effect of bi-axial prestressing forces in order to separate
isotropic and anisotropic deformations.
In these formulae, time t is in days and t0 is the age of concrete at the time of loading.
1.B.1.2 AUTOGENOUS SHRINKAGE
Autogenous shrinkage deformation is isotropic.
For t ≥ 28 days, the formula of EN 1992-2, B.103.1 applies:
Equation 1.B-1
 −
t

ε ca (t ) = ( f ck − 20) ⋅  2.8 − 1.1 ⋅ e 96  in [µm/m]

 
1.B.1.3 DRYING SHRINKAGE
Drying shrinkage deformation is isotropic. EN 1992-2, B.104.2, Formula (B.124) shall be applied:
Equation 1.B-2
K ( f ck ) ⋅ [72 ⋅ exp(− 0.046 ⋅ f ck ) + 75 − RH ] ⋅ (t − ts )

ε cd (t ) = β cd1
(t − ts ) + βcd 2 ⋅ h02
in [µm/m]
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 183 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Where
− RH is the relative humidity (see 1.B.1.5);
− if fck > 55 MPa: K(fck) = 30 – 0.21.fck ;
− if no experimental concrete data are available:
o βcd1 = 1.0 and;
o βcd2 = 0.007 for a concrete with silica-fume.
− if experimental concrete data are available, βcd1 and βcd2 shall be chosen to minimise the sum
of the square of differences between model estimation and experimental results.
1.B.1.4 CREEP
As defined in EN 1992-2, B.103.3, Formula (B.117), the total strain of creep is the sum of the parts of
basic creep and drying creep. The following additional hypotheses shall be taken into account:
− The basic creep is considered as anisotropic deformation.
− The basic creep deformation is considered as proportional to the instantaneous deformations

and σ(t0)/Ec is replaced by the instantaneous deformations (εix or εiy or εiz) under the effect of
the stresses σx, σy and σz taking into account the Poisson effect and the reduced modulus of
elasticity Ec (see 1.B.1.5).
− The drying creep deformation is isotropic and the expression σ(t0)/Ec is replaced by
σm(t0)/Ec=(σ1+σ2+σ3)/Ec, with σ1, σ2 and σ3 as the principal stresses.
Therefore, the formula (B117) is replaced by:
Equation 1.B-3
σ m (t 0 )
ε cc (t , t 0 ) = ε i , x ⋅ ϕ b (t , t 0 ) + ⋅ ϕ d (t , t 0 )
Ec
1.B.1.4.1 Basic creep
EN 1992-2, B.104.2, Formula (B.125) shall be applied:
Equation 1.B-4
t − t0
φb (t , t 0 ) = β bc1 ⋅ φb0 ⋅
[ t −t 0 + β bc ]
Where, for concrete with silica-fume:
3.6
φb0 =
( f ck (t 0 ) ⋅ β cc (t 0 )) 0.37
(adapted from EN 1992-2, formula B.119);
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 184 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
( t0 )
β bc = β bc 2 ⋅ e 2.8⋅β cc
(adapted from EN 1992-2, formula B.126).
With:
If no experimental concrete data are available:
βbc1 = 1.0 and;

βbc2 = 0.37 for a concrete with silica-fume.
If experimental concrete data are available, βbc1 and βbc2 shall be chosen to minimise the sum of the
square of differences between model estimation and experimental results.
1.B.1.4.2 Drying creep
EN 1992-2, B. 103.5, Formula (B.121) shall be applied:
Equation 1.B-5
ϕ d (t , t 0 ) = ϕ d 0 [ε cd (t ) − ε cd (t 0 )]
With:
ϕd0 = 1000 for concrete with silica-fume.

If experimental data are available, ϕd0 shall be chosen to minimise the sum of the square of
differences between model estimation and experimental results.
1.B.1.5 DESIGN DATA
For the estimation of creep deformations, in the absence of defined concrete properties, it is assumed
that the modulus of elasticity of the concrete Ec is 20% lower than the design modulus Ec = 0.8 Ecm.
For containment, the relative humidity is taken as RH = 20% (realistic ambient hygrometry). This value
should be increased according to the site conditions (with max RH = 80%).
The above formulations give the concrete deformation, without reinforcement. As stated in EN 1992-1-
1, 5.10.6, when estimating the shrinkage deformations and creep coefficients, the effect of the steel
cross-section, including tendons, reinforcing bars and liner should be taken into account.
In order to take into account the effect of the leaktight liner, the thickness h0 should be equal to 2 times
the real wall thickness.
1.B.2 CREEP AND SHRINKAGE FOR OTHER STRUCTURE
For concrete structures without silica-fume, this section supplements the formulae given in 1.B.1 to
calculate shrinkage deformations and creep coefficients.
For concrete structures with silica-fume, the formulae given in 1.B.1 apply with design data given in
1.B.2.4.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 185 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.B.2.1 AUTOGENOUS SHRINKAGE
See 1.B.1.2.
1.B.2.2 DRYING SHRINKAGE
EN 1992- 2, B.104.2, Formula (B.124) shall be applied (see 1.B.1.3) with:
RH is the relative humidity (according to 1.B.2.4);
Equation 1.B-6
 18 if f ck ≤ 55MPa
K ( f ck ) =  ;
30 − 0.21 ⋅ f ck if f ck > 55MPa
βcd1 = 1.0 and;
βcd2 = 0.021 for concrete without silica-fume
If experimental concrete data are available, βcd1 and βcd2 shall be chosen to minimise the sum of the
1.B.2.3 CREEP
As defined in 1.B.1.4, the total strain of creep is the sum of the parts of basic creep and drying creep.
1.B.2.3.1 Basic creep
EN 1992-2, B.104.2, Formula (B.125) shall be applied (see 1.B.1.4.1) with:
Equation 1.B-7
φ b 0 = 1 .4 for concrete without silica-fume (adapted from EN 1992-2, formula B.119);

(t 0 )
β bc = β bc 2 ⋅ e 3.1⋅β cc
for concrete without silica-fume (adapted from EN 1992-2, formula B.126).
− βbc1 = 1.0 and;
− βbc2 = 0.40 for a concrete without silica-fume.
If experimental concrete data are available, βbc1 and βbc2 shall be chosen to minimise the sum of the
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 186 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.B.2.3.2 Drying creep
EN 1992-2, B. 103.5, Formula (B.121) shall be applied (see 1.B.1.4.2) with:
ϕd0 = 3 200 for concrete without silica-fume.
If experimental concrete data are available, ϕd0 shall be chosen to minimise the sum of the square of
differences between model estimation and experimental results.
1.B.2.4 DESIGN DATA
For all structures designed with a minimum concrete class of C40, the relative humidity is taken as
RH=50%. This value of RH should be increased according to the site conditions (with max RH = 80%).
1.B.3 CRACKS OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES
To calculate cracks of concrete structures caused by shrinkage, the two following approaches are
acceptable:
− the ‘strain method’ for durability requirement, which leads to a verification of crack opening;
− the ‘force method’ for serviceability requirement.
These two methods and their justification are summarised in 1.B.3.1 and 1.B.3.2.
NOTE In compliance with EN 1992-1-1, 2.3.3, (3), for small-sized structures, these calculations
should be performed without taking into account the shrinkage.
1.B.3.1 STRAIN METHOD
− Calculation of imposed strains: these strains are effectively shrinkage strains (assessed with
EN 1992-2 as stated in 1.B.1 and 1.B.2).
− Calculation of differential strains between connected elements.
− Calculation of minimum reinforcement:
Equation 1.B-8
As ,min = Max( As ,min 1 ; As ,min 2 )

Where:
As,min1 defined in EN 1992-1-1, 7.3.2, Formula (7.1);
Ac ,eff ⋅ f ctm
As , min 2 =
(0.8 ⋅ f y − n ⋅ f ctm )
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 187 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
With:
ES
* n= ;
Ecm
* Ac,eff defined in EN 1992-1-1, 7.3.4.
Asmin2 is used in order to reach stabilized cracking at a load level corresponding to

characteristic combinations.
− Evaluation of distance between cracks (Sr,max) according to EN 1992-1-1, Formula (7.11) (with
k1 = 0.8; k2 = 0.5; k3 = 3.4; k4 = 0.425).
− Calculation of the fraction of the crack width due to imposed strains:
Equation 1.B-9
ws = Rax εr Sr,max
With Rax as defined in EN 1992-3 – Rax = 0.5
− Residual crack width assessment:
Equation 1.B-10
wres = wmax – ws
Where wmax values are chosen according to EN 1992-1-1, Table 7.1N.
− Allowable steel stress assessment σs: this assessment is performed using EN 1992-1-1,
Formula (7.9), considering that both stabilized and non-stabilized cracking may occur to retain
the most unfavourable value (the only unknown parameter in this formula is σs). In this
formula:
Equation 1.B-11
ES
αe =
E c ,eff
− Verification of steel section with the criteria σs found in the previous step.
NOTE 1 The strain method, used for durability requirements, is based on the criteria described in
EN 1992-1-1, 7.3.
NOTE 2 For buildings on independent smaller rafts, EN 1992-1-1, 2.3.3 (3) should apply and
therefore these methods could be omitted.
1.B.3.2 FORCE METHOD
− An acceptable crack opening shall be defined at the beginning of the method.
− Every elementary load case that may influence crack widths, such as thermal load and
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 188 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
shrinkage, is considered. To assess such loads, the effect of cracking on stiffness is

accounted for by applying a factor (0.6 or 0.5 according to 1.4.4.1) to the modulus. For
calculation purposes, these load cases are represented as thermal forces (∆T = εr/αc with αc =
-5
1. 10 according to 1.4.3.1);
− These loads are combined according to Table 1.3.3-2 for combinations with serviceability
requirements;
Checking of steel sections is performed directly with global or local models, considering an elastic
analysis. Material criteria (steel strain limits) are given by 1.4 depending on serviceability
requirements. According to 1.4.6, a difference is made for rafts and buried walls related to buildings
which contain radioactive fluid.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 189 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
APPENDIX 1.C ENGINEERING METHOD FOR MILITARY AIRCRAFT

IMPACT VERIFICATION AND DROPPED LOADS
1.C.1 SCOPE OF THE APPENDIX
This appendix describes an engineering method which may be used to prove the bearing capacity of
structural members under either aircraft impact or dropped loads. If this method is used, the
verifications shall be performed for the local area of the impact. The maximum displacements and
vibration amplitudes obtained by this method shall be confirmed or completed by appropriate
justifications.
1.C.2 CALCULATION METHOD AND MODELLING PRINCIPLES
This appendix provides a methodology for deriving a single-degree-of-freedom model for a military
aircraft impact or dropped loads. This single degree-of-freedom model (essentially consisting of three
lumped masses connected by three non-linear springs) may be used in a time-history analysis with the
applied load-history corresponding to the impact. This methodology is derived from the so-called CEB
model (CEB, 1988). It is based on experimental observations from ‘MEPPEN tests’ (reinforced
concrete slabs impacted by missiles).
This method can be applied for resistance calculations as an alternative to dynamic non-linear finite
elements calculations.
1.C.2.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
The model used is composed of two or three masses which are connected with elasto-plastic springs.
These masses represent respectively:
− the local mass of the punching cone under the effect of the impact;
− the local mass of a circular plane slab which is plasticised in bending;
− a third mass which represents the surrounding structure, if any.
The masses are connected with the following springs:
− one elasto-plastic spring represents the punching phenomenon with the contribution of the
stirrups which are elongated until rupture, and with the contribution of the bending
reinforcement which develops large deformations. The contribution of the tensile strength of
the concrete along the expected cone boundaries is neglected;
− one elasto-plastic spring represents the elasto-plastic bending of the circular slab;
− one elastic spring represents the surrounding structure, if any.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 190 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
F(t)
Ms
Md
Mc
Mc
Kc
Md
Kd
Ms
Ks
Figure 1.C-1 Masses and springs model of structures
This simplified model is loaded by the load-time history F(t) corresponding to the impact. A time-history
analysis is made in order to determine the maximal displacement.
The reduced structural damping is taken as equal to 2 % for the spring which represents the punching
phenomenon and equal to 7% for the spring which represents the bending of the slab and of the
structure.
1.C.2.2 GEOMETRY MODELLING
The punching cone geometry is defined by the radius of the impact area, by the shell thickness (h),
and by the angle of the punching cone (α). The angle of the punching cone is defined by the FIP
method for shear resistance according to the normal compression (Reineck, FIP 99). The angle is
defined by:
Equation 1.C-1
σ
cot α = 1.2 −
f ctm
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 191 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
The angle is taken as:
− 40° for a plate slab when no compression exists, a nd;
− less than 30° for a curved shell.
The circular slab geometry is defined by the radius of the slab and by the shell thickness.
For a plate structure the radius may be defined according to the location of the bearings.
For a shell structure, the following method may be used to define the slab radius. The slab radius is
determined by the comparison between two linear elastic static model calculations submitted to the
impact force. The first calculation is the modelling of the shell structure which gives the maximum
bending moment, the normal force and the displacement in the vicinity of the impact area. The second
calculation is a modelling of a circular plane slab, clamped at the periphery, in which the radius is
evaluated so that the maximum bending moment is the same as in the shell model.
The third mass and the third spring are to be used if it is necessary to represent the displacements
which are not totally represented by the equivalent circular slab.
1.C.2.3 VALIDITY DOMAIN OF THE METHODOLOGY
The methodology which is defined and the formulae which are developed assume that:
− the radius of the circular slab is limited to 10 times the slab thickness;
− the bending reinforcing bars are approximately isotropic for each side of the shell;
− the stirrups are perpendicular to the mean axis of the shell.
1.C.3 MODELLING OF MASSES
1.C.3.1 PUNCHING CONE MASS
The punching cone mass is given by:
Equation 1.C-2
 2 a ⋅ h 1  h 2 
M c = π ⋅ ρ ⋅ h ⋅ a + +   
 tan α 3  tan α  
With:
− a: the mean radius of the impact (taken as 1.5 m for the military impact);
− h: the impacted shell thickness;
− α: the angle of the punching cone;
− ρ: the specific concrete mass (taken as 2 500 kg/m ).

3
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 192 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
h
α
h
a+
tan α
Figure 1.C-2 Geometry of punching cone
1.C.3.2 CIRCULAR SLAB MASS
The lower natural frequency of a circular slab clamped at the periphery and with a uniform mass is:
Equation 1.C-3
10.22 D
fd =
2π ⋅ r 2 ρ ⋅h
The dynamic equivalent mass of the circular slab is evaluated with the assumption that the model of
the slab with the total mass Md + Mc has a frequency equal to fd. If Kd is the elastic stiffness of the slab,
the slab mass is given by:
Equation 1.C-4
Kd
Md = − Mc
(2π ⋅ f d )2
1.C.3.3 MASS OF THE SURROUNDING STRUCTURE
The mass of the surrounding structure is evaluated with the assumption that the model with the total
mass Ms + Md + Mc has a frequency equal to fs, with fs an estimation of the frequency of the whole
structure. If Ks is the elastic stiffness of the structure, the surrounding structure mass is given by:
Equation 1.C-5
Ks
Ms = − Mc − Md
(2π ⋅ f s )2
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 193 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.C.4 STIFFNESS MODELLING
1.C.4.1 PUNCHING CONE ELASTO-PLASTIC SPRING
The elasto-plastic spring represents the punching phenomenon with:
− the contribution of the stirrups which are elongated until rupture;
− the contribution of the bending reinforcement which develops large deformations.
If the contribution of the tensile strength of the concrete along the expected cone boundaries is taken
into account, the punching concrete shear resistance according to the method for shear resistance
(Reineck, 1999) is:
Equation 1.C-6
 h   h  cot α  
Rcys = 2π ⋅  a + ⋅ ⋅ Asw ⋅ f yk + 0.068 ⋅ z ⋅ 1 −  ⋅ f cd 
 2 ⋅ tan α   tan α  4  
Resistance
R cts
R cys
R ctl
ucys ucts uctl

displacement
Figure 1.C-3 Displacement-resistance diagram
1.C.4.1.1 Stiffness of the stirrups
The elastic strength Rcys of the stirrups is evaluated with the assumption that the tensile stress in the
stirrups is equal to the yield stress:
Equation 1.C-7
2π ⋅ h  h 
Rcys = ⋅a +  ⋅ Asw ⋅ f yk
tan α  2 ⋅ tan α 
Asw the cross section of the stirrups (stirrups area per unit surface on the mean axis).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 194 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
The maximum elastic displacement is evaluated with the assumption that the tensile stress is
uniformly applied over distance equal to h/3:
Equation 1.C-8
h ⋅ f yk
u cys =
3⋅ Es
The elastic stiffness of the stirrups assumes an elastic behaviour until the maximum displacement ucys
for the elastic strength Rcys:
Equation 1.C-9
R cys 6π  h 
K cys = = ⋅a +  ⋅ Asw ⋅ E s
u cys tan α  2 ⋅ tan α 
For loads higher than the elastic strength, the stirrups yield. The ultimate strength of the stirrups Rcts is
evaluated with the assumption that the tensile stress in the stirrups is equal to the ultimate strength ftk:
Equation 1.C-10
2π ⋅ h  h 
Rcts = ⋅a +  ⋅ Asw ⋅ f tk
tan α  2 ⋅ tan α 
The ultimate displacement ucts is evaluated with the assumption that the ultimate strain εtk is uniformly
applied over a distance equal to 0.9 h:
Equation 1.C-11
u cts = 0.9 ⋅ h ⋅ ε uk
For a load higher than the ultimate strength, the stirrups break and the stiffness is equal to zero.
1.C.4.1.2 Stiffness of bending reinforcement
The bending reinforcement yields in the cone area, and is deformed according to a paraboloid, acting
as a parabolic tensile membrane. Only the lower reinforcing bars are taken into account. The upper
reinforcing bars are assumed to be broken in the vicinity of the impact area.
2. l
Figure 1.C-4 Deformed bending reinforcement
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 195 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
If the displacement is u, the uniform strain in the reinforcing bars is given by:
Equation 1.C-12
2⋅u2
εm =
3⋅l 2
d
With l the radius of the lower part of the cone: l = a+
tan α
The strength of the reinforcing bars Rcl is evaluated with the assumption that the tensile stress in the
bars is equal to the yield stress fyk. The stress increase until the ultimate strength is not taken into
account:
Equation 1.C-13
Rcl = 4π ⋅ Al ⋅ f yk ⋅ u
With Al the section of the longitudinal reinforcing bars in one direction and on one side (area per unit
length).
The ultimate displacement uctl is evaluated according to the ultimate strain εuk:
Equation 1.C-14
3 ⋅ l 2 ⋅ ε uk
u ctl =
2
The ultimate strength of the reinforcing bars Rctl is given by:
Equation 1.C-15
Rcl = 4π ⋅ Al ⋅ f yk ⋅ u ctl
1.C.4.2 CIRCULAR SLAB ELASTO-PLASTIC SPRING
A bi-linear elasto-plastic diagram is assumed for the spring which represents the plasticised circular
plane slab.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 196 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Resistance
R dk
R dy
Kdy
udy udk displacement
Figure 1.C-5 Displacement-resistance diagram
According to the amount of reinforcement and the concrete cross-section, the elastic bending moment
Mdy and the cracked rigidity D (D = E Icracked) are evaluated taking into account the normal force (if any)
associated with the bending moment.
The ultimate plastic bending moment Mdk is evaluated following the design criteria concerning the
allowable strains in the concrete and in the reinforcement.
The elastic displacement of the circular slab clamped at the periphery and loaded by a unit force
concentrated on a circular area is given by:
Equation 1.C-16
1
K dy
=w=
a2
64π ⋅ D
[( )
⋅ 4 − 3 ⋅ γ 2 + 4 ⋅ γ 2 ⋅ ln γ ]
With:
− γ=a/r;
− ν: the Poisson' ratio is taken as equal to 0.
The elastic resistance Rdy of the slab is calculated according to the formula of a circular slab clamped
at the periphery and loaded by a unit force concentrated on a circular area:
Equation 1.C-17
16π ⋅ M dy
Rdy =
(1 + υ ) ⋅ [γ 2 − 4 ln γ ]
The maximum elastic displacement of the slab is given by:
Equation 1.C-18
u dy =
a 2 ⋅M dy
⋅
[(4 − 3 ⋅ γ ) + 4 ⋅ γ ⋅ ln γ]
2 2
4⋅D (1 + υ) ⋅ (γ − 4 ⋅ ln γ )
2
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 197 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
The plastic resistance Rdk of the slab is calculated according to the formula from the yield-line theory
of a circular slab clamped at the periphery and loaded by a unit force concentrated on a circular area:
Equation 1.C-19
Rdk =
(
2π ⋅ M dk+ + M dk− )
 2⋅a 
1 − 
 3⋅ r 
With:
− Mdk+ the ultimate bending moment which creates tension in the lower fibre;
− Mdk- the ultimate bending moment which creates tension in the upper fibre.
The maximum plastic displacement of the slab is evaluated according to the allowed rotation θlim of the
plastic hinge:
Equation 1.C-20
u dk = r ⋅ θ lim
1.C.4.3 ELASTIC SPRING OF THE SURROUNDING STRUCTURE
The elastic spring which represents the surrounding structure is defined according to the two
calculations which determine the radius of the circular slab. The displacement difference between the
two calculations for a unit force gives the elastic stiffness of the surrounding structure.
1.C.5 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR THE LOCAL VERIFICATION
For the evaluation of the ultimate bending moment, the calculations shall be performed with:
− the admissible strain in concrete: εcu = -0.005;
− the dynamic strength of concrete: σc = 1.2 fck;
− the admissible elongation in the steel: εs = εuk.
with εuk, the characteristic uniform elongation of reinforcement at maximum load.
For the punching verification, the stirrups may fail along the expected cone boundaries but the
longitudinal reinforcing bars shall remain active as a steel mesh. The admissible strain in the
longitudinal reinforcing bars is limited to εs.
The maximum curvature is determined according to the admissible strains in the concrete and in the
reinforcement and taking the normal force into account. The maximum rotation is assumed equal to
the maximum curvature multiplied by the effective depth of the cross-section (d).
An equivalent limitation for the admissible rotation is:
Equation 1.C-21
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 198 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
 
 ε cu ,lim 
θ lim = Min ε s ,lim ; 
 x 
 d 
with:
− d the effective depth of the cross-section of the wall, and;
− x the depth of the neutral axis.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 199 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
APPENDIX 1.D PENETRATIONS OF REINFORCED AND

PRESTRESSED CONCRETE SLABS BY HARD
MISSILES
1.D.1 NOTATION
M Missile mass [kg];
D Missile diameter [m];

-1
V Missile speed [m.s ];
H Slab thickness [m];
fck Characteristic concrete compressive strength [MPa];
ρ Concrete density (pseudo-parameter used to obtain dimensionless variables), taken as

-3
2 500 kg.m .
1.D.2 VALIDITY RANGE
The method defined in the Appendix applies only for the validity ranges given below:
Equation 1.D-1
D
0.5 < < 1.5 ;
H
M
0 .5 < < 5 .0 ;
ρ⋅H3
30 MPa ≤ f ck ≤ 45 MPa (see NOTE 1);
-3 -3
100 kg.m < “symmetrical reinforcement” < 250 kg.m (see NOTE 2);
-1
V > 20 m.s .
NOTE 1 Concretes whose 28-day characteristic strength is 25 MPa are accepted as having a
sufficient resistance at the time of a missile impact to be included in the validity range.
NOTE 2 ‘Symmetrical reinforcement’ means that, for a given steel layer, vertical and horizontal
reinforcement should have the same geometrical parameters (same bar diameter and same spacing).
Other layers in the same structure may have different parameters (see Figure 1.D-1).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 200 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Layer 2
Layer 1
Figure 1.D-1 Example of symmetrical reinforcement
The steel reinforcement density should be calculated taking into account the total steel mass of the
considered structural element (horizontal, vertical and transverse).
1.D.3 PENETRATION FORMULA
Equation 1.D-2
4 3
 ρ ⋅V 2  ρ⋅H2 ⋅D
  = 1.89 ⋅  
 f ck  just penetration  M 
1.D.4 APPLICATION CONDITIONS
1.D.4.1 FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE
− A down-rating coefficient of 12% shall be applied to the calculated speed for all cases in which
penetration of the reinforced concrete wall is unacceptable from the safety viewpoint:
Equation 1.D-3
Vacceptable = 0.88 Vjust penetration.
− The penetration formula shall be applied directly for all cases in which just penetration is
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 201 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
acceptable (special case of double-wall protection).
For the Cessna engine, structural protection shall be ensured by a 0.40 m thick concrete wall with a
-3
steel reinforcement ratio of 100 kg.m . In the case of a wall with thickness greater than 0.40 m, the
same total quantity of reinforcing bars as in a 0.40 m thick wall may be retained.
1.D.4.2 FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
The conditions defined above are also applicable to prestressed concrete:
− For a prestressed concrete structure without leaktight liner, the reinforced concrete formula is
directly applied;
− For a prestressed concrete structure with leaktight liner, an up-rating coefficient is considered,
taken as 10% of the just penetration speed calculated for reinforced concrete.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 202 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
APPENDIX 1.E GLOSSARY FOR THE ANALYSIS OF METAL PARTS

INVOLVED IN THE LEAKTIGHTNESS OF THE
CONTAINMENT
1.E.1 TYPE P DAMAGE
Type P damage is damage which may result from applying a continuous, gradually increasing, or
constant load to a structure.
The two types of Type P damage are as follows:
Excessive immediate strain
Immediate strain is considered to be excessive when total permanent strain starts to increase quickly.
Excessive strain is attained when the total permanent strain exceeds the strain that may occur with
purely elastic behaviour.
Immediate plastic instability
Failure due to immediate plastic instability appears when the variation of the shape of the structure is
not controlled by an increase in the elastic limit of the material.
The plastic instability concerned here is a global phenomenon. A distinction should be made with
ductile tearing which corresponds to a form of rapid failure and should be considered separately.
1.E.2 BUCKLING
Buckling is a phenomenon of instability of a structure under compression which tends to bend and to
deform in a direction perpendicular to the axis of compression.
In the elastic domain, and for a structure without defects, buckling occurs at a load level named
Euler’s critical load, noted CC.
Buckling is not strictly speaking a type of damage, but it generally results in damage, such as elasto-
plastic instability or excessive strain. Any geometrical imperfections due to acceptable manufacturing
tolerances are likely to accelerate and aggravate buckling.
Load-controlled buckling
Buckling is said to be load-controlled when it is the result of imposed loads which cannot be reduced
by the deformations associated with buckling.
The existence of other external (imposed displacements) or internal (temperatures) loadings, act
simultaneously with the imposed loads to modify the imposed loading leading to buckling.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 203 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Strain-controlled buckling
Buckling is said to be strain-controlled if it is not possible for the imposed loads acting on their own to
produce it. In all others cases, buckling is said to be load-controlled.
1.E.3 ELASTIC FOLLOW UP
Elastic follow up is due to the fact that significant local strain of the non-elastic part does not cause
sufficient distortion of the structure as a whole. Local inelastic zones may be the origin of
concentrations of strain likely to cause damage whilst most stresses are considered to be relievable.
1.E.4 STRESSES
Reference segment
Outside areas of discontinuity, the reference segment is superimposed on the segment perpendicular
to the median surface of the thickness of the wall. In areas of discontinuity, the reference segment is
the smallest segment linking the two sides of the wall. In all cases, the length of this segment shall be
designated as h (see Figure 1.E-1).
Along this segment, the components of the stress tensor are referred to as σij and the coordinate of
the abscissa of a point is referred to as x3 with its origin in the centre of this segment. Therefore, the
variation of x3 in the thickness of the steel component taken into consideration is [-h/2; +h/2].
Membrane stress
The diaphragm stress tensor components, (σij)m, are defined by the following equation (see Figure
1.E-1 below):
Equation 1.E-1
+h / 2
(σij )m = h1 ∫ σij (z)dz
−h / 2
Bending stress
The bending stress tensor components, (σij)b, are defined by the following equation (see Figure 1.E.1
below):
Equation 1.E-2
+h / 2
(σij )b = 12x3 3 ∫ σij (z)zdz
h −h / 2
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 204 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Linearised stress
The linearised stress tensor components, (σij)L, are defined by the following equation (see Figure
1.E-1):
Equation 1.E-3
(σij)L = (σij)m + (σij)b
Non linearised stress
The non linearised stress tensor, (σij)nL, are defined by the following equation (see Figure 1.E-1):
Equation 1.E-4
(σij)nL = σij - (σij)m - (σij)b
1.E.5 STRAIN
Membrane strain
The membrane strain tensor components, (εij)m, are defined by the following equation (see Figure
1.E-1):
Equation 1.E-5
+h / 2
(εij )m = h1 ∫ εij (z)dz
−h / 2
Bending strain
The bending strain tensor components, (εij)b, are defined by the following equation:
Equation 1.E-6
+h / 2
(εij )b = 12x3 3 ∫ εij (z)zdz
h −h / 2
1.E.6 CLASSIFICATION OF STRESSES OBTAINED BY ELASTIC ANALYSIS
Total stress is that obtained at a given point under all loads to which the structure is subjected. If
elastic analysis is to be used, the rules of this code require that the total stress be broken down into
several categories of stresses defined in the paragraphs below.
The Table below illustrates the principle of this breakdown:
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 205 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Table 1.E-1
Total stress σ
Primary stress Non Primary stress
Primary Primary Additional

Peak Secondary
bending Local membrane
membrane Stress
Stress
Stress
Stress Stress
F Q
Pm Pb Lm
σ = Pm + Pb + L m + Q + F
(also written PL = Pm + Lm)
Primary stress
The primary stress is defined as the fraction of total stress which cannot disappear due to low
permanent strain. The term low strain refers to strain which does not lead to significant geometrical
modifications (large displacements) or stretching (severe local strain).
General primary membrane stress: Pm
General primary membrane stress corresponds to the average value of the primary stress tensor in
the section.
It is defined for all points of the structure and is obtained by applying Equation 1.E-1.
Unless it may be proved that the stresses shall be relieved following a small strain, all membrane
stresses should be in this category.
Primary bending stress: Pb
Primary bending stress is the stress which is distributed in a linear manner through the section with the
same moment as primary stress. It is defined for all points of the structure and is obtained by applying
Equation 1.E-2.
Primary local membrane stress: PL
In the proximity of discontinuity of form or load (i.e. in a small area adjacent to the discontinuity), a
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 206 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
mechanical stress (elastic behaviour forms part of mechanical load) should be distinguished from
stresses which are not primary stresses. The membrane stress associated with this stress is referred
to as Lm.
The primary local membrane stress PL refers to the stress equal to the sum of stress Lm and the
general primary diaphragm stress Pm.
Equation 1.E-7
PL = Pm + L m
Although it does not have all the properties of a primary stress, caution dictates that stress PL should
be classified in the category of primary stresses.
Secondary stress: Q
Secondary stress corresponds to the fraction of total stress which may disappear following a slight
permanent strain, less the peak stresses.
When there is no risk of spring effect, all thermal stresses and stresses dues to imposed
displacements or strain, are classified in this category, but only part of these mechanical stresses may
be classified in this category.
Peak stress: F
Peak stress corresponds to the fraction of total stress that is:
− the additional stress due to a geometrical discontinuity of the structure, or to the non-linearity
of the distribution of stresses in the section.
− this additional stress, which is generally very localised, cannot set up a strain in the structure
as a whole, should it be redistributed.
This fraction of stress may only affect damage due to fatigue cracking.
1.E.7 EQUIVALENT STRESS
Equivalent stress may be calculated both for total stress and for a stress tensor corresponding to a
stress or a combination of categories of stresses. In this case, the components of each tensor shall
first be combined, then the equivalent stress of the resulting tensor may be calculated.
The equivalent stress at the point concerned is referred to as σ and may be defined by:
− the maximum shear criterion (Tresca)
Equation 1.E-8
σ (
= max σ1 − σ 2 , σ 2 − σ 3 , σ 3 − σ1 )
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 207 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
− the octahedric strain theory (Von-Misès)
Equation 1.E-9
σ = 1 / 2 [(σ11 − σ 22 )² + (σ 22 − σ 33 )² + (σ 33 − σ11 )² + 6(σ12 + σ 23 + σ 31 )]1 / 2
σ = 1 / 2 [(σ1 − σ 2 )² + (σ 2 − σ 3 )² + (σ 3 − σ1 )²]1 / 2
NOTE σ corresponds to a stress tensor with Cartesian components σij (i and j = 1,2,3) and the main
components σ1, σ2 and σ3.
General primary equivalent membrane stress: Pm

General primary equivalent membrane stress is assessed on the basis of the maximum or octahedric
shear theory, using the general primary membrane stress tensor Pm.
Primary local equivalent membrane stress: PL

Primary local equivalent membrane stress is assessed on the basis of the maximum or octahedric
shear theory, using the local primary membrane stress tensor PL.
Primary equivalent membrane plus bending stress: Pm (ou PL ) + Pb

Primary equivalent membrane plus bending stress is assessed on the basis of the maximum or
octahedric shear theory, using the stress tensor equal to the sum of general (or local) primary
membrane stresses Pm (or PL) and primary bending stresses Pb.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 208 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Thickness of the steel

structure considered
X3
Supporting line segment

(singular zone)
Supporting line segment
(normal zone)
Thickness of the steel

structure considered
σij
True stress σij)nl

(σ
Linear stress
σij)b
(σ
σij)m
(σ
Supporting line segment O
X3 X3
h/2 h/2
Figure 1.E-1 Definition of a reference segment and definition of stresses
NOTE (σij)nl is non – linear stress;
(σij)b is bending stress;
(σij)m is membrane stress.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 209 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
APPENDIX 1.F CALCULATION OF THE STATIC FORCE

EQUIVALENT TO CERTAIN ACCIDENTAL ACTIONS
This appendix provides a methodology for deriving a static force equivalent for highly dynamic events
such as External Explosion and Aircraft crash (general aviation).
1.F.1 CALCULATION PRINCIPLE
The equivalent static force F is given by:
Equation 1.F-1
F = α β Fmax
Where:
• Fmax is the maximum value of the time-history loading curve;
• α is the dynamic amplification factor;
• β is the plasticity coefficient.
The methodology for deriving coefficients α and β is described below.
Following validation of the finite element program by test computations, sensitivity studies were carried
out on different slabs in order to calculate the relationship between bending moment (which can be
expressed by the ratio between elastic and plastic moments or bending reinforcements) and material
strains (or curvature deduced from material strains).
For these calculations, each type of boundary condition – either ‘simply supported’ or ‘embedded’ –
was studied for different sizes of slabs (representative of main external walls/slabs submitted to these
load cases).
When considering the results obtained (as plotted in Figure 1.F-1), the steel strain limitations could
permit a 60% reduction in reinforcement compared to those obtained with a dynamic elastic
calculation. In order to ensure safety margins, a smaller reduction was authorized (30% to 40% only)
which corresponds to the plasticity coefficient. For design purposes, values deduced from the previous
calculations are given for coefficients α and β. This allows simple calculations for equivalent static
loads corresponding to the higher dynamic load factor combined with the lowest plasticity coefficient,
to ensure that the strain criteria are never reached. These defined coefficients cover most of the cases
concerned.
The figures (Figure 1.F-2 to Figure 1.F-6) given below are also derived from the calculations carried
out in order to allow more precise evaluations when necessary without complete dynamic studies or
tests.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 210 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Reinforcement rate
Dynamic elastic reinforcement rate
1.00 Dynamic elastic method
Static elastic method
0.75
εs = 5‰ Cut-down method
0.50
Ultimate state (ε s = 10‰)

0.25
Maximum deflection
Max dynamic elastic defl.
0 1 2 3
Figure 1.F-1 Type of method according the maximum deflection and the reinforcement rate
1.F.2 CALCULATION OF THE DYNAMIC AMPLIFICATION FACTOR (α)
α is expressed as a function of the natural frequency of the slab which itself, depends on its equivalent
rigidity.
The equivalent rigidity D is given by:
Equation 1.F-2
Ecd ,eff ⋅ h 3
D=
(
12 ⋅ 1 −ν 2 )
With:
− h: thickness of the slab [m];
− ν: Poisson’s ratio;
− Ecd,eff: effective concrete modulus for cracked sections (Ecd/3).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 211 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Main eigenfrequency of the slab:
Whenever the slab may be represented by a rectangular shape with fixed or simply-supported ends,
the following expression shall be taken into account:
Equation 1.F-3
π λ µ D
f = ⋅ + ⋅
2  a ² b²  ρ ⋅ h
With:
− f: frequency [Hz];
− a, b: slab dimensions [m] (see Table 1.F-1);
− ρ:
-3
concrete density [kg.m ];
− λ, µ: coefficients determined as a function of the bearing conditions as given in Table 1.F-1.
Table 1.F-1 Determination of coefficients λ and µ based on geometry
Diagrams of supports λ µ a
a a’ b b’ b b’
A A A A 1.00 1.00 a’
A A A E 0.94 1.52
a
A A E E 0.84 2.20 0.5 ≤ ≤2
b
A E A E 1.41 1.41
(otherwise, the slab is assimilated to a
A E E E 1.26 2.07 beam)
E E E E 1.90 1.90
A: simply supported ends
E: fixed ends
For intermediate supports situated between two diagrams, the frequency shall be calculated for both,
and the most conservative shall be taken into account.
Dynamic amplification factor (α)
The lowest value of α is taken as 1.
If the main eigenfrequency of the concrete slab cannot be determined, the following maximum values
of α shall be used:
− For Lear Jet: α = 1.25;
− For Cessna: α = 1.75;
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 212 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
− For External explosion: α = 2.00;
− For Rupture of High-Energy Pipework: α = 1.15.
When the main eigenfrequency may be determined, α is given by:
− Figure 1.F-2 for External Explosion;
− Figure 1.F-4 for Aircraft Crash (general aviation).
For the Rupture of High Energy Pipework, α is calculated directly from the impact curve.
1.F.3 CALCULATION OF THE PLASTICITY COEFFICIENT (β )
The minimum values of β are as follows:
− For Rupture of High-Energy Pipework:
o impact: β = 0.7;
o jet effect: β = 0.6;

− For External Explosion: β = 0.7;
− For Aircraft Crash (general aviation): β = 0.6.
β is determined by calculations, which shall be validated by tests. In the absence of validated

calculations for the slab being designed, the following figures shall be taken into account:
− Figure 1.F-3 for External Explosion;
− Figure 1.F-5 and Figure 1.F-6 for Aircraft Crash.
These Figures introduce χ, the maximum curvature [m ] attained by the slab under the considered
-1
action:
Equation 1.F-4
0.008
χ=
0 .9 ⋅ h
Where:
− 0.008 is the maximum steel extension, and;
− 0.9 h is the equivalent lever arm between the steel in tension and the compressed concrete.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 213 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
2 α
1 f = frequency (Hz)
t = duration of the wave
f.∆t
0.5 1
Figure 1.F-2 Dynamic amplification factor (α) for External Explosion
1,0
0,9 E=Fixed ends
Plasticity coefficient β
0,8
A.S.=Simply supported ends
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,0
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1
Curvature χ [%]
Figure 1.F-3 Plasticity coefficient (β) for External Explosion
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 214 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Cessna
1.5
Lear jet
0.5
10 20 30 40 50 f(Hz)
Figure 1.F-4 Dynamic amplification factor (α) for Aircraft Crash
CESSNA
1,0
0,9
E=Fixed ends
0,8
Plasticity coefficient β
0,7 A.S.=Simply supported ends

0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,0
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,4 1,5
Curvature χ [%]
Figure 1.F-5 Plasticity coefficient (β) for Aircraft Crash (Cessna)
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 215 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
LEAR JET
1,0
0,9 E=Fixed ends
0,8
Plasticity coefficient β 0,7 A.S.=Simply supported ends
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,0
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,4 1,5
Curvature χ [%]
Figure 1.F-6 Plasticity coefficient (β) for Aircraft Crash (Lear Jet)
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 216 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
APPENDIX 1.G (INFORMATIVE) TABLES OF REQUIREMENTS
Table 1.G-1 and Table 1.G-2 list the functional requirements for each of the components of the
Nuclear Island civil structures on the basis of the loadings to which they may be subjected, using the
loading classifications: normal (N), exceptional (Ei) and accidental (Ai) situations.
Among the requirement defined in 1.2.5, Stability (S) and Durability (D) concern all listed structures, so
these requirements are not presented in the tables.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Key:
N: Normal situation
Characterization of the expected function of the structures after application of the permanent, variable or accidental actions.
Ei: Exceptional situations
F: serviceability ; C: containment ; L: leaktightness ; R: resistance
Ai: Accidental situations
(Index B: concrete structure - Index M: metal structure)
Situations: Reserve
Airplane Reactor
categories and Inner Internal Outer Foundation water
resistant Steel liner Conduits Building
containment structures containment raft storage
definitions shell pool
tanks
Reactor states or
N environmental FB FB / FB / C + FM C + FM L L
conditions
E1 PCC2 conditions FB FB / FB / C + FM C + FM L /
Inspection
E2 FB FB FB FB FB C + FM C + FM L L
Earthquake
E3 Snow and wind / / FB / FB / / / /
Exceptional
E4 / / FB / FB / / / /
temperatures
E5 Water table / / / L / / / / /
Periodical tests and
E6 FB / FB + C FB / C + FM C + FM / /
proofing
A1 Earthquake RB RB RB RB RB C C L FM
A2 Aircraft crash / / RB RB RB / / / /
A3 Explosions / fires / / RB / RB / / / /
A4 RHEP / projectiles RB RB Local RB / Local RB C RM / /

PCC3/4 conditions &
A5 RB RB / / / C C L /
RRC-A environment
A6 RRC-B environment RB RB C RB / C C / /
A7 2A - LOCA RB RB / RB / C C / /
A8 LOCA + Earthquake / / C C / /
Table 1.G-1Design safety requirements applicable to the Reactor Building
RB RB RB
PART 1 - DESIGN
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 217 of 405
Key:
N: Normal situation
Characterization of the expected function of the structures after application of the permanent, variable or accidental actions.
Ei: Exceptional situations
F: serviceability ; C: containment (* with ventilation) (** limitation radiological impact)
Ai: Accidental situations
L: leaktightness (* by liner) ; R: resistance (* partial) (Index B: concrete structure - Index M: metal structure)
Bunker: Nuclear
Fuel auxiliary
Page 218 of 405
Situations: Safeguard Safeguard Safeguard

PART 1 - DESIGN
Building Building / Diesel

categories and Building Pumping Building Building Drainable Nondrainable
and Effluent generator
ETC-C 2010 Edition

1&2 station RIS [SIS] rooms compartments comp.
definitions Safeguard treatment building
structures rooms CHRS
Building building
2&3 Struct. ext
Reactor states or
N environmental FB FB FB FB / / FB L L
conditions
E1 PCC2 conditions FB FB FB / FB / / L L
Island excluding the Reactor Building
Inspection
E2 FB FB FB FB FB FB FB L L
Earthquake
E3 Snow and wind / FB FB FB / / FB / /
Exceptional
E4 / FB FB FB / / FB / /
temperatures
E5 Water table / / FB FB / / FB / /
A1 Earthquake RB RB RB / L* RB RB RB RB L L
A2 Aircraft crash / / / RB* RB* RB* / / /
A3 Explosions / fires / RB RB RB / / RB / /
A4 RHEP / projectiles / / / / / / / / /

PCC3/4 conditions
A5 & RB / C* RB / C* L* / RB / C** / / / L
RCCA environment
A6 RCCB environment / / / / / RB / C** / / /
Table 1.G-2 Design safety requirements applicable to the design of buildings for the Nuclear
Page 219 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
APPENDIX 1.H SHEAR RESISTANCE OF REINFORCED CONCRETE

STRUCTURES
The requirements given in this appendix supplement or replace those given in EN 1992-1-1, 6.2.1 to
6.2.4.
Table 1.H-1 gives the units of parameters used during the design of shear loads.
Table 1.H-1 Units of parameters used during shear design
2
[-] [MPa] [MN] [m] [m ] [Radian] [mm]
k1 fcd NEd bw Ac α Φ
k3 fck Vfd c Asw θ
k4 fctm VRd d
αcc fwd VRd,c h
αcw fyk VRd,max s
γc k2 z
ν1 k5
ρl νmin
ρw,min σcp
1.H.1 MINIMUM REINFORCEMENT
Minimum shear reinforcement shall be provided in all structures.
Table 1.H-2 gives the minimum reinforcement for structural components.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 220 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
Table 1.H-2 Minimum reinforcement relating to the geometry of structural components
Thickness ≥ 200 mm Thickness < 200 mm
• 4 links per m²
Walls
• Φmin ≥ 1/3.ΦAsl
0.08 × f ck
Principal slabs, floors and
ρ w, min = No imposed minimum
beams f yk
reinforcement
Secondary slabs or slabs

where transverse
4 links per m²
redistribution of loads is
possible
NOTE: Whatever the thickness, 1.H.2 to 1.H.6 shall apply in supplement of previous criteria.
1.H.2 MEMBERS NOT REQUIRING DESIGN SHEAR REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION
EN 1992-1-1, 6.2.2, equations (6.2a) and (6.2b) apply with the following parameter values:
Equation 1.H-1
[
V Rd ,c= C Rd ,c ⋅ k ⋅ (100 ⋅ ρ l ⋅ f ck )
1 3
]
+ k1 ⋅ σ cp ⋅ bw ⋅ d (EN 1992-1-1, (6.2a))
With a minimum value of:
Equation 1.H-2
V Rd ,c ,min= (v min + k1 ⋅ σ cp ) ⋅ bw ⋅ d (EN 1992-1-1, (6.2b))
With:
0.18
− C Rd ,c =
γc
200
− k = 1+ ≤ 2 with d in [mm]
d
− Ratio of longitudinal reinforcement:
Asl
ρl = ≤ 0.02
bw .d
− k1 = 0.15
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 221 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
− The value νmin is given by:
v min = 0.035 ⋅ k 3 / 2 ⋅ f ck (EN 1992-1-1, (6.3N))
N Ed
− σ cp = < 0.2 ⋅ f cd in [MPa]
Ac
NEd is the axial force in the cross-section due to loading or prestressing (NEd>0 for
compression). The influence of imposed deformations on NE may be ignored.
AC is the area of concrete cross section.
1.H.3 MEAN VALUE OF CONCRETE TENSILE STRENGTH fctm
The following formulation extract from EN 1992-1-1, Table 3.1 applies:
Equation 1.H-3
 0.30 × f 2 3 pour f ck ≤ 50MPa

 ck
f ctm =  f ck + 8 
2.12 × ln1 + 10  pour f ck > 50MPa
  
1.H.4 ANGLE BETWEEN COMPRESSION STRUTS AND THE NEUTRAL AXIS
The angle θ between the concrete compression strut and the beam axis perpendicular to the shear
force is given by:
− In compression, σcp ≥ 0:
Equation 1.H-4
σ cp
cot (θ ) = 1.2 + 0.2 ×
f ctm
− In tension, σcp < 0:
Equation 1.H-5
σ cp
cot (θ ) = 1.2 + 0.9 × ≥1
f ctm
Moreover, θ shall satisfy the relation:
Equation 1.H-6
cot (θ ) ≥ 1
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 222 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
1.H.5 DESIGN VALUE OF COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH fcd
EN 1992-1-1, (3.15) applies:
Equation 1.H-7
f ck
f cd = α cc ⋅
γc
With αcc = 1.00.
1.H.6 CONCRETE CONTRIBUTION TO SHEAR RESISTANCE Vfd
The concrete contribution to shear resistance, Vfd, is taken into account by:
Equation 1.H-8
bw ⋅ d   k2  
V fd = σ cp ⋅  + k 3  + k 4 ⋅ f ck + k 5 
γ c   f ck  
With:
− k4 = 0.03;
− k5 = 0.27 in [MPa].
And:
In compression, σcp ≥ 0:
− k2 = 0.736 in [MPa];
− k3 = 0.081.
In tension, σcp < 0:
− k2 = 2.454 in [MPa];
− k3 = 0.27;
− Vfd ≥ 0
1.H.7 COEFFICIENT ACCOUNTING FOR THE STRESS STATE IN THE ELEMENT IN

COMPRESSION
The coefficient αcw, defined in EN 1992-1-1, 6.2.3, (3) is taken as:
− for non-prestressed structures and in tension:
Equation 1.H-9
α cw = 1
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 223 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
− if 0 < σcp ≤ 0.25 . fcd:
Equation 1.H-10
σ cp
α cw = 1 + (EN 1992-1-1, (6.11aN))
f cd
− if 0.25 . fcd < σcp ≤ 0.5 . fcd:
Equation 1.H-11
α cw = 1.25 (EN 1992-1-1, (6.11bN))
− if 0.5 . fcd < σcp ≤ fcd:
Equation 1.H-12
 σ cp 
α cw = 2.5 ⋅ 1 −  (EN 1992-1-1, (6.11cN))
 f cd 
1.H.8 COEFFICIENT FOR REDUCTION OF SHEAR RESISTANCE OF CRACKED

CONCRETE
The coefficient υ1 , defined in EN 1992-1-1, 6.2.3, (3) is taken as:
Equation 1.H-13
 f ck 
υ1 = 0.6 ⋅ 1 − > 0 .5
 250 
with fck in [MPa] (EN 1992-1-1, (6.6N)).
1.H.9 RESISTANT SHEAR
To determine the ratio Asw/s, the following expression is used instead of EN 1992-1-1, 6.2.3, (4),
Formula (6.13):
Equation 1.H-14
Asw
VRd = ⋅ z ⋅ f ywd ⋅ (cot θ + cot α ) ⋅ sin α + V fd (this formula replaces EN 1992-1-1, 6.2.3, (4),
s
Formula (6.13))
With the verification that VRd is not greater than VRd,max:
Equation 1.H-15
cot θ + cot α
V Rd ≤ V Rd ,max = α cw ⋅ bw ⋅ z ⋅ υ1 ⋅ f cd ⋅ (EN 1992-1-1, 6.2.3, (4), Formula (6.14))
1 + cot ²θ
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 224 of 405
PART 1 - DESIGN
The shear reinforcement shall be greater than the minimum reinforcement ρw,min defined in 1.H.1:
Equation 1.H-16
Asw ≥ ρw,min
ETC-C 2010 Edition

ETC-C
PART 2
CONSTRUCTION
Page 225 of 405
PART 2 - CONSTRUCTION
PART 2 CONSTRUCTION
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 226 of 405
2.0 GENERAL PRINCIPLES
Modifications or adaptations of the rules given in PART 2 (particularly regarding the characteristics of
the materials or processes and the associated inspections) may prove necessary in response to
changes in industrial technology or the technical constraints of the Project.
2.0.1 STANDARDS
The technical specifications covered by ETC-C are defined with reference to existing European
standards.
The construction of structures covered by ETC-C shall fulfil the requirements of standards to which
reference is made in this document. The standards to observe are those in force on the issuing date of
the present rules.
The use of standards other than those referenced in the present document (other standard or revised
standard) shall be justified by a document attesting to their equivalence concerning their scope,
requirements and criteria.
2.0.2 NATIONAL MARKS, CERTIFICATIONS, QUALIFICATIONS, APPROVALS
The use of national marks, certifications, qualifications and approvals, other than those given in the
present document, is possible on the condition that the quality guarantees are shown to be at least
equivalent.
When a compliance certificate is required by the present regulations, it shall be possible to prove,
before the start of the works, that the materials, products or processes hold the required certificate, or,
failing this, hold a compliance certificate approved as equivalent.
2.0.3 LABORATORIES AND ORGANISATIONS
Where laboratories or organisations are named in the present document, other laboratories or
organisations may be substitued, on condition that proof is furnished that they provide quality
guarantees that are at least equivalent.
Relevant tolerances are given in 2.13.
2.0.5 NON-CONFORMITIES AND DEVIATIONS
If, during quality controls, the requirements of the present document are not met, a non-conformity is
declared. The concerned materials or components shall remain under control until processing of the
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 227 of 405
non-conformity.
Restoration of conformity is sought after the detection of non-conformities with respect to these rules.
A non-conformity is only declared to be a deviation when the restoration of conformity is not possible.
Deviations are declared as significant or brought to the attention of the Safety Authorities, when the
final condition of the structure does not conform to the design and construction rules described in the
present document or in rules shown to be equivalent.
2.0.6 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
Documents applicable to PART 2 are listed in 0.1.3.2.
Abbreviated notations used in the text are explained below:
2.0.6.1 MINISTERIAL DOCUMENTATION
Ministerial documents applicable to PART 2 are listed in 0.1.3.2.1.
They are designated in the text by an abbreviated title that allows them to be identified.
Example: Documentation n° 4 Title II.
2.0.6.2 STANDARDS
The standards applicable to PART 2 are listed in 0.1.3.2.2.
The standards are coded according to their origin and status. They are designated in the text by their
alphanumeric code.
Meaning of the coding:
− ISO: International Standards, adopted by the International Organization for Standardization

(ISO);
− EN: European Standards, adopted by the European Committee for Standardization (CEN);
− BS: British Standards, approved by the British Standards Institution (BSI);
− DIN: German Standards, approved by Deutsches Institut für Normung (DIN);
− NF: French Standards, approved by l’Association Française de NORmalisation (AFNOR);
− XP, or no coding: Experimental AFNOR Standards;
− FD: AFNOR documentation.
The order syntax of the coding is shown by the following example: International Standard (ISO)
number 14713, adopted by the CEN (EN), and then approved by the National Organism of
standardisation (NF, BS, DIN...):
Example: NF EN ISO 14713.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 228 of 405
2.0.6.3 OTHER DOCUMENTS
Other documents applicable to PART 2 are listed in 0.1.3.2.3.
They are designated in the text by an abbreviated title that allows them to be identified.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 229 of 405
2.1 EARTHWORKS AND SOIL TREATMENTS
2.1.1 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS
2.1.1.1 GEOLOGICAL, GEOTECHNICAL AND HYDRO-GEOLOGICAL MODEL

DETERMINATION
The site investigation program shall be performed by a highly-qualified geotechnical company. If

necessary, an additional audit may be performed.
It should be considered that knowledge of the ground conditions depends on the extent and quality of
the geotechnical investigations. Such knowledge and the control of workmanship are usually more
significant in fulfilling the fundamental requirements than precision in the calculation models and
partial factors (EN 1997-1, 2.4.1).
Geotechnical site investigation programs, the number of tests to be carried out, and their location and
depth, shall be defined according to the geological complexity of the chosen site (stiff or soft materials,
heterogeneity, discontinuities, underground cavities, anisotropy, etc), the type and location of buildings
and other works, and the type of engineering problem to be solved (required parameters).
Whatever the number of drillings necessary to obtain reliable geotechnical parameters, the minimum
number of tests, and the minimum depth investigated shall be:
− Density of drilling: for safety-related structures, a minimum of one drilling giving quantitative
data shall be performed within the footprint of each building.
Under buried pipes and galleries, investigations shall be performed in such a manner to
enable identification of changes in soil conditions that may involve differential settlements.
– Depth: in any case, local stratigraphy (and any qualitative data given by non-destructive
geophysical testing and/or geological study) should be known to a minimum depth of 200 m
under the NI raft (see 0). In addition:
o For soils and soft rock foundations, quantitative data are required to 100 m depth;
o For rocky sites (when rock extends to 200 m minimum depth), quantitative data is only
required for the whole thickness of weathered strata and very fractured strata
supposed to be the main cause of the settlements, with a maximum of 100 m depth;
o For other buildings, the depth of investigations shall be at least twice the width of the
foundation, if it is reliably known that there is no issue at further depths.
2.1.1.2 REGIONAL AND LOCAL GEOLOGY
The geological model is obtained by plotting the geological map and identifying the nature and layout
of the soils. The degree of soil heterogeneity shall be analysed by means of:
− Destructive methods, such as mechanical drilling, borehole sampling, destructive boring with
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 230 of 405
recording of parameters, shafts, trenches, and other ad-hoc investigation methods;
− Non-destructive methods, such as geophysical methods, which give the geologist a

« transparent » view for more clearly understanding and interrelating the information supplied
by mechanical drilling or other operations.
Several methods may be used according to the requirements, the area of application and the desired
investigation depth. It is often necessary to use several methods in combination, either in-situ or
laboratory tests, to be able to compare and interpret the result of the various tests; for instance a
borehole should be drilled near a geophysical profile.
The number of survey points and their density, depending on the desired investigation depth, shall
also be adapted to each site according to the accuracy required to provide a reliable description of the
foundation.
As an illustration, Table 2.1.1-1 identifies the various useable methods.
Table 2.1.1-1
Measured Investigation
Methods Area of application Remark
parameter(s) depth
Search for shallow

voids, (karst) more or
Microgravimetry Relative gravity value 0 – 50 m
less backfilled or
flooded
Survey:
- Bedrock.
Seismic refraction Flight time between
- fractured zones.
profile source and receiver
- Karst zones. 0 – 200 m
- Shiftable ground.
Seismic - Foundations.
tomography
- Structures. Determined by
Seismic Need for
- Determination of measurement
boring
« Down-Hole » Velocity of P and S parameters in dynamic device
waves mode: elastic moduli,
« Up-Hole »
shear modulus and
« Cross-Hole » Poisson's ratio
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 231 of 405
Table 2.1.1-1 (end)
Measured Investigation
Methods Area of application Remark
parameter(s) depth
- Weathering thickness.
- Overlapping Determined by
Electrical methods Apparent resistivity thickness. measurement
- Aquiferous levels. device
- Karsts, faults, voids.
- Porosity
Electromagnetic
Apparent conductivity - Fracturing 0 – 100 m
methods
- Clays
- Fracturing
Propagation speed of - Buried networks and

0 – 20 m
Geological Radar electromagnetic obstacles
waves max
- Cavities
- Surface geology
Detection of any
Magnetism Total magnetic field 0 – 100 m
ferromagnetic object
- Density
Induced and Determined by
Induced or natural Need for
natural nuclear - Water content measurement
radiation boring
diagraphs device
- Porosity
2.1.1.3 GEOTECHNICAL PROPERTIES
Scope
The values given in the geotechnical model should be such that the measurement uncertainties for
these soils are supposed to be covered by the appropriate safety factors in the design studies and the
checking of limit states (see 1.9.2.3. and 1.9.2.4).
The choice of characteristic values for geotechnical parameters should follow the general
recommendations given in EN 1997-1, 2.4.5.
Methods
The geotechnical tests (laboratory and on site) shall determine, for each material affected by the plant
construction, the short-term and long-term deformability and static or dynamic properties.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 232 of 405
Different types of tests and correlations shall be performed to determine and verify the value of
geotechnical parameters. Tests given in EN 1997-2 may be used, particularly in tables 2.1 and 2.3.
Tests should not be used for soils where applicability is indicated as low in EN 1997-2, Table 2.1.
As far as possible, the lab tests shall be carried out on undisturbed samples.
The relevant standards shall be followed when undertaking the tests (see 0.1.3.2).
Laboratory tests shall follow the technical specifications of CEN ISO/TS 17892- 1 to 12. Other
recognized international standards may be used if they provide equivalent parameters.
The test programme shall be adapted to the site.
2.1.1.4 HYDRO-GEOLOGICAL PROPERTIES
Scope
As nuclear sites are mostly located in the plain, close to a waterway or the sea, there are almost
always one or more water tables on site which shall be analysed in order to:
− Provide the number of groundwater tables, mean, high and low water table levels and
hydrodynamic properties of the soil: permeability, porosity, storage factor, transmissivity, etc.;
− Define hydraulic loads in usual, exceptional and extreme cases to be taken into account in
design studies. This may require a combination of measurement as well as extrapolation of
hydrodynamic properties in extreme cases;
− Provide chemical parameters of groundwater and assess its potential aggressiveness, in order
to adapt the design for underground structure (concrete quality, waterproof membrane, etc)
with regard to the required durability and design working life.
The site hydrogeology should be known to enable identification of risks of accidental pollution by the
power plants and, if necessary, to allow implementation of effective solutions for reducing any such
risk to acceptable values.
Methods
Two types of hydro-geological properties need to be ascertained:
1- The number of water tables on the site and their levels may vary with the seasons and
meteorological conditions, together with the general drainage direction. The setting-up and tracking of
piezometers and level recorder scales is indispensable for this reason. The taking of measurements in
open piezometers shall be undertaken according to the process defined in NF P 94-157-1 which shall
be followed.
Depending on the investigations made, the drainage of the water table(s) and the layout of the power
plant, a piezometer location and depth study shall be made.
The following specifications only concern piezometers used for design purposes.
The number of piezometers to be installed and tests to be carried out depends on the initial site
knowledge and the geological complexity of the site. For each groundwater unit, the networks of
piezometers shall be sufficient to assess the groundwater levels and flow direction, as well as to
assess the impact of dewatering on the entire site.
A survey programme shall be set up with a frequency which fits the project phases: soil investigation,
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 233 of 405
construction, operation, etc. The measurement frequency shall be adapted to the potential speed of
variation of groundwater levels. If necessary, automatic devices shall be used. Piezometric
measurements should be acquired over a minimum period of one year, in order to understand
seasonal variations.
Chemical properties shall be measured frequently in order to evaluate seasonal variations during
design studies: pH, sulphate, chloride, salt, etc.
2- The hydrodynamic properties of the water tables influenced by the plant around the site shall
also be identified. These minimum required properties are the permeability coefficient or
transmissivity, and the storage factor.
3
These properties shall be obtained from on site tests , spot boring tests as a first phase, then pumping
test.
The depth and type of tests shall be adapted to each site and related with the site works (diaphragm
wall, excavation dewatering…).
There are 3 types of routine spot boring tests, to be implemented according to the ground conditions:
− Lefranc tests for soils under the water table (see NF P94-132);
− Nasberg and USBR tests in non-saturated soils;
−
4
Lugeon tests in rocks (see NF P94-131).
Standards detailing procedures for undertaking these tests and interpreting measurements shall be
followed, except for Nasberg and USBR tests, for which no such standards are currently available.
Other tests may be carried out by boring, such as the micro-reel, to obtain details on the speed of
vertical water flows through a piezometer.
Full-scale tests: these tests are much more representative of hydro-geological response than spot
tests. This is because they give an average value of permeability or transmissivity corresponding to a
considerable soil volume, and take into account the natural water table feed conditions. Among these
tests, the pumping test and the tracing test may be mentioned:
− Pumping test (in soils or rocks):
This test determines a permeability (or transmissivity) and a storage factor, necessary to
design the pumps for dewatering the excavations for example. This test shall be performed in
accordance with NF P 94-130;
− Tracing test:
This test can cover a variety of areas: search for drainage direction, highlighting of preferential
path, estimation of water flow velocity and transfer time, measurement of flow diffusivity, etc.
3 The permeability coefficient may be determined in the lab on intact samples, but in this case is considered as a
spot value since it corresponds to seeping along the borehole sample axis. The value thus obtained is not at all
representative of the whole medium and experience shows that it can lead to underestimated values in a ratio that
can vary from 1 to 100 (M. Cassan – Water tests in soil investigation). This is why lab tests are not advised. On-
site tests are to be preferred.
4 The Lugeon tests are not true permeability tests, however they do allow an assessment of cracking.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 234 of 405
The volumes studied should depend on the problem to be addressed.
Determination of characteristic groundwater levels:
Modifications of the hydrogeology due to the presence of the plant should be taken into account:
− embedded buildings or diaphragm walls which act like dams for underground water;
− waterproofing of the platform;
− permeability of the backfills;
− capacity of drainage systems if they are safety-related.
2.1.1.5 EVALUATION OF LIQUEFACTION POTENTIAL
The liquefaction potential shall be assessed. On sites prone to liquefaction, empirical methods based
on SPT or CPT measurements shall be used. These methods are described in EN 1998-5, 4.1.4. and
Appendix B. The Vs method is not recommended.
The evaluation shall be performed for a free field, with the frequent value of the groundwater level:
Qk,wl,EF (see 1.3.3.2). The required safety factor is 1.25.
2.1.2 SOIL STRENGTHENING OR IMPROVEMENT
If, during the design study phases, it appears that the ground needs to be strengthened or improved,
suitable treatment shall be performed at the start or in the course of the earthworks, depending on the
process used.
The choice of soil treatment shall be subject to justification with a preliminary full-scale test.
2.1.2.1 SOIL TREATMENT METHODS
The following soil treatments methods are permitted (non-exhaustive list):
− Pre-loading, which involves loading the ground so that it settles before building work starts.
Pre-loading is performed by increasing the effective stresses in the soil, either using a raised-
earth backfill on the site of the future buildings or by pumping water from the soil, under the
area to be covered by the buildings;
− Draining the foundation soils before construction work starts, e.g. under the backfills, to
accelerate the settlement due to the backfill deadweight;
− Replacement of the in-situ soils, in a given volume, by another more suitable material, even if
this requires a diaphragm wall to perform this replacement;
− Ground compaction to limit settlement by decreasing the void ratio (dynamic compaction, rigid
grout, inclusions driven in soils, etc);
− Improving the mechanical properties of the ground or filling cavities (grouting, etc).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 235 of 405
2.1.2.2 INSPECTIONS
Each process or treatment shall be thoroughly inspected on site to verify its effectiveness. The
inspections will vary according to the processes:
− For pre-loadings and draining, settlement over time shall be measured;
− For replacement of the in situ soils, tests necessary to check the required performances over
the whole depth of the substituted soil shall be performed. The substitute materials shall fulfil
the requirements given in 2.1.3.3;
− For ground compaction and improvement, the comparison of appropriate on site tests
(pressure meter tests, SPT, cone penetration tests, etc), carried out before and after
treatment, will enable the ground improvement made by the treatment to be quantified.
If, following the inspections, the treatment is deemed ineffective or inadequate, it shall be either
prolonged or repeated, or supplemented by another process.
2.1.3 EARTHWORKS REGARDING SAFETY-RELATED CIVIL STRUCTURES
2.1.3.1 SOFT CUTTING
2.1.3.1.1 Performance and characterization
Cutting may be performed in several successive phases.
Excavated materials shall be identified in order to guide transport vehicles towards storage, deposit or
backfilling zones.
2.1.3.1.2 Inspections
The cutting is mainly inspected by topography.
During earthworks, deviations between the theoretical coordinates and the measured coordinates of
the located points may be observed.
If the deviations are within the theoretical profile, the earthwork shall be repeated in order to remove
the excess materials.
If the deviations are outside the theoretical profile, the volume situated outside the profile, plus a width
allowance inside the profile, shall be backfilled with materials identical to those of the excavation.
The use of this backfill shall ensure a good connection with the existing soils and equivalent
compactness. When the backfill is completed, the excess materials shall be removed.
2.1.3.2 ROCK CUTTING
2.1.3.2.1 Performance
Firing devices shall be built so as to limit the resulting vibrations to permissible thresholds and to avoid
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 236 of 405
spattering or falling blocks. Beyond the theoretical elevation of the excavations, all necessary
provisions shall be taken to avoid the cracking or crumbling of the soil. The choice of the explosive
mesh shall be based on the performance of previous test shots.
An electric priming system may be used only if there is no magnetic field or stray electric current.
Shots:
Each firing plane shall be inspected before the shot: type of explosive, x, y, z coordinates of each firing
hole and of the shot polygonal, diameter, depth, charge and lining of each hole, priming mode and
type of detonator for each charge, quantity of explosives for the shot or volley, and actual charge
delays.
For the existing buildings, the following inspections shall be performed:
− Vibrations: the measurement and analysis of the vibrations involve the use of a dedicated
measurement channel comprising the detection, transmission and storage of the vibration
signals and the processing and printout of the results;
− Maximum individual speeds: these shall be inspected on a vibration frequency spectrum.
2.1.3.3 BACKFILLS
Two types of backfills are distinguished:
− foundation fill under structures (buildings, galleries and pipes);
− structural fill around buildings or buried structures.
The chosen material and the execution of backfill shall meet the following requirements:
− Mechanical properties according to those taken in the design studies shall be achieved: static
modulus and bearing capacity, dynamic modulus, shear strength (friction angle and cohesion) that
concerns slope stability and pressure on buried structures, and permeability;
− Geotechnical parameters should not vary over time: the material shall not be sensitive to
suffusion, water, freezing and thawing, etc;
− Dynamic behaviour shall be satisfactory: non-liquefiable backfills, negligible seismic-induced

settlement;
− Placement (often in irregular shapes, and in narrow spaces near buildings) shall be sufficiently
practicable.
Several solutions may be implemented, such as soft compacted backfills, rocky backfills, gravely
cement or concrete.
2.1.3.3.1 Performance and characterization
Soil or rock mechanics studies prior to construction work (lab tests, test sections) shall be used to
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 237 of 405
identify the best material to be placed and the conditions for placing it.
The backfill shall be compacted and the compacting parameters shall be determined. For instance:
− water content and optimum compactness for soils and soft rocks materials: identification,
Proctor (if not too coarse), CBR, degradability, etc;
− Los Angeles, micro-Deval test, to obtain degradability and fragmentability for rock materials;
− machinery to be used, required compacting energy, and service conditions of the various
compactors (speed, coverage scheme, etc);
− maximum thickness of the layers;
− any soil treatments with their procedures.
The conditions for using the backfill materials and the guidelines for compacting the soft backfills
should be based on the technical document published by the "Laboratoire Central des Ponts et
Chaussées" and SETRA: "Guide technique: Réalisation des remblais et des couches de forme"
(Technical guide – Performance of backfills and shape layers).
The backfills shall not contain grass, stumps, plant debris, snow, ice, slime, mud, or peat and shall
exhibit a degree of large-scale homogeneity (absence of over-compressible levels or hard areas).
Moreover, for durability purposes, all components shall have characteristics that ensure the durability
of the backfill for the whole plant working life:
− If the backfill may be affected by a groundwater flow, the granulometry of the imported soil
shall be stable;
− Mechanical, mineralogical and chemical composition of the soils should be resistant to

alteration over time;
− Crushed material shall be tested to verify the characteristics detailed above;
− When proctor test is relevant, the compacting shall reach at least 98.5% of the dry density at
the normal proctor optimum for durability purpose.
For each type of fill used under safety-related structures or for safety-related backfills, a trial fill shall
be undertaken before the beginning of works in order to validate the compacting parameters (notably
the layer thickness and Q/S parameters associated to compaction plants). For small volume backfills,
the trial fill may be constituted of the first compacted layers.
The trial fill shall prove that the chosen material compacted with the chosen set of compacting
parameters is able to reach the required mechanical performances.
Transport, storage and placing:
The operations for loading, transporting, unloading and storing the materials shall be carried out so as
to maintain the integrity of the material, and shall not adversely affect the quality and mechanical
properties or subsequent performance of the material: in particular, for rocky backfills, the splitting,
fracture and rifting of materials should be avoided, as well as segregation of the soils.
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 238 of 405
Temporary storage of materials shall be carried out so that they may be checked for quality.
The backfills shall be levelled and worked in slightly convex layers. If the materials are sensitive to
water, each individual backfill layer shall be adjusted in such a way that after compaction there are
sufficient slopes to ensure fast drainage of the runoff and to avoid ponding, waterlogging,
decompression or weathering.
Backfill in contact with structures shall be placed with considerations to earth pressures so as not to
generate static as well as dynamic (liquefaction) overloading, which are not taken into account in the
design.
Material in contact with buried or underground structures should allow easy drainage of the ground if
the control of groundwater table is required.
The nature, frequency and method of the tests for inspecting the proper compactness of the materials
shall be defined according to the category of backfills.
For soft backfills, the material shall be tested with the following minimum frequency:
−
3
dry density (to compare with optimum dry density): 1 measurement every 500 m ;
− plate loading test: 1 test every 500 m².
Other types of test (CPT, pressure meter, etc) may be used if they have been calibrated on the trial fill.
For rock backfills, tests shall be defined and performed to check the load-bearing capacity.
If materials do not have the required qualities for backfilling, they shall be removed;
If materials have insufficient compactness, they shall be recompacted until the required compactness
is achieved.
2.1.4 DEWATERING OF EXCAVATIONS
As a general rule, irrespective of the foundation soil, due to site work constraints it is always preferable
to dewater the excavations. For some materials which are sensitive to water, like marls or clays, the
bottom of the excavation should be dry.
To minimize deterioration of the bottom of the excavation (to limit decompression, deterioration or
fracturing of the foundation layer), a reduction of uplift pressure may be necessary, by controlling the
groundwater level under the bottom of the excavation.
In addition, to be able to perform surveys of the bottom of the excavation, it is necessary that the
bottom be visible, therefore excavations shall be dewatered.
The system used for dewatering the excavations shall be designed according to:
− the foundation depth of the buildings;
− water-table(s) levels;
− the permeability of the aquiferous soils;
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 239 of 405
− the nature of the foundation soils;
− the surface area of the excavations;
− the risk of internal erosion of the materials.
All these parameters shall be analysed to identify the appropriate dewatering system for lowering the
water table during construction work under the bottom of the excavation, or at a greater depth if
bottom instability risks are a concern.
Depending on circumstances, the system may involve a drainage channel, filter wells, drain networks
with sumps, or even the construction of a watertight screen around the excavations, connected if
necessary to filter wells or sumps.
All necessary provisions shall be taken to ensure the drainage water is settled and unpolluted.
2.1.5 MONITORING, INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF EXCAVATION
2.1.5.1 GEOTECHNICAL MONITORING
The aims of geotechnical monitoring are to (see EN 1997-1, section 4):
− compare the quality of the foundation soils to the predictions and to confirm the validity of the
design assumptions;
− check the conformity of works to the project specifications;
− identify whether corrective measures are necessary.
The monitoring program shall be defined during design studies, and shall specify the limiting values
which shall not be exceeded during execution phase.
As a minimum, for safety-related buildings, the following actions shall be undertaken during earthwork:
− geological mapping of the bottom of the excavation:
o Rocky foundation:
Numbering, ranking, filling of fractures (to make an instantaneous judgement on

the foundation quality, which may lead to some zones being deepened or
scoured);
Identification of weathered rock zones and of any contact between different

formations.
o Soft foundation:
Characterisation of the nature of the materials encountered;
Identification of weathered and/or decompressed zones, scouring if necessary.
− geotechnical monitoring:
o Settlement monitoring, as soon as possible, in order to have the first topographic

measurement corresponding to the lightest load possible;
o Lateral displacements;
o Groundwater behaviour during dewatering phases;
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 240 of 405
o Displacement of retaining structures (even if they are not safety-related structures but
can impact a safety-related building during construction phase);
o Outgoing drain flow.
2.1.5.2 ACCEPTANCE METHODOLOGY
The quality of the soils in the foundations of the structures and the possible presence of a water table
impose constraints for the acceptance of the excavations which will result in close earthwork follow-up.
Additional scouring shall be performed if there is a local risk of unsuitability of the ground arising with
respect to the required characteristics.
On completion of acceptance, a decision shall be made, either for concreting or placement of backfill
or substitute concrete, or to leave the ground “as-is”.
Observations and remarks shall be recorded on an “acceptance” sheet with a serial number.
2.1.5.3 ACCEPTANCE PHASES
Acceptance phases are as follows:
− Excavation down to the theoretical bottom level, and cleaning of the bottom if necessary;
− Set-up of a mesh criss-crossing the zone and adapted to the type of foundation (e.g. 10 m by
10 m for large mat foundations);
− Topographical survey;
− Photographic survey;
− Geological survey;
− Hold point: decision initiating acceptance, after which the substitution agreement is issued or
there is a return to additional work and/or scouring.
2.1.5.4 PROTECTION OF THE EXCAVATION PIT BEFORE BUILDING STRUCTURES
If the excavation pit is sensitive to weathering (rain, snow, freezing, etc), it shall be protected (e.g. by
concrete) as soon as possible: the time between acceptance and applying protection should be short
enough so that the material does not change its hydrous state.
2.1.6 BLOCKING AND SUBSTITUTE CONCRETES (ON ROCK FOUNDATION)
2.1.6.1 STUDY
In case of faults or weathered zones or any non-suitable material which it is necessary to scour,
blocking concrete shall be substituted for the removed material. If the extension of the substituted area
may have an impact on the settlement of the building, the modulus value of the substitute material
should be globally equivalent to the modulus values of the rock foundation. To this end, the use of
cyclopean concrete, or an alternation of concrete and compacted backfill, should be considered if the
concrete volumes to be placed are large.
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 241 of 405
At each plant site, if some of the buildings are founded on fissured or fractured rock, they shall be
subjected to a detailed investigation analysis, defining the general methodology for addressing these
singular points.
The study includes definition of the rock foundation and the provisions to be taken at the fault and
fissure locations. The possible influence of a fault on a given foundation is assessed according to the
nature of the building, the characteristics of the foundation (load, geometry, and rigidity), the
dimension and inclination of the fault and the overall configuration. Large foundation mats should be
treated differently from small size or isolated foundations.
2.1.6.2 PERFORMANCE
On the site, the exact provisions to be undertaken, including the scouring depth, shall be determined
by the geologist in each case.
The placement of blocking concrete shall be done in a short time to avoid the degradation of the
material remaining in place.
Any substitution by blocking concrete shall be preceded by the drawing-up of a geological acceptance
sheet for the excavation.
2.1.6.3 INSPECTION
For small volumes (blocking), a visual inspection shall be conducted to ensure that there is neither a
void (due to concrete shrinkage for example) nor a fringe of weathered material between the rock
foundation and the blocking concrete.
For large volumes (substitution), a visual inspection is also conducted on the rock foundation –
substitute concrete interface zones.
2.1.7 LINER UNDER BASEMAT
When a waterproof membrane is required under the buildings, it is protected by a 6 cm thick

reinforced screed.
Each junction between two sheets of this layer is carefully checked.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 242 of 405
2.2 CONCRETES
The required concrete quality shall conform to the specifications of PART 1. The following rules are
based upon French practice in terms of quality requirements for concrete. They are adaptable for
equivalent national practices, whilst respecting concrete quality requirements.
2.2.1 CONSTITUENTS
2.2.1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
The origin and characteristics of constituents shall be described in a file justifying compliance with the
following specifications as a minimum.
Qualification and suitability tests are only valid for constituents of the origin and characteristics
specified and for a given composition. No change in the source of delivery is acceptable and the
variation range shall be in accordance with those specified in standards.
No changes are permitted during construction without the creation of a suitable file of new qualification
and suitability tests that prove compliance with the same instructions.
During the qualification tests, any discrepancies with respect to the specifications shall be recorded,
and the materials in question shall be isolated until a final decision has been made.
2.2.1.2 CEMENTS
2.2.1.2.1 General characteristics
Cements shall conform to EN 197-1 and be certified for conformity by the mark “NF – Liants
hydrauliques” (hydraulic binders).
In particular cases where non-standard special cements are used, they shall give rise to an inspection
equivalent to that required for the mark “NF – Liants hydrauliques” by a laboratory accredited by an
independent third party such as the French COFRAC.
2.2.1.2.2 Cements for prestressed concrete
Cements shall be included in the list of the mark “NF – Liants hydrauliques”, and be labelled CP1 for
prestressing by post-tension or CP2 for prestressing by pretension (sulfide content): These cements
shall comply with NF P 15-318.
Furthermore, cements used for the inner containment of the Reactor Building shall comply with the
requirements given in 2.2.1.2.6.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 243 of 405
2.2.1.2.3 Cements for coastal structures
Cements for concretes subjected to exposure classes XS1 (less than 1 km from the coast up to 5km
taking into account site specific conditions), XS2 and XS3 (tidal, splash and spray zones and
concretes less than 500m from the coast) according to NF EN 206-1 shall be included in the list of the
mark “NF – Liants hydrauliques” and be labelled “PM” (Sea water-resisting cements). These cements
shall comply with NF P 15-317.
If any additions are used, their composition (sulphate content, etc) shall be such that the binder meets
the requirements of NF P 15-317.
2.2.1.2.4 Cements for structures in contact with highly-sulphated water

When the aggressivity class XA1, XA2 or XA3 according to EN 206-1 results from the presence of
sulphates:
− Cements for concretes subjected to exposure class XA1 shall be included in the list of the
mark “NF – Liants hydrauliques” and labelled “PM” (sea water-resisting cements), and the
composition of the binder shall be such that it meets the requirements of NF P 15-317.
− Cements for concretes subjected to environment classes XA2 and XA3 shall be included in
the list of the mark “NF – Liants hydrauliques” and labelled “ES” (sulphate resisting cements ),
and the composition of the binder shall be such that it meets the requirements of XP P 15-319.
2.2.1.2.5 Cements for structures in contact with pure (poorly mineralized) water
Cements for structures in contact with water whose total hardness TH is less than 6 French degrees
shall either have a high slag content (CEM III/B, CEM III/C according to EN 197-1), or containing at
least 30% pozzolanic secondary constituents ( CEM II/B, CEM IV or CEM V according to EN 197-1).
The use of other cements meeting EN 197-1 is permitted, in combination with additions, provided that
the slag content of the binder is greater than 60% or that the pozzolanic secondary constituent content
according to EN 197-1 is greater than 30%.
2.2.1.2.6 Cements for large volumes of concrete (to be poured in a single batch)
Cements for concretes in large volumes (e.g.: raft, inner containment, outer shell, etc) shall comply
with a low enough heat of hydration, so as to respect concrete temperatures determined in 2.2.2.9.5.
This is in order to avoid:
− thermal cracking due to thermal shock (during formwork removal,etc),
− delayed ettringite formation (DEF).
2.2.1.2.7 Cements for injection grouts of ducts for prestressed tendons and prestressed
anchorage bolts
Cements for injection grouts of ducts for prestressed tendons and anchorage bolts shall be CEM I,
meeting the requirements of EN 197-1, and acceptable for the mark “NF – Liants hydrauliques”.
These cements shall also comply with the following specifications:

−
-
Cl < 0.05%;
−
2-
S < 0.01%;
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 244 of 405
− Secondary constituents < 3%;

− Additives < 0.1% (Chrome VI reducing agent not included). Only grinding agent additive is
permitted.
These cements shall not contain any other element which leads to corrosion of steel.
These cements shall not exhibit false setting, measured by the Tusschenbroeck test, as per P 18-363.
2.2.1.2.8 Delivery and storage conditions

Cements shall be delivered:
− either directly by the manufacturing plant;
− or by a distribution centre approved by the mark “NF – Liants hydrauliques”, as a plant
terminal.
All transport and binder storage operations shall be arranged to avoid:
− a mix of different cements;
− the pollution of cements, especially during transport;
− identification errors;
− exposure to the elements.
Cements delivered in bulk shall be stored in silos, according to type.
Each silo shall be equipped with:
− an independent riser, with devices preventing from any risk of accidental filling of the silo,
− stock or flow monitoring devices (level detector, levelling system).
The storage and/or the delivery capacity of the cements on site (in silos, in tracks or in wagons) shall
ensure that concreting of the largest elements can be performed in a continuous way.
When used, the cement temperature shall be less than 50°C and all actions shall be taken to ensure
this, irrespective of the cement temperature upon delivery.
2.2.1.2.9 Checks and controls upon reception
The following checks shall be performed:

− On each lorry or delivery container and for each type of cement:
o Verification of packaging, markings, and delivery schedules;
o a quick cement identification test to detect delivery errors, when the cement is received
and before its transfer to the silo.
− Once per delivery day and for each type of cement:
o setting time and stability tests in accordance with EN 196-3,
o density test in accordance with EN 196-6.
Sampling for tests shall be performed according to EN 196-7 upon the arrival of the cement on site.
Ten kilograms of cement shall be reserved for conservative sampling. The results of these tests shall
comply with the specifications of EN 197-1 for the type of cement concerned. When the production
workshop is ISO 9001-certified and the cement type is delivered daily, the frequency of the controls
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 245 of 405
may be reduced to two days.

− Once a month and for each type of cement:
o a 28-day compressive strength test,
o a 2 day compressive strength test for early strength cements.
These tests shall be performed in accordance with EN 196-1. They shall be carried out to verify the
characteristics of cement used in relation to those of concretes. Sampling shall be performed in the
silo of the batching plant. The results shall comply with EN 197-1 for each type of cement.
For cements used for large volumes of concrete, a heat of hydration measurement shall be performed,
according to EN 196-9, on each block of concrete poured in a single batch. The results shall comply
with the requirements of 2.2.2.9.5.
2.2.1.3 AGGREGATES FOR HYDRAULIC CONCRETES AND MORTARS
2.2.1.3.1 General instructions
Aggregates shall be natural as defined in XP P 18-545.
Aggregates shall fulfil the specifications of code B of XP P 18-545 part 10 as a minimum.
2.2.1.3.2 Quarry file
An identification and characterisation file of the deposit (quarry file) shall be established from samples
taken from geological matter to be used during construction.
The quarry file, drawn up during the design study (for example, in accordance with the principles of
Appendix H of EN 12620) shall include the quarrying plan for different geological matter and contain
the results of the following tests:
− identification of aggregates by petrographic analysis in accordance with EN 932-3;
− intrinsic and manufacturing characteristics: tests shall be performed in accordance with
standards referenced in XP P 18-545;
− sand friability coefficient, in accordance with P 18-576;
− micro-Deval coefficient in the presence of water, in accordance with standard EN 1097-1;
− freeze / thaw resistance, in accordance with EN 1367-1 or EN 1367-2, EN1097-2 or EN 1097-
6;
− classification with respect to alkali-silica reaction in accordance with 2.2.1.3.3.
2.2.1.3.3 Alkali-silica reaction
Each type of aggregate included in the concrete shall be classed as non-reactive (NR), potentially-
reactive (PR), or potentially reactive with pessimum effect (PRP). This classification shall be
undertaken by a specialist laboratory, in accordance with AFNOR documentation FD P 18-542.
Product qualification shall be carried out according to “Recommendations for the prevention of
damage by the alkali-aggregate reaction” (LCPC, June 1994).
The prevention level with respect to alkali-silica reaction is level C.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 246 of 405
NR aggregates shall be used in principle. However, in consideration of the local deposits, the use of
PR or PRP aggregates is permitted on condition that the instructions given in 2.2.2.7 are observed.
The alkali content of cement and concrete shall be controlled and assurance shall be given that the
alkali-doped formula is non-reactive, while evaluating the safety margin available with respect to the
reaction activation threshold.
2.2.1.3.4 Chloride and sulfide content
The chloride and sulfide content in aggregates shall be such that the global criterion for concrete given
in 2.2.2.6 is met.
For this purpose, marine aggregates shall be washed with fresh water in order to respect the
maximum chloride ion content of the concrete.
The maximum size of the pyrite grains and other oxidizable metal compounds shall be limited to 2 mm.
2.2.1.3.5 Additional requirements for prestressed concretes
Aggregates shall meet the specifications of code A of XP P 18-545.
In addition to the requirements of XP P 18-545, the sand friability coefficient, according to P 18-576,
shall be less than or equal to 30 (Fs ≤ 30) and the fine aggregates shall conform to the corresponding
regularity envelope with the following specification ranges:
Table 2.2.1-1
Sievings
PERCENTAGE OF TOTAL FINE-AGGREGATE

Sieve in mm MASS
At least At most
4 94 100
2 78 92
1 57 77
0.500 33 53
0.250 17 32
0.125 7 17
0.063 2 10
The values given in Table 2.2.1-1 are for target ranges. Slightly different fine-aggregate envelope may
be accepted if the performance tests on concrete performed at the external fibres of the envelope
demonstrate the required performance.
2.2.1.3.6 Additional requirements for concretes subjected to the action of circulating water
The micro-Deval coefficient in the presence of water from coarse-aggregate, according to EN 1097-1,
shall be less than or equal to 25 (MDE ≤ 25).
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 247 of 405
2.2.1.3.7 Additional requirements for concretes subjected to severe freeze / thaw attack
Aggregates for concretes subjected to exposure classes XF3 and XF4 according to EN 206-1,
completed with a freeze map, usually given by National appendices to EN 206-1, shall not be liable to
frost damage according to XP P-18-545.
In addition, the water absorption of fine-aggregates and coarse-aggregates shall meet the
specifications of code A of XP P 18-545 (W A24 ≤ 2.5%).
2.2.1.3.8 Qualification, suitability and conformity control tests
Aggregates shall satisfy:

− the qualification tests (see quarry file in 2.2.1.3.2), before their supply to site,
− the suitability and conformity control tests, before their use in concretes.
However, if test reports from a laboratory accredited by an independent third party such as the French
COFRAC may be supplied, which prove that the aggregates present some of the required
characteristics, the corresponding tests need not be repeated within the context of qualification tests.
Table 2.2.1-2 summarises the qualification, suitability and conformity control tests, also indicating the
frequency of the control tests during the production stage.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 248 of 405
Table 2.2.1-2
TESTS STANDARDS QUALIFICATION SUITABILITY CONTROL
Identification
of EN 932-3 X
aggregates
Grading by 1 per day

EN 933-1 X X
sieving of delivery
Density,
Water
absorption
EN1097- content: 1
Fine-aggregates and Coarse-aggregates
coefficient, X X
5&6 per day of
water
concreting
content
Alkali-silica
XP P 18594 X
reaction
Total
sulphur EN 1744-1 X
content
Acid soluble
sulfate EN 1744 - 1 X
content
Chloride
EN 1744-1 X
content
Chloride
content of 1 per day
EN 1744-1 X X
marine of delivery
aggregates
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 249 of 405
Table 2.2.1-2 (end)
TESTS STANDARDS QUALIFICATION Suitability CONTROL
Sand friability P 18-576 X

Fine-aggregates O/D
Cleanliness: Sand EN 933-8 1 per day

1<D≤4 mm
equivalent or X X
EN 933-9 of delivery
methylene blue
1 per
Organic matter: month for
EN 1744-1 X X
colorimetric test alluvial
materials
Micro-Deval in the
presence of water
(for concretes
EN 1097-1 X
subjected to the
action of
circulating water)
(d≥2 mm-D≤63 mm)
Coarse aggregates
Los Angeles EN 1097- 2 X X

d/D
EN 1367-1or
Freeze thaw
2, EN1097-2 X
resistance
or 6
Surface 1 per day

EN 933-1 X X
cleanliness : fines of delivery
1 per
Flakiness Index EN 933-3 X X
week
FILLERS 0/D (D<2mm)
Grading by air jet 1 per day

EN933-10 X X
sieving of delivery
Cleanliness: 1 per day

EN 933-9 X X
Methylene blue of delivery
Alkali-silica
XP P18-594 X
reaction
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 250 of 405
2.2.1.3.9 Delivery and storage conditions
Aggregates of different types (distinct codes, grading classes, etc) shall be stored in separate batches
to avoid mixing.
Delivery capacities and/or storage on, or close to the site, shall be large enough to ensure that
concreting of the largest elements can be performed in a continuous way. Storage and circulation
areas around the stored material shall be drained and covered with a concrete layer, or treated to
ensure equivalent cleanliness conditions.
All precautions shall be taken to avoid segregation of aggregates during storage or when taken from
storage, and to prevent mud, which can accumulate around the storage areas and in the bottom of
silos, from being mixed into concretes or mortars.
2.2.1.4 ADDITIONS
2.2.1.4.1 General information
An addition is a finely divided material used in concrete in order to improve certain properties, or to
achieve special properties (EN 206-1). Standardized inorganic additions are:
− fly ash;
− calcareous addition;
− siliceous addition;
− silica fume;
− ground granulated blast furnace slag.
Paragraph 2.2.1.4 does not deal directly with main constituents added to clinker in compound
cements.
2.2.1.4.2 General characteristics
During the checks and controls performed upon reception of the additions, quick identification tests
shall be performed before transfer to the silo.
2.2.1.4.3 Delivery and storage condition
The delivery conditions of cements specified in 2.2.1.2.8 also apply to additions.
Additions are stored in a silo. Delivery capacities and/or storage on site shall ensure that concreting of
the largest elements can be performed in a continuous way.
In the case of bulk transport by a leaktight road tank, a cleanliness certificate for each tank shall be
appended to the delivery sheet.
Precautionary sampling of 5 kg of additions shall be performed on each batch upon delivery on site.
The sample shall be placed in watertight packaging and stored in a dry room.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 251 of 405
2.2.1.4.4 Fly-ash
Fly ash shall comply with EN 450-1.
1- Physical and chemical characteristics
In addition to the requirements of EN 450-1, the water requirement is subject to determination in

accordance with NF P 18-507. An acceptable variation range shall be set using average values
measured during the concrete qualification and suitability tests.
Fly ash shall conform to the class B specifications of EN 450-1 as a minimum.
The specifications of class A of EN 450-1 shall be met if fly-ash is used in concrete subjected to
exposure classes XF3 or XF4 according to EN 206-1, completed with a freeze map usually given by
National Appendices to EN 206-1.
2- Checks and controls upon reception

Checks and controls shall be carried out on each batch of fly ash delivered on site.
The delivery inspection shall be supported by:
− checking of the delivery schedule;
− a quick identification test;
− a fineness test, according to the method described in EN 451-2. The results shall comply with
the specifications of EN 450-1.
2.2.1.4.5 Calcareous addition
Calcareous addition shall comply with NF P 18-508.
As a complement to NF P 18-508, the water requirement is subject to determination in accordance

with NF P 18-507. An acceptable variation range of this value shall be set from average values
measured during the concrete qualification and suitability tests.

The following checks and controls shall be performed on each batch of calcareous addition delivered
on site:
− checking of the delivery schedule,
− a quick identification test,
− control of grading and fineness (Blaine specific surface), in accordance with the standards
referenced in NF P 18-508. The result shall conform to the specifications of NF P 18-508.
2.2.1.4.6 Siliceous addition
Siliceous addition shall comply with NF P 18-509.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 252 of 405
As a complement to NF P 18-509, the water requirement shall be determined in accordance with NF P

18-507. An acceptable variation range shall be set from average values measured during the concrete
qualification and suitability.
If siliceous addition is used in prestressed concrete, it shall observe the type A specifications of NF P
18-509.
The following checks and controls shall be performed on each batch of siliceous addition delivered on
site:
− control of granularity and fineness (Blaine specific surface), in accordance with the standards
referenced in NF P 18-509. The result shall conform to the specifications of NF P 18-509 for
the type of siliceous addition and density concerned.
2.2.1.4.7 Silica fume
Silica fume shall comply with EN 13263.
Silica fume shall meet the specifications of class 1 of EN 13263.
2- Silica fume production workshops and treatment centres
The choice of manufacturing workshop and treatment center shall be justified. No changes to these
items are permitted during the works without renewed justification.
The following checks and controls shall be performed on each batch of silica fume delivered to the
site:
− verification of bulk density: the result shall be within the variation range of the Supplier’s data
sheet.
2.2.1.4.8 Ground granulated blast furnace slag
Ground granulated blast furnace slag shall conform to EN 15167-1. The 28-day activity index shall be
declared.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 253 of 405
The following checks and controls shall be performed on each batch of ground granulated blast
furnace slag delivered to the site:
− control of fineness (Blaine specific surface), in accordance with the standard referenced in EN
15167-1. The result shall conform to the specification of EN 15167-1.
2.2.1.5 ADMIXTURES AND CURING COMPOUNDS
Admixtures and curing compounds shall be certified for conformity by admission to the mark “NF –
Adjuvants pour bétons, mortiers et coulis, produits de cure” (Admixtures for concrete, mortar, grout
and curing compounds).
The conditions of use of admixture and curing compounds shall conform to those given by the
manufacturer in the technical manual. Use of products beyond the use-by date on the Manufacturer’s
certificate is not permitted.
Admixtures and curing compounds shall be stored in an area protecting them from the elements
(particularly frost), by observing the conditions of storage required by the Manufacturer in the technical
manual.
2.2.1.5.2 Admixtures
Admixtures shall comply with EN 934-1 and EN 934-2.
The delivery capacity and/or the storage on site shall ensure that concreting of the largest elements
can be performed in a continuous way.
2.2.1.5.3 Curing compounds
Curing compounds shall meet the requirements of NF P 18-370.
The storage capacity on site shall be adapted to the curing to be performed.
For each batch delivered on site, the delivery schedule shall be verified.
Upon delivery of curing compounds on site, each batch shall undergo:

− verification of the relative density: the result shall be within the variation range of the
Supplier’s data sheet,
− verification of the dry extract, according to NF P 18-370.
2.2.1.6 MIXING WATER
Mixing water shall comply with the requirements of EN 1008.
The chloride content in mixing water shall allow the requirements given in 2.2.2.6 for the global
criterion for chloride content in concrete to be observed.
Seawater shall not be used for mixing of reinforced concretes, prestressed concretes or those
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 254 of 405
concretes containing embedded metal parts. Analysis of mixing water shall be carried out when work
is started on site, and performed at least quarterly thereafter.
2.2.2 QUALIFICATION AND COMPOSITION
Concretes shall be designed concretes and fulfil the specifications of NF EN 206-1, which are
supplemented by the additional requirements specified in 2.2.2.2 to 2.2.2.7.
The French annex of NF EN 206-1 is used as a reference (k-value concept – limiting values for
concrete composition, etc).
The type of concrete (strength class, target consistency, Dmax, grading, water content, type and
content of cement, etc) shall be adapted to the environment (exposure classes of NF EN 206-1,
structures, etc) in which it will be placed.
The maximum aggregate size of the concrete (Dmax) shall depend upon the dimensions of the
structure and the reinforcement mesh. Only concretes composed of aggregates whose maximum size
has been determined in this way may be used in a specific structural member.
2.2.2.2 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
Concretes are classified by strength. These strength classes refer to specific values of characteristic
28-day compressive strength for concretes measured on a cylinder fck or a cube fck,cube (EN 1992-1-1).
The corresponding strength classes are defined by EN 206-1.
High Performance Concretes (HPC) are characterised by a characteristic 28-day compressive

strength measured on a cylinder greater than or equal to 50 MPa (C50/60).
2.2.2.3 CONSISTENCE OF CONCRETES
A target consistence value shall be set during the concrete studies (qualification tests), and shall be
determined based on the reinforcement density of the structure to be concreted and the installation
methods planned on site.
Target values of consistence shall be given in accordance with the values of EN 206-1.
2.2.2.4 SPECIAL CONCRETES
The composition of special concretes (e.g.: self-compacting concretes, fibre concretes, heavy and
neutron-absorbing concretes, light concretes, sprayed concretes, refractory concretes, concretes
poured underwater, blinding concrete / mass concrete fill, etc) shall be justified on the basis of tests
validating their ability to satisfy the functional instructions.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 255 of 405
2.2.2.5 NOMINAL FORMULA
The composition of each type of concrete shall be defined by a nominal formula which indicates for
one cubic metre of placed concrete:
− the type and the mass (dry materials) of the various categories of aggregates,
− the type and mass of the binder (additions included, if any),
− the type and percentage of dry extracts and the mass of any admixtures and additives,
− the total water volume: volume of mixing water plus volume of water contributed by the
different concrete constituents:
o aggregates,
o additions,
o admixtures and additives.
2.2.2.6 AGGRESSIVE ELEMENT CONTENT
The chloride content contributed by all concrete constituents shall meet the following specifications:
− class Cl 0.20 of EN 206-1 for reinforced concrete, or Cl 0.4 for CEM III cement;
− class Cl 0.10 of EN 206-1 for prestressed concrete;
− the sulfide content of all the concrete constituents shall not exceed 0.5% of the cement mass
for prestressed concrete.
2.2.2.7 ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USE OF POTENTIALLY REACTIVE

AGGREGATES
When aggregates are potentially reactive (i.e.: classed as PR or PRP by a specialised laboratory in
accordance with AFNOR documentation FD P 18-542), the following instructions shall be observed:
− average active alkali content of cement < 0.6% ( in equivalent Na2O);
− average active alkali content of concrete (in equivalent Na2O ):
-3
o < 2.2 kg.m for coastal sites or for the inner containment, the raft, or the outer shell of
the reactor building;
-3
o < 2.6 kg.m in other cases;
− the non-reactivity test of the concrete formula given in 2.2.2.9.3 (alkali content of 125 and 150
% above average) shall be satisfactory.
2.2.2.8 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETES SUBJECTED TO SEVERE

FREEZE/THAW ATTACK
Concretes subjected to exposure classes XF3 or XF4 according to EN 206-1, completed with a freeze
map usually given in National Appendices to EN 206-1, shall be composed with an air-entraining
admixture in order to respect the minimum air content (4 %) of the fresh concrete prescribed by EN
206-1.
However, given the intrinsic strength and air-entraining effect of some superplasticizers, it is permitted
to forego the use of an air-entraining admixture for high-performance concretes (fck ≥ 50MPa) provided
that the instructions given in 2.2.2.9.7 are met.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 256 of 405
2.2.2.9 QUALIFICATION TEST
The composition study of a concrete comprises the determination of the concrete nominal formula and
the execution of the qualification test. This test shall be conducted early enough for the suitability test
to be performed before any concreting takes place.
The manufacture and retention of the specimens for this test shall conform to EN 12390-2.
The qualification test shall give rise to a conformity justification file.
2.2.2.9.1 Study of the validity of the formula
This study shall be performed on the following mixes:

− 3 mixes using the nominal formula;
− 1 mix deriving from the nominal formula for which:
o the quantities of solid constituents are those of the nominal formula, plus 2% and,
o the quantities of liquid constituents are those of the nominal formula minus 2%;
− 1 mix deriving from the nominal formula for which:
o the quantities of solid constituents are those of the nominal formula minus 2% and,
o the quantities of liquid constituents are those of the nominal formula plus 2%.
Each mix requires a sample to be taken, on which the following tests shall be performed:
− a consistency test suited to the workability of the concrete: slump test in accordance with
EN 12350-2, or a flow table test in accordance with EN 12350-5 (except for self-compacting
concrete ),
− an air content test of the fresh concrete according to EN 12350-7,
− a working time test, at a temperature representative of foreseeable concreting conditions, by
regular measurement of the consistency with respect to time in accordance with the test suited
to the workability of the concrete,
− a 28-day compressive strength test measured on three specimens in accordance with
EN 12390-3. The result retained is taken as equal to the arithmetic average of the
measurements taken from the three specimens,
− a density test, in accordance with EN 12390-7. The result retained is taken as equal to the
arithmetic average of the measurements taken from three specimens for the determination of
the 28-day compressive strength,
− a porosity test according to NF P 18-459 or an equivalent standard, subject to approval.
Cements for the qualification test shall undergo a compressive strength test in accordance with EN
196-1 and sampling for retention.
The qualification test is considered satisfactory if the following conditions are all satisfied:
− all the consistency results shall lie within the tolerance interval relative to the target
consistency value. The tolerances are given in EN 206-1,
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 257 of 405
− the arithmetic average (fcm) of the results retained for the 28-day compressive strength, from
the three mixes made using the nominal formula, shall satisfy the two following conditions:
o fcm > fck + CE - (Cmoy - 3Sc) +3,
o fcm > 1.2.fck if fck < 50 MPa,
1.15.fck if fck > 50 MPa.
− the results fc retained for the 28-day compressive strength, performed on each of the derived
mixes, shall satisfy the two following conditions:
o fc > fck + CE - (Cmoy - 3Sc);
o fc > 1.1 fck.
In these inequalities (the values being expressed in MPa):

− fcm is the arithmetic average of the results retained for the 28-day compressive strength
calculated from the three nominal mixes (3 specimens each),
− fc is the 28-day compressive strength value retained, calculated from a derived mix (3
specimens),
− fck is the characteristic value required for the 28-day compressive strength,
− CE is the 28-day compressive strength of the cement used for the qualification test,
− Cmoy is the average value of the 28-day compressive strength of the cement, observed by the
supplier during the six months before the qualification test,
− Sc is the standard deviation of the values used to determine Cmoy.
NOTE These conditions are valid for testing with both cylinders (fck, fcm) or cubes (fck,cube, fcm,cube ).
2.2.2.9.2 Sensitivity study of the formula
A sensitivity study shall be performed on the following mixes:

− 2 mixes derived from the nominal formula by modification of the quantity of cement by +7.5%
for one and – 7.5% for the other,
− 2 mixes derived from the nominal formula by modification of the quantity of mixing water by +
7.5% for one and – 7.5% for the other,
− 2 mixes derived from the nominal formula by modification of the quantity of admixture by +
7.5% for one and – 7.5% for the other,
− For each type of addition, including silica fume, 2 mixes derived from the nominal formula by
modification of the quantity of the addition by + 7.5% for one and – 7.5% for the other.
Each mix gives rise to a sample, on which the following tests shall be conducted:
− A consistency test suited to the workability of the concrete: (slump test in accordance with EN
12350-2), or a flow table test in accordance with EN 12350-5 (except for self-compacting
concrete),
− A 28-day compressive strength test measured on three specimens in accordance with EN
12390-3. The result retained is taken as equal to the arithmetic average of the measurements
taken from the three specimens.
This study shall be subject to an analysis. Specific manufacturing controls may be imposed,
depending on the conclusions of this study.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 258 of 405
2.2.2.9.3 Additional instructions for use of potentially reactive aggregates
The qualification study also comprises a non-reactivity test of the nominal formula. This test is
conducted in accordance with NF P 18-454, supplemented as follows:
− Dosage of alkalis at 150% of the initial quantity determined in accordance with NF P 18-454
for coastal sites or for concrete to be used for the inner containment, rafts or for the outer shell
of the Reactor Building,
− Dosage of alkalis at 125% of the initial quantity determined in accordance with NF P 18-454 in
all other cases,
− Measurement of dimensional variations as per the time limits set out in NF P 18-454 up to 9
months. The specimen shall show expansion of less than 0.02% at 9 months to be
satisfactory.
Furthermore, a test shall be conducted with an alkali content higher than 150% of the initial quantity, in
order to determine whether a reaction will occur (e.g.: 200 %).
2.2.2.9.4 Additional instructions for prestressed concretes
The qualification test shall also include (3 specimens per mix):
− a 28-day static modulus of elasticity test (3 mixes as per the nominal formula) in accordance
with ISO 1920-10:2010 (secant modulus Ecm according to EN 1992-1-1);
− a 28-day tensile splitting strength test, according to EN 12390-6 (3 mixes as per the nominal
formula and 2 derived mixes);
− A drying shrinkage and creep test, following a pre-approved procedure.
The qualification test shall be considered satisfactory if, in addition to the specifications of 2.2.2.9.1:
− the result of the 28-day static modulus of elasticity is greater than or equal to 35 GPa,
− the results of the tensile splitting tests are greater than or equal to the value taken into account
at the design stage.
2.2.2.9.5 Additional instructions for large volumes of concrete (raft, inner containment wall,
etc)
The qualification test shall also include determination of the temperature rise of the nominal concrete
formula during setting, according to one of the following processes:
− Numerical simulation by means of a software program;
− Concreting of a mock-up or section of the structure representative of the dimensions of the
structure (thickness in particular).
The qualification test is considered satisfactory if, in addition to the specifications of 2.2.2.9.1, the
following conditions are met:
− To minimize cracking: ∆Tmax < 40 °C
∆Tmax represents the maximum temperature rise linked to hydration of the binder with respect
to the temperature of fresh concrete.
Depending on the results of this study, provisions during execution shall be taken to limit the
thermal gradient between the core and the skin of the concrete in formwork, the cooling rate of
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 259 of 405
the concrete, and to avoid thermal shocks during formwork removal.
− To avoid delayed ettringite formation:
According to the LCPC technical guide: “Recommendations for preventing disorders due to Delayed
Ettringite Formation" (August 2007), the "Cs" and "Ds" levels of prevention shall be required,
depending on the nature of the building and its exposition class. The "Cs" level shall be required as a
minimum, even for exposition class XH1.
2.2.2.9.6 Additional requirement for concretes to be placed by pumping
The qualification test shall include a pumping test involving a length of piping that produces a line
comparable to that to be used during the works under the most difficult circumstances.
2.2.2.9.7 Special instructions for concretes subjected to severe freeze/thaw attack
For concretes subjected to exposure classes XF3 or XF4 according to EN 206-1, completed with a
freeze map usually given by National Appendices to EN 206-1, all the test results on the air content of
the fresh concrete stipulated in 2.2.2.9.1 shall meet the minimum content prescribed by EN 206-1 (4%
minimum).
The qualification test shall also comprise:
1- For concretes with an air-entraining admixture:
A measurement of the spacing factor L according to ASTM C457 and/or (see below) a freeze/thaw
resistance test on the nominal formula, performed:
− in water, according to standard NF P 18-424; in cases of severe freeze/thaw attack with a high
degree of saturation in water, under the terms of EN 206-1,
− in air, according to standard NF P 18-425, in cases of severe freeze/thaw attack with a

moderate degree of saturation in water, under the terms of EN 206-1.
The qualification test is considered satisfactory if, in addition to the specifications of 2.2.2.9.1:
− the spacing factor L is less than or equal to 250 µm for concretes subjected to exposure class
XF3, or less than or equal to 200 µm for concretes subjected to exposure class XF4. If this
condition is not met, the freeze/thaw resistance test shall be performed,
− for the freeze/thaw resistance test:
o ∆l/l ≤ 400 µm/m;

2 2
o (Fn /Fo ) x 100 > 75.
2- High-performance concretes without air-entraining admixture:
A freeze/thaw resistance test on the nominal formula, performed:
− in water, according to NF P 18-424 in cases of severe freeze/thaw attack with a high degree of
saturation in water, under the terms of EN 206-1,
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 260 of 405
− in air, according to NF P 18-425, in cases of severe freeze/thaw attack with a moderate

degree of saturation in water, under the terms of EN 206-1.
The qualification test is considered satisfactory if, in addition to the specifications of 2.2.2.9.1:
o ∆l/l ≤ 400 µm/m;

2 2
o (Fn /Fo ) x 100 > 75.
2.2.2.9.8 Special instructions for special concretes
Special concretes (e.g.: self-compacting concretes, fibre concretes, heavy and neutron-absorbing
concretes, light concretes, sprayed concretes, refractory concretes, concretes poured underwater,
blinding concrete/mass concrete fill, etc) shall undergo a qualification test suited to their function.
Self-compacting concretes shall conform to EN 206-9, 5.4.1, 6.2.3, 8.2.3.2 and 9.9. Characterization
shall include mobility (in confined and non-confined medium) and stability (resistance to segregation
and liquid penetration) by appropriate tests (e.g.: L-shaped box test) according to a procedure
established for this purpose.
The test is considered satisfactory if the results satisfy the functional instructions. As a minimum, the
required 28-day compressive strength must be obtained.
When special concretes are consistently used for structural purposes (e.g.: use of self-compacting
concretes owing to reinforcing bar density), it shall be demonstrated that all the requirements given in
2.2.2.9.1 are met.
2.2.2.10 INFORMATION TEST
The information test may be conducted in the laboratory at the same time as the qualification test or at
the concrete workshop planned for the site at the same time as the suitability test.
The production and retention of the specimens for this test shall conform to the requirements of EN
12390-2.
To conduct this test, one of the following methods shall be employed:

− a 3-day compressive strength test on three specimens,
− a 24-hour compressive strength test on thermomatured concrete, according to a procedure
established for this purpose.
Before the start of works, in order to determine a minimum strength value for early age concrete,
below which there is a high risk of not achieving the desired 28-day compressive strength, the
following mixes shall be produced:
− 3 mixes in accordance with the nominal formula (mixes of the qualification or suitability tests),
− 2 mixes deriving from the nominal formula by modification of the quantity of cement by -10%
for one and -20% for the other,
− 2 mixes deriving from the nominal formula by modification of the quantity of mixing water by +
10% for one and + 20% for the other,
− 1 mix derived from the nominal formula by modification of the quantity of cement by -10% and
the quantity of mixing water by + 10%,
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 261 of 405
− 1 mix derived from the nominal formula by modification of the quantity of cement by -20% and
the quantity of mixing water by + 20%.
Each mix shall undergo:

− an air content test in fresh concrete, in accordance with EN 12350-7,
− a 3-day compressive strength test on three specimens or a 24-hour compressive strength test
on thermomatured concrete on three specimens,
− a 28-day and 90-day compressive strength test on three specimens.
Compressive strength tests shall conform to EN 12390-3.
The value of the compressive strength retained for the comparison is the arithmetic average of the
measurements performed on each series of mixes of the same composition.
A procedure shall be produced to enable the compressive strength results for early age concretes and
the non-controlled malfunctioning of the concrete manufacturing workshop to be interpreted.
2.2.3 MANUFACTURE
Concretes shall be manufactured either on site or in a ready-mixed concrete manufacturing

installation, admitted to the mark “NF – Béton prêt à l'emploi" (ready-mixed concrete).
The mixing time and the method of introduction of the admixtures shall be defined during the suitability
tests.
2.2.3.1 CONCRETES MANUFACTURED ON SITE
The plant and conditions of manufacture shall be subject to justification.
The equipment quality and its practical use shall allow compliance with the proportioning tolerances of
the constituents as prescribed in NF EN 206-1, in percentages of the required quantity (±3% for 90%
of measurement, ±5% for the last 10%). Mixing water, admixtures and additions in liquid form may be
proportioned by mass or by volume. The other constituents shall be proportioned by mass.
Scale adjustment systems shall be sealed or locked.
An alarm signalling the non-zeroing of the scales shall be provided.
Admixture proportion measuring equipment shall allow the proportions of each admixture solution to
be measured individually.
The concrete installation shall be fitted with devices to measure the water content of fine aggregates
(probes) installed in the hopper; the measurement shall be taken immediately before weighing. The
concrete installation shall be fitted with an indicator providing direct reading of the measurement
concerned. The water content of coarse aggregates is measured at least once a day. A facility at the
workshop allows the automatic correction of water quantities in aggregates to be introduced.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 262 of 405
A recording wattmeter shall be used to monitor the power used in mixing and to indicate the time at
which a satisfactory mixture is achieved. The mixing time shall be no less than the time necessary to
obtain stabilisation of the power absorbed by the mixing motors.
Operation of the installation shall be controlled by a programmer allowing automatic operation.
The workshop shall also be equipped with the means to provide automatic printouts for each mix,
showing the concrete composition, the measured quantities for all constituents, the duration and the
power required for mixing immediately before emptying.
When concrete is transported over a distance greater than 300 m, a radio link shall be established
between the concreting site and the concrete workshop.
The actual compositions shall be checked at least once a month by controls performed after weighing,
to verify that they fully conform to the prescribed compositions in the tolerance limits stated above. If
this is not the case, necessary corrections shall be made immediately and the equipment shall be
checked.
Weighing equipment shall be controlled at least once a year by the Service of Instruments and
Measures (SIM) or equivalent.
2.2.3.2 READY-MIXED FACTORY PRODUCED CONCRETES
Ready-mixed concretes may only be used following a justification of their characteristics with respect
to the requirements of this document.
Ready-mixed concretes shall be designed concretes complying with NF EN 206-1, supplemented by

the additional requirements specified in 2.2.2.2 to 2.2.2.7.
The ready-mixed concrete manufacturing plant shall be certified for conformity by “NF – Béton prêt à
l'emploi” (Ready-mixed concrete).
The Manufacturer shall establish a delivery schedule for each delivery, concerning the production
workshop, the destination site, the nature and quantity of constituents, the values of other required
characteristics, the mass of the materials and matter used in each mix, the exact time at which
concrete is poured into the mixing tank, and the working time.
All concrete constituents, including water, shall be measured and completely mixed at the workshop
before the mixing tanks leave the premises.
The manufacturing workshop shall not omit the tests given in 2.2.2.9, 2.2.2.10, 2.2.3.3 and 2.2.5.11.
2.2.3.3 SUITABILITY TEST
The information test described in 2.2.2.10 may be conducted during the suitability test. No concrete of
a given formula shall be placed without first having passed a suitability test. The following shall be
defined during the suitability test:
− the mode of introduction of the admixtures,
− the mixing time of the concrete,

ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 263 of 405
− the working time.
The production and retention of the specimens for this test shall conform to EN 12390-2.
The suitability test shall give rise to a conformity justification file.
Three concrete mixes corresponding to the nominal formula shall be sampled and tested as defined
for the qualification test. The results of these tests shall be deemed satisfactory if the two following
inequalities are fulfilled:
− fcm ≥ fck + CE - (Cmoy - 3Sc);
− fcm ≥ 1.1 fck;
In these inequalities (values expressed in MPa):
− fcm is the mean of the 28-day compression strength results for the three mixes (3 specimens
each),
− fck is the required characteristic value of the 28-day compression strength,

− CE is the 28-day compression strength of the cement used for the suitability test,
− Cmoy is the average value of the 28-day compression strength of the cement, as observed by
the Supplier during the six months preceding the suitability test,
− Sc is the standard deviation of the values used to determine Cmoy.
NOTE These conditions are valid for testing with both cylinders (fck , fcm) or cubes (fck,cube , fcm,cube ).
Furthermore, the suitability test shall include a measurement of the output in order to ensure that the
concrete formula, placed with the on-site equipment, leads to production of one cubic metre of
concrete to within 2%. The mixer shall be loaded to nominal capacity. This test shall be performed in
cylindrical or cubic containers, whose smallest dimension is at least equal to ten times the maximum
aggregate size. The concrete in these containers shall be vibrated the same way as in the structure.
2.2.3.3.2 Additional instructions for concretes subjected to severe freeze/thaw attack
For concretes subjected to exposure classes XF3 or XF4 according to EN 206-1, completed with a
freeze map usually given per National Appendices to EN 206-1, the suitability test shall also include
sampling and testing identical to those for the qualification test.
The acceptance criteria are:
− the air content of the fresh concrete, determined according EN 12350-7, shall match the value
determined during the qualification test, with a minimum value of 4%;
− the results of the other tests shall meet the criteria of the qualification test;
− spacing factor L is less than or equal to 250 µm for concretes subjected to exposure class
XF3, or L is less than or equal to 200 µm for concretes subjected to exposure class XF4.
− for the freeze/thaw resistance test:

o ∆l/l ≤ 400 µm/m;
2 2
o (Fn / Fo ) x 100 > 75.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 264 of 405
2.2.3.3.3 Additional instructions for High Performance Concretes
For High Performance Concretes, the suitability test shall also include the concreting of a mock-up or
portion of the structure representative of the dimensions of the structure (especially thickness), in
order to define:
− the overlap time between the rollers of a concrete column;
− the treatment time of the concrete joints (lift joints);
− the curing method.
These items shall be recorded in a procedure.
In addition, for prestressed concretes, the suitability test shall be considered satisfactory if, in addition
to the specifications of 2.2.3.3.1, the result of the 28-day static modulus of elasticity test, determined
according to ISO 1920-10:2010 (secant modulus Ecm according to EN 1992-1-1), are greater than or
equal to 35 GPa for each of the 3 mixes.
Special concretes (examples: self-compacting concretes, fibre concretes, heavy and neutron-
absorbing concretes, light concretes, sprayed concretes, refractory concretes, concretes poured
underwater, etc) lead to specimens and tests identical to those defined for their qualification test. The
suitability test shall be considered satisfactory if the results satisfy the functional instructions.
Specific tests shall be conducted in order to develop the procedure(s) defining the precautions to be
taken during the manufacture, transport and placing of special concretes.
2.2.4 TRANSPORT OF CONCRETES
The period of time between concrete manufacture and placing shall be compatible with the working
time determined during the suitability test.
Forms of transport that may cause segregation of elements, the start of the setting process before
placing, or alteration of concrete properties by atmospheric conditions (particularly by excessive
evaporation) shall not be used.
When concretes are transported in mixing tanks over a distance greater than a kilometre, these tanks
shall be equipped with a two-speed drum, one for agitation and the other for mixing.
Apart from plasticizing agents (to be confirmed during the suitability study), no admixtures or water
shall be added either during transport or on site.
Concrete may be placed using conveyor belts if concreting in large quantities.
Before the concreting phase, the following shall be defined:
− the equipment used and installation scheme,
− concreting rates,
− circulation zones planned for personnel,
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 265 of 405
− the precautions taken to avoid ramming of the conveyor belt,
− the maximum slopes of the conveyor belts,
− modifications to the reinforcement if necessary,
− measures necessary to avoid segregation at the beginning and end of the concreting
sequence.
2.2.5 PLACING OF CONCRETES
Placing of concretes shall conform with EN 13670, supplemented by the additional requirements given
in 2.2.5.1 to 2.2.5.11.
2.2.5.1 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE AND WIND SPEED
As a minimum, the following shall be installed on site:

− a sheltered recording thermometer,
− a recording anemometer.
2.2.5.2 CONCRETING PROGRAMME
The arrangements proposed for the placing of concrete shall be transmitted to the Project at least a
fortnight before the start of construction of each structure. These arrangements, along with the
necessary drawings, constitute the concreting programme and shall define:
− the concreting phases,
− the position and configuration of joints,
− the quantity of concrete installed per unit time and per formula,
− the overlap time limits between successive layers,
− the nature of the stop-forms,
− the equipment necessary for placing,
− the means of supply, including spare concrete,
− the total number of personnel, specifying their professional qualification,
− the emergency power supply,
− the arrangements necessary if the supply of concrete is halted.
2.2.5.3 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONCRETING
Water shall not be added to concrete after exit from the mixer.
If placing is performed with a pump, the concrete shall be mixed in a carrier engine before being
poured into the pump opening. Pipework exposed to the sun shall be protected in an appropriate
manner. If a product is used to allow the concrete to flow inside the pipes before concreting, it shall be
completely removed before the start of concreting.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 266 of 405
When concrete is placed, it shall be free from segregation and placing shall occur before the start of
any setting or drying.
The temperature of placed fresh concrete shall be between 5 and 30 °C.
The placing and vibration of concrete shall not provoke any displacement of the reinforcement or
prestressing tendons ducts.
Reinforcements protruding from a lift shall be firmly supported so that their required minimum cover is
guaranteed by the following lift.
Concrete shall be in perfect contact with walls or formwork and covers reinforcements along their
whole surface.
Concrete must not free-fall from a height greater than 1.5 m, unless it is well-proven it can stand it.
The fall shall be guided by flexible troughs and windows may be reserved in the formwork or in the
reinforcement.
2.2.5.4 CONCRETING IN COLD WEATHER
When the temperature of the whole site falls below 0°C (+5°C if slag cement is used or if the concrete
is to be prestressed or for High Performance Concrete), special arrangements set out in a special-
purpose procedure shall be provided and submitted for approval.
After a period of cold weather, normal concreting shall only be resumed when any damaged parts
have been destroyed and the Project has accepted the concrete joints surfaces.
2.2.5.5 CONCRETING IN HOT WEATHER
During periods of high temperature, especially if humidity is low, all measures shall be taken to
prevent from any adverse effects on fresh concrete (very fast setting, fast water evaporation, rapid
decrease in elasticity, cracking after concreting) or on hard concrete (rise in concrete temperature,
resulting in reduced final strength and cracking). The temperature of placed fresh concrete shall not
exceed 30 °C.
Procedures listing the precautions for eliminating the negative effects of these particular atmospheric
conditions shall be established.
2.2.5.6 VIBRATION
A vibration procedure shall be established, depending on the placed concrete.
Concrete compacting shall be performed by internal vibration (poker vibrators) except for special
cases where it shall be supplemented or replaced by external vibration (vibration of formwork,
superficial vibration, and vibrating table). In these cases, the effectiveness of external vibration shall
be demonstrated by scale-model testing.
Poker vibrators shall be used in such a way as to avoid all excess vibration, which may cause
segregation, notably in the case of plasticised concretes.
The dimensions of poker vibrator shall be such that they can penetrate easily between reinforcements
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 267 of 405
and, if the need arises, between reinforcements and formwork in the places provided, in such a way
that they cover the whole of the concrete. Poker vibrators shall not be used to push or spread the
concrete.
In the case of concreting on a slope, model tests shall demonstrate that vibration by pokers can be
correctly performed.
All precautions shall be taken to ensure that the poker vibrators do not enter into contact with the
ducts of prestressing tendons and the reinforcements.
Laying fresh concrete over a layer which has already been poured shall not be considered as a
construction joint, providing the second layer can also be vibrated (this may be recognised by the fact
that the poker vibrator penetrates easily into the layer and its trace closes when the device is raised).
When vibrating the second layer, poker vibrators shall therefore penetrate the lower layer. If the first
layer cannot be re-vibrated, then the second layer of concrete, poured over the first, shall be
considered as defined in 2.2.5.8.
Layers vibrated by surface vibration, using vibrating rams or floats, shall not be more than 20 cm thick
unless the possibility of vibrating greater thickness is demonstrated by tests. Vibration shall be
continued at each device position, until the mortar overflows onto the edges and through any openings
in the surface of the device panel. Successive positions of the device shall overlap.
2.2.5.7 HARDENING ACCELERATED BY HEATING
The acceleration of hardening can take place:

− either by preheating of concrete constituents or the concrete itself in the mixer or the skips,
− or by thermal treatment of the poured concrete.
The process, equipment and control methods shall be subject to a procedure drawn up on the basis of
a non-harmfulness study to verify that the thermal treatment proposed does not cause any
degradation in the medium or long-term behaviour of the concrete.
Probes shall be placed in the concrete to measure the actual temperature attained, and control tests
shall be conducted on the specimens following the same temperature trend as the concrete.
Measures shall be taken to avoid evaporation of water from the concrete exposed to air.
In the thermal treatment cycle for the poured concrete, the presetting time (first phase without heating)
shall be at least four hours and the rate of temperature increase during the following phase shall be
limited to 10 °C per hour.
2.2.5.8 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS (LIFT JOINTS)
The lift joint treatment techniques shall be adapted to the functionality of the part of the structure
concerned.
When the concrete is setting, the lift joints shall be completely cleaned of any grout, and all crumbling
or oily parts shall be removed in order to get a clean and rough surface.
For leaktightness function, the surface shall be completely cleaned of any grout, using a compressed
air and water hose to clean this surface, taking care not to remove any aggregates.
For cases where the mechanical functional requirement applies, the required roughness of the joint
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 268 of 405
according to the design assumptions is defined by EN 1992-1-1. Lift joint treatment techniques shall
be justified in advance with corresponding procedures.
2.2.5.9 CONCRETE CURING
Concrete curing shall be performed.
The curing class shall be determined in order to fulfil the requirements EN 13670. This shall take into
account the temperature, wind and relative hygrometry of the site, the composition of the concretes
(presence of slag, fly ash or silica fume in particular), the surface/volume ratio of the elements (slabs,
terraces, shells, etc) and the end use of the surfaces (surfaces intended to be coated, in particular).
Under no circumstances shall the curing period be less than three days. Curing shall be stopped
simultaneously for all parts of the area concerned.
2.2.5.9.2 Processes
Curing shall be performed by one of the following processes:

− continuous surface wetting,
− temporary impermeable protection of the surfaces (leaktight sheets, curing compound, forms,
etc).
The nature of the curing process and its application conditions shall be defined in a procedure drawn
up on the basis of a study to verify that the methods employed are compatible with the intended use of
the surface.
2.2.5.9.3 Concreting
For surfaces not in forms, curing shall be performed as soon as the surface condition is suitable for
concreting to take place:
− for the wetting process: when the surface of the set concrete does not risk degradation by
sprinkling water,
− for the protection process: from the start of setting (surface turning matt).
For surfaces removed from forms before the end of the normal curing period, curing shall be
completed after removal.
The wetting process or impermeable film shall be regular and cover the whole surface. Maintenance of
humidity shall be continuous; intermittent sprinkling is not permitted.
2.2.5.9.4 Special instructions for High Performance Concretes
The curing of high performance concretes shall be performed with particular care, owing to very low to
nonexistent liquid penetration. The curing of lift joints for High Performance Concretes shall be
systematic: it shall prevent the concrete from drying-out and cracking.
The curing method shall be justified by prior tests, as specified in 2.2.3.3.3. If appropriate, water mist
shall be sprayed between each roll of a concrete column.
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 269 of 405
Irrespective of the geometry of the high performance concrete structure, all necessary provisions shall
be taken to ensure normal cement hydration conditions and correct maturing of the concrete.
These measures shall also apply to surfaces without form (as soon as form is removed).
2.2.5.10 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR MARINE CONCRETE
A procedure for placing concretes at low tide shall be established in order to define the measures to
be taken to prevent material from being washed away when covered by water. When work is resumed,
the lift joints shall be washed and cleaned in such a way as to eliminate all traces of silt or sand.
Facings shall conform to the requirements for fine facings given in 2.3.1.3.
2.2.5.11 CONFORMITY CONTROL TEST
The conformity control test checks concrete compliance with the specifications.
2.2.5.11.1 Sampling
Sampling of fresh concrete shall be performed when the concrete is being used, at a time as near as
possible to the moment it is placed in the structure, for example when the concrete is poured from the
concrete mixer.
3
At least one sample shall be taken from every 500 m of concrete. The production and retention of
samples for this test shall conform to EN 12390-2.
Each concrete sample shall be associated with a cement sample taken from the batch at the same
time, at least once per day of delivery and per type of cement delivered.
This sample, intended to verify the cement characteristics in case of non-conformity of the inspected
concrete, shall be destroyed once the inspected concrete is passed for conformity.
2.2.5.11.2 Consistence control
A consistence test suited to the workability of the concrete (slump test in accordance with EN 12350-2
or a flow table test in accordance with EN 12350-5, except for self compacting concrete) shall be
performed on the sample.
The concrete shall be passed for conformity if the result of the consistence test lies within the
tolerance interval relative to the target value set during the studies on concrete. The tolerances are
given in EN 206-1.
If the result lies outside of the tolerance interval, the corresponding mix shall be eliminated and the
following mix shall be sampled for a new test.
If the result lies outside of the tolerance interval a second time, concreting shall be stopped until the
cause of the non-conformity has been determined and the settings have been changed.
2.2.5.11.3 Control of fresh concrete temperature
A measurement of the temperature of fresh placed concrete shall be taken from the sample.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 270 of 405
Concrete shall be passed for conformity if the concreting temperature is between 5 and 30 °C.
2.2.5.11.4 Control of the compressive strength of early age concretes
Three specimens shall be produced from the sample to test early age concrete by measuring the
compressive strength as per the process implemented during the information test:
− either after 3 days,
− or after 24 hours, on thermomatured concrete.
If a result is lower than the minimum value predetermined during the information test, all the items in
the concrete workshop that are liable to be affected are inspected, as well as the materials used.
If the results from early age concrete do not improve, concreting shall be stopped and more rigorous
controls shall be arranged. These controls may lead to the demolition and reconstruction of the
sections presumed to be faulty.
2.2.5.11.5 Control of the 28-day compressive strength
A test to determine the 28-day compressive strength shall be performed using the sample. The
strength shall be measured in accordance with EN 12390-3. The result retained shall be taken as
equal to the arithmetic average of the measurements taken from the three specimens.
The 28-day compressive strength shall comply with the requirements of EN 206-1, 8.2.1.3.
2.2.5.11.6 Additional instructions for concretes subjected to severe freeze/thaw attack
For concretes subjected to exposure classes XF3 and XF4 according to EN 206-1, the control test
shall also include a test to determine the air content of the fresh concrete according to EN 12350-7.
The concrete shall be considered compliant if the air content meets the minimum content prescribed
by EN 206-1 (minimum 4%).
The control test shall be suited to the function of these concretes. Concretes shall be passed for
conformity if the results satisfy the functional instructions.
2.2.5.11.8 Additional instructions for prestressed concretes
A 28-day static modulus of elasticity test shall be performed, according to ISO 1920-10:2010 (secant
modulus Ecm as per EN 1992-1-1), with 3 specimens per test. The test shall be performed for each lift
of the inner containment wall of the Reactor Building. The result shall be greater than or equal to 35
GPa.
2.2.6 EMBEDDING AND WEDGING PRODUCTS
Embedments and wedges shall be produced using mortar or micro-concrete, depending on their
geometry and the dimensions of the opening. The products shall be certified for conformity by the
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 271 of 405
mark “NF – Produits spéciaux destinés aux constructions en béton hydraulique autorisés d’emploi”
(Special products for concrete structures).
2.2.7 INJECTIONS TO COMPLEMENT CONCRETE LEAKTIGHTNESS
When an additional leaktightness grout is required (e.g.: at penetrations, sleeves, etc), an injectability
study shall be undertaken in order to determine the practical working time and the necessary viscosity
of the grout, which depends upon the geometry to be injected. Furthermore, a study of the behaviour
of the grout after polymerisation at a temperature equivalent to that of the reference accident shall be
undertaken.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 272 of 405
2.3 SURFACE-FINISHES AND FORMWORKS
2.3.1 SURFACE-FINISHES
Surface finishes of concrete structures concerned by these standards shall be defined by their texture,
their flatness and their shape defects. Surface finishes are divided into three categories:
− Rough finish,
− Ordinary finish,
− Fine finish.
The working drawings shall show the types of surface finish required on the various parts of the
structure. Unless otherwise specified, all surface finishes shall be ordinary finish.
If surface finishes bear false joints, concrete joints shall be made in line with these.
Flatness defect acceptance criteria for the areas do not preclude compliance with cover thickness,
consequently the minimum cover thickness of the reinforcements shall be strictly satisfied.
2.3.1.1 ROUGH FINISH
Significant irregularities are acceptable in rough finish as long as they are compatible with the
concrete thickness specified in the drawings. The surfaces are generally covered or not visible.
2.3.1.2 ORDINARY FINISH
Ordinary finish shall be free of honeycomb in concrete and shall be uniform in colour.
Ordinary finish acceptance criteria are:

− Flatness: observation of the following criteria (criteria P(1) of French documentation P 18-
503):
o Maximum dip under a 2.00 m rule: 15 mm,
o Maximum dip under a 0.20 m rule: 6 mm.
− Straightness of angles and edges: maximum deflection under a 2.00 m rule: 15 mm,
− Maximum formwork panel misalignment: 3 mm,
− Maximum height of irregularities (burrs): 3 mm,
− Texture: Average blowholes characterized as a maximum by scale n° 7 (identical to illustration
n° 7 in report n° 24 of the International Building Council (IBC)),
− Texture: observation of the following criteria (criteria E(1-2-0) of documentation P 18-503):
o Maximum area per bubble: 3 cm²,
o Maximum bubble depth: 5 mm,
o Maximum bubbling area: 10% of total area.
− No crack propagation,
− Cracking is not permitted in prestressed anchor areas.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 273 of 405
2.3.1.3 FINE FINISH
Fine finish shall be free of honeycomb in concrete and shall be uniform in colour. They shall have no
burrs, no removal of concrete skin, no damage to angles or edges, no grout runs, no layering, no
mottling, no rust marks, and no obvious concrete joint mark. Fine facing acceptance criteria are:
− Flatness: observation of the following criteria (criteria P(2) of P 18-503):
o Maximum deflection under a 2.00 m rule: 8 mm,
o Maximum deflection under a 0.20 m rule: 3 mm.
− Straightness of angles and edges: maximum deflection under a 2.00 m rule: 8 mm,
− Formwork panel misalignment: not exceeding 1 mm, with a linear value less than 1 m per cm²
of the area,
− Texture: Average bubbling characterized as a maximum by scale n° 5 (identical to illustration
n° 5 in report n° 24 of the International Building Council (IBC)),
− Texture: observation of the following criteria (criteria E(2-3-0) of documentation P 18-503):
o Maximum area per blowhole: 1.5 cm²,
o Maximum blowhole depth: 3 mm,
o Maximum blowhole area: 3% of total area.
− No crack propagation,
− Cracking is not permitted in prestressed anchor areas.
2.3.1.4 REPAIR OF POTENTIAL DEFECTS
Any defects regarding flatness, straightness, burrs, misalignment of formwork, blowhole and cracking
which do not comply with the specifications of the surface-finish considered shall be repaired as per a
special-purpose procedure.
Damage to angles or edges, honeycomb in concrete and anchor cavities of formwork shall be
repaired. Surface repair product shall be approved by the mark “NF – Produits spéciaux destinés aux
constructions en béton hydraulique” (or an independent equivalent third party), and justified by a
procedure which states in particular the surface preparation mode, the material application and the
associated inspections.
2.3.1.5 LINING OF FACINGS INSIDE THE REACTOR BUILDING
Where a contamination-protecting or dust-protecting liner is to be applied inside the Reactor Building,

functional tests shall be carried out to verify the ability of the coating to fulfil its function in normal and
accident conditions throughout the working life of the unit.
2.3.2 FORMWORK
The calculation and test methods for the determination of timber formwork used for the concrete
structure, as well as the dimensional characteristics needed for their effective operation, shall comply
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 274 of 405
with the specifications given in NF P 93-350.
Formwork and falsework shall comply with the specifications of EN 13670, with execution class n°3,
supplemented by complementary requirements defined in 2.3.2.2 to 2.3.2.8.
The formwork shall help to obtain facings which meet the requirements of sections 2.3.1.2 and 2.3.1.3.
Formwork installation and deformation are taken into account such that the structure shall comply with
the prescribed tolerances.
Unless otherwise specified on the working drawings, corners of posts, beams, wall nosing, etc, shall
be chamfered (2 cm x 2 cm), to prevent crumbling damage due to knocks or crushing.
Formwork shall be installed to allow concrete pouring at a high density, during all construction phases.
To this end, the formwork shall include removable wall elements when required.
The formwork shall allow correct removal of the mould, without any risk of damage to the structure.
2.3.2.2 FIXING FORMWORK INSIDE CONCRETE
Where the formwork involves a fixing system inside concrete, this system shall be designed so that
none of their elements shall be closer to the facing than the minimum cover thickness stipulated for
the reinforcements, after the formwork is removed.
When the structure has a biological protection or leaktightness role (retention structures), through-
penetrations are not permitted for the fixing system of the formwork.
When authorized, through-penetrations shall be filled following a special-purpose procedure. Cone

holes shall be filled with a surface repair product approved by the mark “NF – Produits spéciaux
destinés aux constructions en béton hydraulique”. The surface preparation mode, the material
application method and the associated inspections shall be justified (in a procedure).
The use of fixings comprising twisted wires or grouped parallel wires penetrating the concrete is not
permitted except for rough facings not in contact with water.
2.3.2.3 RESTRAINING FORMWORK OUTSIDE CONCRETE
Formwork restraint shall conform to the regulations in force.
Cables tensioned by hand winches between formwork panels and provisional anchor points are not
permitted.
2.3.2.4 PLATE ALIGNMENT
Plates embedded in concrete shall be positioned in accordance with the indications of the working
drawings, and observe the tolerances given in 2.13.
2.3.2.5 CLEANING
Before the concrete is placed, formwork shall be carefully cleaned to remove any dust or foreign
bodies of any type. Where necessary, cleaning shall be finished using compressed air. Windows with
a mobile closing system shall be provided, where required, to facilitate cleaning and inspection of
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 275 of 405
inaccessible parts, such as the bottoms and corners of forms.
If the same formwork is used several times, it shall be thoroughly cleaned and reconditioned. Holes
and other openings shall be filled such that no marks appear on the new facing.
Storage is carried out carefully, vertically if possible, to avoid all damage.
2.3.2.6 FORM RELEASE PRODUCTS
All formwork shall be coated with release products. These products shall be applied carefully, in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, avoiding contact with reinforcements, in an even layer.
Form release products shall not be incompatible with liner products.
2.3.2.7 FORMWORK REMOVAL
Formwork removal shall conform to EN 13670.
2.3.2.8 FORMWORK FOR EMBEDDED ELEMENTS
Holes and cavities provided for plates to be embedded shall be implemented by the installation of
formwork, with the appropriate shape, and arranged such that all elements may be easily withdrawn
when the formwork is removed.
The material used shall enable the dimensional characteristics of the opening to be respected, and
guarantee a tight bond between the embedding and the first phase concrete.
Formed holes shall be wider at the bottom than on the surface.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 276 of 405
2.4 REINFORCEMENT FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE
2.4.1 SELECTION AND ORIGIN
Steel for the reinforcement of concrete used in the form of bars, coils and welded fabric shall comply
with EN 10080 and with the following specifications:
− Steel for reinforcement shall be non-alloy steel quality in accordance with EN 10020,
− Indented steels are not permitted except for prefabricated elements of structures,
− Steel shall have certificates of conformity given by an approved and notified certification body
in accordance with the construction products directive 89/106/EEC modified by the CE
marking directive 93/68/EEC,
− The technical reference system of an approved and notified certification body shall be in
compliance with the directive, in particular with Appendix III. The technical reference system
shall include the requirements of EN 10080 with the following additional specifications and
additional criteria of conformity:
o Yield strength, Re ≥ 500 MPa,
o Ratio of tensile strength/Yield strength, Rm/Re ≥ 1.08,
o Percentage total elongation at maximum force Agt ≥ 5%,
o Ratio of actual to specified value of yield strength Re,act/Re,nom ≤ 1.3,
o For welded fabrics, the nominal diameter shall be lower than 16 mm and the shear
force of welded connections in welded fabric (Fs) shall be higher than the minimum
value: Fs ≥ 0.30.Re.An with An the cross sectional area,
o Suitability for bending shall be evaluated by bend and re-bend tests in accordance with
EN 10080,
o Relative surface of ribbed steel and indented steel shall comply with the values given
in the following table:
Table 2.4.1-1
Nominal diameters (mm) fR (Ribs) fP (indented)
5 and 6 ≥ 0.035 ≥ 0.035
7 to 12 ≥ 0.040 ≥ 0.040
14 to 40* ≥ 0.056
14 to 16 ≥ 0.056
* Higher diameter may be used with justifications of the conformity
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 277 of 405
o The assessment criteria for conformity shall comply with EN 10080 and with additional
value given in the following table:
Table 2.4.1-2
Characteristics Specified value Average value Individual value
Re 500 MPa ≥ 510 MPa ≥ 475 MPa
Rm / Re ≥ 1.08 ≥ 1.08 ≥ 1.06
Agt ≥5% ≥5% ≥4%
Re,act/Re,nom ≤ 1.3 ≤ 1.3 ≤ 1.32
ou Rm ≤ 650 MPa
o The suitability of steels intended to be re-straightened, shall be mentioned in the

conformity certificate.
Plain bars for reinforced concrete shall comply with NF A 35-015 and shall be ordered with a specific
test of the product (“3.1.” type certificate, in accordance with NF EN 10204). For these plain bars,
bond coefficient (ψs) and cracking (η) coefficients are equal to 1.
Welded fabrics shall comply with the requirement of steel reinforcement except for the percentage of
total elongation at maximum force (Agt) which shall be higher than 2.5%.
2.4.2 CONDITIONING
Steels for reinforced concrete shall be delivered to the site either in the form of straight bars, coils,
panels or rolls, or in the form of prefabricated elements cut, shaped and assembled in an industrial
reinforcing workshop.
The restraightening of deformed reinforcement bars accidentally bent during manufacture, transport or
storage is not permitted. Bars delivered with such defects shall be rejected.
After the elimination of bent parts, the use of the straight remaining sections is authorised to the extent
that their length will allow.
The supply of ringed reinforcements whose diameters are greater than 6 mm is not permitted unless
the site or workshop provides equipment for adequate restraightening. Fitness tests shall be
performed to determine the efficiency of the equipment. Acceptance criteria are defined in 2.4.5.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 278 of 405
2.4.3 TRANSPORT, HANDLING AND STORAGE
In accordance with EN 13670, transport and handling shall be organised and conducted so that the
reinforcement bars (reinforcement steels and industrial reinforcements) do not undergo any alteration
(accidental permanent distortion, damage, staining, or assembly rupture).
Reinforcements shall be stored in a special area either on site or, if separate from the site, at the
manufacturing workshop of the assembled elements. Storage areas shall be clean and organised so
that the reinforcement steels are not in contact with the ground or any damp environment and do not
undergo any alteration.
Reinforcement bars for reinforced concrete shall be classed and identified by type, grade, category
and diameter.
2.4.4 CHECKS AND CONTROLS ON DELIVERY
Mechanical characteristics shall be identified and inspected before deformed reinforcement bars are
used.
The identification shall consist of verifying the diameter, origin (the production plant), denomination,
identification sheet marking, grade, category (as well as the number of the casting or batch of the
product), and the certificate number of the marking “NF – Aciers pour béton armé”.
The inspection of the mechanical characteristics shall comprise a tensile test for the determination of
the yield strength, the tensile strength, the total elongation percentage under maximum loading (Agt), a
test of non-brittleness and a control of the mass per linear meter. These tests shall be carried out in
strict accordance with the applicable standards and with any potential complementary requirements of
the marking “NF – Aciers pour béton armé”.
Tests shall be performed by sampling every 1000 tonnes of reinforcements of the same commercial
designation and diameter at the time of delivery, or every three months if the delivery at the end of
each three months is less than 1000 tonnes. Controls shall be performed at reception of industrial
reinforcements on the site before storage and before using.
The use of plain bar reinforcements defined by NF A 35-015 is subject to their identification. This shall
consist of checking that the delivery sheet specifies their origin, grade and mechanical characteristics
(certificate of receipt as specified in 2.4.1).
Where industrial reinforcements are manufactured in a workshop external to the site, these checks
and controls shall be carried out when the products are received.
The reception of industrial reinforcements on the site shall consist of verifying the conformity of the
reinforcement package with the delivery sheet and a dimensional control by sampling, for at least one
element per delivery.
2.4.5 STRAIGHTENING, SHAPING AND PLACING
2.4.5.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Construction arrangements shall be compatible with the placing of the reinforcements.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 279 of 405
Concrete reinforcements may be straightened, shaped into cages or panels, assembled by ties or by
welded joints, on the site or in a workshop external to the site.
Straightening, shaping and placing shall comply with the specifications of EN 13670, supplemented by
the requirements defined in 2.4.5.2 to 2.4.5.5.
If reinforcements are straightened or shaped in a workshop, the workshop shall be certified “NF –
Armatures” attesting that the manufacturing quality for industrial concrete reinforcements conforms to
the specific regulation of the Mark.
If reinforcements are straightened and/or shaped on site, they shall comply with the requirements of
NF A 35-027, and with the specifications and controls of the present document.
Welding methods and welders shall be qualified according to the recommendations of ISO 17660 and
the instructions of the present document.
2.4.5.2 STRAIGHTENING
2.4.5.2.1 General regulations
The efficiency of equipment used to re-straightened ringed reinforcements shall be verified and
controlled by the following method:
2.4.5.2.2 Suitability tests
Fitness tests shall be carried out for the minimum and maximum diameters that may be used as well
as for the closest diameter to the average diameter. This corresponds to the current production by the
equipment in question. Intermediate diameters are covered by these fitness tests.
For each of these diameters, three specimens of sufficient length bearing the complete reinforcement
identification mark shall be sampled in order to perform the following controls:
− a geometric control after straightening: the height of the impressions made on the re-
straightened reinforcements shall be greater than or equal to 90% of the observed height of a
specimen from the same ring before straightening. The measurements shall be carried out
using methods with a precision of 0.01mm,
− weighing, for a check of the linear mass. The linear mass observed shall lie within the
tolerance interval established by the reference standard for the reinforcement,
− a tensile test (yield strength, rupture, Agt). The values observed shall satisfy the regulations
established by the reference standard for the reinforcement.
2.4.5.2.3 Manufacturing control
A check of the geometric characteristics and linear mass of the re-straightened reinforcement shall be
performed by machine and by the manufacturing workshop for a maximum duration of 9 hours. These
controls shall take place at the start of the work and be continued during the manufacturing process at
each change in diameter, reinforcement category or after the production of 30 tonnes of straightened
reinforcements of the same diameter and origin.
The acceptance criteria shall be the same as those for the fitness tests.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 280 of 405
The results of these controls shall be recorded in a test register.
Where any of the aforementioned conditions is not respected, reinforcements prepared under
unsatisfactory conditions shall undergo a specific treatment, the manufacturing conditions shall be
readjusted and a new control test shall be carried out after the adjustment of the equipment
concerned.
2.4.5.3 SHAPING
Shaping of the reinforcements in the formwork is not permitted, except for the closing of ties and
hooks of diameters which not exceed 12mm.
Cutting of the reinforcements shall only be carried out with the aid of shears or an abrasive disc.
Shaping shall be performed mechanically and smoothly, at a constant speed appropriate to the
ambient temperature, and adequately moderated with the help of suitable mandrels to ensure a
constant radius of curvature of the bent section.
2.4.5.3.2 Plain bar reinforcements of grade B235C in accordance with NFA 35015
The minimum interior diameters (in millimetres) of the shaping mandrels are defined by the following
table, in accordance with NF A 35-027.
Table 2.4.5-1
Nominal diameter 5.5 and 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 25 32 40
Links including anchorage 20 30 30 40 50 50 70 100 -

end
Anchorage 30 40 50 70 70 100 100 150 200 200
2.4.5.3.3 Ribbed reinforcing steel
The minimum interior diameters (in millimetres) of the shaping mandrels are defined by the following
table in accordance with NF A 35-027.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 281 of 405
Table 2.4.5-2
Nominal diameter 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 20 25 32 40
Links including 20 25 30 30 40 40 50 70 100 150 200 -

anchorage end
Anchorage 50 70 70 70 100 100 100 150 150 200 250 300 400
Bend - 100 100 100 150 150 200 200 250 300 400 500 500
If the ambient temperature falls below +5°C, the fo llowing precautions shall be taken for the shaping
process: either a reduction in the speed of shaping, or an increase in the diameters of the mandrels if
it is compatible with the structural conditions.
Complementary to EN 13670, it is not permitted to shape the reinforcements at an ambient

temperature of less than –5°C.
The re-straightening, even in part, of a bent reinforcement is not permitted except for reinforcements
which have a certificate of conformity for re-straightening after bending, supplied by an approved and
notified certification body.
Reinforcements shall be straightened according to EN 13670.
Any reinforcement bar which is excessively bent and therefore unsuitable for use shall be rejected.
2.4.5.3.4 Tolerances
Except for special arrangements, as specified on the execution drawings, manufacturing tolerances
shall comply with the specifications of NF A 35-027.
Tolerances on the positioning of reinforcements given in 2.13 shall be observed.
Execution drawings shall take into account analyses implemented to resolve possible construction
conflicts before commencing manufacture of reinforcements. These conflicts may be due to the design
of reinforcements, working phases, or the addition of tolerances for the reinforcements which have
been cut, worked and assembled.
2.4.5.3.5 Bonding mechanisms incorporated in concrete
Handling hooks put into place before concreting and used for the handling of concrete elements shall
only be shaped as B235C plain bars, and are subject to a specific product test. Reinforcements for
this purpose shall have a diameter greater than or equal to 10mm, and the diameter of the bending
mandrels shall be at least equal to four times the nominal diameter of the reinforcement.
The shaping of these reinforcements is not permitted while the ambient temperature is below +5°C.
Re-straightening of the hooks is not permitted – the design shall account for the dynamic effects. The
force imposed on a hook shall always be in its plane and be parallel to its legs.
The use of a lifting beam equipped with a balancing device to measure the load on the bonding slings
is compulsory.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 282 of 405
For diameters greater than 12mm, industrially prefabricated anchorages embedded in the concrete
shall be used with their specific lifting devices.
2.4.5.3.6 Reinforcement continuity system
For reinforcement continuity systems whose diameters are greater than 6mm, starter bar devices shall
be used which bear the corresponding AFCAB certificate. This certificate shall be supplied by an
approved and notified certification body, and shall show the suitability for use of the reinforcement.
Reinforcements left between two concreting phases shall be shaped or equipped in such a manner as
to avoid all serious safety risks to personnel. Constructive arrangements shall be taken after the end
of the structural design phase.
2.4.5.4 PLACING
Reinforcements awaiting the second concreting phase shall be protected against accidental bending
and shall be supplied with protection mechanisms with respect to the danger they may present.
The instructions given in 2.4.5.3.3 on the bending and re-straightening of deformed reinforcements,
shall be observed.
Unless justified, it is not permitted to use deformed reinforcements or welded meshes of different types
on the same structure.
Binders and spacers shall be sufficient in strength and number to ensure that concrete cover will be
respected and that reinforcements will not be displaced during the concreting phase, either due to
forces induced by concreting procedures (notably by vibration), or due to the movement of personnel.
Chairs and spacers supporting layers of reinforcing elements shall be specified as required.
Welding of reinforcements by welding torch is not permitted.
Installed reinforcements shall not present any defects such as cracks.
When concrete is poured, the reinforcements shall be clean and without loose rust or surface marks
(grease, soil, etc.) that may affect the adhesion of the concrete.
Reinforcement bars of reinforced concrete elements moulded in the ground shall be composed of rigid
cages and kept in place by appropriate means.
2.4.5.4.2 Fixing
If reinforcement is installed outside of the formwork its rigidity shall be sufficient in relation to transport
and handling stresses to avoid any permanent overall distorsion of the whole assembly or
displacements of the reinforcements.
Reinforcements shall be bound together by means of ties or field welds by resistance or electrode arc
under the following conditions in accordance with EN 13670:
− Ties shall be made of annealed mild steel wire. The wire shall be pinched tightly with pliers.
They shall be arranged at the points of intersection of the different reinforcements and shall
allow for the correct concrete cover, and all frayed parts of steel wire shall be eliminated
before concreting;
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 283 of 405
− Field welds shall not alter the mechanical or geometric characteristics of the reinforcement
bars in reinforced concrete (the welding methods and the welding operators shall be qualified
according to ISO 17660);
− A visual inspection of the welds in a panel or cage of fastened reinforcements by points of

welding shall be carried out in order to verify the non-alteration of the base steel. This shall be
performed for a maximum duration of nine hours;
− The handling of batches of reinforcements or prefabricated elements shall be performed with

the aid of specifically designed slings. Kinking is not permitted.
2.4.5.4.3 Spacers
The density of spacers shall be defined for each structure and shall be justified.
Only spacers in steel, concrete or mortar are permissible. However:

− steel spacers are not permitted to be in contact with the formwork,
− concrete or mortar spacers shall be of a quality comparable to that of the concrete in the
structure and shall be of the same colour.
Unless perfectly stabilised by their shape, the spacers shall be equipped with systems providing
secure attachment to the reinforcements to prevent their displacement during concreting.
2.4.5.4.4 Cover
Attention is drawn to the fact that the specifications on minimum cover given in 1.4.3.2 apply for both
principal and secondary reinforcements (ties, spacers or hooks). These specifications are equally
applicable to straight sections of splices where the continuity of reinforcements is achieved by a
mechanical joint.
2.4.5.4.5 Continuity of reinforcement
Continuity of reinforcement is normally ensured by overlapping and shall comply with EN 13670.
The cross-section passed by the axes of two reinforcements kept in continuity is parallel to the cross-
section of the closest facing.
If methods such as mechanical splices or welding are used, the following additional requirements shall
be applied:
1- Mechanical splice
The different mechanical splices shall comply with NF 35-020 (parts 1 and 2) and bear a certificate of
conformity supporting their aptitude for use supplied by an approved and notified certification body.
Mechanical splices for use in the scope of structural resistance against seismic hazards shall comply
with the following specifications:
− During monotonic tensile loading, the failure shall not take place in the mechanical splice nor
in the affected zone by threading or forging (zones defined as “dispositif de raboutage” and
“zone ouvragée de l’armature” according to NF A 35020-1, Figure 1),
− Mechanical splices shall satisfy the requirements of ISO 15835-1, 5.5 and ISO 15835-2, 5.6.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 284 of 405
Mechanical splices for use in the APC shell shall be tested by high velocity tensile loading. The tensile
-1
loading shall lead in displacement. The strain velocity shall be equal to 1s . The percentage total
elongation at maximum force (Agt) shall be at least 5% measured according to EN ISO 15630–1,
section 5 (manual method). The positioning of all couplers on the same plan is allowed if couplers are
forged and bonded and coupler external diameter does not exceed 1.6 times threaded bar diameter.
Preparation of reinforcing bars, such as threading or forging, shall be undertaken in a workshop

validated by and in compliance with the mechanical splice Supplier’s instructions.
The installation of mechanical splices shall comply with the Supplier’s instructions. In the case of
installation of mechanical splices on a plane, steel-concrete bonding characteristics of the mechanical
splices shall comply with design.
Installation shall be performed by personnel who are specially trained to use a specific mechanical
splice. The process of enabling shall be justified.
2- Welded joints
Butt welds are not recommended. In exceptional cases where they are used, the qualification of the
welding procedures and of the welders shall take into account real overall dimensions around the
weldings, corresponding to each particular case.
For the production of joints by welding (end-to-end or by overlap), a welding procedure, which
describes the detailed conditions of welding performance, shall be established. The procedure shall be
approved by the Project.
The welding method and welding operators shall be qualified by an inspecting body agreed during the
qualification tests and shall follow the instructions of ISO 17660.
With this end in view, a tensile test and a folding test shall be conducted.
ISO 17660 indicates the acceptance criteria. In addition to the requirements of ISO 17660 the
following requirements apply:
− Tensile failure shall only occur outside the TAZ (Thermally Affected Zone) and the bending
test shall be continued until an angle of 90°, with out causing failure of the assembly.
− Visual inspection of butt welds shall consist in verifying the absence of grooves next to the
weld and the absence of hollow fillets below the nominal diameters of the constituent steel
bars. The technical terms relating to defects are defined according to EN ISO 6520-1.
− Agt measured out of the TAZ shall be greater than or equal to the minimum admissible value
for steel.
− The folding test is performed until an angle of 90° without causing any crack between 0 and
45° and without causing any failure between 45 and 90°.
At the beginning of a manufacturing station, a bending test on a welded assembly shall be performed
to ensure the correct set-up of the welding station. The acceptance criteria for the tests undertaken for
production control are identical to those for the qualification test. This test shall be done every 9 hours.
If acceptance criteria are not met, welding conditions shall be rejected in the same way as for the
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 285 of 405
welding operator qualification.
In the course of manufacturing, unless regulations state otherwise, a folding test on a welded
assembly shall be performed at the start of the manufacturing process for a maximum duration of nine
hours. The acceptance criteria are identical to those of the qualification test.
It is also permitted to link two reinforcements by a strap joint (ISO 17660–1, 6.4). The plane passing
through the axes of the bar and the straps shall be parallel to the closest facing.
2.4.5.5 CONTROL OF THE REINFORCEMENT POSITIONING AND COVER THICKNESS
A systematic control of the reinforcement positioning and of the cover thickness shall be performed
before concreting, when the reinforcement phase is considered to be completed.
Tolerances for the positioning of reinforcements are given in 2.13.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 286 of 405
2.5 PRESTRESSING SYSTEM
The prestressing system shall have a European Technical Approval (ETA) and a corresponding
certificate of conformity with the ETA in compliance with ETAG013 delivered by a notified body.
All the constituents of the prestressing system shall be referenced in the scope of ETA, and jacks shall
comply with additional specifications given in 2.5.3.4.1.
The prestressing system shall satisfy the following (in order of priority):
1- The specifications of the present section,
2- The ETA,
3- EN 13670, 7.
Further to the demonstrations carried out in the scope of technical approval and certification,
additional specifications shall be required to prove that the prestressing system is suitable for use in
the containment of a nuclear power plant. These requirements are based on the feedback experience
of the construction of nuclear containments using bonded post-tensioning systems, and take into
account:
− The material and positioning of the ducts in order to control the friction coefficient inside the
ducts,
− The installation of strands, tensioning, and jack specifications in order to control possible
deviation between tension of the strands,
− The injection of cement grouts to ensure duct filling and strand protection in compliance with
the principle of the bonded post-tensioning system on the one hand and the corrosion risks
corresponding to the exposure conditions of the tendons on the other hand.
2.5.1 CONSTITUENTS
The constituents of the prestressing system are:

− Prestressing reinforcements,
− Anchorage components,
− Ducts,
− Injection of permanent protection products,
− Dynamometric systems.
Constituents shall be accompanied with a delivery sheet upon their arrival on site.
Constituents without complete documentation shall be rejected.
All constituents shall have the same origin and shall result from the same manufacturing during the
supply.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 287 of 405
2.5.1.1 PRESTRESSING REINFORCEMENTS
The Prestressing tendons shall be composed of class 1860 MPa strands which comply with the
following specifications:
− The nominal diameter of strands shall be 15.7 mm. Each strand shall be composed of 7 wires
and have a nominal cross section area of 150 mm².
− Tendons shall be composed of a maximum of 55 strands. The number of strands and the units
shall be defined by the detailed design studies.
Over class (greater class only) of strands may be used, but shall be justified in accordance with the
design and the whole objective of prestressing.
Strands shall be certified, according to the regulation, by the Approved Body (or Notified Body) as
defined by ETAG 013.
The evaluation of the continuous supervision of the following specifications shall be included in the
certification rules:
− Strands shall be constituted of special non-alloyed carbon steels according to EN 10020,
− Standard pr EN10138 (08-2009) applies, modified by the following specifications:
o The diameter of the central wires of the strands shall be at least 1.02 times greater
than the diameter of the wires of the peripheral part of the strands,
o The relaxation of the strands shall be evaluated with loads equal to 0.7 Fm,m and 0.8
Fm,m and the results shall be respectively lower than or equal to 2.5% and 4.5% at
1000 h. The relaxation test shall be performed over at least 240 h, and results may be
extrapolated to 1000 h,
o Corrosion strength under stress solicitation shall be evaluated with solution A.

Durations shall be greater or equal to 1.5 h and the average duration shall be greater
than 4 h.
2.5.1.2 ANCHORAGE COMPONENTS
All anchorage components must comply with the ETA certificate for the system (including the
permanent or temporary anchorage cap).
The bearing device shall consist of a cast-iron plate with a non-separate guide. The guide shall
possess two load transfer flanges.
2.5.1.3 DUCTS
Ducts shall consist of 2 types:

− Rigid hand-bendable steel strip sheaths: used for non-deviating horizontal tendons (loops with
radius of curvature > 80 times the inner diameter of the duct),
− Machine-bendable steel tubes: used for all other ducts or parts of ducts.
The limits between these 2 types of ducts shall be defined by the designer.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 288 of 405
Ducts may be subjected to a surface treatment (phosphated and soaped) with the aim of obtaining a
coefficient of friction between the strands and the duct less than or equal to that taken into account in
the design.
It is not permitted for the strands to come into contact with a galvanizing surface treatment.
Ducts shall be mechanically resistant (resistance to crushing during the pouring of concrete and
resistance to curvature during the setting).
Ducts shall be connected by sleeving (fitting for tubes and couplers for sheaths). The leaktightness of
connections shall be assured by heat-shrinkable sleeves.
The diameter of ducts shall be compatible with the strand installation process.
2.5.1.3.1 Steel tubes
Tubes shall be round section steel, fabricated from hot-rolled products and longitudinally welded.
Welds shall be smoothed.
The tubes shall be capable of withstanding the following shaping operations:

− Flaring at ends as the minimum internal diameter at bell-mouth ends is equal to the external
diameter of the tube in a continuous section plus a value justified in the dedicated procedure
of the post-tensioning specialist company;
− Bending by machine with a regular minimum radius. If the section becomes ovalised, the
minimum internal diameter shall be greater than the specified minimum value given in the
dedicated procedure of the post-tensioning specialist company.
The tubes shall comply with the requirements of EN 10224 or EN 10219.
2.5.1.3.2 Sheaths
Steel strip sheaths shall be fabricated from rolled steel strips of at least 0.6 mm nominal thickness.
Sheaths shall be phosphated and soaped. Other treatments shall require approval by the Project,
which may be obtained by justification using friction tests and the demonstration that the friction of
coefficient is lower than that obtained by phosphatation and soaping.
The sheaths shall be ribbed, to provide a transversally rigid duct and to allow longitudinal bending and
screwed sleeve connection. Sheaths shall be clipped helically and crimped so that the duct remains
sufficiently leaktight during concreting.
The sheaths shall correspond to the instructions of EN 523.
Sheaths shall comply with the following additional specifications in accordance with EN 523:
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 289 of 405
Table 2.5.1-1
Characteristics Minimal requirements
Nominal thickness of steel strip (mm) ≥ 0.6
Relative load for flexural behaviour Fpl/d1 (N/mm) =7
Maximum radius r for bending test (mm) 1800
Lateral load resistance F1 (N; without stiffener) 1500
Tensile load resistance F2 (N) 2500
Leaktightness (water loss in % of the initial volume) ≤ 1.5
Tests shall be conducted according to EN 524-1 to 6.
2.5.1.3.3 Heat-shrinkable sleeves
Sleeves shall be made with reticulated modified polyolefin, with a heat-fusible internal coating and
dimensions such that the external nominal diameter of the duct and the sleeve diameter before
shrinkage are adapted to the ducts and tubes.
The leaktighness of heat-shrinkable sleeves shall be tested according to EN 523. The leaktighness
shall be equivalent to the duct without couplers according to the requirements of tests described in EN
524-6.
2.5.1.4 INJECTION OF PERMANENT PROTECTION PRODUCTS
Two main groups of products shall be used:

− cement grout (in all cases except for instrumented tendons),
− flexible products for instrumented tendons.
2.5.1.4.1 Cement grouts
Constituents of the grout shall comply with the following specifications:
1- Cement
Cements shall comply with EN 197-1-A1-A3 and be certified for conformity by the marking “NF –
Liants hydrauliques”.
In specific cases, when non-standard special cements are used, an inspection equivalent to the
regulation of the marking “NF – Liants hydrauliques” shall be carried out by a laboratory accredited by
an independent third party such as COFRAC.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 290 of 405
Cements used in grout must be CEM I, comply with the requirements of EN 197-1-A1-A3, and certified
by the marking “NF – Liants hydrauliques”.Cements shall also comply with the following specifications:
−
-
Cl < 0.05%;
−
-
S2 < 0.01%.
Cement shall not contain any other element which leads to corrosion of the steels.
− Secondary constituents < 3%;
− Additives (Chrome VI reducing agent not included) < 0.1%.
Only the grinding agent additive is permissible.
Grouts shall not contain any other element which leads to corrosion of steel.
2- Admixtures
Admixture products shall be certified for conformity by an approved body in compliance with standards
EN 934-1 and EN 934-4.
The conditions of use of admixture shall comply with those given by the manufacturer in the data
sheet. When the use-by date on the manufacturer’s certificate is exceeded, the products shall no
longer be used.
Admixtures shall be stored in an area protected from adverse weather and particularly frost, observing
the conditions of storage required by the manufacturer’s data sheet.
Admixtures shall not contain any element which leads to corrosion of steel.
3- Mixing water
Mixing water shall comply with EN 1008 and shall also comply with the following specifications:
− Chlorides Cl ≤ 250 mg.l ,
- -1
− Sulphates SO4 ≤ 250 mg.l ,

2- -1
− ≤ 125 mg.l .
2+ -1
Magnesium Mg
4- Cement grout
Cement grout shall comply with the requirements of EN 445 and EN 447, with the following additional
specifications:
− The fluidity range shall comply with the manufacturer’s specifications which shall be justified
by the tests performed on the mock-up,
− For thixotropic grouts, the viscosity range shall comply with the manufacturer’s specifications
which shall be justified by the tests performed on the mock-up,
− The working time shall comply with the manufacturer’s specifications which shall specify
required fluidity ranges and, if needed, the required viscosity range,
− The bleeding of grouts shall comply with EN 447 after a period of 3h, 24h and until the end of
the setting of the grout,
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 291 of 405
− The volume change of the grout shall comply with EN 447 at 24 h and until the end of setting
of the grout,
− The beginning and end of the setting of the grout shall be measured, declared and shall
comply with manufacturing specifications,
− Bleed water shall be reabsorbed at the end of setting of the grout,
− Bending strength of the grout according to EN 196-1 shall be at least 4 MPa at 28 days,
−
-
Capillary absorption at 28 days shall be lower than 1 g.cm ²,
− Shrinkage at 28 days shall be measured and declared.
Ready mix grout which complies with the requirements noted above may be used.
2.5.1.4.2 Flexible products
Wax shall be used. Other products may be used with a specific justification in order to show that these
products are stable and are able to protect the constituent of the prestressing system for the
applicable working life.
These Flexible products used shall satisfy the specifications of ETAG 013. The products shall have a
European Technical Approval (ETA) and a corresponding certificate of conformity with the ETA in
compliance with ETAG 013, delivered by a notified body.
2.5.1.5 DYNAMOMETRIC SYSTEMS
These systems shall be interposed between the anchor block (or anchor head) and its support plate.
They shall enable the load monitoring of the instrumented tendon.
Tendons instrumented in this way shall be injected with flexible products (see 2.5.1.4.2).
2.5.2 CONSTITUENT TESTS AND CONTROLS
2.5.2.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
All metallic constituents shall be stored in a closed and ventilated dry area.
2.5.2.2 STRANDS
In addition to the controls specified by the regulation in force, the following relaxation tests shall be
performed on samples taken from the batches at the beginning, middle and end of strand fabrication
corresponding to the beginning, middle and end of strand installation:
− Three relaxation tests on the strand shall be conducted per structure, at 20 °C under a load of
0.7 Fm,m (Mean of actual maximum force), according to EN ISO 15630-3.
The acceptance criterion is the following:
o Tests up to 240 hours and extrapolation to 1000 hours: losses by relaxation ≤ 2.5% at
1000 hours;
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 292 of 405
− Three relaxation tests on the strand shall be conducted per structure, at 20 °C under a load of
0.8 Fm,m, according to EN ISO 15630-3.
o Tests up to 240 hours and extrapolation to 1000 hours: relaxation losses ≤ 4.5% at
1000 hours;
− A relaxation test on a strand shall be conducted for each structure, at 40 °C under a load of
0.7 Fm,m, according to EN ISO 15630-3.
o Test up to 240 hours and extrapolation to 1000 hours: relaxation losses ≤ 3% at 1000
hours.
If required by the design criteria, a relaxation test at a higher temperature should be performed.
The tests shall be carried out before the use of the strands.
Control in workshop and on delivery:
The following tensile tests shall be performed on samples taken from site and undertaken by an
independent laboratory:
− At least three samples shall be taken for each structure. Three tensile tests which allow the
following mechanical characteristics to be defined from stress-strain diagrams shall be made
on each sampling:
o The maximum force during the rupture test,
o The load at the conventional yield limit (0.1% proof load),
o The elongation under maximum force.
− A batch shall be considered to satisfy the specifications if all the results of measurements of
the maximum load, the load at the yield limit and the elongation under maximum load are no
lower than the values specified.
Results of these tensile tests shall be written in test reports. If the results of these tests deviate from
the specifications, the batch shall be rejected.
For each manufactured unit, the residual deflection shall be measured. The maximum residual
deflection shall be less than 25 mm, measured along a 1 m chord.
Temporary protection shall be put in place comprising oiling in the workshop using pure, water-soluble
oil and packaging adapted to transport.
If tendons are not installed within fifteen days after their delivery, they shall be re-oiled with the same
original products.
In addition to the conditions specified by the regulation in force, the weight and length of the strand
shall be indicated for each coil, as well as the identification number representing the characteristics of
the heat of steel.
Each coil delivered to the site shall be subject to a visual inspection of the geometrical appearance of
the coils and the surface condition of the strands.
Strands with oxidation traces that do not disappear after cleaning with a cloth shall be rejected.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 293 of 405
2.5.2.3 ANCHORAGE COMPONENTS
A verification of the material test certificates shall be made by sampling, as well as geometrical
controls and controls of the mechanical properties of the products.
Each element shall bear a batch marking enabling its identification since the metal-casting phase, and
its date and place of fabrication.
The following specific conditions shall be verified before placing of components:
For anchor blocks:

− The support surface of the anchor block shall be free of scale;
− Tapered holes shall be free of oxidation and pollution, threaded holes shall be free of any
pollution;
− Finished elements shall be grouped in homogenous batches;
− A marking system shall be used which allows the fabrication process to be traced back to the
material forming stage;
− Each element shall be embossed with the fabrication batch marking;
− The anchor block shall be numbered.
For wedges:
− Wedges shall be free of soiling and oxidation and shall be delivered in an oiled state;
− The elements shall be grouped in labelled homogenous batches;
− The labelling system shall enable the fabrication process to be traced back to the material
forming stage (casting sheet), taking in the thermal treatment operation.
For bearing devices (plate with non-separate guide) of load transfer unit:
− The support surface of the bearing plate in contact with the anchor block shall be free of
oxidation and scale;
− Threaded holes shall be free of any oxidation and/or pollution;
− Cast parts shall be trimmed and free of any silt or grit.
For grouting connections:

− The parts shall be as cast, trimmed, free of grit and suitable for screwing.
For grouting caps:

− As-manufactured parts shall be trimmed and any grit shall be removed,
− Tapered holes shall be protected against oxidation.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 294 of 405
2.5.2.4 DUCTS
2.5.2.4.1 Steel tubes
The necessary controls are defined by the relevant standard. The control equally applies to the correct
trimming of ends and potential surface treatment.
2.5.2.4.2 Steel strip sheaths
The necessary controls are defined in EN 523. The control shall apply equally to the correct trimming
of the extremities and potential surface treatment.
2.5.2.5 INJECTION OF PERMANENT PROTECTION PRODUCTS
2.5.2.5.1 Cement grouts
Before placing, cement grouts shall be subject to the following:

− For grouts which do not have an ETA: design tests with the chosen cement shall be carried
out, so as to determine the optimum composition of the grout. The reliability of the nominal
formula shall be justified. This justification shall include an analysis of the modification of the
constituents and an analysis of temperature change;
− Design tests for grouts which have an ETA supplied by a notified body are limited to
specifications and criteria added to certification referential;
− Suitability tests (carried out on the nominal formula adopted during the design study for
grouts) in order to ensure that the plant used on site will produce a grout with the required
characteristics.
At the end of this step, modifications according to those defined in the justification of the reliability of
the nominal formula may be necessary due to scale effects and efficiency of industrial equipment.
The tests and acceptance criteria of the constituents and the grout shall be identical to those given in
2.5.1.4.1.
At the upon delivery of the grout constituents, the following checks and controls shall be conducted:
1- For each lorry or delivery container:
− A check of the packaging, markings and delivery schedules,
− A rapid identification test of the cement, to detect any errors in the delivery ,
− A Tusschenbroeck test, in accordance with P 18-363 (the cement must not exhibit false
setting),
− A control of the following characteristics once per delivery:

o Determination of the setting and stability times, in accordance with EN 196-3,
o Determination of the density, in accordance with EN 196-6.
These checks and controls shall be conducted on the site upon arrival of the cement and before its
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 295 of 405
transfer to the silo.
Test measurements shall be taken in accordance with EN 196-7 upon arrival of the cement on the
site. Five kilograms of tested cement shall be reserved for precautionary measurements.
The results shall meet the specifications of EN 197-1 for the cement grade considered.
2- A test of the 28-day strength, twice for each tendon category:
These tests shall be conducted in accordance with EN 196-1. The result shall comply with the
specifications of EN 197-1 for the cement grade considered.
For each batch of admixtures delivered on site, the following controls shall be performed in addition to
a check of the delivery schedule:
− A control of the relative density,
− A control of the conventional dry extract.
The tests and results shall conform to specifications of EN 934-4.
An analysis of the mixing water used shall be performed every six months or before each series of
grouts. The results shall conform to specifications of 2.5.1.4.1.
2.5.2.5.2 Flexible and fusible products
It shall be verified that these products have a certificate of compliance with the specifications of the
supplier and the results of the internal inspections performed.
2.5.2.6 DYNAMOMETRIC SYSTEMS
Controls on adaptors, load cells, and support plates shall be similar to those performed on anchor
blocks whose contacting surfaces shall be parallel.
Dynamometric systems shall be subject to a functional test, a calibration test and a leak test before
delivery.
Functional tests shall be performed with the following specifications:

− Mounting of support plates,
− Calibration with adaptors by an accredited organisation, under various conditions:
o normal (position 0),
o turned through 180° horizontally (position 180),
o then turned through 180° vertically (turned-over p osition),
The dynamometric system shall be stored on site so as to ensure its characteristics are not disturbed.
The dynamometric system shall be accompanied by calibration sheets.
2.5.3 INSTALLATION AND ASSOCIATED CONTROLS
The specialist post-tensioning company shall be certified according to AC CWA 14646 by a relevant
organization. Their personnel shall be trained and qualified. These qualification requirements include
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 296 of 405
the following procedures:

− placing of embedded anchor and duct parts,
− placing of anchor blocks for dynamometric systems,
− placing and connection of the duct,
− tendon tensioning,
− injection of protection products.
Any deviation from specifications observed during tensioning or injection shall be recorded and
corrective action shall be taken.
2.5.3.1 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ANCHOR AND DUCT PARTS
2.5.3.1.1 Execution
Shape and leaktightness continuities shall be ensured throughout the length of the duct.
For concrete joints and construction joints, the duct length exiting the concreted section shall be
sufficient to enable the execution of the joint under good conditions.
The supports shall be rigid and in sufficiently close proximity to avoid all tangling and damage to the
ducts during concreting. Special supports shall be placed near the anchorages to reinforce the
restraining of the ducts before or during concreting.
The restraining of the ducts shall take into account concreting and vibration-induced loads. The hoops
and end plates shall be correctly positioned.
The upper extremities of the vertical tubes as well as the extremities of the horizontal ducts shall be
temporarily sealed by a stopper during the intermediate phases in order to avoid foreign bodies or
concrete entering the tube.
The position, shape and diameter of vents, drains, injection and re-injection points shall be defined
according to the ETA and EN 446 by a procedure and methods which comply with design
requirements and with the specifications on the outline drawings.
Embedded anchor components
The unembedded faces of the components shall be painted in accordance with an ACQPA certified
system which is corrosion proof in a highly corrosive atmosphere (category C5-M as per EN ISO
12944-2).
The parts of the bearing guides in contact with air shall be protected by temporary lubrication until
grouting.
Tubes
The tubes shall be provided as a straight section, then cut to the required length and bent in the
workshop in accordance with the indications of the working drawing.
The tubes are capable of withstanding machine bending, while observing the minimum internal
diameter.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 297 of 405
The adjustment of the tubes shall be performed in response to the positioning tolerances after
concreting, as given in 2.13.
After adjustment, the tubes shall be held by ties or welds on the nearest reinforcements before and
after concreting.
Sheaths
The sheaths shall be provided as a straight section whose extremities are trimmed. They shall then be
cut to the required lengths if needed, following the indications of the working drawings.
Sheath sleeves shall be manufactured following the same principle and shall be cut to the desired
length.
In the absence of surface treatment, the protection (being only temporary) shall be in the form of a
soluble or mixable corrosion-proof mineral oil.
Sheath adjustment shall be defined in response to the pre-defined positioning tolerances after
concreting, as given in 2.13.
The positioning of the ducts shall be made from the reference angle of the steel liner.
The method for adjusting the ducts permits positioning tolerances to be met after concreting, as
specified in 2.13.
The ducts shall be restrained by tying them on the supports placed in accordance with the indications
on the working drawings.
Duct connection
− Bearing guide - tube assembly
The connection shall be made by introducing a steel tube in the cast-iron element until contact
is made with the shoulder of the latter.
Leaktightness shall be achieved by gluing with a product specified in the approved operating
procedure and a heat shrinkable coupler.
− Tube-tube assembly
The connection shall be made by introducing a steel tube in a cold-formed bell-mouth at the
end of the other tube, or by means of an intermediate coupling.
Leaktightness shall be ensured by gluing (using a product whose specifications and

application mentioned in the technical notice shall be approved) and placing a heat-shrinkable
coupler of a length at least equal to the duct diameter directly above the joint.
− Sheath - sheath assembly
The connection shall be made by screwing on a coupler-duct.
Leaktightness shall be achieved by two heat-shrinkable sleeves, installed on each side of the
coupler-duct or at the ends of the coupler-duct.
− Tube-sheath assembly
The connection shall be achieved by means of a standard duct coupler (expanded at one end
if necessary to a diameter greater than the outside diameter of the tube). This coupler is
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 298 of 405
screwed on the sheath and fitted on the tube.
Leaktightness shall be insured by two heat-shrinkable sleeves.

− Heat-shrinkable sleeve
The sleeve shall be mounted across the span of the joint.
Sealing shall be performed by heating the sleeve over the whole circumference of the ducts,
using appropriate equipment such as a propane torch flame or a hot-air collar.
Before the couplers are placed, the extremities of the duct shall be trimmed after the cut is
performed.
2.5.3.1.2 Controls
1- Installation of the duct
All deformed duct or tube elements shall be rejected.
The control shall apply to the absence of oxidation (uniform colour and only slight local oxidation
marks are acceptable) inside the ducts or tubes, when these ducts have not received the surface
treatment necessary to reduce the coefficient of friction.
2- Before concreting
Before concreting, the conformity of works with the working drawings shall be checked. This concerns:
− The position and the observation of tolerances,
− The minimum distances between ducts specified on the working drawings, to guarantee
against potential intercommunications, and the strength of the duct attachments,
− The absence of holes or critical defects on ducts,
− A check of the duct section by insertion of a gauge corresponding to the diameter of the ducts,
− The correct execution of the connections,
− Placing of vents as specified in the drawings,
− Fitting of stoppers on all open-ended extremities to avoid penetration of concrete or other
foreign bodies.
Controls shall be performed when the formwork is adjusted and tightened.
Potential defects shall be corrected. Any corrections shall be reported.
3- During and after concreting
The maintenance of stoppers in all open-ended duct ends is subsequently ensured during all
successive containment construction phases.
2.5.3.2 INSTALLATION OF ANCHOR BLOCKS AND DYNAMOMETRIC SYSTEMS
This operation shall take place after verification of the surface condition of conical cavities of
anchorage heads and internal and external faces of the wedges.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 299 of 405
The installation of anchor heads shall be performed:
− Systematically at the time of strand threading for the upper anchorage of vertical tendons and
vertical tendons turned over on the dome (gamma tendons); the anchor heads equipped with
their wedges shall be used to keep the strands in position as and when the connection takes
place,
− Either during or after the threading of the strands in other cases.
NOTE When tendons are equipped with dynamometric systems, these systems shall be installed
before the start of the connecting operation.
2.5.3.3 TENDON INSTALLATION
Generally, tendon installation shall take place by pushing the strands.
The tendon installation system shall be described in a threading procedure.
Strands shall systematically be counted at both the “entry” and “exit” ends for each operation in order
to verify that the tendon is complete and that the provided surplus lengths are compatible with the
prestressing process used.
Tensioning shall be performed within 4 weeks after threading of strands, and grouting must take place
no later than 15 days after tensioning. If these time periods cannot be observed, temporary protection
measures shall be taken for the tendon, using a justified method.
2.5.3.4 TENSIONING
2.5.3.4.1 Execution
Tensioning shall be performed with the aid of a hydraulic jack, fully compatible with the anchorage
block of the system, in accordance with the programme defined by the designer, who specifies the
order of tensioning and the calculated elongation.
The prestressing system, including jacks, shall be tested in order to prove it is suitable for works and
to limit the differential loading between strands. The following aspects shall be tested:
− Its implementation in all situations encountered during works,
− Initial simultaneous tensioning of each strand of a tendon, with individual

displacements of each strand inducing a load between 10 and 15 kN for each strand
at the anchorage,
− Tensioning of the strands in a single stroke of the jacks (at least 500 mm) without
recovery of tensioning,
− The suitability for works of the jacks to satisfy the specifications shall be justified. This
justification shall be based on tests and include friction loss measurements in the
jacks.
Pure vertical tendons shall be tensioned at one end.
Other tendons shall be simultaneously tensioned at both ends.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 300 of 405
The tensioning operation shall be performed within 4 weeks of tendon installation.
For each tendon, measurements and various observations shall be recorded on the tensioning record
sheet, including any incidents that may have occurred.
The strand overlength shall be cut after acceptance of the tendon tensioning sheets and thorough
inspection of the working compliance with the specifications.
2.5.3.4.2 Controls
1- Determination of the duct/tendon coefficients of friction by prior measurement of the

transmission coefficients.
For each structure, and before the start of the first tensioning phase, the transmission coefficients for
two non-deviated horizontal tendons shall be measured and recorded graphically in accordance with
the method given in APPENDIX 2.C.
Corrective action shall be taken if the coefficient of friction does not conform to the theoretical value
defined in 1.4.5.2.2 (including margins).
2- Force and elongation measurements
The force applied to the prestressing tendon during the tensioning operation shall be measured with a
force indicator (strain gauges load cell). The force measurement of the load cell and the jack pressure
shall be recorded.
The corresponding elongation, obtained during tensioning, shall be measured with an elongation
indicator incorporated in the tensioning jack. The elongation measurement shall also be recorded.
The force and elongation shall be displayed on the control point in order to ensure that the operation is
proceeding smoothly.
It shall be verified that the force and elongation values are in accordance with the predefined values.
In case of an anomaly, a tension correction shall be performed in compliance with the statutory
instructions concerning the tensioning of prestressing tendons.
When the prescribed initial tensile force of the tendons has been attained for a value Fo at the jack (or
pressure Po), all measurements of elongation “al” deviating from the range corresponding to + 8 %, - 5
% of the calculated elongation “AL” shall result in a special test of the force-elongation (or pressure-
elongation) diagram.
If the measured elongation “al” at force Fo (or pressure Po) is greater than 1.08 “AL”, the tensioning
operation shall be stopped and a non-compliance report shall be issued.
If the measured elongation “al” at force Fo (or pressure Po) is less than 0.95 “AL”, the following
instructions shall be followed in order to detect the cause of the lack of elongation:
− calibration of the measurement facilities used;
− verification of the functioning of the jack, the pumps and tubing;
− de-tensioning of the tendon and sliding of the tendon in its duct to ensure that it is not blocked.
Re-tensioning of the tendon and, if the non-compliance persists, replacement by a new
tendon.
The de-tensioning – re-tensioning operation shall only take place under special circumstances and
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 301 of 405
requires prior approval. If the desired elongation is not obtained, cutting or sealing operations shall not
be performed.
The tensioning record sheet shall include the graph of tensioning force versus displacement. The
record of the tensioning operation shall include time, force, pressure and displacement. All information
necessary for the calculation of the elongation and for the checking of the tensioning shall be
accessible.
3- Measurement of wedge pull-in
At the end of the tensioning operation, the effect (force estimation) of wedge pull-in on the tension of
the tendon, during the transfer of force from the tensioning jack to the anchor, shall be determined by
analysing the record of the force-elongation curve.
The estimated force shall be compared with the design force for the net nominal re-entry value
specified.
If the recorded measurements exceed this value, retensioning under pressure shall be required after
markings have been traced on two or more other strands. The re-entry after transfer of the force to the
anchor shall be therefore measured on the new markings. If this second measurement is less than this
value, the tendon shall be considered as acceptable.
The acceptance of the tendon shall be subject to approval if the non-compliance persists, depending
on the way in which the sections of the structure in consideration are affected.
2.5.3.5 GROUTING OF TENDONS
Following specific methods of cement grouting with cement grout adapted to these methods of
injection, are required for all type of tendons:
− Method of cement grouting:
o for horizontal and vertical tendons, by injection from one anchorage to the other in one
phase, without the use of the different openings placed at the low points of the
deviated ducts (these openings are required to drain away either water before
threading or oil pulverization before injection when the delays between threading,
tensioning and injection are respected);
o for gamma tendons, by injection in two phases (vertical part then deviated part).
− Cement grouts shall be delayed and/or thixotropic.
Preliminary tests on several mock-ups shall be performed to enable quantification of the different
parameters and tolerances of grouting methods and the cement grout characteristics.
Specifications of EN 446 may be applied where they are not inconsistent with the specifications of
ETC-C.
Grouting procedures shall be documented and approved by the Project. They shall include at least:
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 302 of 405
− The description of the equipment used and personnel resources,

− The composition, characteristics and manufacturing process of the grout, the composition and
characteristics of the wax,
− The injection method,
− The order of injection of the ducts,
− The injection rates,
− The special orders and instructions to follow in case of an incident or when unfavourable
climatic conditions are concern.
The tendons shall be grouted within 15 days after tensioning, which may be reduced depending on the
climatic conditions at the site (condensation, fog, rain, wind, etc) and the exposure of the tendon
groups under consideration.
The ducts shall allow free passage of the grouting products and shall be free from foreign bodies
which may cause obstruction.
Tendon ends shall be equipped with permanent or temporary anchorage caps. The injection tubing
shall have an internal diameter of at least 38 mm.
2.5.3.5.1 Cement grout injection
1- Execution
Three models for each tendon type shall be tested (lightly and heavily diverted horizontal tendons,
pure verticals, "gamma” tendons).
The injection pumps shall be equipped with a pressure gauge with an accuracy of ± 0.1 MPa and a
pre-adjusted pressure switch. An indicating pressure gauge is placed at the entry of the tendon.
The flow capacity of the grout pumping station is between 15 and 20 metres per minute. After setting
of the grout, the mock-ups shall be cut in order to check the filling level.
The nature and frequency of the inspections to be undertaken are defined in Table 2.5.3-1.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 303 of 405
Table 2.5.3-1
Non-deviated or vertical parts Slightly or highly-deviated part of

Type of control
of the tendon the tendon
Ascending and descending part of the

Cross section of ducts Every 5 m *
deviation: beginning, middle and top *
Longitudinal window on
Every 10 m * Descending part of the deviation
upper part 17x40 cm
If, upon removal of grouting caps, defects are found which do not satisfy
Grouting caps the criteria, a sample of anchorages shall be cut transversely to
characterize the defects
* If a defect is detected, additional windows shall be opened to characterise the defects.
Acceptance criteria are listed below:

− For all tendons and grouting caps: wedges, anchor heads and strands shall not be visible in
any voids.
− In addition, for tendons:
o Ducts shall not contain free water or display potentially damaging cracks when opened,
o For pure vertical tendons and the vertical part of gamma tendons: no voids shall be
present,
o For pure horizontal tendons, deviated horizontal tendons and dome sections of gamma
tendons: defects shall not have dimensions (depth, width, length) that expose strands,
o For the descending part of deviated tendons: the volume of voids in the descending part
of the duct shall be limited.
2- Controls
On tendons before injection:

The leaktightness of the ducts shall be checked as follows:
− For ducts of horizontal tendons: once the orifices in the tendon are all sealed, except for the
injection vent, oil-free compressed air at a pressure between 0.5 and 0.7 MPa shall be blown
into the duct through this vent. It shall be checked that the pressure decrease does not exceed
the values established during the preliminary tests, conducted in accordance with the
procedure (losses shall be less than 0.1 MPa in 3 minutes).
− For the ducts of injected tendons under partial vacuum: once the orifices in the tendon are all
sealed, except for the exit vent, the duct shall be placed under vacuum through this vent. It
shall be checked that the pressure increase does not exceed the values established during
the preliminary tests, conducted in accordance with the procedure.
For the two types of verification, in case of non-compliance or failure indicating a local leak and the
possibility of connection with other ducts, effects on neighbouring ducts shall be investigated.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 304 of 405
On the grout:
Controls shall be conducted in accordance with specifications given in 2.5.1.4.1 and the measurement
results shall observe the criteria given in the same section.
For fabrication:
Fluidity:
− A measurement after mixing of each mix,
− A measurement after re-mixing of grout in each tank.
Viscosity (for thixotropic grout): a measurement after addition of a thixotropic agent in the mixing tank.
Bleeding and temperature:

− A measurement at each start of the batching plant,
− A measurement every ten mixes.
A measurement shall be taken of the bleed-water and temperature of the grout at each start of the
work station and every ten mixes, with measurements of the temperature of the water, cement and
ambient air.
The results shall comply with the service range determined during the suitability test.
Any mix that does not satisfy one of the criteria shall be rejected.
The mechanical strengths Rc and Rt, as well as the capillary absorption and shrinkage, shall be
measured twice for each tendon group.
During injection:
Fluidity or viscosity and temperature:

− A measurement at the start of pumping, for each grout transport container,
− A measurement before the restart of injection, in case of a pause of longer than one hour
during the grout pumping operation,
− A measurement at the entry and exit of each tendon,
− A measurement at specific exit vents for gamma and dome tendons.
The measurement results shall comply with the service range determined during the suitability test.
Pressure: the injection pressure shall be constantly monitored so as not to exceed the pressure limit at
the entry, which for each type of tendon shall be as follows:
− 2.0 MPa for vertical tendons or vertical parts of vertical tendons turned over on the dome;
− 1.0 MPa for other tendons.
For each duct, the progression of the quantities of injected grouts and the total quantity injected as
well as the duration of the operation shall be recorded. An injection record sheet shall be established
as and when the operations take place. The sheet shall record the results of the measurements taken,
diverse observations and incidents encountered.
Injection shall be stopped if any of the criteria are not observed.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 305 of 405
3- Anchorage zone protection
Protection of the anchorage area shall be performed:

− Either by injection of the cement grout covers, at the same time as the ducts (in this case, the
covers must be painted),
− Or by covering of the anchor block with concrete, made integral with the supporting concrete
by joint treatment involving scabbling, and if necessary involving gluing with the product
specified in the operating procedure.
2.5.3.5.2 Injection of flexible products
This injection process shall be applied to vertical tendons instrumented with dynamometers.
The ends shall be equipped with specific caps which take into account the strand overlength if
necessary. Furthermore, on the dynamometer side, an additional cap shall protect the tendon
head/dynamometer assembly from externally generated hazards.
1- Execution
The leaktightness of the ducts shall be checked before injection, in accordance with the process used
for the ducts of horizontal tendons (see 2.5.3.5.1). The products shall be melted as follows:
− Either on the site, following an established procedure,
− Or in the workshop, and then transported to site in a equipped tanker: the tank shall be
insulated with a system for keeping at temperature and/or heating.
The product temperature before injection shall be sufficiently high to avoid coagulation, but shall not
exceed 100 °C.
The injection shall be performed using a pump with a flow capacity of at least 10 metres/minute, in
accordance with the process described for tendons injected with cement grout in 2.5.3.5.1.
2- Controls
The injection shall be subject to the following controls:

− Measurement of temperatures at the entry and exit,
− Measurement of pressure during injection, and control with respect to the value prescribed,
− Control of the quantity injected with respect to the volume of the duct.
2.5.3.6 SUMMARY REPORT
All of the tensioning and injection operations shall be described in an analysis and summary report,
which shall include the results from the tensioning and injection record sheets.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 306 of 405
2.6 PREFABRICATION FOR CONCRETE ELEMENTS AND

REINFORCEMENT CAGES
2.6.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter applies to elements of structures and reinforcement cages prefabricated in a workshop
situated either off-site or in an external workshop, or in a prefabrication workshop specially built on the
site in the immediate proximity of the structures.
Only elements designed for prefabrication (with iteration with design phases if needed) may be
constructed as such and shall be approved by the Project. Where applicable, elements shall be
indicated as “prefabricated elements” on drawings.
Prefabrication of concrete elements shall comply with standard EN 13670 and the complementary
requirements of 2.6.2 to 2.6.4 and 2.2 to 2.5 for works on the site.
Forces induced during handling operations shall be taken into account during the design stage.
Lifting apparatus on the site shall be adequate with respect to the designed prefabricated mass in
order to allow safe placing of these elements.
Handling operations, including transport onto site and storage, shall be conducted in such a way so as
to:
− avoid all unexpected forces and excessive deformations,
− eliminate all risks of deterioration capable of damaging the appearance or durability of the
elements.
In particular, a calculation shall be undertaken in order to prove that the forces induced by handling
and transport are taken into account in the design of the prefabricated element.
Any incidents taking place during these operations shall be recorded. The element concerned shall be
isolated until the conclusion of the analysis of the consequences of the incident.
The execution tolerances given in 2.13 shall be respected, particularly for steel parts embedded during
the first phase (liners, sleeves, plates, pre-grouted elements, etc).
2.6.2 LOCATION OF PREFABRICATION WORKSHOPS
Prefabrication workshops may be situated on-site or in close proximity to the site. Existing workshops
may be used.
Workshops shall be equipped with adequate lifting arrangements. Storage and circulation areas shall
be planned in order to store the maximum amount of elements.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 307 of 405
2.6.3 PREFABRICATED REINFORCEMENT CAGES
2.6.3.1 MANUFACTURE
The instructions given in 2.4 shall apply.
2.6.3.2 MARKING
All prefabricated reinforcement cages shall be marked to enable identification. The marking shall
specify the conditions of use of the reinforcement.
Marking shall comply with the details shown on the drawings and shall bear the date of manufacture of
the elements, the type, grade, category and diameter of bars.
2.6.3.3 HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT
Transport and handling shall be organised and conducted such that the reinforcement cages do not
undergo any alteration (permanent distortion, damage, staining, or assembly rupture).
Reinforcement cages shall be stored in a special area either on site or, if separate from the site, at the
manufacturing workshop of the assembled elements. Storage areas shall be clean and organised to
ensure that the reinforcement cages are not in contact with the ground and do not undergo any
alteration.
2.6.3.4 CHECKS AND CONTROLS UPON DELIVERY
An inspection of the mechanical characteristics shall be carried out when the elements are received
from the prefabrication workshops, in accordance with the requirements of 2.4.4.
The reception on the site of the prefabricated reinforcement cages shall include verification of their
compliance to the delivery schedule, and a dimensional check by sampling, for at least one element
per delivery.
2.6.3.5 PLACING
The specifications of 2.4.5.4 shall apply.
The execution tolerances given in 2.13 shall apply.
2.6.4 PREFABRICATED CONCRETE ELEMENTS
The requirements of 2.2 shall apply. Any adaptations shall be justified.
2.6.4.1 MANUFACTURE
Steel reinforcement for concrete and mechanical splices shall comply with the requirements of 2.4,
including the verifications and controls on delivery.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 308 of 405
The manufacturing procedure for prestressed prefabricated elements, as well as the choice of
constituents, shall be justified.
Elements produced shall have zones for connection to the structure, such as starter bars or
mechanical splices. Outer connections shall be considered and taken into account during
prefabrication.
Outer connections shall not cause any singular or particular adverse modifications to the formwork
elements.
Starter bars shall respect the instructions of 2.4.5.3.6.
Mechanical splices shall respect the specifications of 2.4.5.4.5.
The geometry of elements to be connected shall take into account rapidity and ease of placing. The
shape of the cavities to be filled shall be compatible with easy placing while preventing overfilling in
the case of complementary injections.
Gripping and handling devices shall be checked by calculation taking into account the lifting
equipment to be used. These devices shall comply with the requirements of 2.4.5.3.5 and must not
adversely affect the durability of the element concerned.
The execution tolerances given in 2.13 shall be respected, particularly for steel parts embedded during
the first phase of construction (sleeves, plates, pre-grouted elements, etc).
The design and nature of the materials used shall take concreting stresses into account, and also the
requirements for quick and efficient installation and removal as well as cleaning constraints.
The concrete temperature during placing and in the workshop shall be around 20 °C, including during
the maturing phase (the premises and the placed concrete may be heated).
Connecting surfaces shall be correctly cleared in order to ensure a good adhesion between the
prefabricated element and the concrete or bonding mortar.
The requirements of 2.2.5.9 shall be respected.
2.6.4.2 HARDENING ACCELERATED BY HEATING
The instructions of 2.2.5.7 shall apply.
Concrete hardening by heating may be adopted. The heating conditions (temperature gradient and
maximum value) shall be defined in a procedure based on a non-harmfulness study (hydration,
absence of cracks, etc), with the intention of verifying that the method employed causes no alteration
detrimental to the medium or long-term behaviour of the prefabricated element. In all cases, the
possibility of thermal shocks during storage of the elements shall be considered.
2.6.4.3 MARKING
All prefabricated elements shall receive unique marking. The marking shall specify the conditions for
use. Marking shall comply with the details shown on the drawings, and also bear the date of
manufacture of the elements.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 309 of 405
2.6.4.4 HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT
Practical arrangements shall be taken to ensure that the prefabricated element has attained its
minimum strength necessary in order to undergo handling, storage and transport operations without
being damaged.
Bonding or connection devices incorporated in concrete, as well as corresponding equipment, shall be

specified by the designer. Lifting equipment shall be equipped with specific apparatus compatible with
the gripping points on the elements.
The storage areas, lifting method and means of transport shall take into account the shapes and
weights of the different elements. The distribution of forces connected to the points of support during
storage by stacking shall in no way affect the integrity of the stored elements.
Steel reinforcement or linking systems for implementation during the second concreting phase shall be
protected against accidental folding and equipped with protective caps where necessary.
Folding and restraightening of deformed bars shall not be permitted except for reinforcements which is
AFCAB-certified “Ability for folding-restraightening” or certified by an approved equivalent certification
organisation demonstrating the suitability of the product. However, restraightening may only be
performed using a specific procedure.
2.6.4.5 PLACING AND LINKING OF EXISTING PARTS OF A STRUCTURE
Prefabricated elements shall only be placed after verification of:
− the delivery ticket declaring their conformity to the requirements of the order. It shall replicate
the marking indications on the element and shall be completed by details of the transport
company and the delivery date,
− their condition upon receipt; the elements shall be undamaged after handling, storage and
transport operations, particularly at their surface supports.
The placing and linking of prefabricated elements to existing structures shall be performed so that:
− all deterioration risks (shocks) shall be avoided,
− the conformity of correct positioning with respect to the execution plans shall be assured.
The elements shall be kept in position as soon as they are placed so as to ensure:
− their stability with respect to the forces applied, including forces resulting from wind,
− their overall geometry, taking into account the prescribed tolerances,
− the undisrupted setting of assembly materials.
Permanent products for installation of the precast element (concrete or mortar for example) may only
be used with justification that its characteristics meet market requirements. The product used shall be
easy to place and display minimised shrinkage.
Prefabricated assemblies using concrete or mortar shall respect the specifications of 2.2.5.8 and
2.2.5.9.
Installation operations shall be performed by qualified personnel.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 310 of 405
2.6.4.6 FINAL FACINGS
The final facings of the structure shall observe the specifications given in 2.3 for the category of facing
concerned.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 311 of 405
2.7 LEAKTIGHT METAL PARTS ON CONTAINMENTS
This section applies to the manufacturing and erection of all the metal parts contributing to
containment leaktightness, and as a rule to any welding onto the liner during the erection phase. This
includes:
− the metal liner and its anchorage system;
− internal containment penetration sleeves and their anchorage rings welded to the liner (Note:
this includes personnel air lock sleeves and their anchorage rings);
− temporary worksite access and its anchorage ring welded to liner;
− the equipment hatch and its anchorage ring welded to liner;
− anchorages for the equipments supported by the containment wall (including anchor plates,
anchorage and bracket of the revolving crane, etc);
− blind flanges on unused sleeves;
− other miscellaneous elements which could be welded onto liner.
NOTE The following are not covered:
− Manufacturing of the brackets of the revolving crane;
− Welding of the supports on the anchoring plates.
2.7.1 MATERIALS – GRADES AND QUALITIES
2.7.1.1 CLASSIFICATION
The metallic materials used for the parts listed above are classified as follows:
− plates for containment parts (including liner, anchor plates, sleeve shells and anchorage
rings);
− structural sections (including stiffeners or other anchor elements, etc);
− tubes for sleeves;
− studs for the containment liner (∅8 mm) or for other anchorage (∅>8mm);
− steels for reinforced concrete welded onto the anchorage rings of penetrations or onto the
brackets of the revolving crane, etc.
2.7.1.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS
All products shall be delivered with at least a "type 3.1" inspection certificate in accordance with EN
10204.
S235JR grade may be delivered with a "type 2.2" inspection certificate in accordance with EN 10204
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 312 of 405
with the condition that tensile tests and chemical analysis are statistically performed and comply with
EN 10225-2 requirements.
Acceptance shall take into account all heat treatments able to be undergone by the plate during
manufacturing.
Repair by welding (by the supplier) is not permitted. Only repairs by grinding are permitted, up to the
limits of the dimensional tolerances.
All products shall be identifiable at any time during their use.
2.7.1.3 PLATES, STRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND STUDS
2.7.1.3.1 Plates for the containment liner (6 mm plates)
For the containment liner, the plates shall be grade P265GH according to EN 10028-2, with a
specified impact testing at -20°C. Plates shall be delivered in normalized condition. In addition to the
checks defined by EN 10028, the following requirements shall be specified and verified:
− maximum guaranteed ReH shall be 355 MPa;
− mean ReH per batch (objective) shall be 330 MPa.
Any other material shall be submitted to the Project for approval.
The absence of lamination shall be confirmed by a visual inspection of edges after cutting.
2.7.1.3.2 Plates for other containment parts (anchor plates, sleeve shells and anchorage rings
etc.)
Plates shall be grade P265 GH or higher in accordance with the requirement of EN 10028-2 with a
specified impact testing at -20°C. Plates shall be delivered in normalized condition. Any other material
shall be submitted to the Project for approval
Plate material to be loaded normal to its plane shall be compliant with EN 10164. The minimum quality
class shall be Z35 (for example anchor plates, anchorage rings).
The absence of lamination shall be confirmed by a visual inspection of edges after cutting.
Plates with thickness greater than or equal to 10 mm shall be subject to ultrasonic tests according to
EN 10160 with class S2 and E3. The use of rectangular notches is not permitted. Starting at 60 mm
thickness, only a straight transducer is allowed. Attenuation (decrease of the background echo) shall
be taken into consideration in the determination of discontinuity zone.
2.7.1.3.3 Structural Sections (including stiffeners and other anchor elements)
Sections shall be delivered in normalized condition.
Sections shall be grade S235JR supplied in accordance with EN 10025-2.
Requirements related to appearance, shape, dimension, mass, and tolerance checks shall be in
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 313 of 405
accordance with 2.10.
∅8 mm studs for the containment liner shall be grade S235J2 in accordance with EN 10025-2.
Additional requirements resulting from the design (1.5.1.6), if any, shall be taken into account.
∅>8mm studs for anchor plates shall be grade S235J2 or higher in accordance with EN 10025-2.
2.7.1.4 TUBES FOR PENETRATIONS SLEEVES
Tubes shall be grade P265 GH according to EN 10216–2. The test category selected shall be
category 2. Option 4 “Impact test at 0°C” shall be required.
For penetration sleeves measuring more than 600 mm in diameter, the use of welded tubes of P265
GH according to EN 10217-2 is permitted (or the use of equivalent materials). The test category
selected shall be category 2. Option 4 “Impact test at 0°C” shall be required.
Any other material shall be submitted to the Project for approval.
2.7.1.5 EQUIPMENT HATCH PERMANENT MECHANICAL CLAMPING COMPONENTS
The following materials should be used for the design of the structure:
− bracket steel (clams): P355NH according to EN 10028-3 (rolled sheet) or EN 10222-4 + A1

(forged);
− swivel-mounted bearing steel, washers and pistons of hydraulic actuators: 42CrM04 or

40NCD7-3 according to EN 10083-3 or EN 10269 +A1;
− clamping screw steel: "class 10.9": 42CrMo4 or 40NCD7-3 according to EN ISO 4017 and
EN 10269 + A1.
The following checks shall be performed on products or parts:
− inspection of entirety of surfaces by dye penetrant test (using dye penetrant product IIAd-2) or
magnetic particle inspection of finished parts (with the exception of sheet metal), according to
EN 571-1, with criteria according to EN 10228-1 or EN 10228-2 with quality class 3 criteria;
− inspection of entirety of product/part for internal soundness (density) by ultrasound as soon as

the dimensions permit:
o diameter ≥ 50 mm for bars according to EN 10308 for bars in quality class 3;
o thickness ≥ 10 mm for sheet metal according to EN 10160 for sheet metal with quality
class S3/E4 criteria.
2.7.1.6 STEELS FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE WELDED ONTO ANCHORAGE RINGS
Requirements and related checks applicable to the fabrication of steels for reinforcing bars are given
in 2.4.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 314 of 405
2.7.2 WELDING
Single pass welds are not permitted for welded joints which are to perform a leaktightness function.
The joint to be assembled shall have at least two weld layers.
Leaktight welds shall be performed in full penetration of the product being welded.
The use of the MIG (131, 132, 133 according to EN ISO 4063), MAG (135 according to EN ISO 4063)
or flux-core wire (114 according to EN ISO 4063) processes shall be limited to automated welding.
The manual use of MAG 136 and 138 (according to EN ISO 4063) may be permitted subject to
approval and shall depend on a demonstration by the Manufacturer (the Manufacturer shall
demonstrate a good mastering of the process, based on their industrial experience). The conditions of
this demonstration shall be agreed by the Project.
Use of permanent backing strip:
The use of permanent backing strip is not permitted, except in the specific case of the welding of the
base slab liner on permanent anchored structure when such a design has been retained.
The weld arrangement, sequence and supporting devices should be selected in order to avoid a
constraining welding position. The PG position (vertical down) for manual welding is not permitted for
welds with leaktightness function requirements.
2.7.2.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The provisions of EN 1011-1 shall apply.
2.7.2.1.1 Welding Data Package
The welding data package provides a precise description of the welding and inspection operations. It
shall include at least:
− an overall plan or diagram of the material, with the location of all the welded joints;
− a fabrication sequence showing the assembly and welding sequences for the elements
constituting the material, as well as stress-relieving heat treatment and inspections;
− a list recapping the welding Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) for all the equipment with,
for each one of them, the Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) from which the range of
qualification of the PQR shall be deduced;
− the list of the weld test coupon assemblies;
− a Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) of all the joints: for each welded joint, or each type
of joint in the case of pipes:
o a sketch with dimensions and tolerances of the joints to be welded;
o welding procedure specification used;
o cumulated heat treatment data;
o duly referenced welding Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) for welding

procedure specification validation;
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 315 of 405
o inspections planed.
2.7.2.1.2 Qualifications of welding procedures
The following qualifications and acceptances shall be lead before the implementation of any welding
procedure:
− Acceptance of the filler product;
− Qualification of the welding procedures;
− Qualification of the welders and operators;
− Qualification of the workshop and construction site.
2.7.2.2 ACCEPTANCE OF FILLER PRODUCTS
The filler metal shall be selected according to the base metal to be joined and shall be subject to
conformity assessment according to EN 14532.
Filler metals shall be subject to an acceptance procedure. This acceptance procedure aims to
guarantee the homogeneity of dimensional, chemical and mechanical characteristics for a product
batch and shall be justified by, at least, a "type 3.1" certificate according to EN10204.
For each lot, tests to be conducted shall be those of the schedule 4 according to ISO 14344. Tests on
the electrode wire/flux combinations shall be included. The criteria of the impact bending test for the
acceptance testing of filler metals shall cover at least the values required for the parent metals to be
assembled by welding.
When the impact bending values are not required elsewhere, the test shall be conducted with KV
values at -20°C. The acceptance criterion shall be set at 40 J as a mean value, with an only one value
below the mean value and not less than 28 J.
Acceptance shall take into account all heat treatments that could be carried out on the deposited metal
during manufacture.
The characteristics of electrode covering shall be "basic”.
Covered electrode, tubular cored electrode wire and fluxes for submerged arc welding shall be at “very
low diffusible hydrogen” (max 5 ml/100 g of hydrogen content in deposited metal (H5)).
The definition of the batches subject to acceptance shall be as follows:
− BARE SOLID ELECTRODE WIRES AND RODS:
A batch shall have the same trade name and shall fulfil at least the class S3 criteria according to EN
ISO 14344 or equivalent.
− TUBULAR CORED ELECTRODE WIRES:
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 316 of 405
A batch shall have the same trade name and shall fulfil at least the class T4 criteria according to EN
− COVERED ELECTRODES:
A batch shall have the same trade name and shall fulfil at least the class C3 criteria according to EN
− FLUXES FOR SUBMERGED ARC WELDING:
A batch shall have the same trade name and shall fulfil at least the class F2 criteria according to EN
A batch of fluxes shall be associated with a batch of wire to form an indivisible combination for
acceptance and manufacture.
2.7.2.3 QUALIFICATION OF THE WELDING PROCEDURES
2.7.2.3.1 General case
The qualifications of the welding procedures shall be established in accordance with the requirements
of EN ISO 15614-1 + A1.
The procedure initially qualified according to EN 288-3 shall be re-transcribed, according to EN ISO
15614-1 + A1, prior to use.
In the case of ultrasonic examination, only method 1 of EN 1714 +A1 & A2 shall be used.
When impact bending values are not required elsewhere, KV tests at -20°C shall be performed
following the requirements of EN ISO 15614-1 + A1 (for full penetration butt weld thicker than 12 mm)
as a minimum requirement. The acceptance criterion shall be set at 27 J as a mean value with only
one value tolerated below the mean value and not below 20 J.
Welding with metallic backing strip shall not qualify welding with ceramic backing strip and vice-versa.
Except for stud welding (783 according to EN ISO 4063) for which EN ISO 14555, 9, is applicable, all
sections of the welding procedure descriptions defined in EN ISO 15609-1 shall be indicated and the
preparation tolerances (chamfer angle, root and clearance) specified on the preparation diagram of
the WPS.
2.7.2.3.2 Procedure qualification for studs welds with “drawn arc stud welding with ceramic
ferrule or shielding gas process (783)”
Studs directly welded onto the containment liner (∅ 8 mm / 6 mm)
The welding procedure qualifications shall be established in accordance with the requirement of EN
ISO 14555, 10.2 with the following additional requirements:
− Test pieces (grade, plate thickness and stud diameter) shall be strictly representative of the
production;
− The tensile strength test failure shall occur in the stud.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 317 of 405
Studs welded onto anchoring plates (∅ >8 mm)
The welding procedure qualifications shall be established in accordance with the requirement of EN
ISO 14555, 10.2 with the following additional requirements:
− Test pieces (grade, plate thickness and stud diameter) shall be strictly representative of the
production;
− The tensile strength test failure shall occur in the stud.
Stud weld repair
The repair procedure of stud welds shall be qualified according to the same requirement as stud weld
procedure.
The procedure consisting of welding a stud onto an “eliminated stud area” (with presence of molten
metal and heat-affected zone resulting from a previous stud welding) shall be considered as a repair
and so shall be qualified. Each stud welded within the qualification shall be welded onto a
representative “eliminated stud area”.
2.7.2.3.3 Procedure qualification for temporary attachments
Welding procedure for temporary attachments shall be subject to qualification. The thickness to take
into account for qualification shall be “at least” the equipment thickness and not the attachment
thickness.
2.7.2.3.4 Procedure qualification for “reinforcing steel bars welded on plates” (side lap joint)
The procedure for welding reinforcing steel bars onto plates shall be qualified according to EN ISO
17660-1.
They shall also be validated by production weld test according to EN ISO 17660-1, 12.
2.7.2.3.5 Procedure qualification for weld repair
Welding procedure for repair welds shall be qualified on a test piece allowing qualification of the
welding of the assembly to be repaired, according to the same stipulations as defined in the general
case.
2.7.2.3.6 Procedure qualification for parent metal build-up
The welding procedure for parent metal build-up shall be qualified on a test piece for a butt joint
allowing qualification of the welding of the parent metal thickness to be built up, according to the same
stipulations as defined in the general case.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 318 of 405
2.7.2.4 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS AND OPERATORS
2.7.2.4.1 General requirement
The qualifications of the welders and operators shall be established according to the requirements of
EN 287-1 + A2. In the case of automated welding, the operators shall be qualified in accordance with
EN 1418. When operators are qualified according to EN 1418, the range of qualification of EN 287-1 +
A2 shall be applied.
2.7.2.4.2 Performance qualification of stud welds with “drawn arc stud welding with ceramic
ferrule or schielding gas process (783 according to EN ISO 4063)”
The stud welding performance qualifications shall be established in accordance with the requirements
of EN ISO 14555, 6.1.
2.7.2.4.3 Performance qualification of “reinforcing steel bars welded onto plates” (side lap
joint)
The performance qualification of “reinforcing steel bars welded onto plates” shall be established in
accordance with the same requirement as the corresponding procedure qualification (EN ISO 17660-
1). The welder is only qualified for the position used in qualification. EN ISO 17660-1, 9.3 is applicable
for the validity of the qualification.
2.7.2.5 QUALIFICATION OF WORKSHOP AND CONSTRUCTION SITE
The workshop and/or the site shall have suitable installations for executing satisfactory welding work.
The purpose of the technical qualification of a workshop and/or a construction site is to evaluate the
capacity and the technical facilities of this workshop and/or site to carry out welding operations. In the
case of a worksite, the capacity of the manufacturer to work on a site shall be evaluated.
Before beginning the welding operations, a qualification report shall be prepared and submitted for
approval. The qualification report shall include:
− the name of the workshop, and the name of the person in charge of the qualification of the
workshop and/or site,
− a list of relevant references justifying experience in the welding field, and the management of
the workshop and/or site,
− a list of the welding equipment by welding process and demonstration of good working
condition (maintenance policy for the welding generator, frequency of maintenance, special
case of a work site (mobile welding generator), etc.),
− equipment at the place of work, describing the equipment proposed for the work envisaged:
o need for handling equipment,
o cleanliness management,
o suitable means for storage of the base metals and for good protection, conservation,
and drying of the filler products,
o protections necessary for welding work (no traces of water, no draughts, etc.),
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 319 of 405
o heat treatment installations in good condition and with sufficient capacity for the work to
be carried out,
o suitable installations for the destructive and non-destructive testing to be performed,

o means for checking compliance with the geometrical tolerances (dimensions of parts
and welding clearances),
o means for checking compliance with the tolerances of the electrical welding parameters.
The qualification of a workshop and/or worksite remains valid so long as no significant modification
from the previous arrangements has occurred. If this is not the case, the corresponding qualification
report shall be modified accordingly.
If a serious defect is revealed on production welds, the workshop or worksite qualification shall be
reviewed.
2.7.2.6 PRODUCTION WELDS
2.7.2.6.1 General provisions
Storage and use of filler products
The storage conditions shall maintain the properties of the filler products. Filler products shall be
stored in a controlled temperature environment. The Manufacturer’s drying conditions shall comply
with the Supplier’s instruction.
At any given moment, the stock management system shall permit traceability of the filler metals to be
checked (date of entry, date of exit, batch reference, designation, dimension, quantity in stock, etc).
Basic covered electrodes shall be strored and dried out in accordance with the supplier's instructions.
After drying, these filler products shall be kept in heated cabinets or containers until they are used.
These filler metals, if used for more than 4 hours, shall be replaced into the driers. This operation shall
not be performed more than specified by the Supplier. Each welder shall have portable equipment
enabling electrodes to remain dry. Basic flux shall be recycled in compliance with the Supplier’s
instructions.
In cases where specific vacuum packaging is used for the covered electrodes, recycling is not
permitted. The Supplier’s conditions for use, guaranteeing recovery of humidity without damage, shall
be respected (humidity, temperature, working life, etc.). After opening, electrodes shall be used during
the required period in order to ensure that the requirements for diffusible hydrogen below 5ml/100g of
the deposited metal is fulfilled.
Tubular cored electrodes wire coils shall be removed from the welding equipment and properly stored
at the end of the welding shift.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 320 of 405
Preparation and inspection of the edges and surfaces to be welded.
The transition taper of parts with unequal thickness shall be 1/4 and shall allow the execution of the
non-destructive tests.
Grooves and taper should be produced by machining. However, grinding may be used for repair work.
If other methods are retained, the Manufacturer shall be responsible for demonstrating that the internal
condition of the parent metal and the welding method are ensured.
The use of arc air gouging is subject to agreement. All precautions to be taken shall be listed and
submitted to the Project for approval.
The zones adjacent to the surfaces and edges to be welded shall present a surface condition
compatible with the execution of the non-destructive examinations to be performed on the joint.
The examination of the surfaces to be welded and connection surfaces shall be carried out according
to the requirements of 2.7.2.6.2.
After positioning, a guarantee shall be given that the dimensional tolerances of the edges and the root
gaps specified in the Welding Procedure Specification or in the construction drawings are respected.
Tack welding operations shall be considered as a welding operation, and shall be subject to the same
requirements as the other welding operations.
Before welding, a guarantee shall be given that there are no contaminants such as grease, water, or
marks (lamination, tack weld cracks) in the weld preparation or nearby which could interfere with the
quality of welding.
Execution of the production welds
All required documents (procedures, work instructions, etc) shall be available at the point of work
where welding is performed.
Welding is not permitted if the ambient temperature is below -10°C. The part shall be kept at a
temperature of at least +5°C and cooling after weld ing shall be slow enough not to cause any
cracking.
Any welding work shall be performed under protection from bad weather.
If a welding process uses shielding gas, the work station shall be protected from draughts.
Arc strikes on the surfaces of equipment are not permitted. In case of arc strikes, repairs shall be
made, and the metal shall be subject to surface dressing and non-destructive testing (visual and
magnetic particle examination or penetrant testing).
Any hammering of the welds is not permitted.
After welding, the surface of the welds shall be completed to enable the execution of the non-
destructive examination. It shall have a surface finish compatible with the requirements of the non-
destructive inspection procedures.
In order to avoid the welds crossing, they shall be offset by a distance at least equal to the lowest of
the two following values:
− 2 t (t = thickness of the base metal),
− 40 mm,
This distance is measured between the edges of the welds.

ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 321 of 405
Only two welding repairs may be performed at the same point. Further repairs shall not be performed
before a report analysing the cause of these successive repairs has been prepared and submitted to
the Project for approval. The same applies to repairs which occur too regularly or to the detection of
defects which might invalidate the conditions of application of the procedure, or the qualification itself
of the welding procedure.
For the specific case of studs directly welded onto the liner, those with a defective weld or those bent
for inspection purposes are not regarded as anchors. It may not be necessary to remove them, and a
replacement stud may be welded close by.
In other cases studs shall be repaired or replaced (see 2.7.2.3.2).
Production weld data sheet
After a welding operation a production weld data sheet per operation or group of operations which use
the same welding procedure shall be prepared.
This production weld data sheet shall include at least:
− the reference plan of the equipment (or isometric drawing in the case of piping) to which the
joint, group of joints, cladding or repair belong,
− the reference of the joint, group of joints, cladding or repair,
− the reference of the welding procedure sheet,
− the reference of the filler product batches,
− per operation, the name (the reference) of the welder(s) or operator(s) having carried out the
weld,
− in the case of automatic welding, the reference of the machine used.
For stud welding, the weld data sheet shall be established in compliance with EN ISO 14555, 14.6 and
Appendix H.
For welding of steel reinforcement bars, the weld data sheet shall be established in compliance with
EN ISO 17660-1, 15 and Annex F.
Avoidance of hydrogen cracking
The equivalent thickness E to be taken into account for pre and post heating operations are shown in
Figure 2.7.2-1, depending on the type of connection.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 322 of 405
Figure 2.7.2-1
Pre-heating
For non-alloy steels with minimum yield strength ReH ≤ 275 MPa (sub-group 1.1 according to FD CR
ISO TR 15608), pre-heating with a minimum temperature of 100°C shall be performed for the welding
of equivalent thicknesses (E) greater or equal to 40 mm.
For non-alloy steels with minimum yield strength 275 < ReH ≤ 360 MPa (sub-group 1.2 according to FD
CR ISO TR 15608), pre-heating with a minimum temperature of 125°C shall be performed for the
welding of equivalent thicknesses (E) greater than or equal to 20 mm.
Pre-heating shall be continued without interruption and shall be controlled until the end of the welding
operation.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 323 of 405
Post-heating
For non-alloy steels with minimum yield strength 275 < ReH ≤ 360 MPa (sub-group 1.2 according to FD
CR ISO TR 15608) and CE ≥ 0.48 (see Equation 2.7.2-1), pre-heating shall be followed by a minimum
of 60 minutes of post-heating. The post-heating temperature shall be greater than or equal to the
temperature considered for the pre-heating.
Equation 2.7.2-1
CE = C + Mn/6 + (Cr+Mo+V)/5 + (Ni+Cu)/15 in %
Post-heating is not required when a stress-relieving heat treatment is performed immediately after
welding without returning to the ambient temperature.
When post-heating is required, it shall be performed before any cooling below a minimum temperature
stipulated by the welding procedure. Moreover, post-heating shall be maintained without interruption
and shall be controlled until the end of the post-heating time specified by the welding procedure.
For other steels, the pre and post-heating conditions shall be agreed by the Project.
Heat treatments associated with welding operations
As many as possible, welds requiring heat treatments shall be performed in the workshop.
Stress-relieving heat treatment
For non-alloy steels of specified minimum yield strength ReH ≤ 275 MPa (sub-group 1.1 according to
FD CR ISO TR 15608), a stress-relieving heat treatment shall be performed for weld thickness (e)
greater than 35 mm.
For non-alloy steels of specified minimum yield strength ReH 275 < ReH ≤ 360 Mpa (sub-group 1.2
according to CR ISO TR 15608), a stress-relieving heat treatment shall be performed for weld
thickness (e) greater than 30 mm.
Parameters:
− Holding temperature: 550/625°C (recommended 575°C)
− Holding time: 2 minutes per millimetre of thickness (e) with a minimum of 30 minutes and a
maximum of 120 minutes.
The heating or cooling rate shall be sufficiently low so as not to generate harmful strain or stress. This
heating or cooling rate shall not exceed, above 350°C:
− for e ≤ 25 mm: 220 (°C/h),
− for e > 25 mm the greater of the following values:
o 5500/e (°C/h),
o 55°C/h.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 324 of 405
Dimensional stabilizing heat treatment
Conditions of implementation of dimensional stabilizing heat treatment shall be defined by the

manufacturer.
Dimensional stabilizing and stress-relieving heat treatment simulation
Except for dimensional stabilizing heat treatment with holding temperature lower than 465°C, heat
treatment planned in manufacturing shall be simulated on the Welding Procedure Qualification (WPQ)
test coupon (with a minimum of 2 cycles). The heat treatment duration for the production welds shall
be limited to 125% of the heat treatment duration simulated in qualification.
Heat treatment temperature measurement and recording
The thermocouples shall be placed on the load and protected from oven radiation. The essential heat
treatment parameters (time and temperatures) shall be recorded continuously and automatically.
The quality of the oven and its loading plan shall be such that the maximum acceptable variation "of
the temperatures obtained" at any point on the load relative to "the nominal temperature" is ±15°C for
the entire load while it is maintained at temperature.
During the treatment of the equipment, test coupon(s) shall be placed inside the apparatus. If this is
not possible, they shall be placed beside the equipment so that they undergo similar treatment. One or
more thermocouples shall be fixed to the test coupons.
The identification assigned to the recordings and measurement channels should enable them to be
assigned to the load, the equipment, and to the part of the equipment or weld involved. A diagram of
the positions of the thermocouples shall be attached to the recording in order to link up the positions to
the measurement channels.
2.7.2.6.2 Inspections of welded joints
General
The required quality of the production welds shall be as specified by EN ISO 5817, within the
tolerance of class B except for imperfections concerning excess of weld metal, excessive convexity,
excessive throat thickness and excessive penetration for which class C applies. In addition to this
quality requirement concerning the definition of a defect, the acceptance criteria applied are those
specified by EN 12062 + A1 & A2 for the interpretation of the indications (defects reference according
to EN ISO 6520-1). The recommendations given in EN 12062 +A1 & A2 supplemented or modified by
the following requirements shall be taken into account in the procedures.
Visual examination
Visual examination shall be performed according to EN 970.
Amendment to EN ISO 5817: When making longitudinal or circumferential welds on plates, linear
misalignment (507 according to EN ISO 6520-1) shall be ≤ 0.25 t (where t is the smaller thickness of
the assembly) with a maximum value of 5 mm.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 325 of 405
Penetrant Testing
Penetrant Testing shall be performed according to EN 571-1.
The acceptable criteria are those corresponding to level 2X of EN 1289 + A1 & A2.
Groups of 5 or more indications shall not be acceptable if included in a rectangular area of 100 cm²:
− chosen in the most unfavourable manner in terms of indication positions,
− and whose largest dimension shall not exceed 20 cm.
Magnetic particle examination
Magnetic particle inspection shall be performed according to EN 1290 + A1 & A2.
The acceptable criteria are those corresponding to level 2X. of EN 1291 + A1 & A2.
Groups of 5 or more indications shall not be acceptable within a rectangular area of 100 cm² chosen in
the most unfavourable manner in relation to the indications and whose largest dimension shall not
exceed 20 cm.
Radiographic examinations (X-ray and γ-ray examination)
Radiographic examination shall be performed according to EN 1435 + A1 & A2
The radiographic examination shall be performed with the X-ray technique for the inspection of
thicknesses less than or equal to 20 mm. The system film class shall be C3 at least. Gamma
radiography shall be used for thicknesses greater than 20 mm.
The acceptable criteria are those corresponding to level 3 of EN 12517-1 amended by the following
restrictions and conditions:
− The following are not acceptable: shrinkage cavities (202), crater pipes (2024), lacks of fusion
( 401), and incomplete penetrations (402),
− For elongated cavities (2015) and metallic inclusions (304) the acceptable indication shall be
lower than or equal to 0.4 s or 6 mm (where s is the nominal thickness of the weld in mm).
Acceptance criteria for imperfect shape dimensions (5011, 5012, 5013) shall be those of EN ISO 5817
with the tolerances of class C.
In case of use of permanent backing strips, the interpretation of the radiographic images is made
difficult by the geometry (fit-up between the plates and the backing strip). To overcome this difficulty,
an interpretation catalogue based on standard images shall be established in order to identify the
image defects due to the singularity. This catalogue shall be submitted for approval.
Ultrasonic examination
Ultrasonic examination shall be performed according to method 1 (examination level C) of EN 1714 +

A1 & A2.
Indications shall be characterized according to EN 1713 + A1 & A2.
The acceptable criteria are those corresponding to level 2 of EN 1712 + A1 & A2.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 326 of 405
Leak testing
Vacuum box leak examination shall be performed according to the criteria and methodology for
technique C3 as described in EN 1593 + A1 and EN 1779 + A1.
The leak test method shall not deteriorate the sensitivity of the method of dye penetrant inspection.
2.7.2.7 SCOPE OF THE PRODUCTION INSPECTIONS
2.7.2.7.1 Non-destructive testing of production welds
1- General requirements related to NDT
Personnel performing non-destructive examination shall be qualified to an appropriate level in

accordance with EN 473 or ISO 9712 + AC1 in the relevant NDT method industrial sector. Their
qualification shall be valid.
The interpretation of a non-destructive test shall be performed over a width including the deposited
metal added to the two adjacent zones of the parent metal (on either side of the welded joint). The
width of an adjacent zone shall be 10 mm minimum for surface examination, 10mm for radiographic or
ultrasonic examination if the thickness is greater than 30mm, and 5mm if the thickness is less than
30mm (in reference to the weld side).
The final volumetric examination shall be carried out after final heat treatment. It may however be
carried out after intermediate heat treatment if this is performed at a temperature at least equal to the
minimum specified for final heat treatment.
If both radiographic and ultrasonic examinations are required, the final volumetric examination after
stress-relieving heat treatment shall be an ultrasonic examination. However, the latter may be
performed before heating, if after stress-relieving heat treatment a second ultrasonic examination is
performed using at least transverse wave beams with a single refraction angle.
When a non-destructive test by sampling is required, inspection zones shall meet the following
requirements:
− the entirety of weld joint intersections shall be inspected;
− the total length of the joints to be examined shall be divided into uniform batches5 (same
procedure, position, thickness, welder/operator, etc). An examination shall be performed on
each batch over at least 10% of the weld length (the length of the weld examined as part of
the weld joint intersections shall not be considered as part of the examination of the standard
runs).
5 Batch definition shall be submitted to the Project for approval
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 327 of 405
For automatic welding processes, if unacceptable defects are found in the sample tested, the entire
related batch shall be tested.
For manual welding processes, when an unacceptable defect is detected, the examination rate shall
be raised to 30% for welds belonging to the same batch. The existence of one or more unacceptable
defects in these welds shall lead to the examination of the entire batch.
All defective welds shall be repaired and re-examined by the same procedure.
For assemblies subject to sample inspection, the zones to be examined may be subject to agreement.
It should be noted that the Surveillance Agent or Inspector may specify the areas to be checked during
the sampling.
2- Scope of NDT – general cases
The general scope of NDT is given in Table 2.7.2-1 .
Table 2.7.2-1
Before welding After welding

Type of
assembly
Inspections Scope Inspections Scope
100%*
Visual examination
100%*
Butt joint Visual examination Penetrant testing or magnetic
100%
particle examination
Thickness ≤ Penetrant testing or magnetic
100% Sampling**
10 mm particle examination. Radiographic examination***
(≥10%)
Visual examination 100%*

Butt joint
Visual examination Penetrant testing or magnetic 100%*
Thickness 100%
Penetrant testing or magnetic particle examination
> 10 mm and 100%
particle examination. Radiographic examination or Sampling**
≤ 50 mm ultrasonic exmination (≥10%)
Butt joint Visual examination 100% Visual examination 100%*

Thickness > Penetrant testing or magnetic 100% penetrant testing or magnetic 100%*
50 mm particle examination particle examination
Radiographic examination
100%
Ultrasonic examinations
100%
Corner joint Visual examination Visual examination 100%*

100%
with full Penetrant testing or magnetic Penetrant testing or magnetic 100%*
penetration 100% particle examination
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 328 of 405

Type of
assembly
Ultrasonic examinations
100%
Joint with Visual examination 100% Visual examination 100%

partial
penetrant testing or magnetic 100%
penetration
* The non-destructive testing of surfaces (visual, liquid penetrant examination and magnetic particle
examination) shall be performed on the outer face of the welded joint, and on the inner face when this
is accessible.
** If radiographic examination is not technically possible, it may be replaced by an ultrasonic

examination.
If radiographic or ultrasonic examination are not practicable, compensatory measures should be

proposed and submitted for approval.
*** For butt joints with thicknesses from 6 mm up to and including 10 mm, either manual or automatic
Ultrasonic Testing (UT) may be proposed in lieu of Radiographic examination (RT). In such cases, the
manufacturer shall justify the adequacy of the method and the associated criteria. The supporting
documentation shall be submitted to the Project for approval.
3- Scope of NDT – special cases
Special cases are given in Table 2.7.2-2.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 329 of 405
Table 2.7.2-2

Type of assembly
Liner stud welds

Visual examination 100% Visual examination 100%
(∅ 8mm)
Anchorage plate
stud welds(∅ > Visual examination 100% Visual examination 100%
8mm)
Side lap joint

Steel reinforcing
Visual examination 100% Visual examination 100%
bars welded onto
plates
After removal and restoration

of initial surface condition,
Temporary Magnetic Particle examination
Visual examination 100% or, if this cannot be performed, 100%
attachments
penetrant testing,
4- Validation during production of the welding procedures used on-site for the leaktight welds of
the liner
The entirety of the first batch welded within the first implementation of a Welding Procedure
Specification (WPS) shall be systematically inspected. This inspection rate shall be maintained for the
following batches until the total absence of unacceptable defects on a whole batch is confirmed.
2.7.2.7.2 Destructive testing– production weld tests
1- Simplified production tests for stud welding
Within each shift of stud welding, simplified production tests shall be performed by each operator,
according to EN ISO 14555. In all cases, all welding equipment shall be tested.
The purpose of this simplified production test is to check that the equipment is correctly set up, that it
is operating correctly and that there is no deviation during the shift.
Two studs shall be welded, one before the start of the shift and one at the end.
The simplified production tests comprise at least the following:
− visual examination (100%);
− bend testing (100%).
The examinations and tests shall be performed and evaluated in accordance with EN ISO 14555.
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 330 of 405
The results of the simplified production tests shall be documented.
2- Production weld tests for steel reinforcing bars welded onto plates (side lap joint)
Production weld tests for steel reinforcing bars welded onto plates shall be performed according to EN
ISO 17660-1, 12.
3- Other production weld tests
Weld test coupons shall be produced during fabrication, in order to confirm the consistency and quality
of the production welds and to ensure compliance with the welding conditions determined during the
welding procedure qualification tests.
A production weld test coupon shall be produced for the main full penetration butt joints of more than
12 mm thickness:
− by welding procedure qualification, and
− per workshop and/or site.
The list of the main full penetration butt joints for which a production weld will be performed shall be
submitted before welding.
The number of test coupons shall be agreed with the Project. The number of test coupons depends on
the location where the welding will be performed including conditions. In addition to the Manufacturer's
quality control, an independent third party may be required.
The test coupons shall be performed in compliance with the corresponding production welds, and
whenever it is geometrically possible, in the continuation of a welded joint.
The weld test coupon shall be prepared by those welders and/or operators who performed the
production welds associated with this test coupon, under the surveillance of the workshop inspection
department. The same welding parameters and the same type of welding equipment shall be used.
Measurements (or recordings) shall be taken in the same manner as for the welding procedure
qualification tests.
It is not permitted to repair defects detected during the final non-destructive tests. The extent and
cause of the defects shall be detailed in the examination report.
When the results of the production test do not satisfy the requirements, the welding procedure
qualification shall be suspended unless the Contractor may prove that the procedure is not at fault.
The dimensions of the weld test coupon assemblies shall satisfy the provisions of the weld procedure
qualification test assemblies and be sufficiently long to perform all the required tests, repeat tests, and
repair simulations.
The test coupon assembly shall be subject to the same non-destructive and destructive tests required
for the weld procedure qualification programme.
The weld test coupon assembly should be examined as quickly as possible, and in any event shall be
examined within a maximum of two months after the end of welding and heat treatment operations.
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 331 of 405
The contractor shall prepare a report, to include:
− the test assembly execution conditions (required and performed) and the welding sequences,
the names of the welders and the batch numbers of filler products used,
− the non-destructive tests performed and their results,
− the destructive tests performed with the values to be respected and the results obtained.
2.7.3 PREFABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY
2.7.3.1 DEFINITION OF A REFERENCE CIRCLE: GUIDE CIRCLE
The simultaneous construction of the internal structures and the containment itself may make it difficult
to identify the centre point of the Reactor Building. The construction and the location inspection of the
various metal elements of the liner shall be performed in relation to a reference circle which coincides
with the inner containment and is referred to as the “guide circle”.
This circle centre shall be identical to that of the containment liner.
At the first level, after the liners have been welded (base slab), the guide circle shall be traced as
close as possible to the diameter of the inner containment.
Before the erection of the internal structures, the reference points (control points) shall be located
where an independent control can be performed. Their position shall be determined by a certain
number of equally distributed points which are systematically raised to each floor or level step by step
during the erection.
2.7.3.2 SPECIAL CASE OF THE EQUIPMENT HATCH
The flange of the hatch-anchorage ring connection shall be welded onto the anchorage ring in place
after prestressing of the containment in order to limit the deformations induced by this operation.
2.7.4 DIMENSIONAL INSPECTIONS DURING EXECUTION
2.7.4.1 FOUNDATION RAFT INSPECTION
2.7.4.1.1 Inspection of the metal structure forming the mounting plane of the base slab plate
In case of an anchored liner, the structure forming the mounting plane (using structural section) shall
be checked with respect to elevation and horizontality.
For this intermediate check, the Manufacturer's own predefined tolerances shall apply, considering
erection constraints and tolerances specified for the base mat surfacing (2.7.4.1.2).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 332 of 405
2.7.4.1.2 Inspection of concrete
The acceptance criteria for the flatness of the last sequence concrete shall be the following:
− maximum sag under 2 m: 10 mm ;
− maximum sag under 0.2 m: 4 mm.
In case of an anchored liner, the requirements related to flatness shall be simultaneously respected by
the last sequence concrete and the upper horizontal face of the metallic frames embedded in the
concrete base mat.
In addition, in case of an anchored liner, the tolerances on the level of the last sequence concrete on a
±100 mm lane each side of the metallic frames shall be no more than +0, -3 mm, related to the upper
horizontal face of the metallic frames.
2.7.4.1.3 Liner inspection
The purpose of the following tolerances is to ensure the proper contact between the liner and the
concrete of the base mat after pouring the concrete of the inner structure foundation.
The liner shall be checked for height (at random locations) and for local sagging. The required
tolerances shall be:
− Maximal gap between basemat and liner: 40 mm;
− Local sagging: less than 20 mm over a length of 2 m.
If these criteria are not achieved, it shall be demonstrated that the weight of the pouring concrete
(which is expected to reduce the size of the imperfections) is sufficient to keep the liner plane against
the concrete, while respecting the design requirements of 1.5.1.1.
2.7.4.2 INSPECTION OF THE CONICAL SECTION
2.7.4.2.1 Dimensional checks on general shape
1- Radii check
Radii shall be checked at two different levels of the conical section (for example, at the circular
stiffeners level).
This check shall be performed from the guide circle defined above.
Radii lengths shall be R ± 50 mm.
2- Height check
The height and flatness of the free end of the conical section onto which the barrel shall be welded
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 333 of 405
shall be checked by the Manufacturer (approximately 40 points).
For this intermediate check, the Manufacturer’s own predefined tolerances shall apply, considering the
final tolerances to be achieved for penetrations and other incorporated items, and the correct fitting
between the conical section and the other part of the liner.
2.7.4.2.2 Local dimensional check
1- Within a mesh
The check shall be performed after concreting using a shape jig complying with the theoretical profile
and whose lengths are equal to the spacing between the continuous anchorages forming the mesh.
Defect tolerances are defined in Figure 2.7.4-1.
Any other device shall be justified with a dedicated technical analysis and submitted to the Project for
approval.
2- Over a liner joint weld
The purpose of this inspection is to check: angular deviation, measured over a distance of 250 mm on
each side of the weld.
This check shall be performed using shaped jigs (weld on circular line or generating line).
Defect tolerances are defined in Figure 2.7.4-2.
Any other device shall be justified with a dedicated technical analysis and submitted to the Project for
approval.
If these criteria are not achieved, it shall be demonstrated that the criteria for the design of the liner
(1.5.1.4.3) are still verified.
3- Check inside a mesh
With reference to the Figure below (L is the spacing between continuous anchors), the following
deviations are permitted:
− for concave depression, the lowest of the following values is permitted:

2
o f (mm) < 40 L (m);
o f < 40 mm.
− for convex depressions, the lowest of the following values is permitted:

2
o f (mm) < 20 L (m);
o f < 20 mm with f = (a + b) / 2.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 334 of 405
Figure 2.7.4-1 Local dimensional Inspection of Containment Liner
NOTE The defects mentioned above are the most common in this type of construction. In the event
2
of a more local convex depression type defect, the relationship f < 20 L is still required. In this case, L
shall be modified. L shall correspond to the actual extent of the defect (e.g. if L = 0.5 m, fmax = 5 mm).
4- Check at a liner joint weld
With reference to Figure below, the following values shall be permitted:
− for concave depressions, the angular deviation at welds ([a + b] / 2), measured over 500 mm,
shall be no more than 10 mm,
− for convex depressions, the angular deviation at welds (C), measured over 500 mm, shall be
no more than 10 mm.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 335 of 405
Figure 2.7.4-2 Local dimensional Inspection of Containment Liner
2.7.4.3 BARREL INSPECTION
2.7.4.3.1 Dimensional check of general shape
1- Radii check
The radii of each ring forming the barrel are checked at the upper horizontal continuous anchorage.
This check may be performed from the guide circle defined in 2.7.3.1 (20 measurements for each
level).
Required tolerance is ± 50 mm after concreting.
2- Height check
Except for the last ring, this check shall be left to the discretion of the Manufacturer. The check shall
verify the height and flatness of the top of the ring onto which the next ring is to be welded.
For this intermediate check, the Constructor’s own predefined tolerances shall be applied, considering
the contractual tolerance applicable to the barrel lining and manufacturing requirements.
The height check on the top of the last ring, on which the dome is to be welded, shall be as defined by
the Contract. Required tolerance shall be ±15mm. Flatness shall be left to the discretion of the
Manufacturer.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 336 of 405
2.7.4.3.2 Local dimensional checks
Local dimensional checks after concreting shall be performed as described in 2.7.4.2.2.
2.7.4.4 DOME INSPECTION
2.7.4.4.1 Pre-lifting checks at ground level
Pre-lifting checks at ground level shall be left to the discretion of the Manufacturer. Their purpose is:
− to facilitate presentation of the dome onto the barrel,
− to minimize work on the dome when in position, as far as possible.
2.7.4.4.2 Dimensional checks of general shape
These checks shall be performed before and after concreting the first 200 mm of concrete. They
consist of checking that the liner be located between two surfaces within ± 50 mm from the theoretical
surface.
1- Radii check
Radii shall be checked at the level of the welded joint linking the dome with the barrel. This check shall
be based upon the guide circle defined in 2.7.3.1 (20 measurements).
2- Check of toric and spherical zones
This check shall be performed at approximately 50 points including one in the centre of the dome, with
the others equally distributed on three properly situated concentric circles.
2.7.4.4.3 Local dimensional check
Local dimensional checks after concreting shall be performed as described in 2.7.4.2.2.
2.7.4.4.4 Attachment points inspection
To be determined in relation to the equipment being supported.
2.7.4.5 LARGE PENETRATION SLEEVE CHECK (EQUIPMENT HATCH AND PERSONNEL

AIRLOCK)
2.7.4.5.1 Dimensional check of shape
The purpose of this check shall be to verify the diameters and developed length of the penetration
sleeve (shell), after ground-level assembly of the three sections prefabricated in factory.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 337 of 405
The required tolerances are:
− the shell shall be included between two cylinders between -5 and +15 mm from the theoretical
cylinder;
− the shell developed length shall be between +0 and +12 mm from the theoretical cylinder.
2.7.4.5.2 Dimensional position check
The purpose of this check is to verify the position of the centre at the extremities of each ring.
Flatness and height shall be checked.
Required tolerances shall be:
− the radial position of inner and outer faces shall be positioned at ±50 mm in relation to the
theoretical distance to the reactor axis (see 2.7.4.6),
− height and angular position shall be ±25 mm in relation to the theoretical axis marked on the
barrel (see 2.7.4.6),
− the distance between the centre of the outer face and the parallel to the theoretical axis
passing through the centre of the inner face (see 2.7.4.6) shall be ±10 mm.
2.7.4.5.3 Closure flanges
In the final stage of construction (after welding), flatness and ovalisation (out-of-roundness) values
foreseen by the design of the closure flange shall be checked and considered.
2.7.4.6 INSPECTION OF PENETRATION SLEEVES WITH DIAMETERS BETWEEN 250 MM AND

1500 MM
The purpose of the inspection is to check the position of the centre at the extremities of each ring.
Flatness and height shall be checked.
Required tolerances are:
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 338 of 405
− the radial position shall be ±50 mm in relation to the theoretical distance between the centre of
inner or outer faces and the reactor axis,
Center of outer face

Theoretical distance
+ 50 mm
Theoretical distance
Center of inner face
- 50 mm
Reactor axis
Liner
Figure 2.7.4-3
− the height and angular position shall be ±25 mm in relation to the theoretical axis marked on
the barrel. This tolerance may be increased in the case of penetrations not requiring very
precise positioning (electrical penetrations, for example). On the other side, it may also be
reduced if necessary,
Penetration theorical axis

+ 25
+ 25
Centre of outer face
Centre of inner face
Liner
Figure 2.7.4-4
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 339 of 405
− ±10 mm between the centre of the outer face and the parallel, to the theoretical, axis passing
through the centre of the inner face.
Parallel to the theorical

axis passing threw the
+ 10 centre of the inner face
+ 10
Centre of external face
Centre of inner face
Penetration
theorical axis
Liner
Figure 2.7.4-5
2.7.4.7 INSPECTION OF POLAR CRANE BRACKETS
The purpose of this inspection shall be to check the position of the upper horizontal plate upon which
the rail will be mounted.
Required tolerances are:
− the radial position shall be ±50 mm in relation to centre of Reactor Building.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 340 of 405
Figure 2.7.4-6
− The height and angular position shall be ±25 mm in relation to the theoretical axis marked on
the barrel,
Figure 2.7.4-7
− Horizontality for a given bracket: all points on the upper horizontal plate shall be between 2
horizontal planes 15 mm apart.
− Horizontality for the set of brackets: all plates shall be included between two planes ±25 mm
from the theoretical plane.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 341 of 405
Figure 2.7.4-8
2.7.4.8 INSPECTION OF WALL ATTACHMENT POINTS
The instructions given in 2.7.4.7 apply, except for the horizontality checks which are not applicable.
2.7.5 SURFACE TREATMENT
The inner face of the liner shall be corrosion resistant.
Surface treatment shall be submitted for approval before fabrication.
During storage, and in general if there is a risk of persisting contact with an agressive atmosphere, all
faces concerned shall be protected against corrosion risk.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 342 of 405
2.8 METAL ELEMENTS INCORPORATED INTO THE CONCRETE
2.8.1 SCOPE
This section covers sleeves and anchor plates incorporated into the concrete, excluding metal parts
contributing to containment leaktightness and watertight metal liners of pools and tanks.
The material procurements are realised in accordance with 2.7.2.
2.8.2 SLEEVES
Metal sleeves are placed on supporting parts joined to the formwork or on fixtures independent of the
formwork, which can be an integral part of the structure. The attachment mode is determined in
response to the tolerances given in 2.13.
2.8.3 ANCHOR PLATES INCORPORATED INTO THE CONCRETE
Before welding, the parts (plates and connectors) are prepared in accordance with the requirements of
EN 1090-2, as minimum conditions.
The sheet, section and plain bar delivery operations are performed either by thermal cutting or by
shearing for thicknesses under 25 mm.
The thermally cut edges shall be ground off to remove carbon deposits.
All drill-holes and their chamfers shall be made with a drilling machine bit.
The weld joint of the connectors shall not affect the plate flatness.
The welded assemblies shall be executed in accordance with the requirements of EN 1993-1 and EN
1090-2.
For qualification of the welding procedures (as per EN 1090-2) and welders (as per NF EN 287-1), a
tensile test shall also be carried out on the connector; the rupture shall occur outside the weld joint.
Each plate shall be identified by a marking cold-stamped at the time of its fabrication, on the face
remaining visible after formwork removal.
The welds of the connectors on the plates shall be 100% visually inspected and the acceptance
criteria of the defects shall be those of the level of quality B class of EN ISO 5817.
For plate welds supporting safety-classified level N1 support (according to French regulation related to
nuclear pressure-retaining components) the executive class is EXC4 as per EN 1090-2 and EN 1990.
The execution class defines the inspection to be be done and its extension. For all other plates welds
the execution class is EXC3.
For dye penetrant inspection conducted in accordance with 2.7.2.6.2, the acceptance criteria of the
defects shall be those of the quality class 2X of EN ISO 17635 (according to EN 1090-2).
In addition, the production welds shall undergo a tensile test on the connectors, at a frequency of at
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 343 of 405
least every 100 connectors welded, for the first 1000 welds. If the results are satisfactory, a tensile test
will be performed at least every 1000 connectors welded. If one of these test results is not satisfactory,
the testing frequency shall return to one test at least every 100 welds for every 1000 connecters
welded, and so on.
The production test sample for this tensile test shall be an anchor plate chosen from a batch which
may include plates of all types fabricated by several welders.
Rupture shall occur in the connector outside the weld for a stress between Rmax and Rmin (upper and
lower values of the guaranteed rupture stress as per the corresponding standard of the connector
steel grade); however:
− If the rupture occurs in the weld or Heat Affected Zone (HAZ) for a stress less than Rmax, two
additional inspections are conducted. If a defect is found during these additional tests, all the
welds executed on the tested batch by the welder in question shall be declared defective and
the corresponding plates discarded,
− If the rupture occurs outside the weld or HAZ for a stress less than Rmin, the whole fabricated
batch is rejected (there is a doubt about the quality of the steel used),
− If the rupture occurs in the weld or outside it for a stress greater than Rmax, the batch shall be
accepted but an inquiry shall be conducted into the nature of the steel used.
The dimensional inspections of the plates shall provide assurance that the maximum deflection of the
plates in all directions is less than 1/200th of the plate length in the relevant direction; further, the
hollows measured under a 0.20 m rule shall be less than 1 mm. These inspections also relate to the
compliance of the plates (length, width, thickness, special constructional features,etc) and of the
connectors (number, section, length, type of weld) with respect to the working drawings.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 344 of 405
2.9 METAL LINER OF WATERTIGHT POOLS AND TANKS
2.9.1 SCOPE
2.9.1.1 GENERAL CASE
This chapter applies to the metal liners of watertight pools (with doors and gates) and tanks. This
includes the liner plates, equipment plates and leaktight welds between these components.
Requirements for temporary welds on the liner are given in 2.7.
Pools and tanks concerned by this section shall be listed by the Project. The following pools and tanks
may be concerned:
− the Reactor Building (HR) pools (reactor cavity, core internal storage, instrumentation lances
storage and transfer compartment);
− the Fuel Building (HK) pools (spent fuel pool, loading and transfer compartments);
− the IRWS tank;
− and other tanks (EFWS, CCWS, EBS tanks).
The following are not covered by this chapter:
− Anchoring frame system;
− System to collect leaks;
− Penetrations;
− Connectors;
− Doors and shutters;
− Sumps liners.
2.9.1.2 STATUS OF BUTT WELDS
Requirements given in 2.9 are consistent with pools and tanks designed with multi-layer butt welds on
permanent backing strips anchored in the concrete. These requirements are based on requirements
given in 2.7 for butt welds of the containment liner.
2.9.1.3 STATUS OF FILLET WELDS
Some of the requirements given in 2.9 and 2.7 may be inconsistent with fillet welds (i.e. lap joint) if a
design with fillet welds (or lap joint) is chosen by the Project according to 1.6.2.3. This applies
particularly to the number of passes and the NDT to be done. Some additional requirements shall be
established by the Project.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 345 of 405
The steel plates shall be austenitic stainless steel supplied according to EN 10088-2.
The reference Grade is X2CrNI 18-9. For other grades, supporting documentation specifying the
arrangement for its acceptance (supply) and its use (welding) shall be submitted for the Project’s
approval.
Steels with a specified %Cmax higher than 0.03 shall be stabilized grade.
All mandatory inspections and tests required by EN 10088-2 shall be performed. For stabilized
austenitic steels, the resistance to integranular corrosion test shall be performed.
Plates shall be passivated.
All the products shall be delivered with at least a type 3.1 inspection certificate in accordance with EN
10204.
Any repair by welding by the Supplier is not permitted. Only repairs by grinding are permitted within
the limit of the dimensional tolerances.
In addition, surface defects are ground down while taking account of the following requirements:
− the repaired surface on the water side of each sheet shall not exceed 1% of the total surface
of the plates;
− ground surfaces shall have a degree of surface finish and roughness similar to base materials
(i.e. non-ground materials).
Plate finishes shall be:
− 1D according to EN 10088-2 for the bottom of the spent fuel pool;
− 2B according to EN 10088-2 for all other cases.
For liner plates, in addition to the tests envisaged in the standards, a bending test to 180° shall be
carried out in accordance with EN ISO 7438. The diameter of the mandrel shall be equal to the
thickness of the sheet, with the outer face of the test specimen showing neither cracks, tears, nor
surface cracks.
For equipment plates, the optional “Impact test at ambient temperature” shall be required.
Cobalt content shall be below 0.20%, except for the sheet metal of EFWS and CCWS tanks for which
there is no limit on cobalt content.
2.9.2.1 FABRICATION
Plates shall be cut cleanly without burrs or deformation of the edges so that no trace of the cutting
operation appears on radiographic examination.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 346 of 405
Pool and tank corners shall be lined with parts fabricated and inspected in workshop. The welds
connecting the corner parts and the wall sheets shall be checked by radiographic examination over
their whole length.
2.9.2.2 WELDING
2.9.2.2.1 General
Filler materials, Welding Procedure Qualification and welding execution conditions shall be adapted to
the grade of stainless steel used.
The requirements of 2.7.2 apply. These requirements are supplemented by the following:
− Welding without filler metal is not permitted. This requirement does not apply to remelting of
weld metal for shape improvement;
− Welds shall be pickled and passivated. The use of mechanical processes is not permitted.
2.9.2.2.2 Filler material
For each batch, tests to be conducted on filler material shall be those applying to schedule 4 as
defined by EN ISO 14344. For austenitic filler material, these tests shall be completed by tensile tests
and impact tests.
2.9.2.2.3 Qualification of welding procedure
The qualification assemblies shall be prepared under the same conditions as the production welds.
Macrographs shall be executed with permanent backing strips. In addition, the weld shall be checked
for good penetration of the strip by the root pass over the full width.
For austenitic stainless steel, impact testing is not required for welding procedure qualification.
An integranular corrosion test in the deposited metal is required for the welding of stabilized stainless
steels.
2.9.2.2.4 Qualification of welders and operators
The welders or operators carrying out the liner welding work shall be qualified on a qualification
assembly with permanent backing strips.
A macrograph showing satisfactory penetration of the strip by the root pass shall be prepared for the
full width of the weld.
2.9.2.2.5 Pre-heating, post-heating and heat treatments
The requirements of 2.7.2 concerning pre-heating, post-heating and heat treatments do not apply to
the elements covered by 2.9.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 347 of 405
2.9.2.2.6 Repairs
Repairs by welding shall be made in accordance with qualified welding procedures. They shall be
submitted for the approval of the Project.
2.9.2.3 INSPECTIONS
Inspections shall be performed in accordance with 2.7.2, taking into account the following additional
requirements:
2.9.2.3.1 Visual inspection
The acceptance criteria are modified as follows:
− maximum excess weld metal (502 according to EN 6520-1) shall be 1 mm;
− maximum linear misalignement (507 according to EN 6520-1) shall be 0.3 mm;
− connecting gradients between two sheets or parts of different thickness shall not exceed 1:4.
2.9.2.3.2 Acceptance criteria for Liquid penetrant inspection
No indication is permitted. A 20 mm wide strip on both sides of the weld shall be examined at the
same time as the weld itself.
2.9.2.3.3 Radiographic examination
Leaktight welds shall be designed so as to be fully inspectable during construction, using X-ray
radiography. The list of uninspectable welds shall be submitted to the Project for approval.
The following controls shall be performed:
− Leaktight welds for pool compartments or tanks that are constantly full of water shall be
examined over their entire length (unless a specific requirement is expressed by the Project,
as is the case for the HK pools, the HR instrumentation lances storage and the IRWS tank),
− Leaktight welds on other pool compartments and tanks:
o A radiographic examination shall be performed on 10% of the linear welds, by

sampling. Regarding sampling, the conditions, the definition of the batch and the
extension criteria are defined in 2.7;
o 100% of weld nodes shall be examined.
In addition:
− In order to enable identification of the radiographically examined joints, an identification

number shall be assigned to each joint, in halogen-free ink. The identification numbers shall
remain legible until the inspected joint is considered to be satisfactory and it has been marked
on a drawing.
− A drawing shall identify the position of the joint numbers, their origin and their orientation. This
identifying data shall allow classification of the films, prove good coverage, and avoid any
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 348 of 405
confusion between films.
NOTE For welds that cannot be X-rayed in their entirety, the possibility of dye penetrant inspection
after each welding layer should be considered, with the criterion of there not being any indication
(blank dye penetrant), followed by inspection in a vacuum box.
The following are not permitted:
− Cracks;
− Porosity ≥ 0.3 t (where t is the thickness of the thinnest assembled sheet);
− Aligned porosities whose summed length is greater than “t” over a length equal to 4 t;
− Lack of penetration, and lack of fusion;
− Any isolated inclusion if its largest width is greater than t/2 mm. Two defects are regarded as
forming the same defect if the distance which separates them is less than three times the
length of the shortest defect;
− Aligned inclusions whose summed length is greater than “t” over a length equal to 4 t
(t = thickness of sheet);
− Isolated tungsten inclusions above 1 mm;
− Worm holes.
The interpretation of the radiographic images is made difficult by the geometry of weld fitup on the
backing strips. To overcome this difficulty, an interpretation catalogue based on standard images shall
be built up in order to identify the image defects due to the geometry of fitup.
2.9.2.4 DIMENSIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.9.2.4.1 Walls
Scope
The following requirements are applicable when concreting is performed before welding of the liner on
the frame.
For any other construction method, specific requirements may be expressed if justified by a dedicated
technical analysis and submitted to the Project for approval.
Walls (frame supporting the liner)
The tolerances for the levelness of the vertical face of the metallic frames embedded in the concrete of
the wall shall be those for the last sequence concrete.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 349 of 405
Walls (last sequence concrete)
The following requirements deal with the last sequence concrete, whatever the concreting method is:
− the first phase in case of a 1 phase concreting method,
− the second phase concrete in case of a 2 phases concreting method.
The tolerances for the levelness of the surface of the last sequence concrete shall be those given in
2.13 for concrete structures.
The requirement for the surface finish of the last sequence concrete shall be:
− one phase concreting method: ‘’fine facing’’ according to 2.3.1.3, except for surface bubbles
2
which shall be filled if greater than 0.25 cm ;
− two phase concreting method: flatness of “fine facing”, according to 2.3.1.3.
Unless a specific requirement is expressed by the Project and justified by a dedicated technical
analysis, the tolerance on the level of last sequence concrete on a +/- 100 mm line each side of the
metallic frame shall be no more than -3mm, 0mm related to the upper horizontal face of the metallic
frames.
Every form panel misalignment corresponding to formwork limits shall be levelled.
Walls (liner)
The liner shall be checked for local sagging. Unless a specific requirement is expressed by the Project
and justified by a dedicated technical analysis, the sag shall be less than 10 mm below a 2 m ruler, in
all directions.
Additional requirements, for instance related to outline dimensions, shall be given by the Project.
2.9.2.4.2 Base
Base (frame supporting the liner)
The manufacturer shall apply its own predefined tolerances considering the final tolerances to be
achieved on the liner.
Base (last sequence concrete)
Unless a specific requirement is expressed by the Project and justified by a dedicated technical
analysis, the tolerance on the level of last sequence concrete 100 mm apart from the metallic frame
shall be no more than +0, -3 mm related to the upper horizontal face of the metallic frame.
The surface finish of the last sequence concrete shall fulfill the flatness requirements for “fine facing”,
according to 2.3.1.3.
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 350 of 405
Base (liner):
For the liner, the tolerances shall be:
− for assembly, the liner shall be situated between two parallel planes 10 mm apart, the
theoretical dimension being between these two planes;
− slope gradient measured with a 1 m ruler shall be less than 4/1000 for the cooling
compartment of the HK pool and the vessel compartment of the HR pool, and less than 1/100
for the other compartments;
− local flatness: sag shall be less than 3 mm below a 1 m ruler, in all directions.
2.9.2.5 TESTS
Pools and tanks shall be filled with demineralized water or town water for a minimum period of one
week. The pool or tank shall be considered leaktight if no leaks are noted through the leak-collecting
system.
NOTE In case of flow in the drainage system, the duration of the test may be increased up to four
weeks, in order to distinguish leakage from effects such as condensation. In all cases, a one week
period with no recorded leaks shall be the minimum requirement.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 351 of 405
The general requirements concerning the products and their general delivery conditions are defined in
EN 1090-2, unless otherwise specified within this document.
The execution classes shall be defined during the design of the different stages (procurement,
manufacturing, construction, etc). Execution classes shall be specified on the drawings.
The execution class for metallic structures covered by this chapter shall not be less than 3, whatever
stage is being considered.
2.10.1.2 STRUCTURAL STEELS
All the elements of a metallic structure shall be obtained from hot-rolled sections or welded plate
girders. The use of cold-formed profiles is not permitted.
The products and the general technical delivery conditions are as defined in EN 1090-2.
The grades of steel normally used are S235, S275 and S355.
All products are to be covered by a type 3.1 acceptance certificate as defined in EN 10024.
Products of quality JR shall be ordered with non-specific inspection.
Products of quality J0 shall be ordered with specific product inspection.
Products of quality J2 and K2 shall be ordered with specific product inspection and will be covered by
the marking "NF- Acier".
Should it be necessary to take the risk of lamellar tearing into account (plates that have received
heavy tensile stressing perpendicularly to their surface), the products shall comply with EN 10164 for
the quality Z35.
Products to be galvanized shall be compliant with class 3 as defined by NF A 35-503 and

galvanization shall be carried out according to the requirements of EN ISO 1461 and the guidelines of
EN ISO 14713.
Coated products (shot-blasted and pre-painted products, "PGP") shall meet the requirements of EN
1090-2 in the general case and those of EN 10238 when they are pre-painted by an automatic
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 352 of 405
process.
Products shall be guaranteed free of internal defects liable to cause overlaps during shaping, cutting
or welding operations (in the event of ultrasonic examination, the applicable standards are EN 10160
for plates and EN 10306 for hot-rolled sections). The quality classes which define the control criteria
shall be imposed by the Project. For the singular case described in EN 1090-2, 5.3.4, and if ultrasonic
examination has been imposed by the Project, quality class S1 as defined in EN 1090 shall be used.
2.10.1.3 HIGH STRENGTH STEELS
High strength steels shall not be used without Project approval.
High strength steels are to be ordered with specific product inspection and shall be covered by a type
3.1 acceptance certificate, as a minimum. They are to be selected from those featuring the marking
"NF-Acier".
2.10.1.4 FACTORY INSPECTIONS
In addition to the requirements stated in the products and delivery conditions standards and for the
execution classes EXC3 and EXC4, factory inspections shall be conducted per inspection unit with the
conditions given in the following paragraphs:
2.10.1.4.1 Plates
Inspections shall be performed at the following frequencies:
Quality J0:
− Plates of thickness less than or equal to 25 mm: every 20 tonnes or remaining fraction of the
same batch,
− Plates of thickness greater than 25 mm: per parent strip.
Quality J2 and K2:
− Per parent strip.
2.10.1.4.2 Hot-rolled section products
− Every 20 tonnes or remaining fraction of the same batch.
2.10.1.4.3 Wide flat products
Quality J0:
− Wide flat products of width equal to or larger than 600 mm are to be considered as plates,
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 353 of 405
− Wide flat products of width less than 600 mm are to be considered as commercial-grade steel
sections and hot-rolled section products.
Quality J2 and K2:
− Every 20 tonnes or remaining fraction of the same batch.
2.10.1.5 CHOICE OF QUALITY OF STRUCTURAL STEELS
The choice of quality of the steel to be used shall be made by classifying the elements into particular
categories and by thickness.
2.10.1.5.1 Classification of elements
The classification of elements is given in Table 2.10.1-1, according to their loading, difficulty of
fabrication and stress level, into five categories (I-V) defined with the following criteria:
− Difficulty of fabrication and stress level criteria:
o High: elements comprising weld build-up or difficult welds (example: flanged welds);
o Medium: elements comprising welds of normal performance difficulty, without any
particular stress concentration and annealed elements exhibiting a high stress
condition;
o Low: easily fabricated elements and annealed elements exhibiting a medium stress
condition.
− Element importance criteria:
o P: major element having a decisive function in the bearing structure;
o S: secondary element whose collapse would not severely affect the stability or normal
duty of the structure.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 354 of 405
Table 2.10.1-1
Categories
Fabrication difficulty and Element
stress level importance Compressively-stressed Tensile-stressed
element element
P II I
High
S III II
P III II
Medium
S IV III
P IV III
Low
S V IV
2.10.1.5.2 Steel quality
Steel quality shall be at least equal to the values given in the table below:
Table 2.10.1-2
Limit thickness in mm
Categories
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
Quality J2,
I
K2
Quality
II
J0
Quality
III
JR
IV
For items situated at the limits between quality classes, the lower rank quality shall be chosen (for
example, for an element of category I and thickness 25 mm, the steel quality is: JR).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 355 of 405
2.10.1.6 SCREWS, NUTS AND WASHERS
The requirements of EN 1090-2 are applicable for bolts. Ordinary bolts shall meet the requirements of
EN 15048 and controlled-torque bolts those of EN 14399.
In addition to these requirements the bolts shall be covered by the marking NF “Bolts for steel
structures”.
For anticorrosion treatment bolts shall be covered by:
− either a hot galvanisation (in accordance with EN ISO 10684) or an electrolytically placed zinc
deposition (in accordance with EN ISO 4042) for ordinary bolts, or,
− a hot galvanisation (in accordance with EN ISO 10684) for controlled-torque bolts.
In case of electrolytically placed zinc deposition, the minimum thickness of zinc shall be 10 microns. In
case of hot galvanization the minimum thickness of zinc shall be 50 microns on average and 45
microns locally.
2.10.1.7 FILLER METALS FOR ELECTRIC ARC WELDING
The requirements concerning the products and the general delivery conditions defined in EN 1090-2
are applicable.
The use of processes 136 and 137 shall be submitted to the Project for approval, whenever it is
necessary to use them under a specific protection.
The choice of filler metals shall be validated by the success of welding tests.
The electrodes used for manual arc welding shall be of basic type, conserved and dried as defined in
EN 1090-2.
Rusty electrodes are not permitted.
For execution classes EXC3 and EXC4, the filler metals shall be covered by a type 3.1 acceptance
certificate.
The positioning of the metal fillers shall be in accordance with EN ISO 14344 and the batches are to
fulfil the requirements of the following classes, as defined by EN ISO 14344:
− large wire electrodes, rods, strip iron and fuse inserts: class S3;
− filled wires and filled rods: class T3;
− coated electrodes: class C3.
In the case of electric arc welding in powder, a report of the wire-current is required (chemical
analysis, mechanical tests and folding) for EXC3 and EXC4 classes of execution. This report shall
define the batch’s wire-flow.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 356 of 405
2.10.1.8 STORAGE, SHIPMENT AND HANDLING
The requirements concerning the storage, shipment and handling defined in EN 1090-2 are
applicable.
2.10.2 WORKSHOP CONSTRUCTION
All necessary provisions shall be taken to ensure that the steel structures fit within the other
structures, keeping in mind the working tolerances of the latter as defined in 2.13. If necessary,
temporary assembly shall be provided in shop (shop test assembly). In this case, the items shall be
marked before removal.
Parts should be identified by marking or metal labels for minor parts. Marking and identification with
paint is not permitted.
2.10.2.2 PREPARATION AND ASSEMBLY OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS
The preparation and assembly of elements in the workshop shall fulfil the requirements of EN 1090-2,
6, unless otherwise specified here.
2.10.2.2.1 Preparation of structural elements
Steelwork areas which are inaccessible after assembly shall be subject to individual shop treatment,
with the exception of the structures with controlled-torque assemblies.
Ordinary bolt assemblies
Holes for ordinary bolts may be directly punched into the final diameter, on condition that the following
conditions are met:
− assemblies of elements subjected to fatigue or vibrations shall not be included,
− e ≤ D and e < 15 mm, where e = punched thickness and D = hole diameter (in mm).
If these conditions cannot be met, the holes shall be drilled. It is not permitted to execute or enlarge
the holes with a blowtorch.
Prestressed bolt assemblies
If the surface treatment is not covered in EN 1090-2, Table 18, friction tests of the assembly’s strength
should be performed. These tests determine the roughness which the surfaces should exhibit after
treatment and the means to control this roughness (see EN 1090-2, Annex G).
The nature of the surface treatment, the working conditions, and the tightening of the prestressed bolts
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 357 of 405
shall be specified and listed in the working documents.
For metal spray treatments, assembly strength shall always be attained via friction tests.
The treatment qualifications focus on:
− the nature of the treatment,
− the equipment used and its service conditions,
− the nature and properties of the abrasives or the nature of the metal and the thickness of the
sprayed layer in case of metal spraying,
− post-treatment inspection of surface finish.
The surface treatments shall be verified and shall match the surface finishes specified by the design
study.
2.10.2.2.2 Assembly of elements within the workshop
Weld seams of temporary junctions may be incorporated into the final weld seams, on condition that
provisions are taken to avoid excess thickness.
2.10.2.3 ASSEMBLY BY BOLTING AND RIVETING
2.10.2.3.1 General requirements
For butt assemblies of joists by splicing, all provisions shall be taken to ensure both the alignment of
the elements during assembly and perfect contact of the splices with the elements which are being
assembled.
For each bar, an end assembly shall comprise at least two bolts.
"Full-hole" bolted assemblies (fitted bolts) are not permitted.
2.10.2.3.2 Huckbolting
Huckbolts shall be used as ordinary bolts; the clearances of the holes shall meet the conditions of the
manufacturer.
The use of huckbolts as prestressed bolts is not permitted.
2.10.2.3.3 Bolting
Bolting shall fulfil the requirements of EN 1090-2, 8, unless otherwise specified here.
1- Ordinary bolts
The design of ordinary bolted assemblies working in shear shall meet the requirements of EN 1993-1-
8.
The construction of these assemblies shall comply with EN 1090-2, taking into account the following
additional requirements:
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 358 of 405
− Assemblies shall be designed to ensure load transmission while avoiding secondary

moments. Otherwise, these assemblies shall be subject to justification by further analysis
taking into account these secondary moments;
− The use of a different bolting quality for the same diameter series should be avoided as far as
possible; if not, it shall be identified beforehand, in order to avoid mistaken use;
− Nuts shall be tightened thoroughly except for the bolts of oblong-shaped holes which shall
allow for the displacement of the assembled elements (in this case, sliding portions shall be
greased);
− The threaded portion of bolts shall not correspond to a shear section area;
− Nuts shall always be locked (welding of the nut to the bolt is not permitted).
2- Prestressed bolts
The design of prestressed bolted assemblies shall meet the requirements of EN 1993-1-8.
The choice of friction factor is to be made during the design stage.
The maximum time between surface treatment and bolt tightening shall be determined during the
design stages and shall be compatible with the choice of friction factor.
The calibration curves of the machinery to be used to tighten the prestressed bolts shall be recorded.
The indications on surface preparation and torque value shall be given within the working documents.
Prestressed-indicating washers are not permitted.
2.10.2.4 ASSEMBLY BY WELDING
The different stages necessary for the execution of a welded assembly shall meet the requirements of
EN 1993-1-8 and of EN 1090-2, 7.
A procedure should be established specifying:
− the welding program;
− the welding procedures’ qualifications;
− the field of application for each welding procedure;
− the qualification of welders and operators;
− the requirement for a welding coordinator regarding the execution classes.
In addition to the requirements of EN 1090-2, the following requirements shall be observed:
− Gouging the element with a chipping hammer during welding is not permitted;
− Crossing of two main weld lines should be avoided;
− Welding of accessory parts shall be performed away from the main welds;
− Seams shall generally be turned to the cross-section of the assembled parts.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 359 of 405
2.10.2.4.1 Correction of welding distortions
According to a special procedure which shall be established, local distortions may be corrected so as
to obtain a distortion-free finished element:
− either at room temperature, when the radius of curvature exceeds a hundred times the
dimension affected by the curvature, or,
− at elevated temperature, for parts other than beams, by use of shrinkage heating according to
the requirements of EN 1090-2, 6.5.3. In this case, the operation shall be conducted by an
experienced operator, and metal temperature shall not exceed 600 °C, with cooling carried out
in still air.
2.10.2.4.2 Inspection of production welds
Welding inspections shall be conducted according to the requirements of EN 1090-2, 12.4.
The inspections shall be based on the execution classes of the elements and also on the technicality
of the welded assemblies concerned.
All welds shall be visually examined over their entire length.
In addition to the requirements of EN 1090-2, the sampling inspections should concern the entirety of
the welded nodes.
The inspection methods and the associated acceptance criteria are given in Table 2.10.2-1 below.
Table 2.10.2-1
Type of check Relevant standard Acceptance criteria
Visual EN 970 EN ISO 5817
Dye penetration EN 571-1 EN ISO 23277
Magnetic particle EN ISO 17638 EN ISO 23278
Ultrasonic EN 1714 or EN ISO 23279 EN 1712
Radiographic EN 1435 EN 12517-1
The acceptance criteria of the dye penetration and magnetic particle examinations are:
The relevant recording threshold of any blemishes shall be 2 mm.
Two blemishes shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice the length
of the smallest one.
For Dye penetration testing, the following are unacceptable:
− non-round blemishes,
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 360 of 405
− rounded blemishes with their largest dimension greater than 4 mm,
− aligned blemishes with a total of 3 or more others within a distance of less than 3 mm edge to
edge,
−
2
clustered blemishes with a total of 8 or more over a rectangular surface of 100 cm chosen in
the most unfavourable manner with respect to the blemishes, without the rectangle’s largest
dimension exceeding 20 cm.
For magnetic particle testing, the following are unacceptable:
− linear blemishes,
− non-linear blemishes greater than 4 mm,
− aligned blemishes with a total of 3 or more others within a distance of less than 3 mm edge to
edge or extending over more than 40 mm if this distance is between 3 and 6 mm.
2.10.2.5 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
General tolerances are specified in 2.13.
The individual tolerances of the elements are as follows:
1- Elements made from hot-rolled sections
Cut to the correct length:
The fabrication tolerance on length "L" of the uninterrupted elements expressed in mm varies with the
following conditions:
Equation 2.10.2-1
±2 for L < 7000
±3 for L > 7000
The fabrication tolerance on the length of the elements fitted with connection plates at their ends is
reduced to the following values:
Equation 2.10.2-2
+0, -2 for L < 7000
+0, -3 for L > 7000
Tolerance on the blueprint line (notching, gusset plates, stiffeners, mounting panels, bends, cut-outs):
The tolerance with respect to the theoretical line is ±1 mm for dimensions smaller than or equal to 1 m.
This tolerance shall be raised to ±L/1000 for dimensions of L greater than 1 m.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 361 of 405
Tolerance of the squareness of the ends of the sections:
The tolerance of the perpendicularity of the ends of an element with respect to its longitudinal axis
during sawing or thermal cutting operations is as follows:
Equation 2.10.2-3
a ≤ 0.005H
Where “a” represents the distance between the straight sections framing the oblique cut and “H” is the
transverse dimension of the part expressed in mm.
For elements with connection plates fitted to their ends, the squareness tolerance of the plates bearing
faces is as follows:
Equation 2.10.2-4
a= 0.5 mm for H ≤ 200 mm
a= [0.5 + (H-200)/1000] mm for H > 200 mm
Tolerances for the flatness of the elements:
The flatness tolerance of the connection plates of the columns transmitting direct loads to each other
is defined as follows:
Equation 2.10.2-5
b = 0.5mm for H ≤ 200 mm
b = [0.5 + (H-200)/1000] mm for H > 200 mm
Where “b” represents the maximum deformation measured and “H” represents the transverse
dimension of the element.
The above tolerances are also valid for the bearing face of the columns that are to be grouted.
The tolerance on the flatness of the connection plates for elements other than columns is defined as
follows:
Equation 2.10.2-6
b = 1 mm for H ≤ 200 mm
b = [1 + 1.25 (H-200)/1000] mm for H > 200 mm
2- Elements rebuilt by shop welding
The overall height “H” shall be measured in mm at the supports in the web plane.
The tolerances are given in Table 2.10.2-2.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 362 of 405
Table 2.10.2-2
Dimensions
DESIGNATION Tolerance (mm) Diagram*
(mm)
Overall height: H H < 1600 ±3
H > 1600 ±5
These heights are measured at the web

location 1
Flange width: b
±3
Squareness defect: t t ≤ 0.01 b 2
Symmetry defect: s =(b1 – b2)/2 s≤3 3
Curvature of wings: c c ≤ 0.01 b/2 4
Curvature of web: p p ≤ 0.01 h 4
Tolerance on length: L +3 5
Squareness defect of ends: v v ≤ 0.005 H 6
Straightening defect or camber: q q ≤ L/1000 7
General curvature “u” measured on length L u ≤ L/1000 8
* The diagrams are given hereafter, see Figure 2.10.2-1
Figure 2.10.2-1
Diagram 1 Diagram 2
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 363 of 405
Diagram 3 Diagram 4
Diagram 5
Diagram 6
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 364 of 405
2.10.3 ASSEMBLY ON SITE
The requirements given in 2.10.2 shall be applied if the relevant operations are also performed on site.
The use of rivets is not permitted on site.
2.10.3.1 STORAGE AND HANDLING
Structural steelwork elements shall be stored and elevated so as to avoid contact with the ground and
any deformation.
Handling operations shall be performed so as not to cause permanent deformation and not to damage
the elements or their coatings.
The necessary provisions shall be made to respect the storage and handling conditions allowed for in
the design.
2.10.3.2 ASSEMBLY
The assembly and setting operations shall fit the framework imposed by the design conditions and the
constraints of the site (temporary sheet pilings, assembly phases).
Assembly shall be preferably by bolting, otherwise by welding.
Inspection of the holes shall be undertaken using a "go-no-go" gauge.
Pins may be used for bringing parts together, and shall be gently hammered in so as not to distort the
holes.
Any enlarging of the holes shall be performed by drilling or boring. The use of a blowtorch is not
permitted.
2.10.3.3 ASSEMBLY TOLERANCES
General assembly tolerances are given in 2.13.
Individual tolerances are as follows.
2.10.3.3.1 Columns
The deviation between the true column axis and the theoretical bearing axis shall not exceed 5 mm.
The verticality defect of the columns supporting travelling cranes, of height “H” (in mm) shall not
exceed the smallest of the following values: H/1000 and 20 mm.
2.10.3.3.2 Travelling beams
The incline of the bearing surface of the travelling beams between two successive columns in the
same line shall be less than 5 mm.
The incline of the bearing surface of the tracks (upper flange) of two successive beams on the same
track shall be less than 2 mm.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 365 of 405
2.10.3.3.3 Track rails
The rail axis shall not deviate by more than ±10 mm from their theoretical positions. The upper rail
section shall not deviate more than ±10 mm from the anticipated level.
When the rail is designed to be in line with the web of the supporting beam, the rail axis shall not
depart from its theoretical position with respect to the supporting web by more than ±0.5 a, where “a”
represents the minimum thickness of the supporting web.
The geometry of each track shall meet the conditions of NF E 52-121 supplemented as follows:
− the level tolerance, defined as the level difference at the columns of the same line, shall not
exceed 1/2000 of the distance between the latter with a maximum of 10 mm,
− the level difference between the rail surfaces, measured at the facing supports, shall be less
than 5/10000 of the theoretical crane span with a maximum of 10 mm,
− the deviations of the pitch (expressed in meters) of the rails with respect to the specified value
shall be no greater than ±5 mm, for s ≤ 16 m or ±[5 + 0.25 (s - 16)], for s > 16 m.
Final levelling and spacing readings shall be taken. Levelling measurements shall be taken at each
column location.
2.10.4 METAL FRAMES AND HARDWARE
"Hardware" is understood to mean structures such as: guard rails, flights of stairs, walkways, ladders,
support frames, doors, etc., constructed by assembling steel sections and plates.
These structures shall be built according to the relevant standards, in accordance with the regulations
in force.
The requirements given in 2.10.3 shall apply for hardware construction, with the following
modifications:
− welding procedure qualification is not required,
− welders and operators shall be qualified according to EN 287-1,
− only the visual examination shall be conducted for the weld joint inspection according to the
requirements of EN 1090-2.
The gratings used shall be of the hot-galvanized type. When placed, they shall be joined to the
support framework. In case of welding, the spot welds shall be painted.
All necessary provisions shall be taken to assemble the stairs and guard rails, to place the gratings,
safety flooring elements, steps, etc., at the same time as the construction of the supporting structural
steelwork.
In all cases, the safety flooring shall be spot welded to the support framework and the spot welds shall
be painted.
2.10.5 PROTECTIVE LINING OF STRUCTURAL STEELWORK, METAL FRAMES OR

HARDWARE
When it is required that a corrosion-proof protective lining must be applied to structural steelwork,
metal frames or hardware mounted inside the Reactor Building, functional tests shall be undertaken to
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 366 of 405
verify the fitness of the lining to fulfil its function in normal and accidental service throughout plant
working life.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 367 of 405
2.11 BURIED SAFETY-CLASSIFIED PIPELINES
Buried, safety-classified pipelines shall be made from reinforced concrete with embedded steel
cylinders.
Buried safety-classified pipelines shall comply with the following requirements:
− The design shall comply with the specifications given in 1.4.8. The different parts of the
pipelines including pipes, supports or foundation units, expansion joints and special purpose
parts shall be defined on the drawings,
− Settlements shall be defined in accordance with 1.9.1.3,
− Backfill shall be executed in accordance with 2.1.3.3,
− All the requirements given in 2.2 for the concrete constituents, design and manufacture shall
apply,
− Surfaces finishes shall comply with the requirements for a fine finish given in 2.3.1 and the
tolerances for fabrication shall not exceed 10 mm,
− Weld shall comply with 2.10.2.4,
− For reinforcement, the requirements given in 2.4.1 shall apply. The requirements on the fixing
and welding of reinforcement set out in 2.4.5.4.2 shall apply.
Any variations on these requirements shall be justified by special procedures.
The grade for the steel cylinder and the thickness of the pipes shall be justified and approved by the
Project.
Support or foundation units shall be designed and constructed as structural elements complying with
the relevant specifications of the ETC-C.
Dedicated procedures, approved by the Project, shall be written to justify:
− Inspection and tests during and at the end of fabrication in accordance with the design and the
loads taken into account. An “End of Fabrication Report” shall be written which shall justify
that the final quality of the elements (straight lengths, elbows, tees, flanges, etc.) satisfies
requirements,
− The welding program, welder and operator qualifications, and welding controls during
fabrication of pipes and works on site,
− The type of joints between the pipes including the material to be used,
− Inspections upon delivery, storage requirements, and handling methods,
− Installation methods for the pipes and their joints (including backfilling). Checks of the laying
bed shall be specified in order to respect:
o settlements taken into account in the design,
o the level defined in the drawings,
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 368 of 405
− mortar used to protect joints against corrosion,
− leaktightness testing of the pipes during fabrication and of the whole pipeline at the end of the
works.
An End of Operation report shall be written which shall demonstrate that the final quality of the works
meets the required specification.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 369 of 405
2.12 FILLING OF JOINTS
2.12.1 FIELD OF APPLICATION
The current section applies to linear construction joints. In the present text, the construction joint is a
free space between two civil structural elements. These joints aim to:
− Limit cracking in concrete structures (expansion joint),
− Avoid disturbances following either a temperature variation or a differential movement

between two structures, or following vibrations, seismic tremors, shocks, etc.
The filling of joints shall ensure leaktightness in the scope of the safety-related function of civil
structures. The characteristics of the product filling the joint shall take into account the relevant fluid,
the environment, and the geometry of the structure concerned.
The filling of joints is usually ensured by using a mastic filler and embedded or inserted strips.
The following are not taken into account:
− Joints for penetrations (equipment hatches, personnel hatches, piping, cable raceways, etc) of
structures,
− Joints of doors, windows, air locks,
− Joints of tunnels and underground piping.
2.12.2 PRINCIPLE
Associated with concrete structures, the filling of joints provides triple protection:
− by averting the routing of all effluents deriving from the nuclear site (which may contain toxic,
radioactive, inflammable, corrosive or explosive components, towards the natural subsoil),
avoiding the risk of dispersion of radionuclides in the natural ground and groundwater;
− by averting the penetration of external water (groundwater, rainwater, floodwater, accidental

flooding linked to the rupture of hydraulic structures, etc) into the civil engineering structure
rooms, which may lead to the failure of equipment;
− by protecting safety-related equipment in case of internal flooding.
The location of the joints to be filled shall be determined from an analysis of the protection to be
provided.
The filling of joints shall ensure leaktightness, with respect to:
− all liquids that may be found at the joint,
− the working life of the plant,
− normal and accident design operating conditions: (seismic event, fire, external and internal
flooding).
To guarantee the durability of the leaktightness function, the joint filler shall:
− have properties which guarantee resistance to mechanical, thermal and chemical attacks;
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 370 of 405
− be repairable;
− be inspectable.
2.12.3 PRODUCT AND QUALIFICATION PROCESS
Joint fillers are classified by systems which shall be qualified. The choice of the system and the
qualification tests shall take into account the environment surrounding the filler and the functions that
are to be fulfilled by the system (potential “nuclear” properties, mode and frequency of application of
loadings, strain rate, applied pressure, nature of joint edges, width of joint and potential supplementary
specific properties), and geometry of the joint.
Qualification tests shall be justified according to:
− The location of the joint, which is associated with its working mode,
− Extreme conditions associated with its installation,
− Mechanical (and hydro-mechanical), thermal and chemical requirements (in accordance with
2.12.2),
− Maintenance conditions (e.g.: changing frequency, if the lifetime of the products is short),
− Specific conditions of the nuclear site, including launching test, and an analysis of possibility of
corrosion induced by the products on the components.
Qualification of the installation method shall be based on full-scale installation tests making it possible
to:
− verify that the filler installation is compatible with the surrounding structures and equipment,
− establish the on-site installation control,
− establish the parameters for deciding the acceptance of the installation,
− establish the procedures for inspection and monitoring throughout plant working life,
− establish maintenance procedures.
2.12.4 TYPES OF FILLER CONCERNED
2.12.4.1 TREATMENT BY LEAKTIGHT STRIPS
Leaktight strips may be:
− Embedded in the concrete or incorporated at the time of concrete pouring,
− Inserted with or without reinforcement, mechanically fixed or glued.
2.12.4.2 TREATMENT WITH JOINT SEALANT
The joint sealant shall be suitable for the dimensional variations of the joint, taking into account its
working conditions (geometry, dilation, splitting, settlement, and environment). Elastic return is
determined as per EN ISO 7389.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 371 of 405
2.12.4.2.1 Elastomer joint sealant
Under deformation, elastomer joint sealants essentially behave elastically and accommodate
significant strains.
2.12.4.2.2 Plastic joint sealant
Plastic joint sealant behaviour is close to that of purely plastic material. The residual stresses induced
in the plastic joint sealant by a joint movement disappear rapidly.
2.12.5 QUALIFICATION
The usability of a joint filling system shall be justified by tests and documents, in accordance with the
applicable criteria governing joint operation.
2.12.5.1 IDENTIFICATION TESTS
The following identification tests conducted by manufacturers shall appear on technical sheets:
− Chemical analysis, including determinations of the constituents, infrared spectroscopy and

specific determinations;
− Determination of the Rapid Identification Characteristics of compounds involving

thermogravimetric analysis, density and ash content;
2.12.5.2 FUNCTIONAL TESTS
Functional tests shall be performed in response to the service conditions imposed (including the width
of the joint), the joint functional criteria and the expected performance.
Taking into account the containment required, these tests may include the following:
− Determination of elongation properties under tensile stress, according to EN ISO 8339,
− Determination of adhesive and cohesive force by shearing to rupture according to NF P 85-

522,
− Determination of resistance to compression according to EN ISO 11432,
− Resistance to water pressure, as per EDF/CEIDRE/TEGG procedure n°EDTCE090496A or an

approved equivalent,
− Evaluation of susceptibility to contamination and decontaminability, according to NF T 30-901,
− Determination of adhesion/cohesion properties of sealant after immersion in aggressive water

(borated water pH 6.8; boron concentration 2.5 g/litre), according to EN ISO 10591,
− Determination of adhesion/cohesion properties of sealant after immersion in aggressive water

(osmosised demineralised water pH 7.8), according to EN ISO 10591,
− Determination of the reparability of the filler after artificial ageing, according to EN ISO 9047
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 372 of 405
and NF P 85-522,
− Determination of fire resistance (if needed) according to EN 1366-4 and ETC-F.
− If necessary a justified launching test to analyse the possibility of corrosion induced by the
products on the components.
2.12.6 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION ON SITE
The following specification shall be observed during installation on the site.
2.12.6.1 PRELIMINARY REQUIREMENTS
Personnel involved in the works shall be qualified.
The qualification of personnel shall be verified.
Application procedures shall be available before the beginning of the works.
File on construction and suitability of filler systems with respect to the working of the joints shall be
established.
2.12.6.2 RECEPTION OF PRODUCTS
All delivered products shall be in compliance with the technical data sheet justified during the
qualification process.
Sampling and tests shall be performed to verify the conformity of materials with the qualified system
(Rapid Identification Characteristics).
Storage shall allow a correct conservation of products on the site, in accordance with the terms of the
technical data sheets.
2.12.6.3 INSTALLATION
Surface preparation of joint edges or contact areas:
− Joints shall be free of laitance, dirt and debris. All curing and sealing compounds shall be
removed. Joints shall be water and frost free
− Conservation of the joint shape, with surface preparation by all appropriate techniques:
manual brushing and cleaning, traditional sanding and stripping methods.
− Re-shaping by:
o Adding material (localised or throughout the line of the shape),
o Mechanical sawing of material in place,
o Embedding of angle bars or metal plates.

− The immersed joint profiles shall be pumped and dried.
The end of this “preparation” phase leads to a control.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 373 of 405
2.12.6.4 CONTROL DURING APPLICATION
2.12.6.4.1 Treatment by joint sealant
The application of the system generally involves the following successive steps:
− Placement of the backup,
− If necessary, application of a primer to ensure bonding with the substrate,
− Laying of the joint sealant.
The following shall be controlled with particular attention during the application:
− The strength of the backup and its depth,
− The quality of compound mixes of the mastics (if bi-compound) and observation of their
working time,
− The overlap time with the primer,
− Filling of the joint and tightening of the mastic.
The joint fillers shall be protected by a mechanical protection feature and shall be installed as soon as
the mastic cross-linking is effective (according to the technical sheets of the manufacturers).
2.12.6.4.2 Treatment by leaktight strips
The installation of a leaktight strip shall give rise to the following actions:
− Verification of the integrity and positioning of the strip before concreting or embedding,
− Check that for each hot vulcanisation, the maximum duration stated by the test report is not
exceeded,
− Ensure that a mechanical protection feature protects the strip from the elements, ultraviolet
light and all other attacks, before and during concreting (for embedded strips),
− Inspection of the Omega (tension of the strip) for strips inserted with reinforcements,
− Checking of the best-before date of the glue and inspection of bonding (for glued strips),
− Inspection of the installation and the compactness of the concrete directly above the strips.
2.12.6.5 FINAL CHECK
A final check shall be systematically performed at the end of the works, comprising:
− checking of the finalisation and completeness of the working files,
− testing, to be defined according to the nature of the filler and its function, on the basis of
the following non-exhaustive list:
o Shore A hardness measurements,
o Bonding checks by application of manual pressure,
o Possible sampling in order to check the presence of the backup, the mechanical
performance of the material and the thickness of the product,
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 374 of 405
o A general visual inspection of the appearance of the filler (metal fixture, Omega
presence and integrity),
o Etc.
2.12.7 FILLER DURABILITY: FUNCTIONAL AND AGEING MONITORING
The loss of the mechanical properties of a material due to its ageing may reduce resistance to
stresses arising under accident conditions for the relevant filler.
To ensure the continued functioning of the system in normal or accident conditions the following
actions shall be implemented:
− A maintenance programme, comprising a visual examination and Shore A hardness

measurements of accessible fillers,
− A hydraulic test programme on inaccessible fillers which are not situated under the lowest
layer of the groundwater (permanent hydraulic test of the infrastructure).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 375 of 405
2.13 TOPOGRAPHY, TOLERANCES AND MONITORING
Before the start of works, a procedure relating to the topographical works shall be submitted to the
Client for approval. The Client will provide a “topographical reference unit” or several successive units
pertaining to each portion of the work.
2.13.1 TOPOGRAPHICAL REFERENCE UNITS
There are 4 topographical reference units:
− the primary survey grid;
− the secondary survey grid;
− the micro survey grid;
− the “DRT" system.
2.13.1.1 PRIMARY SURVEY GRID
The primary grid consists of a set of landmarks defined in the national projection and altimetric
reference, to be set up before the earthworks.
It forms the “primary survey grid”.
In planimetry, the standard deviation between 2 consecutive points of the primary survey grid shall be
±2 cm.
In altimetry, the standard deviation of a point on the survey grid shall depend on the distance L to the
closest national landmark: it is generally ±1 L cm (where L is expressed in km).
The primary survey grid provides the reference for the earthworks.
2.13.1.2 SECONDARY SURVEY GRID
2.13.1.2.1 Local system
A local coordinate system shall be defined as soon as the position of the structures is known.
Conventionally, the local system characteristics are as follows:
− No alteration of lengths,
− Axis Y is defined by the direction from the centre of the unit 1 reactor to the unit 1 turbine hall.
A conversion formula will be provided by the Project to switch from the national system to the local
system and vice versa. The latter switch is valid for the site or its immediate proximity.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 376 of 405
2.13.1.2.2 Definition
Before the start of works, a topographical landmark system, called the “secondary survey grid”, is set
up. It is determined:
− for planimetry, in the local system,
− for altimetry, in the national altimetric system.
The standard deviation between 2 consecutive points on the secondary survey grid shall be ± 2 mm
for planimetry and for altimetry.
The secondary survey grid shall comprise:
− piles or columns considered to be fixed, which form the base of the system,
− a few columns which may undergo coordinate variations in the course of construction,
− a single altimetric reference, generally placed on one of the piles and verifiable by the other
points on the base.
The 3 reference columns shall form the contractual landmark for the works until completion of the
microsurvey grid.
2.13.1.3 MICROSURVEY GRID
During the construction of each building, a landmark system called the “microsurvey grid” shall be
established consisting of:
− a set of landmarks on the structure basemat, namely:
o several landmarks defined as planimetric coordinates (standard deviation between 2

consecutive points ±2 mm),
o a single altimetric reference for the structure (standard deviation of ±2 mm with

respect to the altimetric reference of the worksite (fixed point)),
− landmarks located directly above the previous ones, at each floor, set up by means of sleeves
passing through the floors.
The “microsurvey grid” shall form the contractual reference of the civil works.
2.13.1.4 “DRT” SYSTEM
The microsurvey grid shall be supplemented in each room by a system called “DRT” (for “Divers
Referentiel Topographique” in French), forming the reference for the layout of hardware and
equipment.
This system shall be made up of:
− two by two landmarks defining an X- and Y-axis in each room;
− an altimetric landmark located close to the room.
The standard deviation between a DRT planimetry landmark and the microsurvey grid of the building
shall be ±4 mm.
The standard deviation between a DRT altimetry landmark and the altimetric reference of the building
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 377 of 405
shall be ±2 mm.
"Working tolerances" is understood to mean the tolerances which take into account the deviations
inherent in the layout of topographical operations and deviations attributable to the work itself.
Tolerances relate to the permissible deviation in the specified value of a dimension, position or surface
condition.
Three types of working tolerance are distinguished, as explained below:
Absolute tolerance:
Tolerance on the absolute position (X,Y,Z) of a structure’s axis or any part of a structure with respect
to a “topographical reference unit”.
For independent and isolated structures, the topographical reference unit shall be part of a known
“primary” survey grid in the national projection system, for planimetry, and the national altimetric
system, for altimetry.
For connected structures, the topographical reference unit shall be part of a “secondary” survey grid
determined in a local coordinate system and attached to the primary survey grid.
Relative tolerance:
Tolerance on the relative position (X,Y,Z) of any part of a structure with respect to a “topographical
reference unit” linked to this structure.
This “topographical reference unit” is part of a “microsurvey grid” set up on the structure itself and
defined with respect to the primary or secondary survey grid.
Elementary tolerance:
Tolerance on:
− a dimension, orientation, inclination or surface condition requiring an accuracy greater than

required by the absolute or relative tolerances;
− the relative positions of equipment items or parts of structures.
The basic tolerance is one-dimensional: it does not refer to any topographical reference unit.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 378 of 405
Table 2.13.2-1
Type of tolerance to be Origin of the topographical

Type of structure
considered reference unit
Independent structures absolute Primary survey grid
elementary No topographical reference unit
Primary or secondary survey

Connected structures absolute
grid
Structure internals relative Microsurvey grid
The maximum allowable working tolerances under normal working conditions are given in APPENDIX
2.A.
2.13.3 ALTIMETRIC MONITORING
Each structure shall be equipped with a set of landmarks to remain in place during operation and shall
enable the variations in basemat displacements and distortions to be measured.
The measuring frequency shall be adapted to match the foreseeable or observed movements.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 379 of 405
APPENDIX 2.A TO CHAPTER 2.13
TOLERANCES
(For normal working conditions, tolerances could be replaced by other values in case of specific
requirements)
(6 pages)
ETC-C 2010 Edition

ABSOLUTE RELATIVE
Independent structures Connected structures Internal structures

Table 2.A-1
TYPE OF WORKS planimetry planimetry Vertical BASIC

planimetry altimetry altimetry
measurements
Page 380 of 405
uncertainty tolerance range tolerance range

Tolerance range
uncertainty uncertainty
ETC-C 2010 Edition

radius + or - + or -
radius radius + or -
Survey works
- piezometers 20 cm 2 cm
- test boring 20 cm 10 cm
- seismic profiles 20 cm 20 cm
- gravimetric measurements 20 cm 2 cm
- limnigraphic scales 1m 5 cm
Open-air earthworks
- rocky spoils (line A)

For lined excavations, a line A basic
without pre-splitting (1) 20 cm 15 cm 15 cm 10 cm tolerance with respect to the adopted
with pre-splitting 15 cm 10 cm 10 cm 5 cm structure profile may be required,

depending on the tolerance set for
- rocky backfills (profile performed) 15 cm 10 cm
the lining thickness

- loose earth spoils and backfills (line 10 cm 5 cm
A or profile performed)
Underground earthworks
- rocky spoils (line A)

Tolerances on the distance of the
without pre-splitting (1) 15 cm (3) 10 cm (3)
20 cm (2) 15 cm profile performed (or line A) to the
with pre-splitting 10 cm (3) 5 cm (3) axis set up after earthwork: +3 cm.
15 cm (2) 10 cm
with full-sized boring
12 cm (2) 10 cm
machine
(1) With surface adjustment or use of the careful splitting technique.
(2) If the length of the tunnel (L in km) is > 5 km, the applicable tolerance in normal working conditions is increased by the value in cm given by the expression: (L-5)1/2.
(3) Applies to major excavations (underground factory).
ABSOLUTE RELATIVE

Table 2.A-2
Vertical
TYPE OF WORKS altimetry altimetry BASIC
planimetry planimetry planimetry measurements
tolerance tolerance
uncertainty uncertainty uncertainty Tolerance
range range
radius radius radius range
+ or - + or -
+ or -
The deflections measured with the 3 m ruler shall
Platforms – Roadways not exceed:
- Earth platforms Foundation layer: 2 cm

10 cm 5 cm
- Roadways Base layer: 1 cm

5 cm 3 cm
Surface layer: 1 cm
Boring in the earth 20 cm 10 cm 5 cm 3 cm The deviation of the boreholes shall not exceed 3 %
of their length.
Piles, cast walls, sheet piling For structural foundations, the deviation of the
vertical elements such as piles, cast walls, sheet
- Structural foundations 5 cm 3 cm (1) 3 cm 2 cm
piling, etc, shall not exceed 1 % of their length. This
- Watertight walls 10 cm 5 cm (1) tolerance is raised to 4.5% for inclined piles or sheet
piling. For watertight walls, the continuity of the wall

shall be guaranteed.
Concrete structures (2) For tunnel, shaft or other excavation linings, the
tolerance on the distance of the profile performed (or
- 1st phase concrete (3), 2 cm (5) 1 cm (5)
line R) to the profile set up after earthwork is +2 cm.
penetrations performed during
5 cm 3 cm 3 cm 2 cm
concreting (4) For sleeves , the verticality or horizontality tolerance
nd
1 cm (5) 0.5 cm (5) is 1%, with a maximum off-centre of 1 cm.
- 2 phase concrete (3),
penetrations by boring
(1) At top of structure.
(2) For the structures made up of prefabricated elements, the facing tolerances and definitions shall apply as if construction was performed on site.
(3) The acceptance criteria of the facings (flatness and shape defects, texture) are defined in 2.3.1.
(4) Tolerances on the position of centre and the ends of the sleeves.
(5) This tolerance may be increased for penetrations which do not require very precise positioning (electrical penetrations for example).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 381 of 405
ABSOLUTE RELATIVE

Table 2.A-3
TYPE OF WORKS Vertical BASIC

Page 382 of 405
planimetry altimetry planimetry altimetry planimetry measurements
ETC-C 2010 Edition

uncertainty tolerance range uncertainty tolerance range uncertainty
Tolerance range
radius + or - radius + or - radius
+ or -
Large-diameter conduits 5 cm 3 cm 1 cm 0.5 cm (1)
Revolving crane brackets (2) 5 cm 3 cm 2 cm 1 cm All points on the upper horizontal

anchor plate shall lay between two
horizontal planes 1.5 cm apart.
Structures and equipment
The basic tolerances applicable to

1 cm (3) 0.5 cm (3)
- grouted parts the steelwork and beams of the
3 cm 2 cm 3 cm 2 cm 2 cm 1 cm
tracks are given in 2.10.

- large steelwork (4)
- small steelwork, metalwork

1 cm 0.5 cm
(1) Axis with connections to other supplies.
(2) Tolerances on the position of the horizontal anchor plate to which the rail will be fixed.
(3) Upper value of the tolerances of the grouted parts.
(4) Positioning tolerance of a given element with respect to the reference unit.
TYPE OF WORKS BASIC
3
- Main linear dimension: e0 < 0.25. db
Table 2.A-4
with:
db = theoretical dimension expressed in centimetres
e0 is never less than 0.5 cm or greater than 3 cm
- Maximum off-centre between two walls or two columns which shall be superimposed:
e1 (cm) < emin where emin = smallest thickness of the two elements
Walls and columns
(1)
e1 < 3 cm
- Verticality: sum of the tolerances over the height of a wall or column
1
e2 (cm) < .e where e = thickness of the element
15

(1) e2 < 0.5 cm per meter height between floor or end.
where e = deviation between the axis of the theoretical wall and any point on the axial plane executed.
Prefabricated slabs or pre-
- Straightness of the edges with respect to the straight line joining their ends: +0.5 cm
slabs
(1) The severest of the two values shall be retained.
ETC-C 2010 Edition
Page 383 of 405
TYPE OF WORKS BASIC
- The minus tolerance on the minimum cover is null (1),

Reinforced concrete
Table 2.A-5
- the tolerance on nominal cover is +1 cm, this tolerance is reduced to +0.5 cm for pre-fabricated elements (1),
reinforcements
Page 384 of 405
- for parallel reinforcements whose spacing is no more than 10 cm, the tolerance on this spacing is set at +1 cm,
ETC-C 2010 Edition

- in other cases, the tolerance is +2 cm for cross section (normal to the plane) and +5 cm for the plane.
- Vertical ducts: the tubes shall be positioned from vertical marking reference tubes regularly spaced around the circumference
Reference tubes: Radial and tangential directions: theoretical position +1.5 cm
Other tubes: Radial direction: theoretical position with respect to formwork +1.5 cm
Tangential direction:
- Horizontal curvilinear distance between ducts: theoretical gap +2.5 cm
- Position of a duct with respect to closest reference tube: theoretical curvilinear dimension +5 cm
- Horizontal ducts:
Radial direction: theoretical position +1.5 cm
Presstressing ducts Vertical direction: the criteria are as follows:
- The levels of the centres of gravity of the cross sections of the same horizontal duct section shall be

situated between two horizontal planes 4 cm apart,
- The average level of the centres of gravity of the cross sections of a duct shall be situated +2.5 cm from
the theoretical position indicated on the drawings.
- Dome ducts:
Radial direction: theoretical position +1.5 cm
Tangential direction:
- Horizontal curvilinear distance between ducts: theoretical gap +2.5 cm
- Position of a duct with respect to the axes of the cable families: theoretical curvilinear dimension +5 cm
(1) The minimum cover and nominal cover are defined in the design section.
Page 385 of 405
APPENDIX 2.B
Table 2.B-1
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 386 of 405
Table 2.B-2
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 387 of 405
APPENDIX 2.C
The test requires the use of pressure gauges and continuous recording to plot the pressure in the
passive chamber of one jack (Pp) versus the pressure in the active chamber (Pa) of the other jack.
The passive and active jacks shall have the same section. The transmission coefficient obtained kobs is
equal to the slope of the straight line Pp versus Pa. The coefficient kobs is corrected by factor fC to
obtain the real coefficient of transmission:
Equation 2.C-1
Kr = (1/ fc). kobs.
Load factor fc is obtained by two tests, called α test and β test, which enable determination of the
friction losses in the jacks and in the whole anchorage block, bearing guide and guide-tube assembly:
1- Preliminary test (α test) is defined by the following figure:
Jack A Jack P
Figure 2.C-1 Type α preliminary test
Two bearing guides, deviation and connection ducts are embedded in two concrete blocks installed in
opposite frame. The test is performed with all the anchorage components (anchor blocks, wedges,
bearing devices), tubes, strands and tension equipment (jacks with jack heads fully complying with the
anchor blocks of the system) which will be used for the prestressing works and for the measurement of
real coefficient of transmission Kr.
The slope of the straight line Pp versus Pa give the coefficient fc.
2- Preliminary test (β test) is defined by the following figure:
Jack A Jack P
Figure 2.C-2 Type β preliminary test
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 388 of 405
The test is performed with the same jacks and strands used for the α test.
The coefficient fC is calculated with fc = r².f v
fv is a coefficient of friction losses in the jacks,
r is a coefficient of friction losses in the duct connection, bock anchors and wedges. The value of r
must be known to perform this test.
The slope of the straight line Pp versus Pa gives the coefficient fv.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

ETC-C
PART 3
LEAK AND RESISTANCE TESTS
AND CONTAINMENT MONITORING
Page 389 of 405
PART 3 - LEAK AND RESISTANCE TESTS AND CONTAINMENT MONITORING
PART 3 LEAK AND RESISTANCE TESTS AND

CONTAINMENT MONITORING
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 390 of 405
3.1 TERMINOLOGY
NOTE The following definitions apply within the context of ETC-C PART 3. Some of them may differ
from NDT terminology stated in EN1330-8.
Leaktightness test: pressurizing of the containment in order to check its tightness against the
contractual or regulatory conditions.
Resistance test: carried out in order to check the mechanical behaviour of the inner containment
under pressure. It can be performed at the same time as a leaktightness test.
Flow rate: the quantity of gas which escapes during a given time under clearly defined pressure and
temperature conditions. The reference gas for the leaktightness test is air.
Leakage rate: conventional expression for the mass of gas leaking through the containment wall (or
an isolation valve) under specific conditions (pressure and temperature during testing or Severe
Accident) for a given period (24 h) compared to the mass of gas contained in the free volume defined
by the containment.
Partial leakage rate: the leak rate for each component measured separately during partial tests. A
distinction is made between the tests relating to specific penetrations (generally consisting of leaktight
systems equipped with seals), and the tests relating to the fluid penetrations (the tightness of which is
measured from the isolating valves).
Notations:
Po: atmospheric pressure (taken as 0.1 MPa);
Pa: maximum containment gauge pressure in accidental conditions given in 1.3.3.4.3;
Ta: containment temperature in accidental conditions;
NOTE Pa and Ta result from decoupling curves considered to represent the envelopes of accidental
conditions.
Pe: pressure of the containment leaktightness test;
Te: ambient temperature of the containment atmosphere during the leaktightness test;
Lra: maximum containment leakage rate acceptable under actual accident conditions (Pa, Ta, air-
steam mixture);
Lre: containment leakage rate under leaktightness test conditions;

acc
Lre : maximum acceptable containment leakage rate under the preoperational leaktightness test
conditions (Pe, Te, air);
Lrm: overall containment leakage rate obtained from the average value measured during the Pe
pressure plateau;
Lrad: maximum leakage rate acceptable for penetrations under actual accident conditions (Pa, Ta air-
steam);
Lred: maximum leakage rate acceptable for penetrations under the test conditions (Pe, Te air).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 391 of 405
The prestressed and reinforced concrete cylindrical wall and dome of the internal containment
withstand internal pressure, while leaktightness is ensured by the metal liner.
At containment penetrations, structural strength and leaktightness are ensured by various components
such as connecting parts between sleeves and penetrations, the equipment hatch and its seals, the
personnel airlocks (fixed parts, doors and seals), isolation valves for fluid penetrations (valve body,
covers and stems), electrical penetrations, blind flanges.
Before unit start-up, the containment undergoes a test known as the "acceptance test" or
"preoperational test", comprising:
− A "type A" test consisting of an overall leaktightness test of the inner containment (preceded
by partials tests for example on the penetrations);
− A mechanical resistance test;
− An evaluation of the external containment leaktightness, to check that it complies with the
Annulus Ventilation System (AVS) design. AVS is a system which collects and filters gas
leakages in the annulus space, between the inner (prestressed concrete) and outer
(reinforced concrete) walls.
During plant working life, leaktightness tests of the inner containment wall are periodically repeated.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 392 of 405
3.3 LEAKTIGHTNESS TESTS
3.3.1 ACCEPTANCE LEAKTIGHTNESS TEST OF THE CONTAINMENT
3.3.1.1 OVERALL LEAKTIGHTNESS TEST OF THE INNER CONTAINMENT
The purpose of this “type A” test is to measure the leakage rate of the inner containment. The
maximum pressure Pe of this test is equivalent to the pressure Pa.
Before the acceptance test and during construction or in the factory, the containment system shall
undergo tightness checks such as:
− inspection of the welds on penetrations and containment liner sheets;
− tightness checks of the metalwork on the personnel airlocks;
− tightness checks of the electric penetrations and containment isolation valves.
To supplement these preliminary checks, and before unit start-up, an initial test comprising the
following sequences shall be performed:
− partial type B tests (see 3.3.1.2) which determine the local leaks through containment
penetrations equipped with seals;
− partial type C tests (see 3.3.1.2) which determine the local leaks through penetrations
equipped with isolation valves;
− an overall type A test determining the total inner containment leakage rate.
3.3.1.1.1 Preliminary configuration of circuits
The containment should be equipped with all its penetrations, isolation valves and plugs.
A visual inspection and, any necessary corrective actions shall be performed before the test.
If a penetration is not completed (for example not fitted with its permanent isolating devices) it shall be
temporarily sealed before the test. The type A test should be corrected later by using the result of a
partial test on this penetration. This arrangement should be applied in exceptional case only.
As a general assumption, the components and circuits shall be in a state as close as possible to the
state they would be in for accidental conditions, following the actuation of the automatic devices in
application of the post-accident procedures:
− All the isolation valves, apart from those which are part of the systems needed to maintain the
safety of the unit during the test, shall be closed by a normal operation (for example without
manual retightening after automatic closure);
− All the systems or parts of systems which are likely to be directly connected to the
containment atmosphere during the Severe Accident shall be drained of the fluid which they
contain and opened to the containment atmosphere;
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 393 of 405
− Any pressurization channels of welds connecting penetrations to the containment and the
containment bottom liner welds shall be open to the containment atmosphere during the test.
Steps should be taken to avoid any leaks towards the water-steam circuit (for example, the pressures
between this circuit and the containment may be balanced).
3.3.1.1.2 Test method
1- Principles
Tightness shall be measured by the so-called “absolute” method which consists of measuring
pressure variations of the dry air contained in the containment and correcting them based on mean
temperature and hygrometry variations.
The absolute method is an application of the law of ideal gases, namely:
Equation 3.3.1-1
P.V = N.R.T
where:
N = a number of moles;
R = constant of perfect gases;
V = inner volume of the containment;
T = mean temperature of the containment dry air;
P = absolute pressure of the air.
The mass of air m is proportional to the number of moles N. By applying the logarithmic heat-rate
curve, Equation 3.3.1-1 becomes:
Equation 3.3.1-2
dm/m = dN/N = dP/P + dV/V – dT/T
As the volume variation is generally negligible, the formula for the relative loss of gas mass between
instants t and t0 is:
Equation 3.3.1-3
dm/m0 = dP/P0 – dT/T0
The method consists of measuring the pressure variations of the air contained in the containment as
well as the variations of the average temperature.
As the pressure P of the dry air is equal to the absolute pressure in the containment minus the partial
pressure of the steam, the mean hygrometry obtained by weighting the local hygrometry
measurements can be calculated.
The mean temperature results from a suitable weighting of a sufficient number of local temperature
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 394 of 405
readings relative to the partial volumes.
2- Instrumentation
The necessary instrumentation for the overall leaktightness test comprises:
− temperature sensors;
− hygrometers;
− pressure gauges.
The temperature sensors and hygrometers shall be of a sufficient number, and judiciously distributed
in the various volumes delimited by the internal structures.
3.3.1.1.3 Procedure
Measurements should be taken at null relative pressure at the start of testing, in order to check the
validity of the measurements and evaluate the error due to the instrumentation.
The pressure build-up is gradual with three plateaus at: 0.1 MPa, 0.5 Pe and Pe (Pe = Pa).
Measurements shall be taken at each plateau.
The measurement plateaus shall be maintained until stabilisation for at least 4 hours.
At each plateau, the readings shall be taken at regular intervals. The value dm/dm 0 for the relative
variation of the mass between the initial moment and the moment of the measurement shall be
calculated. The leak rate value is then obtained by a linear regression calculation: this is the least
squares line on the graph showing the values dm/dm 0 in relation to time.
3.3.1.1.4 Test gas
The test gas used shall be clean air (filtered and de-oiled) which shall have a relatively low moisture
content to avoid condensation in the containment (residual content in steam shall be below 1 g of
3
water per m drawn in).
3.3.1.1.5 Test acceptance criterion
The Severe Accident conditions differ from the test conditions depending on the pressure, the
temperature in the containment and by the test gas used (air-steam mixture instead of only air).
Due to the presence of the metallic liner, the transposition between these two situations shall be
performed by considering a turbulent flow in a rough path, given by the NIKURADZE formula, which
stands for the most conservative conditions.
The general formula which ties the leakage rate Lre under the test conditions to that of Lra under the
accidental conditions is:
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 395 of 405
Equation 3.3.1-4
1/ 2
 Po 2 
1/ 2  1 − 
Lre  Ma Te   ( Pe + Po) 2 
=  
Lra  Me Ta  Po 2 
1− 
 ( Pa + Po) 2 
(where Ma and Me are, respectively, the molar masses of the test gas contained in the containment in
accidental and leaktightness test conditions).
This criterion is established for Pe = Pa, and Equation 3.3.1-4 then becomes:
Equation 3.3.1-5
1/ 2
Lre acc  Ma Te 
= 
Lra  Me Ta 
The envelope conditions are as follows:
Te = 273 +20 = 293°K Me = 29 g/mole (dry air in test)
Ta = 273 + 170 = 443°K Ma = 21 g/mole (air-steam mixture in accidental conditions)

acc
From which: Lre = 0.69 Lra.
Taking into account the error d(Lrm) on the total leakage rate due to the instrumentation, the overall
test shall be considered acceptable if the measured leakage rate Lrm satisfies the following condition:
Equation 3.3.1-6
acc
Lrm + d(Lrm) < 0.75 Lre
The factor 0.75 corresponds to a margin designed to take account of any ageing of the containment.
3.3.1.2 “TYPE B” AND “TYPE C” PARTIAL TESTS ON PENETRATIONS
3.3.1.2.1 Objectives
The purpose of these tests is to determine the impact on containment tightness of leaks at
penetrations.
Type B and type C tests are distinguished as follows.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 396 of 405
1- Type B tests
These tests determine the leaks at singular penetrations defined as:
− canisters of electrical penetrations;
− sealing systems on personnel airlocks (doors and penetrations);
− sealing systems on the equipment hatch;
− penetrations equipped with removable blind flanges with seals, such as the transfer tube.
2- Type C tests
These tests determine the leaks at fluid penetrations, which are isolated by active cut-off devices
(valves).
The mechanical penetrations of closed secondary systems in the containment are not affected by
these tests.
3.3.1.2.2 Test procedures
1- Electrical penetrations
All electrical penetrations shall be checked by reading the pressure gauges (electrical penetrations are
permanently pressurised).
2- Equipment hatch
The seals positioned on the flanges shall be checked by pressurising the inter-seal space to the
design pressure Pa, using the decreasing pressure method.
3- Personnel airlock
The fronts of the personnel airlock may generally have various types of seals which can be grouped in
two categories:
− either leaktight devices verifiable by pressurisation, inlcuding door seals and balancing valves,
inter-lockable shaft penetrations, manually operated control shafts and control shafts for the
door motor on the inside of the containment, and blanking plugs or penetration and openings
for the compression-decompression device;
− static, unverifiable, but self-sealing devices such as door observation ports and plugs for
certain penetrations.
Before any acceptance testing of the containment, these seals shall undergo local testing. These local
tests shall be supplemented by an overall tightness test performed by pressurising (to 0.03 MPa
relative pressure) each one of the personnel airlocks and then applying a soapy solution to the non-
testable seals and noting any bubbles that form. The pressure and temperature variations over a
period of 24 hours shall be measured and recorded.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 397 of 405
Thereafter, only the local tests of the seals shall be periodically repeated. Nevertheless, in the event
that the self-sealing devices are not equipped with pressure pick-offs for local leak testing, these tests
are supplemented by the overall test.
4- Isolation valves for penetrations
The leaktightness tests are normally carried out by local pressurization with air up to the containment
design pressure. However, in order to account for issues of safety or availability of circuits, these tests
may be carried out using water for certain systems.
The leak measurement of the isolation valves is mainly based on two methods:
− the direct method: by applying pressure upstream of the valve and by measuring the leak
downstream using a flow meter;
− the decreasing pressure method: by pressurising the part of the system between two isolation
valves.
The direct method is favoured for each of the devices since it is more accurate and more realistic (the
valves are pressurized in the right direction).
Concerning the leak tests using water, the water-air hydraulic equivalence to be taken into account
when totalising the leaks from isolation valves is given by the formula below based on laminar flow:
Equation 3.3.1-7
V µ' 2 Po
= ×
V ' µ P1 + P2
where:
V volumic discharge of a water leak;
V' volumic discharge of an air leak (reduced to atmospheric pressure);
µ dynamic viscosity of water;
µ' dynamic viscosity of air;
P1 P2 upstream and downstream pressure (absolute pressure).
The equivalence of the radiological consequences in the post-accident conditions (ratio of the
radioactivity of gases released outside the Reactor Building due to a water leak and an air leak) is
taken conservatively as equal to 1.
3.3.1.2.3 Acceptance criteria
The leaks from all the penetrations shall not exceed 60% Lra.
acc
From which: Lrad = 0.60 Lra ⇒ Lred = 0.60 Lre .
As for the type A test, a coefficient of 0.75 is applied to the penetrations to take account of ageing
(wear of the valve seats) between each cycle (each shutdown for reloading).
Before a restart, the leakage rate from all the penetrations submitted to the partial leaktightness tests,
measured at the beginning of cycle, is therefore limited to: 0.75 Lred.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 398 of 405
3.3.2 PERIODIC LEAKAGE TESTS DURING OPERATION PHASE
The in-service containment surveillance programme applies to the entire system and comprises the
three different types of leakage tests:
− Type A (overall);
− Type B (partial);
− Type C (partial).
Generally, the periodic leakage tests of the containment should be carried out at the same frequencies
as those of the main reactor coolant system tests, during which all the fuel is removed from the
containment.
3.3.3 SPECIAL TESTS IN THE EVENT OF SERIOUS INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL

ACCIDENTAL EVENTS
Additional overall or partial leak tests shall be performed following events sufficiently serious and as to
be likely to lead to degradation of the containment such as:
− strong earthquakes;
− internal or external projectiles;
− internal explosions.
3.3.4 TEST REPORT
Each test shall be covered by a test report giving the results obtained as well as any anomalies noted.
The test report shall contain at least the following:
− The name and company of the tester;
− The calibration certificate of the measurement equipment;
− The pressure-time-diagram for the complete sequence (including increasing and decreasing of
the pressure).
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 399 of 405
3.4 RESISTANCE TESTS AND CONTAINMENT MONITORING
The resistance tests and containment monitoring focus only on the inner containment wall.
NOTE In this chapter, the term "structure" designates the inner containment: dome, cylindrical wall
and basemat.
3.4.1 ACCEPTANCE TEST
3.4.1.1 GENERAL REMARKS
Before the unit is commissioned, the containment shall undergo a test intended to prove its capacity to
withstand the conditions of the design basis accident. This test, performed on the occasion of the
acceptance leaktightness test, takes place under normal temperature conditions, whereas the design
basis accident corresponds to a pressure of fluid raised to accident temperature.
In recognition of this, a 10% increase in the relative design pressure is applied.
3.4.1.2 ACCEPTANCE RESISTANCE TEST PROCEDURE
For the resistance test, the inner containment wall shall be subjected to a pressure of 1.10 Pa, under
normal temperature conditions.
The containment pressure shall be gradually increased up to maximum pressure, followed by a

gradual return to atmospheric pressure. Readings shall be taken from devices at the pressure stages
described below and continuously throughout the test, with a time step that is sufficiently fine to plot
the curve of the deformation of the inner containment wall against time.
As a minimum, the pressure stages at which the measurements are taken shall be as follows:
0 – 0.5 Pa – Pa – 1.10 Pa – Pa – Pa – 0.5 Pa – 0
In addition, a visual inspection shall be performed before and after the resistance test to verify the
response of the mechanical connections between the components or structures and facings of the
containment inner wall. The list of zones to be examined shall be drawn up prior to the test.
During constant pressure plateau, measurements shall be taken with a time step that is sufficiently
fine to identify any drift in deformations or displacements.
3.4.1.3 INSTRUMENTATION
The structure shall be instrumented in order to:
− assess the validity of the hypotheses and methods used for design (e.g. overall stiffness,
modulus of elasticity, etc);
− ensure the correct response of the structure over time.
The measuring instruments shall have an effective range consistent with the values of the physical
phenomena to measure over the operating lifetime of the containment.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 400 of 405
The instrumentation shall include the following devices:
3.4.1.3.1 Topographic benchmarks
At least 20 topographic benchmarks shall be evenly distributed within the vertical prestressing tendon
tensioning gallery located in the extension of the inner containment wall. If this gallery is not built into
the structure, the topographic benchmarks shall be located so as to measure the displacements of the
basemat. These devices shall supply indications of:
− the absolute settling of the structure with respect to an external fixed point connected to the
national reference system;
− the inclination of the structure.
Complementary topographic benchmarks are installed in other parts of the basemat in order to
measure its global deformation.
3.4.1.3.2 Levelling pots
Levelling pots are intended to measure the deflection of the portion of the basemat under the Reactor
Building. They are located along 3 radii with extremities in the current area of the gusset, outside large
geometrical discontinuities.
3.4.1.3.3 Pendulums
Pendulums are used to measure displacement or diameter variation. They shall be located along 3
vertical axes of the inner containment wall, preferably outside the mechanical influence zones of the
horizontal tendons tensioning buttresses and large geometrical discontinuities such as the equipment
hatch.
At various levels of the structure, readings from pendulums provide information on:
− the horizontal deformation shape of the inner wall under the effect of prestress or test
pressure;
− the irreversible delayed effects arising from concrete shrinkage and creep, and from the
relaxation of the prestressing tendons;
− the effects of thermal variations.
3.4.1.3.4 Devices for measuring height variations
Devices for measuring height variations shall be located along the inner containment wall at the same
locations as the devices for measuring the variation of radius or diameter. They shall enable the
determination of the overall height variation of the inner wall under the effect of prestressing, pressure,
and concrete shrinkage and creep.
3.4.1.3.5 Devices for mapping local displacements and deformations
The displacements of the prestressed concrete zone situated at the periphery of the equipment hatch
shall be monitored by a device enabling the zone to be mapped with sufficient density.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 401 of 405
These measurement devices shall also provide readings of variations of the equipment hatch’s
geometry in three directions (vertical, horizontal and radial), at the junction with the inner wall.
As a minimum, the measurement shall be taken at the various pressurization plateaus, during
pressure rise and decrease.
3.4.1.3.6 Devices for measuring the tension of the tendons
Tendon tension is measured on 4 vertical tendons which are not cement-grouted, do not feature any
deviations liable to disturb the measurement and do not extend into the dome.
The first tension measurements are taken just after the initial tensioning of each instrumented tendon
and after the prestressing of the inner containment wall is completed.
3.4.1.3.7 Devices for strain measurement
Devices for strain measurement shall enable local strains in the concrete to be monitored. These
measurements enable estimation of the modulus of elasticity of the concrete, and Poisson’s ratio.
Concrete strains shall be measured at the following locations:
− along 4 axes of the inner containment wall (including the dome, the gusset and the upper ring
belt): 3 in the current section at the same locations as the devices for measuring the radius or
diameter variation and one in a prestressing buttress;
− along two axes of the basemat;
− around the equipment hatch;
− on the inside, on the outside and at the centre of the inner wall and the dome;
− in 2 orthogonal directions (horizontal tangent and vertical for the inner containment wall, 2
meridional orthogonal directions for the dome) except at mid-height of the inner wall, in the
gusset and at the centre of the dome where the deformations shall be measured in three
orthogonal directions.
These devices are arranged with a reinforced density in mid-height of the inner containment wall.
3.4.1.3.8 Thermometers
Thermometers provide readings of the thermal state of the structure, making it possible to build a
response model for the strain gauges with respect to the thermal deviations.
Thermometers can be classified into 2 groups:
− those linked with strain gauges and generally with each instrument whose measurement
requires thermal correction;
− those used to estimate the temperature distribution through the wall section and over the
whole structure.
Thermometers shall be arranged in the area of the steam penetrations in order to monitor concrete
temperature changes.
Thermometers shall also be positioned in the area of any instrument whose measurements require
thermal correction.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 402 of 405
A series of thermometers shall be arranged at mid-height of the inner containment wall and at the
centre of the dome. Their purpose is to gauge the temperature distribution through the wall section
with a sufficiently fine time step in the area of the inner and outer facings of the structure, which form
zones where the gradient rapidly evolves in response to the ambient temperature and the depth in the
wall.
The ambient temperature inside the Reactor Building and in the space between the outer and inner
walls shall be measured, together with the atmospheric temperature.
3.4.1.3.9 Inclinometers
Inclinometers shall enable measurement of the rotations of zones subjected to bending moments.
They shall be set up in the area of the gusset at the junction of the basemat and the inner containment
wall, and at the upper ring belt joining the dome and the inner containment wall.
Inclinometers shall be situated along 3 axes distributed through the current sections of these zones,
outside the large geometrical discontinuities at the same locations as the devices for measuring the
radius or diameter variation.
3.4.1.3.10 Pressure monitoring
The Reactor Building pressure shall be monitored. This measurement enables the raw displacement
and deformation data to be corrected for reversible effects.
3.4.1.4 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The structure may be considered to have passed the resistance test if:
− the measurements taken in the current zone demonstrate an elastic response in accordance
with the structural calculations;
− the inner containment wall and its connections with the internal structures have not been
damaged by the test.
3.4.2 PERIODIC RESISTANCE TESTS
In operation, no resistance test is planned.
However, a complete reading shall be taken from the inner containment wall monitoring device during
the periodic leaktightness tests.
Readings are taken continuously throughout the leaktightness test, with a time step sufficient to plot
the deformation curve of the structure over time.
3.4.3 TEST REPORT
Each test shall give rise to a report containing the results obtained, and the anomalies observed.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 403 of 405
3.4.4 MONITORING DURING CONSTRUCTION
The entirety of the measuring devices and acquisition systems shall be operational as soon as
possible before prestressing of the structure starts. Data acquisition rate shall be sufficiently fine to
precisely track the development of concrete shrinkage and creep in early age, according to the
planning of the prestressing tendon tensioning phases.
Once prestressing of the structure is completed, data acquisition shall continue at a rate similar to that
planned for monitoring during operation, until the unit becomes operational.
3.4.5 MONITORING DURING OPERATION
The entirety of the measuring devices shall be available during operation. Measures shall be taken at
rates adapted to the changes in the kinetics of the various phenomena measured by each of the
corresponding measuring devices.
3.4.6 EXPERIMENTAL MONITORING
Experimental monitoring is not within the scope of the devices used during normal operation. Where it
seems appropriate, experimental monitoring should be conducted to enable studies on the operating
life time of the structure and its changes over time to be performed.
3.4.6.1 MOISTURE OR WATER CONTENT PROBES
Moisture or water content probes shall be arranged in the current zone of the inner containment wall in
the first unit of the reactor series, and of any unit where this may prove useful, depending on the
composition of the concrete and its drying conditions.
A series of probes shall be embedded within the wall at four different places (making four series in all).
Each series shall be made up of several probes distributed across the thickness of the inner
containment wall, enabling measurement of the free water content profile of the concrete over time.
The resulting data are needed to assess the kinetics of change of the concrete water content on a
purely qualitative basis.
3.4.6.2 OTHER EXPERIMENTAL MEASURING DEVICES
The deployment of any other experimental device may be proposed, if deemed useful for tracking the
changes in the structure or for carrying out prospective studies on its behaviour. The progress in the
development of the techniques shall be taken into account, i.e.: whether they are at an experimental
stage or proven at industrial scale.
3.4.7 SUMMARY TABLE OF INSTRUMENTATION USE
An overview of instrumentation used, for each Reactor Building lifetime is given in Table 3.4.7-1.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 404 of 405
Table 3.4.7-1
Instrumentation to be used for each Reactor Building operating lifetime
Resistance test
and Monitoring during Monitoring during

Instrumentation
Leaktightness construction operation
test
Topographic benchmarks x* x
Devices for measuring basemat

x**
levelling under the structure
Devices for measuring radius or

x x* x
diameter variation
Devices for measuring height

x x* x
variation
Devices for locally mapping

x x
displacements and deformations
Devices for measuring the

x* x
tendon tension
Strain gauges x x* x
Pressure gauges x x
Thermometers x x* x
Inclinometers x x* x
Moisture or water content

x* x
probes
x denotes instrumentation used at the time of the corresponding phase.
* measurements shall be taken as soon as possible before beginning prestressing of the

structure.
** measurements are optional except for in the case of acceptance test.
3.4.8 DATA ACQUISITION FREQUENCY
Data acquisition frequency shall be adapted to the kinetics of the phenomenon whose effects are to be
measured, both at the time of the tests and during construction or operation. Acquisition frequency
shall enable the change in the phenomenon to be reliably monitored over the relevant time period.
ETC-C 2010 Edition

Page 405 of 405
For measurements taken throughout operation, the acquisition frequency may be adapted over time,
depending on the change in the kinetics of the phenomenon being monitored.
ETC-C 2010 Edition


Afcen Etc-C 2010

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Afcen Etc-C 2010

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION RULES FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS

EPR TECHNICAL CODE FOR CIVIL WORKS

AFCEN - An association subject to the law of July 1, 1901

 122-2010 – all translation, reproduction and adaptation rights

ETC-C 2010 Edition

NOTE TO THE USER

A continuous improvement of ETC-C is generated by AFCEN.

The request must be accompanied by justificative documents.

The modification sheets are periodically incorporated in a new addendum of ETC-C.

ETC-C 2010 Edition

ETC-C 2010 Edition

ETC-C DEVELOPMENT HISTORY

− to facilitate discussions with nuclear safety authorities,

− to create documents facilitating export of safety reports.

In 2009, ETC-C development was continued under the frame of AFCEN.

ETC-C 2010 Edition

Chairman: C. DUVAL EDF-CEIDRE

LIST OF SUB COMMITTEE TASK GROUPS AND THEIR LEADERS

TG1 Design and structure of the code TG Leader: E. GALLITRE

ETC-C 2010 Edition

ETC-C 2010 Edition

0.1 STRUCTURE OF ETCC

0.1.1 GENERAL INTRODUCTION

0.1.2.1 GENERAL ORGANISATION OF ETC-C

ETC-C PART 0 defines the structure and the scope of ETC-C.

ETC-C PART 1 defines:

ETC-C PART 2 provides construction criteria (concrete, reinforcement, prestressing system,

ETC-C 2010 Edition

0.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.2 PRINCIPLES AND REFERENCES

1.3 DEFINITION OF ACTIONS AND COMBINATIONS OF ACTIONS

1.4 GENERAL RULES FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES

1.5 METAL PARTS INVOLVED IN THE LEAKTIGHTNESS OF THE CONTAINMENT

ETC-C 2010 Edition

1.6 POOLS AND TANKS WITH LINER

1.7 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

1.8 INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS BETWEEN ANCHORS AND CONCRETE

1.9 GENERAL RULES FOR GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN

APPENDIX 1.A SEISMIC ANALYSIS

APPENDIX 1.B CREEP AND SHRINKAGE STRAINS AND CRACKS OF CONCRETE

APPENDIX 1.C ENGINEERING METHOD FOR MILITARY AIRCRAFT IMPACT VERIFICATION

ETC-C 2010 Edition

APPENDIX 1.H SHEAR RESISTANCE OF REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES

2.1 EARTHWORKS AND SOIL TREATMENTS

ETC-C 2010 Edition

2.1.5 MONITORING, INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF EXCAVATION

2.3 SURFACE-FINISHES AND FORMWORKS

2.4 REINFORCEMENT FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE

2.5 PRESTRESSING SYSTEM

2.6 PREFABRICATION FOR CONCRETE ELEMENTS AND REINFORCEMENT CAGES

2.7 LEAKTIGHT METAL PARTS ON CONTAINMENTS

2.8 METAL ELEMENTS INCORPORATED INTO THE CONCRETE

2.9 METAL LINER OF WATERTIGHT POOLS AND TANKS

2.10 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

ETC-C 2010 Edition

2.10.1 MATERIALS - GRADES AND QUALITIES

2.11 BURIED SAFETY-CLASSIFIED PIPELINES

2.12 FILLING OF JOINTS

2.13 TOPOGRAPHY, TOLERANCES AND MONITORING

APPENDIX 2.A TO CHAPTER 2.13

PART 3 LEAK AND RESISTANCE TESTS AND CONTAINMENT MONITORING

3.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS

3.3 LEAKTIGHTNESS TESTS